diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-07 17:45:07 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-07 17:45:07 -0800 |
| commit | 9e1ad03a0e3e3da7b1c0f6b5913962305ff0ba6f (patch) | |
| tree | 9da353949b2bccf0509b675a716c59827d986045 | |
| parent | 43307a9c3d054d0e6a90300593c550c8995427f9 (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-0.txt | 5409 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-0.zip | bin | 98439 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h.zip | bin | 669866 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/55826-h.htm | 5794 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/back.jpg | bin | 83882 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 117608 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/endpaper.jpg | bin | 51183 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/p01.jpg | bin | 62465 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/p02.jpg | bin | 43756 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/p03.jpg | bin | 29827 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/p04.jpg | bin | 81939 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/p05.jpg | bin | 43524 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826-h/images/p06.jpg | bin | 48982 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826.txt | 5416 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/55826.zip | bin | 97307 -> 0 bytes |
18 files changed, 17 insertions, 16619 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b788767 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #55826 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/55826) diff --git a/old/55826-0.txt b/old/55826-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 57a50d3..0000000 --- a/old/55826-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5409 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Peggy Goes Straw Hat - Peggy Lane Theater Stories, #3 - -Author: Virginia Hughes - -Illustrator: Sergio Leone - -Release Date: October 27, 2017 [EBook #55826] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT *** - - - - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -[Illustration: _“I’ve wanted to tell you, Peggy,” said Chris, “what fun -it is working with you.”_] - - PEGGY LANE THEATER STORIES - - - - - _Peggy Goes Straw Hat_ - - - By VIRGINIA HUGHES - - Illustrated by Sergio Leone - - GROSSET & DUNLAP _Publishers_ - NEW YORK - - © GROSSET & DUNLAP, INC., 1963 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - - MANUFACTURED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA - - - - - CONTENTS - - - 1 The Arrival 1 - 2 A Serious Complication 15 - 3 A Broadcast 27 - 4 A Favorable Decision 41 - 5 Opening Night 48 - 6 Chance Encounter 58 - 7 Unfair Play 74 - 8 An Explanation 85 - 9 A Lifeline 96 - 10 Friends—New and Old 108 - 11 Quick Thinking 121 - 12 Varied Explosions 131 - 13 Double Trouble 143 - 14 Ups and Downs 156 - 15 Summer Stock 168 - - - - - PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT - - - - - I - The Arrival - - -Eight hours after leaving New York City, the rickety old Pathways Bus -lurched to a bouncing halt in a small Adirondack mountain town. Peggy -Lane rose from her seat and somewhat shakily managed to collect her -handbag, a small suitcase, a hatbox, two coats, and her precious tin -make-up kit. - -“I wonder if I really look like an actress or more like a walking -luggage rack?” she thought excitedly as she stepped down from the bus. -The scene that greeted her was breath-taking; Peggy gasped aloud with -delight. Before her, Lake Kenabeek lay gleaming like a jewel in the -afternoon sun. Pine trees rose everywhere and although it was summer -there was a delicious nip and tang in the air. Peggy’s heart raced with -eagerness and the familiar nervous anticipation she always felt when -approaching something new. She had been hired as resident ingénue for -eight wonderful weeks with her first summer stock company. Each week she -would be playing a different part, gaining invaluable experience, and -learning new phases of life backstage. - -“And I got the job all on my own!” Peggy thought exultantly. “Just by -reading for the producers! That must mean something—at least, it means -that I’m really a professional actress now and don’t have to depend on -friends and ‘contacts’ for my work!” She smiled happily, taking a deep -breath of the fragrant, pine-scented air. - -“Miss Lane?” A voice interrupted Peggy’s thoughts. She turned and saw a -spectacled, studious-looking boy about seventeen who was wearing -dungarees and a paint-smeared shirt. Offering her a slightly stained -hand, he grinned shyly. “Scene paint,” he explained, “but it’s clean.” - -Peggy could hardly shake his hand, laden down as she was, and the boy -stammered with embarrassment. “Oh, I’m so sorry—I was so busy looking at -you, I didn’t notice.” He relieved her of some of her bags, giving her a -frankly admiring stare. “You sure look like a good ingénue!” - -“I do?” Peggy beamed. - -“Just what I had in mind.” He smiled, taking in Peggy’s trim little -figure, dark chestnut hair and fresh, mobile face. “I’m Michael Miller, -and I have the jeep waiting to take you to your hotel.” - -The jeep had been painted bright blue with an eye-catching sign on the -hood. Kenabeek Summer Theater, it proclaimed in large white letters. - -“Good advertising,” Michael confided as they deposited Peggy’s bags in -the rear. “But then, you’re not bad advertising either!” He nodded in -the direction of a few bystanders who were casting curious glances at -Peggy. Peggy smiled back at the townspeople, and as she climbed into the -front seat, her nervousness unexpectedly dropped away. She was really -here at last, she realized, an actress with a season’s contract—and -suddenly she felt very professional. - -As they drove carefully up the winding mountain road, Peggy discovered -that Michael was one of three local boys who were to work as -apprentices—helping the scene designer, doing odd chores, and playing -small parts when needed. Michael’s father was Howard Miller, a retired -theater man, who was to do all the older character parts during the -season. - -“Oh, I’ve heard of him!” Peggy exclaimed. “He’s supposed to be a -wonderful actor, and we’re lucky to have him. You know how hard it is to -get good character men for stock. Michael,” she went on eagerly, “do you -think the theater will be a success?” - -Michael considered a moment. “I don’t honestly know,” he replied -thoughtfully. “This is a very small town, and actually we don’t have a -large enough population to carry a summer theater all on our own. But -one of the ideas behind this venture is to bring in more summer resort -business.” - -Peggy nodded. She knew that Richard Wallace, one of the two young -producers, was a resident of Lake Kenabeek, and wanted to help improve -his town—both culturally and financially. - -“Of course Richard’s Aunt Hetty is vice-president of the Chamber of -Commerce,” Michael continued, “and the Chamber of Commerce put up half -the financial backing for the theater. So we do have solid support -there. But some people here resisted the idea of a group of actors—you -know, they think that actors are a strange, Bohemian breed—” He glanced -at Peggy and laughed. “Bohemian, huh! All they need is to take one look -at you, or any of the other actors who have come up from New York.” - -Peggy smiled gratefully. She knew that a lot of people didn’t realize -what honest, hard work the theater could be. But obviously this -intelligent young boy had a deep feeling for the profession and knew -that an actress’ life wasn’t only curtain calls and bouquets after the -performance. - -“Yes, we do have a lovely group of people,” Peggy agreed earnestly. She -had met most of them in New York during the tryouts and been impressed, -not only by their acting ability, but by their responsible and -intelligent attitude. “And we have a really good director, wonderful -plays, and at least half the town is behind us. That should be enough if -we work hard!” she concluded with a twinkle. - -Michael turned from the twisting, ribbonlike shore line and drew up in -front of a large, old-fashioned, rustic building. “Here we are,” he -announced grandly, “Kenabeek Inn! But you’re not in the main building; -your company is staying in the annex.” - -Peggy followed him around the side of the inn, down a little path -fringed with fir trees. In a small clearing, well away from the kitchen -noises issuing from the rear of the inn, Peggy saw a tiny, two-story -building. There was a roofed-over patio outside with two sofas, some -chairs, and a table on which stood a hot plate and stacked cups and -saucers. Peggy smiled to herself, recognizing the sure sign of an -actors’ residence—coffee, coffee, and more coffee. - -Rita Stevens came bursting out of the door, a radiant smile transforming -her rather plain features. “Margaret, ‘Peggy’ Lane—Star of Stage, -Screen, Radio, Television, and Summer Stock! Welcome!” she cried, -running up and giving Peggy a hug. - -They grinned at each other happily. “Oh, I’m so glad to see you!” Rita -bubbled. “I’ve been positively frantic for some female company around -here. We’ve been up for three days and Gus has spent every single minute -at the theater—” - -Rita was married to Gus Stevens, the scene designer—a lucky combination -for the company. Although young, Rita had one of those ageless faces and -a maturity which made her a perfect character woman. Peggy had liked her -the instant they met at the readings in New York. - -“No women?” Peggy asked, “Hasn’t Alison Lord arrived yet?” - -“Oh, no, my deah,” Rita intoned in a stagy accent. “No, our leading lady -is being flown up in someone’s private plane and isn’t expected until -tomorrow morning.” She waved a hand airily, imitating perfectly a prima -donna. - -“Oh, no!” Michael grimaced in disgust. “Is she really like that?” - -“No, Mike,” Peggy said with a laugh, “she’s really quite friendly and -nice—and a very good actress. Just a little theatrical, but I’m sure -you’ll like her.” - -“Well, I hope so,” Michael said, obviously still doubtful. “Look, I’ve -got to scoot back to the theater. May I leave your things here, Peggy?” - -“Oh, I’ll take them, Mike.” Rita grabbed some of Peggy’s luggage and -started up the stairs of the little house. “See you later, Mike.” - -“And thanks for the ride and everything,” Peggy called after him. - -“He’s such a sweet kid,” Rita commented as they climbed. “A wonderful -help to Gus—I have a feeling Michael may make this business his life -work. Here’s where you live, Peggy!” - -They stepped into a tiny white room, sparsely furnished with only a day -bed, a large bureau, a folding screen, straight chair, and a bedside -table. - -“The manager of the inn must know something about summer stock -companies,” Rita observed ruefully. “Obviously he has a good idea of -just how much time we’ll be spending in our rooms.” - -Peggy looked at her questioningly and Rita laughed. “It’s your first -season, I know—but just you wait and see!” - -“My trunk!” Peggy interrupted with a sudden disturbing thought. “I sent -it ahead by Railway Express. Hasn’t it come?” - -“Right here, madame.” Rita folded back the screen and revealed Peggy’s -large, black wardrobe trunk, which was somewhat dented and worn, parts -of old labels still sticking to it here and there. “You know, for a girl -who hasn’t done stock before, or been on the road, this trunk is really -strange. What did you do?” she asked with a teasing smile. “Stick on -labels, and tear them off, and then jump up and down on it wielding a -hammer?” - -Peggy hooted. “Rita Stevens, you have a very suspicious mind! I want you -to know that this trunk belonged to a friend of my father’s—a wonderful -woman who was in the theater years ago.” Peggy’s face softened -wistfully. “And I imagine that this battered old trunk has seen more -drama—on stage and off—than we can even imagine.” - -The girls looked at it thoughtfully, a picture of the old, romantic days -of the theater—great plays, great producers, great stars—all the golden -history of the stage firing their imagination. - -Peggy broke the spell, “Well, anyway, May Berriman gave it to me. She -runs the rooming house where I live in New York, you know. And believe -me, I’m grateful! Besides needing a trunk, I think of it as a symbol of -good luck. Some time soon, Rita, would you mind taking a look at my -wardrobe? I think I brought enough, but I’d like to be sure.” - -“I’d love to,” Rita said. “But now let me show you where everything is -in our little annex, and then you’d better rest awhile. I’m sure you’re -tired, and we have a company call tonight.” - -Alison Lord would be in the room across the hall from Peggy. Rita and -Gus were also upstairs, on the opposite side of the house. Danny Dunn, -Chris Hill and Chuck Crosby, the director, were all downstairs. The -patio was community property for coffee, line rehearsals, and just plain -relaxation. It seemed like a good arrangement. Rita showed Peggy where -she could shower and freshen up and said she would call her in time for -dinner. - -But Peggy was too keyed up to take a real nap. She sat on the edge of -her bed, thinking of all the steps that had led her here, to this place, -at this time. Her love of acting, the school plays, the productions in -college, coming to New York, the long, hard work at the Dramatic Academy -and in the Penthouse Theater. She was grateful for a private room where -she could be quiet and think. - -She remembered her home town of Rockport, Wisconsin, and suddenly had a -vision of that other gay little bedroom where she had often sat quietly -and thought—much as she was doing now. She remembered her mother’s kind, -attractive face and her encouragement and understanding. Her father, -too, would be glad to hear of this job, Peggy thought, and would -probably run an article about her in his paper, the _Rockport Eagle_. -She smiled, visualizing the headline—Local Girl Signed in New York—or -something like that. Thomas Lane was a good newspaper man and would try -to “hook” them with the headline. Nothing so simple as Local Girl Makes -Good. - -Peggy promised herself to write them good long letters as soon as -possible. And she should write to May Berriman, and to her housemate in -New York, Amy Preston. Well, there was a lot to do—and a lot ahead. -Peggy sighed and opened a suitcase to change into something fresh for -the evening. - -After dinner, Peggy, Rita, and her young husband, Gus, walked up the -road to the theater. Gus had joined them for dinner in the little -roadside restaurant where the cast had made arrangements for meals at a -percentage off the regular cost. - -“Mrs. Brady, who runs the place, is anxious to do all she can for the -theater,” Rita explained. - -“To say nothing of the extra customers she hopes to attract by having -real actors in her dining room,” Gus added. “Not that I’m a candidate -for glamour, you understand—” - -The girls laughed. Gus had hastily donned a clean shirt and a fresh pair -of blue jeans, but the unmistakable signs of sheer hard work still -showed on his pleasant, tanned face. - -Rita squeezed his hand affectionately as they hurried up the road. “I do -wish you’d let up a little,” she said. “After all, we do have nine days -before opening.” - -“And it’s going to take every minute!” Gus nodded emphatically. “You -haven’t seen the auditorium yet, have you, Peggy?” - -“No, I haven’t. You know,” Peggy confessed, “I was really disappointed -when I learned that we were playing in the high school. I had visions of -a rustic barn with candlelight, bats in the wings and mice for -rehearsals—” - -“There is one.” Gus chuckled warmly. “Aunt Hetty has a barn that we can -remodel next summer if this season is a success. But we couldn’t afford -to do it this year. It’s better to rent the school and see what happens. -If it bothers you, Peggy,” he added, looking at her with amusement, -“hold on to the thought that we’re helping education! We are, too. The -school needs the money.” - -The front doors of the school auditorium faced the highway. A large sign -for the theater gleamed brightly under the floodlights that played on -it. “It’s never too early to advertise,” Gus observed as they walked to -the back of the building. - -Entering the stage door, they came through the wings and walked out on a -dark stage, only a single worklight throwing a white circle on the bare -boards. The heavy drapes were pulled back, framing the empty house, the -vacant seats ghostlike in the silence. - -“Well, where is everybody?” Peggy gasped in the eerie quiet. - -Gus and Rita roared. “We just thought you’d like to see the stage, -Peggy,” Gus laughed. - -“You didn’t think we were going to rehearse tonight, did you?” Rita -teased, and then took Peggy’s hand. “Come on, dear, we’re only kidding. -Everybody’s down here.” - -They crossed the stage, descended some stairs, and entered a door that -led directly into the school gym. “Here’s our ingénue,” Rita called as -she ushered Peggy in, “ready to work!” - -Peggy blinked, coming into the sudden light and busy scene. The gym was -bright as daytime. A huge canvas ground cloth covered the floor and -several people knelt, beside cans, buckets, and paintbrushes, over the -scenery flats that were strewn from one end of the gym to the other. -Peggy had difficulty recognizing anyone. They were all spotted and -paint-smeared, in a variety of strange work clothes. - -“Hi!” someone called, raising a hand with a dripping brush. Peggy peered -intently at the slight figure and dark hair, and recognized Chuck -Crosby, their intense young director. “Get to work,” he ordered with a -smile and went back to his painting. - -A well-built young man with a heavy mass of light-brown hair rose with -his can and beckoned to her. Peggy picked her way through buckets and -flats, following him. - -“Danny Dunn!” she said with a shock of surprise. “How on earth am I -supposed to know you under that disguise?” Danny was to do juvenile and -some character parts for the company. Now he looked like a clown as he -smiled at her with a paint-dotted mouth. - -“Tomorrow is another day!” he quoted dramatically. “Tomorrow and -tomorrow—I can hardly wait! By the way, sorry I couldn’t join you all -for dinner, but I just had a sandwich here. Tell me everything -tomorrow—if I’m still alive.” He made a face, “Here, ingénue, fill a -can.” - -In a clear corner near the wall, Michael Miller sat hunched over a hot -plate with a bubbling pot of melting glue. He looked like an ancient -alchemist as he stirred and poured, mixing paint, whiting, and glue into -large buckets. - -“The white cliffs of Dover,” Michael muttered romantically, taking a bag -of powdered chalk and measuring it into his caldron. - -“Sure, double, double, and all that,” Danny replied, nodding kindly. -“Well, just keep steady, old chap, we’re all a little tired tonight.” - -“It really is the white cliffs of Dover,” Michael protested as Danny -walked away. “For the ground coat,” he added, peering up at Peggy -through his steaming glasses. “Here, have fun.” He waved her away. - -For the next four hours Peggy knelt on her hands and knees, laboriously -painting flats. These were frames of white pine, over which was -stretched unbleached muslin, like a painter’s canvas. They had already -been sized with a solution of glue and water until they were drum-tight. -Over the ground coat that Peggy was painting, Gus would design wallpaper -for interiors, fireplaces, outdoor scenes. Peggy’s back ached as she -worked silently. No one said a word. - - [Illustration: Painting flats.] - -“A funny way to begin,” thought Peggy, sighing. She had expected a line -reading, even some work on stage. “And Chuck hardly said how-do-you-do, -and I don’t know half the people here.” She glanced around, guessing -that the young boys must be Michael Miller’s friends, and that older man -by the other wall his father, Howard Miller. He noticed Peggy looking at -him and smiled. - -“Well,” Peggy decided, acknowledging him with a sigh, “if a man his age -thinks nothing of working like this until all hours of the night, I -guess I can do it too!” She worked on with renewed energy. By the time -all the flats were finished, it was after midnight. - -“Rehearsal promptly at nine o’clock in the morning,” Chuck announced -crisply as they cleaned up and prepared to go home. - -“Heavens to Betsy!” Peggy thought wearily as she lay in her bed, her -back aching, muscles jumping from the unaccustomed effort. “Now I know -why everyone was so quiet. They’d been at it all day—and I feel like -this after only a few hours!” Her head spun dizzily as she closed her -eyes. “Well, I’m part of a company,” she mused dreamily, “and that’s -what counts. Even if I don’t like the parts I’m given—even if I have to -do other things than act.” Plays and parts and costumes danced before -her like a mirage. “I guess this is summer stock, all right!” she -thought as she fell asleep. - - - - - II - A Serious Complication - - -“Not quite so serious, Peggy.” Chuck Crosby pulled on a lock of his -straight, black hair as he listened to her read. “If you don’t have a -slight tongue-in-cheek attitude, it’s not going to be funny. She is an -earnest young girl, but it’s got to be exaggerated in a comic way.” - -Peggy tried again. “Dad, I’m disappointed in you,” she read. “The -world’s on fire and you’re occupied with a cigarette lighter!” - -“Thank you,” Howard Miller answered dryly. He was reading the part of -Peggy’s father in their opening show, _Dear Ruth_. - -The cast was having its first line rehearsal on the sunny patio of the -annex. Peggy had awakened excitedly with the expectation of working on -stage, only to find that the company would be at the annex all day. She -had wondered, in a resigned way, if she would ever see the stage at all. -But now, as they progressed to the second scene of Act One, her -disappointment was forgotten. She was concentrating on her part of -Miriam, “Dear Ruth’s” younger sister. - -“We can _use_ you,” Peggy read on, addressing her father. “We can use -anybody we can get!” She read the last line in a hopeless, adolescent -fashion, timing it carefully, and the cast spontaneously laughed. - -“That’s it,” Chuck cried. “That’s the quality I want.” - -A pretty local girl, Mary Hopkins, who was playing the part of the maid, -Dora, didn’t come in on her cue. Everyone looked at her as she nervously -rattled her papers, looking quite lost. - -“That’s your cue, Mary,” Chuck said patiently. “Miriam says, ‘We can use -anybody we can get,’ and you enter.” - -“I don’t see it,” Mary replied helplessly. - -“Right here.” Rita was sitting beside her and pointed it out. “Anybody -we can get.” - -“But that’s not the whole line—oh, I see.” Mary blushed. - -“We’re using sides, Mary,” Chuck said kindly. They were half sheets of -paper bound like a small pamphlet. “I have the master script here with -the whole play, but you’ll find only about four or five words of the -preceding speech printed on your sides. You can fill in the other words -if you find it easier.” - -Peggy gave Mary an understanding smile. She had been busy writing in -speeches herself, as she found the short sides difficult to work from. -Peggy liked to think of the play as a whole, but she knew that some -actors worked better from short cue lines, and that for stock, with so -many different parts to learn each week, sides were often faster. - -Rita read the part of the mother with assurance and humor. She made a -perfect partner for Howard Miller, and one could tell that she was used -to this type of part. Miriam made her exit, and then Ruth appeared for a -short scene with her father and mother. Before her next cue, Peggy had -time to examine, with a certain fascination, their leading lady. - -Alison Lord had arrived that morning, making a grand and breathless -entrance at exactly nine A.M. Her luggage was still stacked in the -patio, and peering at it, Peggy raised her eyebrows. “And I thought I -had a lot!” She wondered how many costumes Alison expected to wear on -stage, but judging by the stunning outfit she was wearing for rehearsal, -Alison must intend to dress as glamorously off stage as on. Her bright -auburn hair was caught up under an eye-catching sun hat of fringed red -straw. The color exactly matched the sleeveless blouse she wore over a -beautiful pair of beige, basket-weave slacks. With her enormous straw -bag, gay sandals, and dark glasses, she looked like a visiting star. And -a really beautiful girl underneath all that, Peggy thought, noticing the -careful make-up that enhanced Alison’s features. - -Peggy glanced down at her simple, peasant skirt and blouse. It was -pretty, but hardly spectacular like Alison’s attire. For a moment she -wished that she had thought of bringing more colorful everyday -clothes—was it good advertising for the theater perhaps?—but then she -laughed at herself. “You’re just a little bit envious, Peggy Lane, and -you know it! Now just forget about clothes, and tend to your knitting!” - -Her cue came, and she jumped back into her part with gusto, really -enjoying it now that she had caught the flavor of Miriam. She found that -playing with Alison was fun. She was even better than Peggy remembered. -She had a certain awareness of herself, a special “here I am” quality -that would make an audience notice her. She wasn’t a very deep actress, -but she had poise and presence and moved the play along. - -Chuck was pleased with the reading. He looked at his watch and called a -break. “Take five. Chris ought to be here any minute, and there’s no -point in going on now without him.” - -The cast paused for coffee, waiting for their leading man to arrive. -Chris Hill, who was to play the part of Bill opposite Alison in _Dear -Ruth_, was the only cast member Peggy hadn’t met. He had been held up in -New York with a last-minute television show, and was due on the -ten-thirty bus. - -“What’s he like?” Peggy asked Rita as she broke off a piece of doughnut -to share with her. The cast kept snacks in an old-fashioned icebox on -the patio. - -“Oh, he’s lovely!” Rita grinned mischievously. “He’s quite tall and very -blond, tanned and terribly handsome, blue eyes, a great smile, -romantic—” - -“Really! He’s all that, hm?” Peggy teased back. “Well, all I want to -know is, can he act?” - -“He certainly can. I’ve worked with him before—” Rita looked at Peggy -curiously. “It will be very interesting to see your reaction to Chris. -It’s a shame that you didn’t have a chance to meet him before and more -or less prepare yourself.” - -“Oh, Rita!” Peggy exclaimed, shaking her head in protest. She didn’t -know what a picture she was with the sunlight striking her dark hair and -framing her pretty face. Rita watched her, noticing the fine, high -cheekbones, straight nose, and soft, wide mouth. - -“You really have a captivating quality, Peggy,” Rita said thoughtfully. -“I wouldn’t be surprised if Chris Hill is quite taken with you.” - -“With me?” Peggy blurted in astonishment. “Oh, Rita, I haven’t even met -him yet, and anyway,” she added, “I’m not really interested in anyone.” -She was remembering Randy Brewster in New York, and all the fun they’d -had together in dramatic school and in the off-Broadway production -they’d been involved in. Kind, steady Randy, with the marvelous sense of -humor. It would have to be somebody quite wonderful to share the special -place that Randy occupied in Peggy’s thoughts. “Why, there’s no time for -romance here, Rita,” she said. “We’re all too busy. And besides, I -should think Alison would be more his type.” - -“Um-hm. Maybe,” Rita interrupted rather mysteriously and nudged Peggy. -“You’ll soon have a chance to find out.” - -Following her glance, Peggy looked up the little path and saw Chris -Hill, a duffel bag slung over one shoulder, hurrying down with long, -energetic strides. His appearance was certainly everything Rita had said -and more. She glanced at Rita, her eyes wide, and Rita returned a bland -“I-told-you-so” expression. - -Chris ran the last few yards, dumped his bag carelessly on the patio, -and with a wide, completely engaging smile, announced, “Reporting for -duty—on the dot, I hope!” He shook Chuck’s hand. “Svengali, how are you? -You picked a beautiful spot—it’s just great. Alison!” He leaned over her -chair, planting an audible kiss on her cheek. Peggy’s eyes popped. - -“Doesn’t mean a thing,” Rita whispered to Peggy. “Watch.” - -“Darling!” Alison replied extravagantly. “What kept you so long? Did you -come up by dogcart?” - -Chris noticed Rita and ran over, swooping her up in a big bear hug and -giving her a kiss, too. “My favorite actress!” he laughed, standing back -and looking at her with delight. “And where’s her favorite husband? -Don’t tell me—he’s up to his ears in flats! When do I see him? Don’t -tell me—probably never!” - -Rita laughed. “Such energy, Chris! How do you do it after all night on a -bus? Chris, here’s someone you haven’t met—our ingénue, Peggy Lane. Star -of Stage, Screen, Radio—” - -“Television and Summer Stock!” Chris finished for her. “Don’t mind us, -Peggy, it’s an old joke from another summer company. Well!” - -He stopped and Peggy couldn’t tell whether he was pausing for breath or -from the interest in her which his look seemed to indicate. - -“Well!” he said again, and there was something in his voice that caused -an unexpected flurry in Peggy’s emotions. - -“Hello,” Peggy said tremulously. She would never know what his next -words might have been, because just then Chuck interrupted with a call -to resume the reading. - -The company sat down again, and Peggy forgot Chris Hill, the young man, -as she listened to Chris Hill, the actor. He read the part of Bill with -so much energy and interest one would think he had just returned from a -long vacation instead of a grueling bus trip. He _was_ a good actor, -Peggy thought. He brought a special kind of magic to the play, and as -they finished the first act, Peggy had a sudden feeling that _Dear Ruth_ -would be a hit. Chuck couldn’t have chosen a better opening bill for the -cast. It was perfect for their company, and she looked at him with -renewed respect. - -After lunch the furniture was rearranged on the patio as it would be on -stage. Chuck wanted to block the first act. Pencils in hand, they busily -scribbled on their sides, marking movements as Chuck directed them. He -had blocked the play in advance, but it was still a long process, as, -with the actors in front of him, he saw many necessary changes. - -Mary Hopkins had to be told that Stage Right was her right, and not the -right of the audience. She caught on quickly, though, and very soon -Peggy noticed that she was lightly penciling in initials—C.U.L. and -D.R., instead of writing out “Cross Up Left” and “Down Right.” - -Danny Dunn was enjoying himself enormously. He had the part of Albert, a -stuffy, amusing character who is engaged to Ruth before Bill captures -her heart. Peggy was struck by this boy’s amazing versatility. She had -read with him in New York and knew how well he did juvenile parts. Yet, -here he was, playing a slightly older man and doing a perfectly -wonderful job. Danny had a face almost like putty; he could do anything -with it he wished, and Peggy realized that here was a true actor—who -would never be typed, who could play anything he was given. - -“Hello, Mother. Hello, Dad.” Danny made his entrance, and Peggy stifled -a laugh. He was really very funny. - -They finished the second scene of Act One and Chuck called, “Curtain!” -There was a sound of hands clapping, and a voice said, “Bravo!” Peggy -looked around. She had been so engrossed in her work that she hadn’t -noticed Richard Wallace standing near the patio, looking on. Beside him -stood a tall, white-haired woman with strong, craggy features, and -sparkling blue eyes framed by a network of tiny lines. - -“What a wonderful face!” Peggy exclaimed to herself, realizing that this -must be the famous Aunt Hetty. - -“Bravo!” Richard repeated in a deep voice. He was a large young man, -mature for his age, with the same observant blue eyes as his aunt. - -“It’s a pity to think that all this work may go to waste,” he said -bitterly, coming on to their outdoor stage. - -There was a stunned silence. Peggy didn’t know what to think—was this -Richard’s way of kidding? Chuck got up to give Aunt Hetty a seat, and -plunking herself down heavily, she stated matter-of-factly, “You’re all -so good—so much better than I expected—I’ll hate to see you go!” - -The cast looked blank. Chuck was struck dumb for a moment, and then he -suddenly exploded. “What are you talking about? We’re having a rehearsal -here and this is not the time for idiotic jokes!” He looked at Aunt -Hetty and controlled himself. “Excuse me, but really, Richard knows -better than to interrupt us like this.” - -“It’s no joke, young man,” Aunt Hetty said bluntly. “Richard, tell them -all about it.” She peered closely at Chuck. “And you ought to know -better, Mr. Crosby, than to think we’d intrude for anything less than a -very good reason!” - -“My!” Peggy thought. “It certainly isn’t wise to cross Aunt Hetty. She’s -a stubborn old girl. No wonder she got all that backing from the Chamber -of Commerce—they could hardly say no.” - -“I imagine you haven’t seen this,” Richard said, holding up a newspaper -so the cast could see the front page. - -The _Kenabeek Gazette_, Peggy read on the masthead, and right underneath -was a headline: Theater In School Illegal. - -“I hate to bring you bad news,” Richard said as the cast gathered -around, “but the man who was responsible for this may be right.” - -Peggy looked at the bottom of the column and saw that it was signed -“Ford Birmingham.” - -“No, that’s just the man who wrote it,” Richard said, noticing Peggy’s -glance. “Ford Birmingham covers art, music, theater, and local features -for the paper—he’s supposed to write our reviews, too. But the man -behind this article is either Max Slade or his brother William—or both. -The Slade brothers run the local movie house and they’ve opposed this -theater from the beginning, thinking it will affect their business—” - -“But it shouldn’t.” Peggy couldn’t help interrupting, and Richard agreed -with her. - -“No, of course, it shouldn’t. Our theater could even help their business -by exposing more people to entertainment and thereby drawing them to the -movies, too. However, the Slade brothers don’t see it that way.” - -“The Slade brothers don’t see much of anything at all,” commented Aunt -Hetty brusquely. “Not even their own movies, from what I gather. If they -used better judgment in selecting films, they might have better -business.” - -“Why, I’ve known Max Slade for years,” said Howard Miller, coming over -to Aunt Hetty. “I realized that he didn’t exactly approve of the summer -theater, but what’s all this about our not being legal?” He ran a hand -through his handsome, graying hair, frowning. - -“Read it and weep, Howard,” Aunt Hetty responded. “Apparently they’ve -found a loophole.” - -“The article claims that a high school cannot legally be used by a -profit-making organization such as a summer theater,” Richard explained. - -“But we’re helping the school by paying rent to them,” Chuck protested. - -“Sure, but the Slade brothers aren’t concerned about the school,” -Richard continued. “They’re thinking of themselves and are willing to -use any means to get us out of town. This article says that we will be -taken to court if we don’t suspend our operation.” - -“Can they?” asked Chris Hill. “I mean, wouldn’t the case be thrown out?” - -“No,” Richard answered seriously, “I don’t think it would be thrown out, -because there’s a chance—a good chance—that they’re right!” - -“Marvelous!” Alison Lord exclaimed ironically. “Just wonderful! And I -guess we’re just supposed to sit here and take it!” - -“No, why should we?” Peggy rushed in with a sudden thought. “Why can’t -we stop the case before it even gets to court?” - -“Right!” Richard smiled at her. “That’s exactly what I’m going to do, -Peggy. I’m flying up to Albany tonight to see the commissioner of -education. But,” he said earnestly, “his decision may go against us, and -you’ll all have to be prepared for that. That’s really why I’m here. If -we can’t play in the school, we can’t play at all this year. I want to -know if you’re willing to go on rehearsing on the slight chance that -we’ll be able to open. I’ll probably be gone for several days, and you -may be working for nothing. It’s up to you.” - -A determined chorus of voices responded. - -“Of course, we’ll work.” - -“I want to go on.” - -“We’ll open or else—” - -“I’d like to meet this Max Slade—” - -Mary Hopkins’ little voice trailed on after everyone else’s, “... and -besides all the boxes of crackerjack, I see that the script calls for -dozens of bunches of lilacs. I may be able to make them for you”—she -faltered, a little embarrassed—“I—I’m kind of good with my hands.” - -Everyone applauded, and Aunt Hetty came over to give her a hug. “Good -girl, Mary. You sound like the other professionals.” She beamed at the -cast, displaying an unexpected warmth, and then, as if remembering a -role, barked gruffly, “Back to work, then!” - -“Why, she’s really soft and sentimental under that brusque exterior,” -Peggy thought, watching Aunt Hetty walk stiffly away. “She’s in love -with this theater and it would break her heart to see it fold.” - -Everyone wished Richard luck in the state capital as he walked away -toward the interview that meant everything to this little group of -actors. - -Chuck Crosby turned to face them, and with a resolute look that -reflected the feelings of all, he firmly called, “Places!” - - - - - III - A Broadcast - - -The next few days were almost a mirage of feverish activity. Never had -Peggy worked so hard! Rehearsals morning and afternoon, helping Gus with -the scenery at night, and always, in back of everyone’s mind, the big -question—would the theater open at all? - -“What do you think, Rita?” Peggy asked late one night when the two -exhausted girls returned to her room. They had stayed late at the -theater helping Gus, for tomorrow with the set finally up, the cast -would have its first rehearsal on stage. - -“I think we’re going to open!” Rita answered hopefully. “At least I’m -working with that idea. It is disturbing not to hear from Richard again, -though.” - -Richard had wired the company from Albany the disquieting news that the -commissioner of education was off on a fishing trip and could not be -reached. Now, on top of everything else, a new problem—would the -commissioner return in time? And if he did, would Richard be able to -persuade him to come to a favorable decision? It was already Sunday, and -_Dear Ruth_ was scheduled to open Thursday. - -Thinking of all this, Peggy sighed loudly, unconsciously repeating the -heavy stage sigh she used in the play. - -“All right, Miriam,” Rita laughed, “better be quiet or you’ll wake our -leading lady!” - -Alison had returned to the annex early after rehearsal, saying that it -was about time she had some sleep. - -“I do think she might have stayed to help, too,” Peggy whispered -indignantly. “After all, we’re all in this together, and I’m sure we’re -all equally tired. Gus needed the help—he’s still up there, for goodness -sake!” - -“Well,” Rita said, “that’s Alison. And maybe she didn’t realize how much -was involved here.” - -“Then why did she come?” Peggy persisted. “She must have known -beforehand that she’d be asked to do other things besides act.” - -“Oh, a good company to work with, I suppose, and a good director and -parts that she wanted to play. Maybe she’s interested in the leading -man!” Rita laughed softly. “If there’s another reason, I’m sure I don’t -know it. Peggy,” she added eagerly, “while we’re here, why don’t I take -a look at your wardrobe? Unless you’re ready for bed—” - -“I couldn’t sleep right now on a bed of down!” Peggy agreed -enthusiastically as she opened her trunk. “I’m too tired, and it always -takes me awhile to wind down. Gosh! I wonder if I’ll really be using all -these things!” - -The trunk stood flat against the wall, rather like a second bureau, with -drawers on one side and hangers on the other. “I tried to think of -everything,” Peggy said. “If we don’t open, this certainly will be a -monument to wasted effort!” - -The girls worked quickly through Peggy’s wardrobe. She had tried to -bring an average of three changes apiece for eight different plays, -knowing that summer audiences don’t like to see actresses wearing the -same thing twice. Besides appearing in a different costume each time, -Peggy had to think of the seasons of the plays and be prepared to dress -appropriately for spring, summer, fall, and winter. - -Suits, dresses, jumpers, skirts, evening gowns, housecoats, sweaters, -blouses, shoes, hats, coats, aprons, scarfs! Rita exclaimed, “My! If -there’s anything you haven’t remembered, Peggy, I’d like to know what it -is. You’re beautifully prepared. It looks as if I might be borrowing -from you! And this would look lovely on Alison.” She lifted a -silver-sequined jacket from a bed of tissue paper. “I can just see her -in it, making a spectacular entrance!” - -“Why, I’d be glad to lend it to her,” Peggy said. “I borrowed it myself. -But is that done?” She was surprised. “I mean, we all do borrow from -each other at the Gramercy Arms—my home in New York. In fact, that’s how -I managed this wardrobe. I just couldn’t have done it without help. But -somehow, well,” she confessed, “I didn’t think it would be very -professional in stock.” - -“Pooh,” Rita chuckled. “Nobody ever has all the things she needs in -stock, Peggy. We all borrow from each other.” - -“I doubt if Alison will want anything, anyway,” Peggy said, reflecting -on the piles of luggage Alison had brought. “Oh, Rita, here we are, -talking as if the theater will actually open, and for all we know, -Thursday night may come and we’ll all be on the bus going back to New -York!” - -She sank dejectedly on her bed while Rita carefully folded the little -jacket. “We might be,” Rita conceded cheerfully, “but I don’t think we -will! You’re forgetting your trunk, Peggy. Remember? Your symbol of good -luck!” She patted it with a smile as she left the room, leaving Peggy -some of her contagious optimism. - - -On stage at last! Peggy could hardly believe it. She ran lightly up the -steps from the auditorium floor, crossed the stage, tried each piece of -furniture, moving back and forth— - -“What on earth are you doing?” Alison called from the front row where -she was seated, holding a coffee container while she waited for -rehearsal to begin. - -“Getting the feel of the set,” Peggy called happily as she ran to the -stairs up left, crossed down right, and exited. “Where’s the prop -phone?” she asked, reappearing from the wings. - -“Michael’s out getting props,” Gus answered, coming on stage with a -paintbrush to put the finishing touches on the banister. - -Peggy ran down to the auditorium floor again, walked up the aisle, and -stood looking at the stage. Gus had done a beautiful job, she realized -with a thrill. For their opening show an effective set was important, -and Gus had transformed the flats with a miracle of paint and -imagination. The room was so realistic that Peggy felt she could touch -the molding on the walls. - -“You’d think you never saw a stage before in your life,” Alison -commented lazily, getting up and stretching. - -“I feel like this every time,” Peggy said. “There’s something absolutely -magical about a good set—like moving into a brand-new home. I love it!” - -“Well, let’s just hope it will be home for a week,” Alison remarked. -“Personally, I have my doubts.” - -“Act One,” Chuck called, and the cast scrambled for the wings. “Places.” - -At noon, Aunt Hetty presented herself at the theater and asked for two -people to do a radio interview at the station in Merion Falls about -twenty miles away. - -“Anybody,” she said briskly, “as long as they’re part of the resident -company. John Hamilton wants people from New York—and we’ll be gone all -afternoon, Chuck, so give me someone you don’t need.” - -“I need everybody,” Chuck said with a laugh, “but advertising is -important too, so—let’s see.” He looked around at the cast. “Peggy, -you’ll go—I need the rest of the family and Albert, but there should be -a man along, too—Chris! Your scenes with Ruth are going well—I won’t -need you today. Go along with Peggy.” - -“Have fun, you lucky people,” Danny called after them. “This may be your -first and last day off!” - -“And don’t let on that there’s any doubt about opening!” Chuck reminded -Chris and Peggy. “Tell them we’re doing fine!” - -“Just fine!” Alison echoed, smiling grimly. Looking back at her, Peggy -realized with sudden surprise that Alison wanted to go too! Why? Peggy -wondered. Surely she didn’t think a local radio show was that important -to her career? And then Peggy recalled what Rita had said. She looked -curiously at Chris as he walked along beside her to Aunt Hetty’s car. -Maybe Rita was right and Alison _was_ interested in the leading man! Oh, -well, it wasn’t any of her business, anyway, Peggy told herself as she -got into the car. - -“Sorry to take you off like this so suddenly,” Aunt Hetty was saying, -“but it’s quite important. I promised Richard to get in as much -advertising as I could while he’s gone, and John Hamilton requested this -interview on the spur of the moment.” - -“Will he ask us to play a scene?” Chris questioned. - -“Oh, I don’t think so. I imagine he’ll just want you to talk about what -you’ve done in the theater—personal stuff. Now you two hush and don’t -bother me with questions. I like to keep my mind on the road!” - -Peggy and Chris exchanged amused glances. Aunt Hetty drove as carefully -and slowly as if she were on eggshells. Peggy could see why they would -indeed be all day getting to Merion Falls and she sat back with -resignation to enjoy the scenery. Chris winced as he watched Aunt Hetty -at the wheel, holding it so tightly with both hands that her knuckles -were actually white. He was itching to drive himself, and Peggy smiled -as she watched his inner struggle—whether or not to ask. Aunt Hetty won. -Looking at her determined shoulders from the back seat, he evidently -decided that she would never relinquish the wheel. Chris sighed in -defeat and slumped back. As he met Peggy’s twinkling eyes, they both had -to cover their laughter. - -A good while later, when they finally reached Merion Falls, there was -barely time to find the radio station and John Hamilton’s studio. Aunt -Hetty plumped herself down in the booth with the engineer, and Peggy and -Chris took seats at a little table with Mr. Hamilton and a microphone. - -Looking at the large clock over the booth, Mr. Hamilton shook his head. -“Four minutes to go,” he said anxiously. “I wish we had more time to -prepare, but this will have to do. I’ll just ask you both about your -background, and then you can plug your theater all you like. We want to -hear about your players and something about the plays if there’s time—” - -“Can I hear some voices?” the engineer’s voice interrupted him from the -booth. - -Peggy and Chris spoke into the microphone while the engineer tested -sound. “Okay. Fine,” he said. “One minute—” They watched his hand, held -up in the air while the minute hand of the clock made a full circle, and -then he brought his arm down sharply. - -“Good afternoon. This is John Hamilton again, with another interview of -interest for residents of the lake area—” - -Peggy was impressed, listening to this suave young man and the competent -way he handled himself at the microphone. She felt a beginning, just a -twinge, of mike fright, but then Mr. Hamilton introduced her, and as she -said a few words, Peggy felt easier. As the interview went on, she was -fascinated to hear details of Chris Hill’s background that she hadn’t -known. - -“Then you’ve really been a professional actor for only two years or so?” -Mr. Hamilton was asking Chris. - -“Yes, since I was discharged from the Army—but before that, of course, I -did a lot of work in college and little theaters—and in the Army I was -attached to Special Services overseas.” - -“Soldier shows?” - -“Partly, but my main job was ferreting out good civilian actors to work -with us—to bring about a better feeling between the local population and -the Army.” - -John Hamilton laughed. “Sounds as if you were doing shows in two -languages—” - -“Oh, no,” Chris said easily. “They had to be English-speaking, of -course. It was a wonderful experience all around, but then I was in a -skiing accident in Bavaria. Broke my leg. That finished both the job and -the Army for me, and I came straight to New York.” - -Mr. Hamilton handled the questions and conversation so skillfully that -soon Peggy and Chris almost forgot this was a radio interview. They -spoke about theater and sketched the plot of _Dear Ruth_, talking up -Alison Lord as the star of the show. - -“And the idea behind this theater, as I understand it,” Mr. Hamilton -said, “is to attract more visitors to our area, isn’t that right?” - -Peggy and Chris agreed enthusiastically. - -“Then certainly it should be a good thing for Lake Kenabeek,” Mr. -Hamilton went on, “and I want to wish you a lot of luck. But I’ve heard -a rumor recently that you two might set straight while we have the -opportunity here. People are saying that you are operating illegally in -the high school—” - -Peggy gasped, but Hamilton didn’t give them a chance to reply just then. - -“—and that you may not be able to open at all!” he continued. “Now, what -about this rumor? I’m sure our listening audience would like to hear.” -He sat back and looked at them—“as if we were two fish on a hook,” Peggy -thought, aghast at his question. - -In the booth, Aunt Hetty had turned beet red and looked as though she -might explode. Chris’s mouth tightened and Peggy found that she was -becoming angrier by the moment. Of all the dirty tricks—John Hamilton -asking them here to “plug” their theater, and then bringing out this -issue! But Peggy had had enough experience with her father’s newspaper -to know how newsmen operated—and she knew how to counter. Before Chris -had a chance to reply, and in the face of Aunt Hetty gesturing -frantically from the booth to say nothing, Peggy lashed back. - -“Oh, yes,” she said quite calmly. “We saw that little piece in the -paper. Rather childish, wasn’t it? Do you know that if we weren’t -renting the auditorium the high school wouldn’t make a penny this -summer? I’m sure you’ve heard of the great need for a new science lab. -By the way,” she went on in a new vein, “I wouldn’t be surprised if you -could help raise funds for the school, too—with your radio program. I’m -sure people would be glad to donate to a cause like that!” - -It was John Hamilton’s turn to flush, which he did, as they looked at -each other like two sparring partners in a contest. Ignoring Peggy’s -thrust, he came back firmly to the question. “Is it true that the -theater may not open at all?” - -In the booth, Peggy could see the engineer signaling thirty seconds to -go. If she hesitated, a lot of potential theatergoers might tune out -this program thinking of the Kenabeek Summer Theater as a myth, as a -good idea that failed. She couldn’t lie, but perhaps there was another -way. She thought quickly, and her pretty voice sounded young and gay as -it traveled through the microphone. - -“The theater is scheduled to open this Thursday night, curtain at -eight-forty, for _Dear Ruth_. We’ll be looking forward to seeing you, -Mr. Hamilton, and we hope your listening audience will be there, too.” - -Peggy had timed her speech carefully, and Mr. Hamilton had barely time -to say, “This is John Hamilton, good day.” The red light blinked off, -and they were off the air! - -John Hamilton took out a handkerchief and wiped his brow. Then he looked -at Peggy, laughed good-naturedly, and shook her hand. “You were a -charming guest! And a tough opponent! But you win, I won’t say another -word about your theater until you do open—and then I’d like to have you -both back.” He shook Chris’s hand. “I know you were angry, but that’s -the news business. Sorry. I’ll be there for your opening if I can make -it.” - -Aunt Hetty looked grimly at Peggy as they walked out the studio door. “I -hope you knew what you were doing, young lady,” she said under her -breath. “You shouldn’t have said a thing! If we don’t open, you’ll have -made a laughingstock of my nephew’s name and mine—to say nothing of the -theater!” - -Aunt Hetty drove back in a silence so thick that Peggy and Chris didn’t -have the courage to break it. Peggy felt acutely miserable. Had she done -wrong? She leaned over to Chris and whispered, “What else could I do? -But maybe she’s right. Maybe I should have let you speak instead. Now -I’ve probably messed everything up!” - -“But I would have said the same thing!” Chris whispered back. “I was -_mad_!” He nodded at Peggy warmly, and she smiled back. She liked Chris -Hill, there was no question about that. He was impulsive, but -wonderfully kind and engaging. - -Aunt Hetty dropped them off in front of the high school and was about to -drive away when Danny Dunn came racing out of the stage door. - -“Wait a minute!” he yelled, tearing over to the car and waving a piece -of paper in the air. “We opened it,” he panted, handing Aunt Hetty the -telegram. “It’s to you and all of us, but we couldn’t wait. Where’s that -_brilliant_ girl!” He gave Peggy a tremendous pat on the back. “We -listened to you—and we nearly had heart failure when he pinned you down. -There wasn’t time to call you at the studio, but—” - -“I suppose I owe you an apology,” Aunt Hetty interrupted, handing the -telegram to Peggy, “but I still think you were taking a terrible chance. -Terrible,” she repeated, but her eyes were twinkling. - - EVERYTHING OK STOP COMMISSIONER GIVES GO AHEAD STOP DETAILS ON RETURN - TOMORROW STOP HALLELUJAH RICHARD - - [Illustration: Chris was still standing beside the car.] - -“Oh, thank goodness!” Peggy cried. She could have almost wept with -relief, but Danny’s excitement affected them all, and instead of tears -there were hugs and handshakes and Danny pulling Peggy back to the -theater to display “the most intelligent girl who ever graced a stock -company!” - -“Intelligent!” Peggy laughed. “Oh, Danny, just lucky!” - -“Mental telepathy,” Danny insisted, “and that takes intelligence!” - -“Have everybody come to my house after rehearsal,” Aunt Hetty called. -“We’ll celebrate the good news. That’s a nice girl,” she remarked to -Chris, who was still standing by the car. “Even if she is a little -hasty. Not that you wouldn’t have said the same thing.” - -Startled, Chris stared at Aunt Hetty, who gave him an understanding -smile. Even in a whisper, it seemed, there was very little that Aunt -Hetty missed. - - - - - IV - A Favorable Decision - - -When Richard returned from Albany the next day he couldn’t find enough -words to praise Peggy for what she had said on the radio. - -“But your aunt _was_ upset,” Peggy exclaimed, “and she might have been -right! Just suppose we couldn’t have opened—” - -“It wouldn’t have made a bit of difference,” Richard said. “But if you -had said we might not open, think of all the audience we would have -lost!” - -“That’s exactly what I was thinking of,” Peggy declared happily. “That’s -why I went ahead.” - -Richard called the cast together on stage to tell them what had happened -in Albany. “I got panicky when I heard that the commissioner was out of -town—almost decided to hire a guide and try to trail him in the woods! -But then he sent a wire from some little town saying he’d return Monday, -so I decided to wait.” - -“By the way,” Chuck interrupted, “you know we have dress rehearsal -tomorrow night, and the next night we open! Have you sent anything to -the papers yet? Does the town know we’re going to open?” - -Richard gave Chuck an amused “where-do-you-think-I’ve-been” look. “Mr. -Crosby, I sent out at least six press releases Monday afternoon from -Albany. Not only to Lake Kenabeek, but to the New York papers, too. The -Albany paper is running a long article on this—it’s an interesting -issue, you know. I wouldn’t be surprised if we get a good press all -around. The Slade brothers may have actually helped this theater!” - -Chris laughed out loud. “I’ll bet they love that idea!” - -“Oh, certainly! They’ll be here with bells on Thursday night,” Alison -drawled. - -Michael Miller was listening, too, covered with scene paint as usual, -and wearing his carpenter’s apron stuffed with tools. “I’ll bet anything -that when they hear about this, we’ll be hearing from them again! Those -boys don’t give up so easily!” - -“Oh, now, Michael,” his father remonstrated, “they’re not as bad as all -that—” - -“I want to hear what happened!” Rita urged Richard. “We don’t know how -you wangled this or what the commissioner said—” - -“Well, I explained our problem to him,” Richard began. “That someone had -questioned the legality of operating a profit-making business in a -school, and that we were threatened with court proceedings if we -continued. I told him who was behind it and why—the brothers Slade and -their movie house—and I also explained that we were helping the school -by our rent. Of course, he couldn’t have agreed more with that, knowing -as much as he does about educational funds! And I ranted—really -ranted—about what the Kenabeek Summer Theater could do for this town—and -the whole area—and the school.” Richard was declaiming now as he walked -back and forth in front of the stage, and the cast was highly amused. - -“So, the commissioner promised to look into the matter some time soon.” -Richard stopped dramatically. “Some time soon,” he repeated, obviously -enjoying the effect on the cast. - -“Why, he’s a regular ham!” Peggy thought, grinning. - -“Well, you should have seen me,” Richard continued, laughing himself. “I -got up from my seat, leaned over the desk, stared him straight in the -eye, and said, as if this was the biggest thing since the end of the Ice -Age, ‘The Kenabeek Summer Theater opens on Thursday. _This_ Thursday!’” - -“What did he do? What happened?” Mary Hopkins asked breathlessly. - -“He decided that he’d better do something about it!” Richard laughed. -“He was galvanized! He told his secretary to drop everything, and -together we went through a list of all the companies operating in the -state. We found that two other companies were playing in high schools! -If we couldn’t go ahead here, those theaters would have to fold, too! - -“Well, it didn’t seem fair, and yet, since no one had ever before -questioned the legality of playing in a school, there was no precedent -to go by. And no time to get a court decision!” Richard was very serious -now, and the cast listened interestedly, hanging on every word. “So, the -commissioner decided that the only thing he could do legally was to -_postpone a decision_ until Labor Day! If anyone raises the question -again, they will be informed that nothing can be done about it until -after Labor Day—and by that time, of course, all the theaters will have -finished their seasons!” - -“Very clever!” Mr. Miller nodded thoughtfully. “Very clever indeed!” - -“Yes, but there’s one other little thing,” Richard added. “It was also -decided, in order to squelch any rumors or new questions, that this -theater will operate on a non-profit basis.” - -“We are now a non-profit organization?” Chuck asked slowly. - -“We are indeed,” Richard replied. “Any money left over at the end of the -season, after expenses, goes to the Kenabeek High School toward their -new science lab.” - -“Well!” Chuck exclaimed, looking perfectly blank. - -“Oh, what a pity!” Rita cried. “Then you two won’t make any money this -summer!” She knew that Chuck and Richard were working for nothing beyond -their living expenses. They weren’t even on regular salaries like the -rest of the company. Every penny would be poured back into the theater -to pay back the Chamber of Commerce and the individual investors. - -Chuck laughed. “I had hoped to have something left over at the end of -the season, but I can’t imagine that we need the profits as much as the -school does. Actually, I’m glad about this arrangement!” - -“There probably won’t be too much left over, anyway,” Richard added. -“Did you ever hear of a summer theater making a real profit on a first -season? I agree with Chuck. We just want to have a season successful -enough to warrant a return next year.” - -“We won’t have a season _this_ year if we don’t get back to work!” Chuck -declared. “We have a lot to clean up today. Places for the second act, -everybody, Scene Two.” - -“Congratulations, Richard,” Peggy said as she took a seat in the -auditorium. She had some time before she was due on stage, and she -wanted to watch the other actors. “I think you did a wonderful job!” - -“The Chamber of Commerce is going to be awfully pleased with the way -this turned out,” Mr. Miller said, shaking Richard’s hand. “And the -School Board will be delighted.” - -“Thanks, Mr. Miller,” Richard said. “I hope Max Slade will change his -mind about us now, too.” - -“He might,” Mr. Miller agreed. “He just might. If I have an opportunity, -I’ll try to speak with him about it. Well, back to work, now. -Congratulations again, Richard.” - -Watching him go, Peggy was struck again by the company’s good fortune in -having Howard Miller. He was such a finished actor and lent dignity to -the theater by his position with the Chamber of Commerce and the School -Board. “Mr. Miller did a lot in the theater in his time, didn’t he?” -Peggy whispered to Richard as the act began. - -“He certainly did. His background’s very impressive!” - -“Do you think he might be able to work something out with Max Slade?” -Peggy asked. - -“It’s possible, but if he can’t,” Richard whispered with a twinkle, -“maybe I’ll sic you on the job! You did just fine with John Hamilton.” - -Peggy laughed. “Oh, Richard! All I said was that _Dear Ruth_ would open -Thursday. What on earth would I say to Max Slade?” - -“I would leave that entirely up to you!” Richard teased. “I’m sure you’d -think of something!” - -“But not until after Thursday,” Peggy said with mock seriousness. - -“No, no, certainly not until after Thursday!” Richard agreed, chuckling. -“We couldn’t take a chance on losing you opening night! He might lock -you up in the movies!” - -“And I’d have to look at one of those awful pictures twelve times.” They -both laughed. “But isn’t it exciting, really?” Peggy said. “I mean the -opening—only two more days! It doesn’t seem possible.” - -“Two more days,” Richard echoed thoughtfully, “and there’s such a lot to -do.” - -“NO!” Chuck suddenly shouted from the orchestra, and Peggy and Richard -both jumped. “No! How many times do I have to tell you—you cannot throw -that line away!” - -He ran up on stage and motioned Danny out of the way, saying, “Now watch -this! I hate to show you how to do your part, but we can’t get hung up -on this every time we play the scene!” - -Peggy’s eyes opened wide. She had never seen Chuck Crosby like this -before. - -“You _pause_ after you say, ‘I got to the turnstile,’ etc. _Then_ you -say, ‘I didn’t have a nickel’—and you _don’t_ throw it away! You’ll kill -your next line if it isn’t just right. Now watch.” - -“I see,” Danny said when Chuck had finished. “Thanks, Chuck.” - -“This is not Chekhov we’re playing, it’s a Norman Krasna _comedy_!” -Chuck said, speaking to everybody. “Now suppose we get to work! And stop -playing Alison Lord and Chris Hill and Danny Dunn—_and_ Peggy Lane, -radio heroine.” He pointed straight at her. “Let’s play _Dear Ruth_!” - -He jumped off the stage and resumed his place down front. “Take it -again,” he called, “from the beginning!” - -And he was right. Watching him, Peggy knew that it was time to get down -to serious work. In two days they had to have a play ready. Really -ready, not half-way. And Chuck, like all good directors, was giving them -the impetus and the drive to do it. - - - - - V - Opening Night - - -Thursday! Peggy woke up with a funny feeling in the pit of her stomach -and for a moment wondered why. Then she remembered—opening night! - -“Oh!” she groaned and turned over, feeling the butterflies come and go -somewhere in the region of her chest. “Oh,” she moaned again and turned -over on her back. - -“Good morning!” There was a knock at her door, and Rita entered bearing -a steaming cup of coffee. The cup rattled a bit in the saucer as she put -it down, spilling coffee over the sides. - -“You, too?” Peggy asked, sitting upright. - -“Naturally!” Rita held her arm out, showing Peggy her trembling hand. - -“That’s nothing!” Peggy scoffed. “Look at this!” They compared hands, -and indeed, Peggy’s was much the shakier. - -“Well, you haven’t been up as long as I have,” Rita said. “Wait awhile.” - -“I know. It’ll get better, and by noon I’ll feel fine, and by dinnertime -I’ll wish I’d never thought of being an actress in the first place. Oh -dear!” Peggy steadied herself with a sip of coffee. “I wonder how Alison -feels.” - -“I’d better wake her up, too,” Rita said and went out for more coffee. -In a moment she was back, and Alison, beautifully sleepy-eyed, joined -them in Peggy’s room. - -“Why, oh, why did I ever decide to be an actress in the first place?” -Alison muttered over her coffee. - -Peggy and Rita went off into gales of laughter while Alison looked at -them indignantly. “It isn’t funny,” she said. “I don’t feel funny in the -least.” - -“We know!” Peggy laughed. “It’s just exactly what I said a minute ago—I -mean what I said I would be saying about eight o’clock tonight!” - -“Well, but you don’t have to carry the show,” Alison said, still glum. -“I’ll blow up, I know I will—or I’ll trip over the stairs coming -down—I’ll probably fall flat on my face on my first entrance. Oh, I wish -it were over! Heavens, my hair! I’ve got to wash and set my hair!” She -gulped down the last of her coffee and fled to the shower. - -Peggy and Rita watched her go with real compassion—they knew exactly how -she felt! - -Chuck Crosby knew what he was about when he called the cast together for -a morning reading of next week’s play, _Angel Street_. By the time the -cast had finished, they had forgotten their anxiety about opening night. -It helped to be reminded that _Dear Ruth_ was not the only play of the -season. There would be other opening nights, too. But this was the big -one—everyone felt that as the day wore on and nervousness slowly -returned. - -The company gathered together at a large table for an early dinner at -Mrs. Brady’s. They seldom ate _en masse_ like this, but tonight they -did, almost huddled together for support. - -“It feels like the last meal!” Danny mourned as he stirred his soup -listlessly. - -“I can’t even stand the thought of food!” Alison declared, looking at -her bowl with distaste. - -Even Chris was nervous. Peggy couldn’t help giggling as she watched him -break cracker after cracker into his soup until it looked like a -snowbank. He didn’t have the slightest idea of what he was doing. Rita -plowed into her food, grimly determined to put something into her -stomach, and urged Peggy to do the same. - -“Never mind how you feel about it—you’ll have more energy.” - -“I can’t,” Peggy said, still giggling. “I just can’t. There’s something -absolutely ridiculous about food at a time like this! Imagine—tomato -soup and _Dear Ruth_—they just don’t mix!” She started laughing again, -and everyone looked at her accusingly. “I can’t help it.” She giggled -helplessly. “I always do this—it’s just nerves. It’ll stop in a while!” -She took a deep breath, trying to calm down, but then another thought -sent her off again. “What do you imagine your husband is having for -dinner tonight?” she asked Rita. “I can just see him up at the theater, -decorating the set and eating lilacs dipped in crackerjack!” - -“Oh, Peggy, please stop!” Danny protested as he choked on a mouthful of -soup. “Stop talking and eat.” - -“Please!” everyone echoed, and Peggy subsided, trying to force down some -food. It was worse, though, than nervous giggles. The palms of her hands -were first icy and then hot, her stomach felt as if a thousand birds -were migrating through, and the very thought of walking on stage gave -her a shiver from head to toe. - -“Well, the worst is over!” Rita said with relief as they finished dinner -and left, with Mrs. Brady’s good wishes following them. - -And she was right. Somehow the food, the sparkling night air, the -familiar feeling of the auditorium, and the good smell of grease paint -in their dressing rooms relaxed everyone. This was their job—it was -opening night. In half an hour when they walked on stage, they would be -fine—and everybody knew it. - -“It’s funny how the anticipation is always worse than the fact,” Rita -mused as she started to put on her make-up. “And that dinner is the most -dreadful thing of all. It’ll never be that bad again.” - -“Aren’t you nervous?” Mary Hopkins asked innocently from her table. The -girls all shared one large dressing room, and the men another. - -“What a question!” Peggy laughed. “Aren’t you?” - -“Well, a little,” Mary replied. “Not much.” - -“That’s because you’re not a professional,” Alison said. “If you ever -become one—just watch. You’re not nervous at first, but the more you -work, the more nervous you get.” - -“I think that’s because in the beginning we all think we’re just -wonderful,” Peggy said, “but after a while, we realize how much we have -still to learn.” - -“Zip me up, please?” Alison asked Peggy. She looked perfectly beautiful, -Peggy thought, in her pretty two-piece dress, and marvelous make-up. -Alison sat down again and took a little black candle out of her make-up -kit. She lit it and tilted it over a small tin cup. - -“Is that some kind of a ritual?” Peggy asked in amazement. “What on -earth are you doing, Alison?” - -“Eyelashes,” Alison replied, dipping a brush in the cup and carefully -lifting it to her eyes. “I always do this last.” - -“Eyelashes!” Peggy exclaimed—and looked into the little cup. It held -black wax melted by the flame, which thickened when Alison applied it, -making her lashes look thick and long. - -“I don’t like to wear false lashes,” Alison explained, “and this works -just as well if not better.” - -“If you’ll put a little white at the outer corner of your eyelid, -Peggy,” Rita offered, “it will give you a young effect—and a dot of red -in the inner corner helps, too.” - -Peggy tried it and it worked. - -“No line under your eyes,” Rita said. “That makes you look older, and -you have to shave off about five years since Miriam is supposed to be -about fourteen. Now, bring your rouge up a little closer to your eyes -and not so far out on your cheek—you want to have a round effect. -There!” Rita looked at Peggy appraisingly. “What do you think?” - -Peggy looked at herself and was pleased. She would appear about fourteen -on stage, she thought. She hadn’t been quite satisfied with her make-up -at dress rehearsal. She put on her little navy-blue jumper and white -blouse, brushed on her powder and was done. - -“Telegrams!” a voice outside the door announced. “Are you decent?” - -“We are, come in,” Rita said, and Richard came through with a stack of -yellow envelopes, handing them to the girls. - -“I have to get out front,” Richard said, “but I know you’ll be terrific. -Break a leg!” - -“Break a leg!” Mary gasped as he left. “Why—what a thing to say!” - -“It means good luck,” Peggy explained as she put her telegrams in front -of her mirror. “Theater people always say that, or something like -it—it’s an old superstition.” - -“I see. Why don’t you open your telegrams?” Mary asked. - -“Oh, we never do,” Alison answered. “Not until after the show.” - -“That’s in case any of them are bad news,” Rita explained. - -“But they’re just good-luck wires, aren’t they?” - -“Of course,” Peggy laughed, “but it’s another old superstition—like -whistling in the dressing room!” - -“Fifteen minutes!” Gus called, rapping a tattoo on the door. - -“Where’s the music?” Chuck asked, coming by. “Get that turntable going, -Gus—and better check the door buzzer again.” He came into the room. -“Alison, don’t worry about the orange juice—if you’re shaky about -drinking it tonight, let it go. Peggy, let’s see your make-up. Good! -That’s much better! Now listen—I know it’s opening night and I know it -means a lot—to all of us. And I know we’re all excited and nervous—but I -know you’re going to be just fine! - -“Remember—pace it! Keep it moving! It’s a terrific comedy and it ought -to carry you along. It will, if you just keep it moving. I’ll be -watching, but I don’t think you’ll see me until after the show unless -there’s someone I can’t hear. Mary, watch that. I couldn’t hear you in -the last row last night.” He paused a moment. “What else? Guess that’s -it. Break a leg, everyone!” - -As Chuck left, the girls heard the music begin, and Gus came by, -calling, “Five minutes!” - -There was a sudden silence in the dressing room as everyone felt the -mounting tension. It was a different excitement, though, from their -morning nerves. Peggy began to yawn while Rita took very deep breaths -and Alison did a bending exercise. All these things helped their systems -adjust to the impending effort. - -Peggy felt that she had to move. Movement always helped and it was time, -anyway. She walked backstage and took her place in the wings. - -“Peggy,” a voice whispered behind her, “have a lot of fun.” - -“Thanks, Michael,” Peggy replied shakily. “Do you know what kind of a -house we have?” - -“I think it’s pretty good—there’s a peephole in the curtain if you want -to look.” - -“No, not tonight—” - -“Have fun, Dad,” Michael said to his father as Howard Miller took his -place beside Peggy. - -“How do you feel, Peggy?” Mr. Miller asked. - -“Nervous!” Peggy smiled. “Break a leg, Dad.” - -“House lights!” they heard Gus call to Michael, who was at the -lightboard. “Music! Spots!” - -Peggy took a deep breath and adjusted the little beret she wore for her -entrance. Suddenly her knees felt like water. “What’s my first line?” -she thought frantically. “I don’t remember what I’m supposed to say—” - -“Curtain!” Gus said, and the heavy drapes swept back. - -There was dead silence for a moment, and then Peggy heard a gasp from -the audience followed by a wave of applause for the set. It was evident -they hadn’t expected anything so charming and good. - -“Morning, Mis’ Wilkins.” Mary Hopkins entered with her first line. - -“Good morning, Dora,” Rita said, her voice clear and steady. - -Five more lines before Peggy’s entrance. She was desperately trying to -remember her first line.... - -“... and that’s the last box of Kleenex,” Mary said. That was it—Peggy’s -cue. - -Almost in a trance she made her entrance. “Good morning, Dora,” she -said, the words coming from somewhere—and the minute she spoke, bathed -in the bright lights of the familiar, homey set, everything connected, -everything fell into place. - -Peggy began to act easily, feeling out the audience, trying to sense its -mood. It was a curious, rather tight house in the beginning. She felt -the spectators were silently saying, “Show me!” - -Mr. Miller and Alison got nice hands on their entrances, but nothing -seemed to “zip” yet—the audience still seemed too polite. Peggy watched -from the wings when Chris made his entrance—and then it happened. That -magical moment when a play suddenly comes to life. Chris entered with -exuberance and power, carrying the audience right along with him, and -the play began to move. It did have pace and rhythm, just as Chuck had -said. The whole cast could feel it and the audience began to laugh. At -the end of the first act there was a resounding wave of applause. - -Chuck couldn’t wait out front as he had said he would. He came running -backstage with a huge grin. “It’s great,” he cried, slapping everybody -on the back. “It’s great—just great! Keep it up—keep it moving—it’s -great!” Vocabulary had apparently deserted Chuck Crosby, and his praise -made the actors very happy. They knew how he felt out there, watching -his actors, as nervous as they were, and probably praying that they -would come through. Directing was a big responsibility. - -There were six curtain calls! Richard presented Alison Lord with a big -bouquet of flowers from the Chamber of Commerce—a nice gesture for a -special opening, and by the way the applause went on and on, the cast -knew that this audience didn’t want to leave. A sure indication that -they had really had a wonderful time! - -Gus finally turned on the music, the curtains closed on the company, and -opening night of _Dear Ruth_ was over. - -Almost over. There was to be a party later in the dining room of the -Kenabeek Inn, and now there were congratulations and backstage visitors, -and the exhilaration that always follows a good show. - -As she rubbed cold cream on her face in the dressing room, Peggy finally -read her telegrams. BREAK A LEG LITTLE ONE, from her big brother, David, -now off in San Francisco on an assignment for his news service. BEST -WISHES FOR A GRAND OPENING STOP WE KNOW YOU AND THE COMPANY WILL BE -WONDERFUL, from Mother and Dad. A wire from May Berriman and all the -girls in New York; and another from Randy Brewster, THINKING ABOUT A -VERY SPECIAL ACTRESS. - -The telegrams brought family and friends backstage as if they were right -here, congratulating her now. Peggy looked at Rita, remembering the way -they had felt in the morning. “Did I ever say I didn’t want to be an -actress?” she asked, and they laughed, comparing absolutely steady hands -this time. - - - - - VI - Chance Encounter - - -There was no review of _Dear Ruth_ in the _Kenabeek Gazette_ the next -day! The cast sat around the patio after blocking the first act of -_Angel Street_, glum and disheartened. The wonderful elation of last -night’s opening had left them. - -“Isn’t Ford Birmingham going to review us at all?” Peggy wondered -unhappily. “Isn’t it his job? Doesn’t he have to?” - -“Oh, he’ll probably write a token piece—it would be too obvious if he -didn’t,” Chuck answered grimly. “But I imagine he won’t do it until the -middle of the week when we’re almost finished with _Dear Ruth_. By that -time we’ll have lost an audience—people will lose interest in our -theater.” - -“But didn’t he like the play?” Alison demanded. “Everyone else simply -loved it!” - -“He wasn’t there,” Chuck said shortly. “He didn’t come last night, and I -doubt if he’ll come at all. Max Slade must have that man wrapped around -his little finger! We had an audience last night only because of our own -advertising and publicity. But people expect reviews! And if Birmingham -doesn’t give us one next week on opening night—I’ll write one myself!” - -“Oh, you can’t!” Peggy said anxiously. “If you do, he’ll be sure to -bring it out in the paper, and then we’ll seem like amateurs!” - -Chuck sighed. “I know, Peggy. I wouldn’t, of course, but I just don’t -see any other way!” - -“Well, for heaven’s sake!” Alison protested. “He can’t write a review -unless he comes to see a play!” - -“Sure he can,” Chris Hill returned. “Easy. He’ll write about two lines -to the effect that _Dear Ruth_ opened at the high school last Thursday, -and in the cast were..., et cetera and et cetera. By saying nothing -he’ll create the impression we were terrible!” - -Peggy looked uneasily at Chris. He was terribly angry. She had a -momentary vision of him storming into the offices of the _Kenabeek -Gazette_ and demanding to have it out with Mr. Birmingham. She wasn’t -far wrong. - -“Why don’t I go to see him?” Chris fumed. “I’d love to see that guy -and—” - -“—tell him just exactly what you think of him!” Chuck finished. “Yes, I -know. So would I, but that’s probably what they expect us to do, so we’d -better not. Better sit tight.” - -“Just what is the connection between Max Slade and Birmingham?” Peggy -persisted. “It seems very mysterious to me. I can’t imagine why a -newspaperman would be working hand in glove with a theater manager—it -doesn’t make sense. Newsmen usually just want news! Period!” - -“Who knows?” Chuck shrugged. “All I know is that we’ll be able to judge -from the house tonight how it’s going to go from now on without a -review. It’s too early to tell—maybe people will come anyway. But if -they don’t, I can tell you this theater isn’t going to last long!” - -Watching Chuck, Peggy felt worried. She noticed that Chris was looking -at their director too, and catching his eye, she knew that he felt as -she did. This meant so much to Chuck, and he had worked so hard. If -there were only something she could do.... - -“Peggy,” Chuck said, as if in answer to her thought, “would you mind -going with Danny and Mike Miller this afternoon to hunt for furniture?” -He was going to work on the second act of _Angel Street_, in which Peggy -didn’t appear. “You don’t have to—I know you need a rest—but if you feel -like it, it would be a great help.” - -“I’d love to!” Peggy beamed cheerfully. “Really, I would. It’ll give me -a chance to see the town.” - -Chuck smiled gratefully. “Well, if you’re sure—” - -“Anything that’s Victorian?” Peggy asked as she collected her sides and -pencil, dropping them into the large knitting bag she carried to -rehearsals. - -“Mike has the furniture and prop list up at the theater,” Chuck said. -“I’d like you to keep an eye out for decoration. Knickknacks and -pictures and maybe a statue—you know.” - -“They shouldn’t be hard to find here,” Peggy called gaily as she left -the annex. “These houses look as if they’re stuffed with Victorian -antiques!” - -“Thanks, Peggy.” The cast went back to rehearsal, and Peggy started up -to the theater. - -“We need a chaise longue, a desk, two tables, four straight chairs, two -easy chairs, and a hall table plus extras.” Danny Dunn checked the list -as Michael Miller turned the little blue jeep out of the school driveway -and down the main road. - -“Are you sorry not to be in _Angel Street_?” Peggy asked him. Danny -would not be playing next week and had taken the job of stage-managing -instead, giving Gus an opportunity to concentrate on the set alone. - -“Not a bit!” Danny grinned. “You know I’ve played Sergeant Rough before, -and although I enjoyed doing it, I felt I was a little young. It will be -a real treat to see Howard Miller in the part. I think he’ll be -fabulous!” - -Peggy chuckled. Danny’s remarks were always liberally peppered with -words like _fabulous_, _terrific_, _fantastic_, _out of this world_. -Danny asked why she laughed and Peggy told him. - -“Well,” he pronounced expansively, “the theater _is_ a little bit out of -this world—and I’m in the theater. So where am I?” - -“Passing the office of that ‘fantastic’ paper, the _Kenabeek Gazette_,” -Michael informed him, laughing. “There it is, children, look your fill.” - -Peggy and Danny whipped around in their seats to look. “The building -looks just like my father’s newspaper in Rockport,” Peggy said, “only a -little smaller. I wonder if Ford Birmingham is in.” - -“Well, you won’t have a chance to find out,” Michael said. “I’m taking -you across town to see Mary Hopkins’ mother. Mary said they might have -some things we could use.” - -Peggy looked eagerly around the little town of Lake Kenabeek as they -drove through. It was only a few buildings on either side of the main -highway. A post office, drugstore, general store, and sporting goods -shop, the newspaper building, and a couple of restaurants. The -residents’ houses and cottages were almost all off the main highway, on -twisting roads, hidden behind the profusion of pine trees and thick -forest growth. - -Peggy wished she could have just a few minutes to stroll around. -“Goodness,” she said, “I’ve been here ten days, and this is the first -time I’ve been into town since I got off that bus!” - -“You mean ten years!” Michael retorted. “I’ve felt at least ten years go -by since I first saw you that afternoon!” - -Danny and Peggy laughed. Looking at Michael, though, Peggy realized that -he wasn’t far wrong about himself. He had grown up in the past week! And -he seemed to be having more fun. He wasn’t as serious and shy as he had -been at the start. For his sake, Peggy was glad of the change. - -“The jeep has aged, too,” Danny commented. “Don’t I detect a cough in -the engine?” - -“Oh, no, that’s only her way of saying hello.” Michael patted the wheel -as if the jeep were alive. “Look—there it is—the ogre!” Michael pointed -to the movie house and shook a fist playfully as they drove by. - -“Well, you certainly don’t seem too worried about the state of affairs!” -Danny commented. - -“I’m not!” Michael responded. “I have absolute faith in the ultimate -triumph of the Kenabeek Summer Theater! Hey!” Michael suddenly braked -the jeep and pulled to the side of the road. “Bladen’s Antiques! I’d -forgotten about them. This is the one antique store in the area, Peggy.” - -They looked at the little house at the side of the road. Outside, by the -gate, was a huge iron elk carrying the shop’s sign on his antlers. The -yard was strewn with marble pedestals, bird cages hanging from trees, -and a huge red sleigh with massive iron runners. There was even a small -weather-beaten totem pole leaning rather precariously to one side. - -“Is that the real thing?” Peggy asked Michael. - -“Well, if it wasn’t when they put it up, it’s certainly an antique by -now! No, it’s not a real Indian one, Peggy. It’s a fake, like a lot of -souvenir items up here. But we don’t pretend they’re real.” - -“Think we might borrow one of those pedestals?” Peggy asked. “We could -use one on the set.” - -“Couldn’t carry it back—they’re too heavy,” Michael answered. “Why don’t -I drop you here, Peggy, and you can browse around inside? We’ll pick you -up on our way back from Mrs. Hopkins’.” - -“Well, all right,” Peggy agreed doubtfully, climbing out. “But suppose -they don’t want to lend us anything?” - -“Make a big pitch about the program credit. Say it’s great advertising! -See you later.” They drove off, leaving Peggy feeling even more dubious. -She had never been very good at this type of thing—program credit or -not. She remembered a time when she had been asked to sell advertising -for the high school yearbook at home, and how shy she had felt about it. -Acting was one thing, but this was another. - -Some people didn’t realize that actors and actresses didn’t always make -good salesmen, she thought, as she entered the gate and walked up the -little flagstone path to the shop. She wished that Richard Wallace were -with her. He could talk anybody into anything! But then, Peggy recalled, -he seemed to think the same of her. She smiled, remembering how he had -kidded about sending her to see Max Slade. Well, even if that had been a -joke, at least she could try to do something useful here. - -Chimes rang above her head as she opened the door, and Peggy blinked, -coming into a room so stuffed with bric-a-brac and furniture that she -could hardly see her way. There was a narrow path of clear space, only -about a foot wide, that led to the counter. She had to avoid things -hanging from the ceiling: bunches of toy bark canoes on strings, birds -carved out of wood that danced merrily in the air at the breeze from the -door. Leaning down from the wall behind the counter and staring at her -roundly was a huge, stuffed owl, his eyes gleaming strangely in the dim -light. Peggy stared back at the owl, fascinated. - -“Yes, may I help you?” For a moment Peggy almost thought the owl had -spoken, but then she saw a little splinter of a man, so fragile and old -that it seemed as if he might break into a thousand pieces at any -moment. - -“Oh dear!” Peggy thought. “He’s so old, and probably can’t hear very -well, and won’t know what I’m talking about!” But she had to begin -somewhere. - -“Why, yes,” she said, speaking clearly in hopes he could hear. “I’m -Peggy Lane from the Kenabeek Summer Theater, and we hoped you might be -able to help us. We’re doing a Victorian play next week—_Angel -Street_—and we thought you might have some furniture or decoration we -could use on our set....” Peggy stopped lamely while the old man just -smiled and said nothing. Obviously, he hadn’t understood a word. - -“We couldn’t pay you for them, of course,” she rushed on, determined to -finish at any rate. “But if you’d be interested, we’d give you a good -credit in our programs, and that’s free advertising for you, you know.” - -Peggy felt bumbling and awkward, at a loss for words. Well, there was -only one thing left to say. She would finish and leave quickly. “We -would take very good care of whatever you lent us,” she mumbled -faintly—it didn’t matter, he couldn’t hear anyway. “Well, I’ve certainly -made a mess of this,” Peggy thought. “They should have sent somebody who -knows the old man and how to talk to him!” - -“Ah, yes. _Angel Street_ is an excellent play!” Peggy could hardly -believe her ears as the old man spoke. “Quite a thriller, yes, indeed. I -made a special trip to New York to see that play once—type of thing I -like. I was waiting for you to say something about taking care of -anything I might lend you,” he went on. “You see, some of my things here -are quite valuable and I would have to be sure they were in responsible -hands.” - -“Oh, of course,” Peggy said eagerly. - -“If you hadn’t mentioned that, I might not have said anything at all! -Might have let you leave thinking I was deaf as a stone!” He cocked his -head humorously on one side, giving Peggy a wink that reminded her of -the wise old owl. - -“I’m Mr. Bladen,” the old man said as he came out from behind the -counter and threaded his way among the piles of stuff on the floor, -crooking a finger for Peggy to follow. There was hardly room to squeeze -through, but she valiantly held her breath and went sideways, picking -her way carefully around the vases, picture frames, statues, tables, and -chairs. - -“Been here forty years,” he added, leading her over to one wall under a -window. He drew back the curtains and a dust cloud rose as he pinned -them back to get some light. Peggy sneezed. “_Gesundheit!_” Mr. Bladen -said. - -Peggy sneezed again. “_Gesundheit!_” he repeated, and Peggy giggled. - -“Think I’m a funny old codger, don’t you?” he said, his eyes twinkling. -“And you’re right—I am—I am! Can’t get to be as old as I am and not be -funny somehow! Now look—” He started removing a pile of odds and ends -that were burying a piece of furniture covered with a dusty red shawl. -“Take this and put it somewhere.” He handed Peggy a plaster cast of a -nymph blowing a conch shell. Peggy looked around and placed it on a -table already filled with other figurines. “And this—and this—” He gave -her pictures, frames, little boxes, lamps. Peggy was hard pressed to -find a place for them, but somehow she managed. Finally they reached -bottom and Mr. Bladen pulled off the shawl. After the cloud of dust had -subsided, among more sneezes and _Gesundheits_, Peggy looked at the -“buried treasure” and gasped. It was a perfect Victorian chaise longue -with a curving, dark mahogany frame, beautifully upholstered in red and -gold striped satin. - -“It’s perfect!” Peggy cried excitedly. “Oh, Mr. Bladen, it’s simply -perfect! We couldn’t find anything better if we looked for a million -years! Oh, may we use it, really?” She clasped her hands eagerly. - -“Of course!” Mr. Bladen laughed, his thin, sensitive fingers patting the -edge of the sofa. “I know it’s perfect. Just like the one they used in -New York—noticed it myself when I saw the play. Been waiting, really, to -find a use for it. Nobody would ever discover it under all this stuff!” - -Peggy looked around, wondering how many other lovely pieces were hidden -under the incredible litter. - -“Yep,” Mr. Bladen said, “I have a lot of nice things here, but can’t -ever find the time to straighten things up so they can be seen. Too old, -I guess—and then there’s my work.” - -Peggy’s surprise was evident. His work? Wasn’t this his work? Mr. Bladen -answered her unspoken question with another conspiratorial wink. - -“Write poetry, you see—only thing worth doing at my age. Wouldn’t you -agree?” - -Peggy was charmed. She hadn’t met anyone so delightful as Mr. Bladen for -a long time. Wouldn’t her parents love to hear about this wonderful old -man with his fantastic little shop and his poetry! - -“Then of course you’d know about the theater and plays and everything,” -she cried with sudden understanding. “No wonder!” - -[Illustration: _“It’s perfect!” Peggy cried excitedly._] - -“Yes,” Mr. Bladen answered cheerfully. “And it’s nice to know that -someone’s bringing the theater to us here. Town needs it—wish you a lot -of luck. Anxious to help all I can. Now, let’s see if we can’t find some -little extras for that set—” He poked around, and like a magician -drawing rabbits out of a hat, triumphantly produced pictures, ornaments, -a student lamp, and two beautiful porcelain vases. - -“Think you’ll need these,” he told Peggy, holding up the vases. “Seems -to me I remember something special about a vase—” - -“That’s right.” Peggy smiled. “The rubies are hidden in a vase. But -those are much too good, Mr. Bladen!” - -“Nonsense,” he scoffed. “You want to be realistic, don’t you? Now you -just take these vases and scoot along. I’ll put them in your care. Here, -take this along with you now, too.” He balanced the student lamp -precariously between the vases that Peggy held in each hand. The china -shade was just under her chin. - -“But I really don’t think—” Peggy started. - -“Send somebody back for the rest of the things.” Mr. Bladen ignored her -protest. “I’m here all the time,” he said as he opened the door. - -“Well, now about the advertising for the program—” - -“Worry about that later—have to get back to work now. Run along and good -luck.” - -Mr. Bladen closed the door firmly, the chimes ringing good-by as Peggy -found herself outside. She hadn’t even thanked him, she realized, -looking back at the house. Why was he in such a sudden hurry, she -wondered? And then she remembered—poetry! Peggy laughed softly. Mr. -Bladen must have had a new idea and wanted to write it down quickly. She -wondered if the poem would be about the theater, or _Angel Street_, or -if the sofa could have given him an idea, or the vases. It could be -anything! Peggy smiled broadly as she stepped down the little path to -the gate, carefully holding the vases and lamp. What a surprise to find -someone like Mr. Bladen in Lake Kenabeek! It proved that it paid to get -into town once in a while—there might be other fascinating people to -meet in this resort. - -Peggy leaned forward to open the gate and the lamp started to tumble. -Grabbing it, she almost let go of one of the precious vases which -started to slide out of her hand. It kept slipping and she couldn’t get -a secure grasp on it. In a flash she saw an awful picture of shattered -porcelain, and Mr. Bladen’s disappointment at having entrusted something -so valuable to her. Just as it was about to fall entirely and crash on -the pavement, two hands reached over the gate, grabbed the vase, and -removed the lamp from her arms. - -“Now maybe you’ll be able to see where you’re going!” A handsome young -man in a conservative summer suit stood there smiling, and Peggy sighed -with relief. - -“Thank you so much!” she said gratefully. “I don’t know what I’d have -done if they’d been broken. You’ve really saved the day—I can’t thank -you enough!” - -“Well, I don’t know about that,” the young man said, grinning, “It may -be enough to know that I’ve saved the day! How have I saved the day, by -the way?” He looked amused and interested, and Peggy laughed. - -“By the way, you’ve saved the day and helped the play!” she rhymed. -“Really you have. And you’ve also saved one of Mr. Bladen’s precious -antiques!” - -He raised an eyebrow, turning the vase over in his hand. “Is it really -good?” he asked. “And what does it have to do with a play?” - -“We’re going to use them in _Angel Street_,” Peggy explained. She liked -this friendly young man who somehow made her feel as if she’d known him -for years. Was he another interesting resident, she wondered. “I’m Peggy -Lane from the Summer Theater,” she said, “and next week’s play is _Angel -Street_.” - -“Oh,” he said slowly, and Peggy was surprised to see him frown slightly. -But then he smiled again, handing back the vase. “How are you going to -manage all this?” he asked, still holding on to the lamp. “I don’t think -you can carry them all without breaking something. Can I drop you -somewhere?” - -Peggy noticed a car parked a few feet away and shook her head, -declining, “No, thank you—” - -“I realize we haven’t met formally,” he said, bowing a little, “but in -Lake Kenabeek we’re not very formal. I’d be glad to drive you to the -theater.” - -He hadn’t introduced himself, Peggy realized suddenly, but he seemed so -well-mannered that she imagined it was just a slip. “No, thanks again, -but the jeep is coming back for me. I’d better wait.” - -He gave her a regretful glance and put the lamp carefully on the ground. -“Well, I’m sorry,” he said. “It would be a pleasure to help you. A real -pleasure,” he added softly, almost under his breath. “But perhaps we’ll -meet again sometime.” He looked at her as if about to add something, but -then, apparently changing his mind, gave her a peculiar smile and walked -to his car. “Good luck,” he called as he got in, leaving Peggy -thoroughly puzzled. - -The little blue jeep was coming back just as the young man drove away, -and they passed each other on the road. Michael turned and pulled up in -front of Peggy, exclaiming when he saw the lamp and vases. - -“Success! They look wonderful, Peggy, and look what we have!” - -The back of the jeep was crammed with chairs and tables. “Mrs. Hopkins -has taken care of the table and chair department, and all we have left -now of any real importance is that couch. Can’t seem to find one,” Danny -said. - -“I’ve found it!” Peggy declared. “And wait until you see it! But we have -to come back for it later. Oh, I have such a lot to tell you!” She -handed Danny the lamp and climbed into the front seat, carefully holding -the vases. - -“By the way,” Michael said as they drove back to the theater, “did you -see one of the ogres? He drove right past you—back there in front of -Bladen’s.” - -“Who? What ogre?” Peggy asked. “Where?” - -“Remember the car that passed us just as we came back for you?” - -Peggy certainly did remember, and her heart sank as she guessed what -Michael’s next words would be. - -“That, my girl,” he confirmed, “was none other than our Mr. Slade!” - -“Max Slade!” Peggy breathed softly. “Why, it doesn’t seem possible....” - -“No, not Max,” Michael corrected. “That was his shadow—his younger -brother, Bill.” - -Peggy had such a peculiar expression that Danny worriedly asked, “What’s -the matter, Peggy? You all right?” - -“Why, I don’t know,” she said slowly, hardly hearing as she recalled -Bill Slade’s parting words— - -“... it would be a pleasure to help you ... a real pleasure.” - -“Oh, Michael,” Peggy cried, “I’ve got to see your father and Richard -Wallace right away! There may be a lot more to all this than we realize! -There may even be a way to help the theater!” - - - - - VII - Unfair Play - - -“I think you should send someone to see him. I’m sure he’d really like -to help!” Peggy was saying. She had dropped into Aunt Hetty’s home with -Richard and Mr. Miller to discuss her meeting with Bill Slade. “I had -the feeling when he spoke that he doesn’t approve of what his brother’s -doing, doesn’t like this feud—” - -“Whether he approves or not, there’s nothing he can do about it!” Aunt -Hetty said firmly. “They both run the movie house, but it’s Max who -makes the decisions and Bill just follows along.” - -“That’s right, Peggy,” Howard Miller agreed. “I’d hate to stir up any -friction between those two brothers. I spoke at length to Max the other -night, and I’ve never heard him so unreasonable about anything in all -the years I’ve known him! He won’t even discuss the problem. He’s so -terrified that we’re going to ruin his business that he just clams up.” - -“Was Bill Slade there when you saw him?” Peggy asked curiously. - -Mr. Miller nodded. “And he didn’t say a word. I hate to disappoint you -about Bill, Peggy, but he’s never been strong enough to stand up to his -brother; and no matter how he impressed you, I don’t think this issue is -the one to change his character.” - -Peggy sighed. “Well, I guess that’s that,” she said regretfully. “I’m -sorry—for a while I thought something could be done. He seemed so -nice—and sad somehow. It’s a shame.” - -“How’s _Angel Street_ going?” Aunt Hetty asked, tactfully closing the -subject of Bill Slade. - -“Wonderful,” Richard said. “It’s going to be even better than _Dear -Ruth_—if that’s possible! Come on, Peggy,” he said, “I’ll walk you -home.” - -“Thank you for the coffee and the cake,” Peggy said to Aunt Hetty. “It -was wonderful to have something homemade for a change!” - -“Remind you of home?” Aunt Hetty asked. - -“Yes—it all does,” Peggy said wistfully, looking around the comfortable -living room with the beamed ceiling, fireplace, and gay chintz coverings -on the furniture. “But then,” she laughed, “anything like this is a -startling change from the annex! It makes me wonder if I shouldn’t go -home for a visit after the season is over....” - -“Good idea,” Aunt Hetty agreed. “You’ll need a rest.” - -“Are you staying, Mr. Miller?” Richard asked. - -“Yes, I want to go over some things with your aunt, Richard. We have to -give a report soon to the Chamber of Commerce.” - -“And I want to talk over some more promotion ideas with you,” Richard -said, “if you’ll be here when I get back.” - -“Your aunt and Mr. Miller make a nice couple,” Peggy observed as she and -Richard started back to the annex. “Have you ever noticed?” - -Richard grinned at Peggy. “You mean that just occurred to you? Why, I -guess everybody in town has seen that for years. We’re all just waiting -for Aunt Hetty and Mr. Miller to wake up and notice it, too! - -“I’m sorry that we had to squelch your idea of appealing to Bill Slade,” -Richard went on seriously, “and believe me, we wouldn’t if there were -the slightest chance of his making any headway with his brother. But I’m -afraid Mr. Miller’s right. Bill Slade is a pretty weak character. If he -really felt strongly about this, he’d do something about it on his own. -Don’t you think so, Peggy?” - -“Yes, I do,” Peggy said thoughtfully. “And do you know, Richard, I -wouldn’t be surprised if he did do something! Maybe he isn’t as weak as -all of you think. I just have a feeling—” - -“Woman’s feelings!” Richard laughed. “For once, I’m afraid your -intuition is wrong, Peggy!” - -And as the week wore on, it seemed that Richard was right. By the night -of dress rehearsal for _Angel Street_, the cast was terribly dispirited, -having seen audiences diminish little by little each night for _Dear -Ruth_. Apparently Max Slade was talking down the theater at every -opportunity—calling them amateurs, and saying that if Ford Birmingham -wouldn’t even bother to go, the townspeople could certainly judge from -that. Unfortunately, the company hadn’t been playing long enough to -secure the loyal audience that could keep it going regardless. - -Alison Lord, who was playing the very demanding lead of “Mrs. -Manningham” in _Angel Street_, was particularly upset. - -“It’s bad enough to be under the strain of doing this part,” she said -tearfully to Chuck. “Sometimes I wonder why I bother at all—why not just -quit? It doesn’t seem worth the effort!” - -“It will, tomorrow night, when we open,” Chuck reassured her. “You’re -doing a beautiful job, Alison, and, of course, it’s worth while!” - -“Cheer up, Mrs. Manningham,” Howard Miller said, patting Alison on the -shoulder, “you and I are going to have a wonderful time out there, -audience or not. Right?” - -“I guess so.” Alison dried her tears and smiled ironically. “I’m unhappy -enough really to feel like Mrs. Manningham, anyway. If this keeps up, I -won’t have to work very hard!” She went to the dressing room to change -into her costume. Peggy followed, worried about Alison’s mood. “Mrs. -Manningham” was on stage almost constantly and really carried the show. -If some of Alison’s fire was gone, even the fine performance that Howard -Miller was giving wouldn’t be enough to save the play. - -“How is your costume?” Peggy asked Alison, thinking that clothes and -make-up always seemed to have a magical effect on the leading lady. -“Have you unpacked it yet?” The large boxes of costumes had arrived -earlier in the afternoon from New York. Because _Angel Street_ was a -period piece, everything had to be rented. Measurements had been sent, -and now the girls could only hope that everything fitted properly. If -not, there would be last-minute sewing—a difficult project to fit into -the next few short hours. - -“It’s dull,” Alison replied disinterestedly, “but it fits. At least I -don’t have to worry about that!” She put on a smock and sat down at the -table to apply her make-up. Watching her draw in the tiny lines on her -forehead, and apply blue shadow under her eyes, Peggy had to giggle. - -“Oh, Alison!” She laughed. “Forgive me, but really, what a change!” - -Alison stared blankly into her mirror and then had to smile at herself. -Gone was the bright, vivacious “Ruth,” and even beautiful Alison. In her -place was a wan, haunted woman about thirty, with circles under her eyes -and an expression of fear. “For once I look just the way I feel,” said -Alison, and as Peggy and Rita laughed, even she had to join in. - -“I really should be a blonde for this,” Peggy considered as she put up -her hair, arranging it in little curls on the top of her head. She was -playing the pert, saucy maid, Nancy. - -“You could spray your hair,” Rita told her, “but it’s a mess, and I -wouldn’t advise it. I think you’re all right just like that.” - -“Except that my skirt is too long,” Peggy noticed as she walked about -the dressing room, strutting a bit as “Nancy” did, with a rustle of -taffeta. “I’ll trip on it, I’m afraid.” - -“Here, maybe I can pin it,” Rita offered. - -Finally, dressed in their costumes and make-up, the girls walked out on -stage for an inspection under lights. - -“What base are you using, Alison?” Chuck called from the aisle. “You’re -too yellow under all this amber light. Gus, kill that spot and let me -see what happens. Now, will you walk over and sit on the sofa, Alison? -And Peggy, let me see you up by the fireplace.” - -The girls moved around the stage while Gus worked with the lights, -changing filters and spots until Chuck was satisfied. It was a -wonderful, eerie set, Peggy thought. Gus had stenciled a wallpaper -design on the flats, and with the couch that Mr. Bladen had lent them, -and the other Victorian pieces and bric-a-brac, the room had a heavy, -mysterious quality. The atmosphere affected Peggy strongly. She felt as -if some dire event was going to take place. She walked down to the -auditorium to look at the stage. - -“Now try the bracket circuit,” Chuck called. “Let me see how they dim. -Where’s Mr. Miller? Get him and take that bit in Act Two, Alison, where -the lights go down.” - -Already nine o’clock, and dress rehearsal hadn’t even started yet. It -would go on until the early hours of the morning, Peggy knew. Missing -props would be found and put in place, movements changed, and -last-minute touches made to the set. Peggy settled down, curling up as -comfortably as she could on the hard seat, as she waited for rehearsal -to begin. - -Chris Hill walked out on stage, his appearance completely transformed -with the mustache, small beard, and sideburns that he used for Mr. -Manningham. Even his attitude was different, Peggy noticed. He seemed a -lot older and his voice was deep and serious as he checked his make-up -with Chuck. - -Finally, at nine-thirty, they were ready. The curtains were drawn, -Alison settled herself in her chair, Chris stretched out on the couch, -and Peggy took her place in the wings. Even a dress rehearsal, she -thought, as she mentally prepared for her entrance, had a feeling of -excitement and pressure. Well, this was their one chance to feel the -play as it would be on opening night—to rehearse with continuity. - -“I’m not going to stop you,” Chuck called. “I’ll be taking notes and -we’ll iron out the flaws later. Ready, Danny?” - -“All set,” Danny affirmed, his hands on the curtain. - -“All right then; make it a performance, everyone.” - -The first half of Act One went well. Peggy had a very small part and was -able to watch almost continuously from the wings. Chris was really -sinister, she thought, shivering as she observed his scene with Alison. -And Alison was wonderful. She was a little young to play Mrs. Manningham -but her own personality had disappeared in the part, and she was -completely believable. - -“How I would love to play that part someday!” Peggy dreamed. “Or -something like it. I wish I had just one dramatic part to do this -summer!” She sighed as she thought of the season ahead—one comedy part -after another. - -Chris made his exit with a slam of the door, and Rita, as the -housekeeper, came on to announce the arrival of Sergeant Rough. Peggy -drew up a box near Gus at the switchboard, and leaned forward excitedly -to watch. With his old-fashioned cape-coat and painstaking make-up, -Howard Miller was the very picture of a Scotland Yard Inspector. Peggy -tensed as the suspense mounted; even Gus at the lights was so engrossed -in the play that he almost forgot to dim the lights at the right time. - -“Gus,” Peggy whispered, “the lights! Gus, isn’t that your cue?” - -He started, quickly dimmed the lights, and then shook his head -sheepishly. “Thanks, Peggy!” - -“I’m afraid you are married to a tolerably dangerous gentleman,” -Sergeant Rough said to Mrs. Manningham, and as she stood there, slowly -realizing his meaning, the curtain closed on Act One. - -“House lights,” Chuck called. “Open the curtain, Danny, and everybody on -stage.” - -Surprised, the cast gathered on the set. - -“I thought we were doing a straight run-through” Alison complained -crossly. “I need it, Chuck, to get a feeling of the continuity!” - -“I know, Alison,” Chuck said, “I’m sorry. But something’s come up that -you’ll all know about tomorrow, and it might ruin opening night. I’d -rather tell you now so you can work it out during rehearsal. Better a -bad dress rehearsal than a dreary opening.” - -“What now?” Peggy wondered. She had never seen Chuck so depressed or -listless. All his energy seemed to have left him as he walked forward -and looked up at everybody. - -“You’re all wonderful,” he said slowly, “and you’re doing a job that’s -worthy of Broadway—honestly, you are.” He watched Alison closely as he -spoke, letting the words sink in. “Now, I don’t want this to throw you. -Just hear it quietly, and then we’ll finish rehearsal. Aunt Hetty -dropped in a minute ago—she’d been in town and happened to drive past -the movie house. She saw the advertisement for the new bill which opens -tomorrow night.” - -“Oh, no!” Chris broke in with instant comprehension. - -“I’m afraid so, Chris,” Chuck said quietly. “They are showing the movie -of _Angel Street_ this week. Under another title, of course, but -everybody knows it’s the same play. The story’s too famous. Slade is -counting on the stars of the film to draw audiences away from our -production.” Chuck tried to think of something else to say, but it was -no good. Everyone recognized the seriousness of this move, and what it -could mean. “I—I’m sorry.” Chuck concluded lamely. - -Alison was standing stiffly, her hands clenched and her mouth tight as -she tried to control her tears. But then she broke. “I told you it -wasn’t worth the effort,” she sobbed. “I’m not going to ruin my health -and nerves doing this part and then have nobody in the audience! They -can all go to the movies as far as I’m concerned! This whole theater has -been a fiasco from the beginning, and the sooner we close the better. -You can give the part to somebody else—I’m through!” She ran off the -stage and to the dressing room as the rest of the cast looked after her -unhappily. - -Rita started to follow her, but Chuck shook his head. “Let her go,” he -said. “She doesn’t really mean it, and she might as well get it out of -her system. The part is a terrific strain, and I’m not surprised at her -reaction!” - -Peggy dropped onto the couch beside Howard Miller, who was sitting there -twirling his hat thoughtfully. “I had a feeling something was going to -happen,” Peggy said sadly, “but I never dreamed it would be this. Guess -I really was all wrong about Bill Slade. If he didn’t make an effort to -stop his brother this time, I guess he never will. Maybe he’s just as -opposed to the theater as Max.” - -“I don’t know, Peggy,” Mr. Miller replied, “I’m beginning to wonder if -we shouldn’t have had someone go to see him as you suggested. Perhaps -any try would have been better than none at all. This move of theirs may -ruin the theater for good. We can’t possibly stay open if business drops -off any more.” He frowned. “The Chamber of Commerce will never want to -hear of a summer theater again, and we can’t afford the loss of money -either.” - -“Do you think it’s too late?” Peggy questioned intently. “Too late to -see Bill Slade?” - -“I’m afraid so,” he said. “I’ve already spoken to Max. Aunt Hetty is so -furious that she won’t talk to either one of them, and they won’t speak -to Richard or Chuck.” He smiled ruefully. “Impasse. Like nations trying -to get together without a common language.” - -Peggy was silent, remembering that Bill Slade had seemed to speak her -language. Could she have been so very wrong about that, after all? Why -couldn’t she see him herself? Why did it have to be one of the directors -of the theater or of the Chamber of Commerce? If the Slades were too -stubborn or unreasonable to talk with “authority,” maybe they—or at -least Bill—would be freer with her. She laughed softly to herself, -thinking of the Hatfields and McCoys. This feud was every bit as -unreasonable and silly—and in the stories, it was always the younger -generation that somehow managed to work things out! Feeling a little -like a heroine in a legend, Peggy decided to try. - -But how? All through the rest of the rehearsal—with Alison back and -working just as Chuck had predicted—Peggy thought about it. She couldn’t -call and ask for an appointment. It had to be subtler than that. She -would have to arrange something that seemed quite accidental. Yes, a -chance meeting with Bill Slade! But how? - - - - - VIII - An Explanation - - -“Chuck, are you up yet?” Peggy knocked cautiously on the door of his -combination office-living quarters on the lower floor of the annex. It -was eleven o’clock and the tired company hadn’t turned in until -three-thirty in the morning. - -“Come in, Peggy.” Chuck opened the door and motioned her in. His desk -was covered with work, and crumpled wads of paper littered the floor. -“Been up for hours,” he said. “I was just going over the budget.” His -eyes were hollow and ringed from lack of sleep. “The answer is, _what_ -budget?” He tore up the piece of paper he was holding and dropped it in -the waste-basket. “It doesn’t look good, Peggy.” - -“Oh, Chuck, I’m sorry!” Peggy felt dreadful, realizing the enormous -amount of work that he had put into the theater, and the possible -futility of it all. But she couldn’t reveal her plan, much as she would -like to, even to offer him some hope. It might not work out after all, -and Chuck was so depressed that he would probably try to dissuade her -from seeing Bill Slade. She had determined to try, at any cost, and she -must do it very quietly and all alone. - -“Could I possibly be excused from the reading today?” Peggy asked. -“There are so many things I need from town, and I haven’t had a chance -yet to catch up on shopping—” - -“Go ahead,” Chuck answered dully. “There isn’t going to be a reading, -anyway. I don’t know if we’ll even be open after this week, so I’m not -going to work you any harder than I have to. Today everyone gets a rest; -tomorrow we’ll begin again.” - -“Thank you,” Peggy said, wishing she could wave a magic wand and set -everything right. “Is there anything I can get for you while I’m in -town?” - -“No, thanks, Peggy. By the way, we will have a line rehearsal before the -show tonight. Five o’clock here.” - -Five o’clock. Peggy calculated. Yes, that would work out. She could be -about her business and get back in plenty of time. She left quietly, -hoping that nobody noticed her as she walked up the little path around -the side of the inn and down the hill to the highway. - -The weather was changing, Peggy noticed, as she walked along. When she -had arrived a hint of spring had still been in the air, but now it was -hot and beginning to feel like real summer. Wouldn’t it be fun to enjoy -some of the pleasures of the resort, she thought, looking at the -beautiful blue of the lake dotted with sails and speedboats. Michael had -promised to take her out in his boat someday. Someday! Everyone had been -so busy that even Michael hadn’t had an opportunity to be out on the -water that he so dearly loved. - -“When we get settled into a routine,” the company had dreamed -optimistically. “In a few weeks, after things are going smoothly, well, -then we’ll have time to swim once in a while and go boating!” - -Peggy sighed, taking off the little jacket that topped her gaily -flowered summer dress. It could still work out, she thought, things -could run smoothly if everyone knew that the theater would stay open. -This uncertainty, though, was terrible for everyone’s morale and left no -time for play. Actors needed relaxation, too, she mused. The theater was -fun, but it was hard work as well. - -“And today I’m free for a while!” She smiled with a sudden sharp -enjoyment at being outdoors and away from the theater. - -As Peggy passed the offices of the _Kenabeek Gazette_, she paused for a -moment. She needed a newspaper and wondered if she should go in. But no, -she decided, somebody might recognize her, so she hastened on and walked -into the drugstore. There were several copies of the paper left and -Peggy bought one along with some cosmetics she needed. Outside again, -she flipped through the paper, seeking the information she wanted. There -it was—the first showing of the movie today would be at noon. She had -just enough time. Hurriedly, she walked on, nodding back at several -people who smiled at her, apparently part of their grateful, if small, -audience. - -“Oh, Miss Lane—” A middle-aged woman, smartly attired in sports clothes, -stopped her on the sidewalk. “I just want to tell you how much my -husband and I enjoyed you in _Dear Ruth_. We saw it on Broadway years -ago and I must say we were surprised at the professional excellence of -your cast. Tell me, who did that lovely set?” - -“Oh, thank you.” Peggy smiled. “Our set designer is Gus Stevens. He’s -the husband of the girl you saw playing the part of the mother. And she -was awfully good, wasn’t she?” - -“Wonderful,” the woman agreed warmly. “Just wonderful. You know, we’ve -been coming up here to Lake Kenabeek for years—our son goes to a camp -nearby. This is the first summer that we’ve had any real entertainment! -You tell your director that we wish him a lot of luck—and the whole -cast. We hope you’ll be here every year from now on!” - -Peggy left her thoughtfully, realizing that if the theater should have -to close, it would affect more than just the company and the Chamber of -Commerce. People here really wanted entertainment. Surely there was room -for a summer theater and the movies to exist side by side! - -She bought her ticket for the film, hoping that the woman in the booth -didn’t recognize her. Probably not, Peggy thought. It might be a sin for -anyone employed at the movies to go to the Summer Theater! She shook her -head impatiently and went into the dark interior. Now that she was here, -Peggy wondered if her plan had been so ingenious after all. Perhaps Bill -Slade wouldn’t even be here today. Perhaps instead of finding him, she -would run smack into his brother Max! And that was a prospect she didn’t -particularly want to face. - -Peggy took a seat in the first row at the side of the balcony. Here she -was close enough to the mezzanine to get up frequently and look around -the lounge where a sign on a door announced, Office of the Manager. -Looking at it doubtfully as she left her seat for what must have been -the tenth time, Peggy wondered if anyone was inside. She might have to -stay here all day, seeing the film several times as she waited for -someone to emerge. Two ushers walked by and Peggy heard one of the girls -say, “No, Mr. Slade isn’t here yet. He said he’d be in around -five-thirty. But you’re off duty then, aren’t you?” They went on, -leaving Peggy feeling that her brilliant idea hadn’t been so brilliant -after all! She was just about to go back and watch the end of the movie, -when the door opened and Bill Slade walked out! - -Peggy was in luck! It must be Max who was expected later on. - -Bill Slade saw her standing there, and an incredulous expression -suffused his face. “Why—why, it’s you!” he blurted, in utter -astonishment. - -“Oh, Mr. Slade! How nice to run into you again!” Peggy’s acting -experience came in handy right now. She hoped she seemed genuinely -surprised. - -“And you know my name now, it seems,” he said, reddening slightly as he -came over to her. “I’m sorry about that. I didn’t dare introduce myself -that day, not knowing how you’d feel about it.” - -Something tugged at Peggy’s heart. She felt she had never met anyone so -basically nice or so unhappy with a situation. - -“What on earth are you doing here?” he asked, frowning a little as if he -had only just realized where they were. - -Peggy had planned the answer. “Why, I was having a little difficulty -with my part this week,” she said easily, “and I thought I’d take a look -at the movie to see how it was done.” From the balcony, the sound of the -closing music of the film swelled around them, followed by the martial -strains of music for the news-reel. - -“You missed the end,” Bill Slade observed, looking at her closely. - -“Oh, that doesn’t matter.” Peggy was slightly flustered. “I’m not in the -end, anyway. I’m just playing the maid.” She hoped it sounded logical. - -Bill laughed. “No wonder you were having trouble,” he said. “That’s -miscasting if I ever heard of it!” - -“Oh, no, it isn’t.” Peggy smiled back. “You just come to see the play -and you’ll see what a good character actress I can be!” - -Again she noticed that sad expression come into his eyes, but then he -brightened and said, “Miss Peggy Lane, why don’t we do something utterly -insane and go out for some lemonade or something together? Do you have -time?” - -Peggy glowed. This invitation was exactly what she had hoped for! “I’d -love to,” she agreed happily. - -Bill Slade walked with her back to the drugstore and they took one of -the little booths in the rear, well away from curious eyes. In the -middle of the afternoon there were few people in the store, and they -could speak freely without being overheard. - -“I wish you would come up to the theater just once,” Peggy implored. “I -think you’d enjoy seeing a play for a change.” - -“I know I would,” Bill said slowly. “I love the theater, Miss Lane—” - -“Peggy, please!” she twinkled. - -“Peggy!” he agreed. “All right. But we might as well not beat about the -bush. You know how my brother feels about the theater! I’ve talked to -him, Peggy, believe it or not.” He looked at her pleadingly, and she -wondered how an attractive, intelligent young man like this could bear -to remain so entirely under his brother’s influence. Bill Slade looked -as though he should have a more independent role. - -“But what does your brother have to do with it?” Peggy asked, hoping to -jolt him a little. “Surely, if you would like to be on our side—and I -gathered from the way you spoke that day that you would—?” - -Bill answered her implied question with an emphatic nod. - -“Well, then,” Peggy urged, “why not take a stand? Come up to the theater -and let your brother know exactly how you feel.” - -“He does know,” Bill said softly. - -“I don’t see why we have to be in competition,” Peggy went on earnestly. -“Don’t you think the two forms of entertainment could complement each -other? For instance, we’re doing a melodrama this week, and if instead -of choosing the same story, you had run a comedy film, both our -businesses would have benefited. Or don’t you agree?” - -She looked at him anxiously over her glass of lemonade, her large eyes -serious and her pretty dress making a splash of color against the dull -gray of the seat. Bill Slade smiled, saying, “You make an incongruous -picture, Peggy! You’re much too young and pretty to be carrying the -weight of rival businesses on your shoulders. Tell me—” he leaned -forward intently—“did anyone ask you to come and see me about this? I -can’t quite believe your story about the movie!” - -Peggy decided to be completely honest with him. “No, no one asked me to -come—but I did hope to see you. I came with that intention. I thought -perhaps if we talked together, you might see our point of view and -persuade your brother to put an end to this silly feud!” - -“I have tried to persuade him, Peggy,” Bill said uneasily. “I’ve argued -about it from the beginning. Then when he decided to run this particular -movie this week—well, it was almost the last straw!” - -“Well, then,” Peggy cried, “why not let it _be_ the last straw? Why -don’t _you_ choose a picture for once instead of your brother? He -doesn’t have everything to say about your business, does he?” - -Bill looked at her unhappily. “There’s a lot you don’t know, Peggy,” he -said. “We are partners, yes, but partners in name only. You see, when we -bought that theater, Max was the one who put up the money. He was older, -and had been in a very successful public relations business in New York. -His dream had always been to come back here to live, with a business of -his own. I had just come out of the Army and didn’t have any money to -invest.” - -“And your brother bought the theater all on his own?” Peggy asked. “My! -He must have saved a lot!” - -“No, not entirely on his own,” Bill said. “I don’t know why I’m telling -you all this, Peggy—” he smiled as her wistfully—“I guess it’s because I -want you to like me, and I want to clear myself. But please promise me -that anything I say will be a confidential matter between us.” - -“Of course,” Peggy agreed warmly. She was glad to know that Bill Slade -trusted her, and thought that it was probably a very good thing for him -to talk to somebody. She had an impression that he was very lonely. - -“Max couldn’t have done it all on his own,” Bill confided. “He had -another investor—a silent partner whom almost nobody knows about. Not -that there’s anything wrong about it, but—” - -“Ford Birmingham!” Peggy guessed excitedly as the pieces began to fall -into place. - -“That’s right. Ford put up the rest of the money. He keeps his -partnership silent because of his job on the paper. He loves the -newspaper business and writing, and manages to carry both jobs very -well. However, if people knew he was a partner, they might think his -movie reviews were prejudiced!” Bill laughed. “They’re not, of course. -Ford is a painfully honest critic!” - -“And he goes right along with your brother’s attitude about us?” Peggy -asked incredulously. - -“Well, you see, I’m afraid that Max has said some pretty awful things -about your theater to Ford.” Bill seemed almost ashamed. “Not about the -people personally,” he added hastily, “but professionally. Max honestly -thinks you’re all amateurs and he’s persuaded Ford of that.” He shook -his head ruefully. “And Max resents a little company of newcomers coming -into the town and possibly drawing away his business. He—he’s not a very -happy man, Peggy, and he is my brother. I have to understand how he -feels.” - -“Of course,” Peggy said sympathetically. “I know some people like that -in my home town. They’re terrified of anything new and become completely -unreasonable about it.” - -Bill nodded. “If Max would just let me choose some of the films, as you -said, I think our own business would pick up. It’s been terrible lately, -but I know why. It isn’t the Summer Theater, as Max thinks. It’s his -choice of old, dull movies that nobody wants to see. This is the first -good one we’ve shown in a long time!” He sighed ironically. “And it took -your theater to make him choose it—for all the wrong reasons!” - -They were silent, each thinking of the seemingly impossible situation. -Now that she saw the design more clearly, Peggy couldn’t think of a way -out. Apparently, neither could Bill. He frowned and shook his head -again. “I’m sorry, Peggy, but there just doesn’t seem to be anything I -can do. I wish I could. Believe me, I wish I could!” - -Peggy walked back to the annex for the line rehearsal, feeling -disconsolate and subdued. It was really almost hopeless, she thought, -mulling over all the problems. Without any real authority in the -business, Bill couldn’t be of much help. But she had been right about -one thing. Bill Slade was certainly not the weak, spineless creature -that people imagined! He had good reason for his actions, and actually, -it was wonderfully loyal and brave of him to stick by his brother in the -face of a lot of criticism. Peggy didn’t doubt that more persons than -those concerned with the Summer Theater regarded Bill as his brother’s -younger shadow—possibly even Ford Birmingham! - -Peggy thought of the little paragraph Mr. Birmingham had written on -_Dear Ruth_ toward the end of the week—just as Chuck had predicted. -Chris had been right, too. It had said almost less than nothing—a mere -notice, in fact! Well, it was all a shame, Peggy thought sadly, a -terrible and unnecessary shame! - - - - - IX - A Lifeline - - -_Angel Street_ opened to a house of twelve persons! - -Fortunately, Alison was so engrossed in her work that she was not aware -of the ridiculously small audience until curtain calls, when they showed -their intense appreciation of the play by standing while they applauded -and shouted, “Bravo!” It was indicative of the fine performances the -actors had given and a deliberate gesture of support. Almost everyone in -the audience came backstage after the show, congratulating the company -and telling Alison and Howard Miller in particular how wonderful they -had been. Aunt Hetty was singularly impressed. “I knew you were a good -actress, Alison,” she complimented her, “but I really had no idea you -could do a demanding, difficult part like this so well!” - -Overhearing, Peggy couldn’t help wishing again that she could have a -chance to sink her teeth into a dramatic part, too. Not that she was at -all envious of Alison—or was she, Peggy wondered? No, she didn’t think -so. It was just that seeing someone else in a serious role opened up a -part of Peggy that hadn’t been tapped this summer and wished to be used. - -There was something else to it, too, Peggy thought, smiling secretly. -Something that almost nobody outside of the theater knew. And it wasn’t -such a bad idea to keep audiences in ignorance about it—otherwise their -enjoyment might be lessened. The secret was that in many ways it was -really easier to play a dramatic part than a comedy role. Comedy was the -hardest thing of all. - -Peggy suddenly saw Mr. Bladen, who was popping about on stage like a -sprightly old bird, nodding with satisfaction at the set. The friendly -woman Peggy had met on the street that morning had come with her -husband, and they were speaking with Richard Wallace. She noticed Peggy -and smiled, beckoning her to come and join their group. - -“I’d like you to meet Mr. and Mrs. Cook, Peggy,” Richard said. “They’re -interested in our theater and in some of the furniture we’re using this -week.” - -“Oh,” Peggy exclaimed. “Well, I met part of the family this morning.” -She smiled at Mrs. Cook. “And if you’re interested in the pieces on -stage, you might speak to Mr. Bladen. He’s here somewhere—” - -“I noticed in the program that he loaned the couch,” Mr. Cook said. “We -think it’s such a beautiful piece that we’d be very interested in buying -it.” - -“Well, wait a minute, and I’ll find him for you.” Peggy beamed and -hurried away. Wouldn’t it be wonderful if the theater could be of -assistance to Mr. Bladen, too! She found him behind a flat, looking -curiously at a prop table and, pinned above it, the list of scenes in -which the things were used. - -“Neat. Very neat,” Mr. Bladen said. “Haven’t been backstage since I was -a boy. It smells wonderful!” - -Peggy laughed. She knew exactly what he meant. There was a very special -aroma about backstage. It had a hint of glue, paint, make-up, and even -the peculiar, musty odor of ropes and pulleys. - -“I think you’ve sold your chaise longue,” Peggy told him happily. “That -is, if you’re interested in selling it!” She brought him back to meet -the Cooks, and soon all were engrossed in a discussion of antiques. -Peggy saw that it might indeed be a fruitful night for Mr. Bladen. When -the boys returned the props and furniture after _Angel Street_ was over, -maybe they would be willing to clean up Mr. Bladen’s shop a bit. It was -little enough to do in return for the things he had lent them. Peggy -made a mental note to remind Michael and his friends. - -The audiences for the rest of the week were uniformly small. Either -people were going to the movie instead of the play, as Max Slade had -hoped, or his comments about the company were having their effect. The -absence of anything in the paper except their own advertisements was -keeping people away, too. If only Ford Birmingham would break down and -come to the theater, Peggy thought! - -The company began rehearsals for the next play, _Charley’s Aunt_, not -knowing if they would even have an opportunity to play it! Rehearsals -had never gone so badly. All the fire had left Chuck’s direction, and -the cast responded just as dully. Toward the middle of the week, Richard -and Chuck called everyone together and announced that the theater would -definitely have to close unless everyone took a cut in salary. If the -actors were willing to do this and work just for expenses, they might be -able to pull through another week. - -Rita and Gus looked at each other gloomily. Peggy knew that they had -counted on saving something this summer to take a long-dreamed-of -vacation. In the four years they’d been married, they had never had a -honeymoon! Still, Rita and Gus were the first to say they’d be glad to -forego their salaries. - -Rita even laughed about it. “It’s fate, that’s all. We might have known -it! And if we did leave now, we’d only have to go back unemployed to New -York. It’s too late to get other jobs this summer. Might as well stay -here another week and enjoy the scenery!” - -Everyone else felt the same way. There was little point in not making -one last effort, even though they knew the theater couldn’t last long. - -“Maybe I can talk the manager of Kenabeek Inn into letting us stay for a -few days after we close,” Chuck added glumly. “Then you could all at -least have a little leisure and swimming after your work!” - -“Do you remember when we had all that space in the paper after the -commissioner of education made his decision about the theater?” Chris -Hill asked. “It probably accounted for the good house we had opening -night of _Dear Ruth_. Couldn’t we somehow find something else that would -bring us space in the paper—maybe to be mentioned in some of the social -columns—anything, as long as they write about us!” - -“I’ve tried,” Richard said. “I’ve been to see everyone on that paper who -could do us the slightest bit of good, and Aunt Hetty has used her -influence, too. We do get things in. But the social columns aren’t the -answer, Chris, as long as people regard us as amateurs. They don’t want -to spend money on anything that isn’t professional! That’s why we only -get the same small audience over and over again. Even people who bought -season tickets before we opened aren’t using them! They’re beginning to -regard their investment as some kind of charity to help the town! No, -Chris, I’m afraid we’re licked.” - -And for the first time, Peggy thought so, too. Until now she always had -felt a stirring of hope, an optimistic sense that the theater would pull -through somehow. But now everything looked too bleak. It would be -unrealistic to hope for a miracle at this point. - -Peggy began to visualize the letters she would shortly have to write -home: “Sorry, we folded! How would you like a visitor for a while?” If, -she thought dismally, she could even manage a ticket home now with the -cut in salary. It would be too defeating to ask her parents for that. -Maybe she wouldn’t be able to go home after all! - -On the last night of _Angel Street_ a pall hung over the entire theater. -It was so thick the company could almost taste it. All the magic had -deserted the dressing rooms and the stage, and Peggy realized anew how -much the theater was a two-way romance. Plays needed an audience. One -couldn’t work to a vacuum. Still, there was a job to be done, and -although the actors had long since lost their excitement, they began the -play with a determination to do the best possible job, and with that -inexplicable feeling of loss that always occurred on the last night of a -show. It was sad, saying good-by to a part and a story. _Angel Street_ -wouldn’t live again until some other company somewhere took it and -molded it into being. - -The curtain fell to loud but scattered applause, and the actors, too -enervated to rush to their dressing rooms tonight, stood about on stage -longer than usual. Peggy was talking to Rita about _Charley’s Aunt_, -when a movement in the wings caught her eye, and she turned to see a -sight so astonishing that she literally dropped onto Mr. Bladen’s couch. - -Bill Slade, accompanied by two other men, was walking onto the stage and -heading straight for Chuck Crosby with a purposeful air and a broad -smile. - -Peggy gasped, unwilling to trust her eyes! The men were all talking to -Chuck now, and he seemed as flabbergasted as Peggy. - -Rita pulled on her sleeve, “Who are they, Peggy? What’s it all about?” - -“That’s Bill Slade, one of them,” Peggy said. “I don’t know who the -others are.” - -“Bill Slade!” Rita exclaimed in disbelief. “Well, for heaven’s sake!” - -Suddenly the little group laughed, and Bill turned to smile at Peggy. “I -took your advice, you see,” he said, coming over to her. “I know I’m a -little late getting here, but I wanted to bring someone with me. Peggy, -this is Ford Birmingham!” - -Ford Birmingham! Everyone heard the name and stared openly. Mr. -Birmingham was an interesting, distinguished-looking man, younger than -Peggy had imagined, with streaks of premature gray in his hair. As he -spoke to her, Peggy felt a quality of integrity in everything he said. - -“I’m so sorry that I didn’t come on my own initiative sooner. I feel -that I owe you all an apology—particularly in view of the superb play I -saw tonight! I’m afraid I misjudged you. I had no idea it would be like -this.” - -He was kind enough to see each member of the company personally and -offer his apologies. Peggy was struck by the graciousness of the -gesture. It couldn’t be easy for him. - -“So that is Ford Birmingham!” she exclaimed to Bill. “He’s so—so -entirely different from my picture of him!” - -“Thought you’d like him.” Bill smiled. “And I think there’s another -surprise for the cast, Peggy!” He indicated the other member of the -trio, who was still deep in conversation with Chuck. - -“Who is he?” Peggy asked curiously. But before Bill could answer, Chuck, -grinning from ear to ear, asked the cast to gather around. - -“Someone here has a proposition for us,” Chuck said, introducing Mr. -Eugene Vincent, the entertainment director for Lake Manor, a huge resort -hotel three miles down the highway. - -“If you people would be interested,” Mr. Vincent said, his plump face -wreathed with good humor, “I’d like to have you play one night a week -down at the Manor! It would be a wonderful addition to our program, and -you wouldn’t have to worry about a thing. We’d do our own sets for your -plays, take care of moving your props, and transport you back and forth. -All you have to do is act!” He beamed at them. “How does that sound to -you?” - -“It might mean that we’d be able to continue our season,” Chuck broke in -anxiously. “I’m not sure yet, but the additional money might carry us -through—” - -“And there’s one other inducement,” Mr. Vincent added. “You’d come early -for dinner on performance days, and have the recreation facilities -available for your use at any time. Swimming, Ping-pong, volleyball....” -He raised his eyebrows and peered at them like a genie offering infinite -temptations. - -They couldn’t believe their ears. After a stunned silence, Chris Hill -was the first to give a mighty whoop. “Mr. Vincent,” he exclaimed, -pumping his hand furiously, “I have always believed in Santa Claus, and -now that you have come along, I _know_ it’s true!” He turned to the -company. “What about the rest of you? Don’t you believe in miracles?” - -“You mean it’s true,” Danny said, with a perfectly blank expression. -Then as it sank in he grinned, and grabbing Peggy, began to waltz about -on stage. - -“It’s true,” he sang, “it’s terrific, it’s fantastic, it’s the most -amazing ever!” - -The cast merrily congratulated one another, showering Mr. Vincent with -handshakes and praise, and finally dragging him and even Ford Birmingham -into an impromptu conga line about the stage. Gus turned on the music -and it wasn’t long before a real party developed. Michael Miller went -out to bring back sandwiches and soft drinks, and the set of _Angel -Street_ changed, miraculously, from a gloomy room to one of brightness -and gaiety. - -“How did it all happen?” Peggy asked Bill Slade breathlessly during a -lull in the dancing. - -“Simple,” he answered, smiling. “It occurred to me after our talk that -there was one effort I could make in your behalf. I had never spoken -seriously to Ford about the theater. I took it for granted that he knew -how I felt, but then I remembered that I’d never actually told him so. -He’d only heard Max’s side of the story. So”—he grinned at her—“after I -saw you that day, I went to see Ford. It took all week to persuade him -to come up here, but I finally managed.” - -“But what did you say to him?” Peggy questioned, her eyes alight with -interest. “It must have been good!” - -“I appealed to his sense of honor,” Bill said. “Since we’re all in the -same business, I felt he should make an effort to understand your side -of the question, too. And after enough insistence that you were really -professional, and that he ought to check that for himself, well—he -agreed. You know,” Bill added rather sheepishly, “I was terribly -impressed. I really didn’t think the play would be as good as it was. -Will you forgive me?” - -Peggy laughed delightedly, “Oh, Bill! Of course!” - -“I think Ford will give you a terrific review,” Bill said. - -“And what about Mr. Vincent?” Peggy asked, “Was that your doing, too?” - -“No.” Bill shook his head shyly. “Just a coincidence, Peggy. Ford was -having dinner with him—” - -“And you persuaded both of them to come!” Peggy cried. “Now don’t deny -it, Bill Slade, I know you did!” - -“Well,” he admitted reluctantly, “I just said that it might be -interesting.” - -“Oh, Bill, how will we ever be able to thank you!” Peggy’s face was -flushed with gratitude. “And I’ll bet Chuck and Richard don’t know a -thing about this—” She got up with every intention of telling them, but -Bill put out his hand to stop her. - -“No, please don’t, Peggy,” he pleaded. “They think we came out of simple -curiosity and were pleasantly surprised. If the real story should get -back to Max, it might hurt him dreadfully. I’d rather keep the whole -thing as quiet as possible.” - -“Of course,” Peggy agreed, sitting down again. “I hadn’t thought of -that. Bill, what are you going to do about your brother? I’m sure he -thought the theater would close, and he’ll be furious at this new -development.” - -“Well,” Bill said slowly, “he’s bound to know I had something to do with -it, but he doesn’t have to know how much—until I prove to him that your -theater isn’t the problem! I’ve already talked with Ford and together -we’re going to try to improve our choice of films. Ford’s on my side -about that.” He smiled ruefully. “If I’d only spoken to him before, -Peggy! I guess it took a nudge from you to open my eyes!” - -“Say! When’s this set coming down?” Gus Stevens asked everyone. “Do you -people know what time it is?” - -And it was late—so late that no one could think of leaving Gus and the -boys to work all alone. Everyone, including Ford Birmingham and Mr. -Vincent, pitched in to help. The wonderful night ended as the last flat -was stacked away and Mr. Vincent, dusting himself off, waved good-by -with the cheery promise, “Be seeing you next week at the Manor!” - -Bill said good-by to Peggy, holding her hand for a moment as he reminded -her, “Don’t forget, Peggy, if you’re grateful to me, that I have a lot -to thank you for, too. A lot!” - -“Well,” Chris observed as he watched Bill drive away with his friends, -“I think there’s more to this than meets the eye! You two seem to know -each other very well!” He looked at Peggy curiously as they started the -walk back to the annex together under a bright night sky so clear that -it looked like a canopy of diamonds. - -“Oh, well, you heard the story of my meeting Bill Slade when I went to -Mr. Bladen’s that day,” Peggy reminded him, hoping that it would satisfy -Chris. She didn’t want anyone to know of their further talk. - -“And you two became such fast friends in all of about five minutes?” -Chris raised his eyebrows. “Oh, now, Peggy! I watched you together -tonight and I still say—there’s more to this than meets the eye!” - -“Well”—Peggy was glad of the night that effectively covered her -blush—“he’s really nice, Chris.” She wasn’t very good at evasion and -wished that she could tell the whole story, but for Bill’s sake she -mustn’t. - -“I see,” Chris said softly. “Yes, he is a pleasant fellow, Peggy, but -you know there are other people around, too. I hope you won’t forget -that when you’re thinking of Mr. Slade.” - -“What does he mean?” Peggy wondered in silence all the way home. Could -Chris possibly be putting a different interpretation on her friendship -with Bill Slade? “Oh dear,” Peggy thought, “I may have helped untangle -the theater, but I’ve certainly tangled up my personal affairs!” She -sighed, remembering a little nervously that tomorrow _For Love or Money_ -would go into rehearsal and she would be playing a romantic lead -opposite Chris Hill! - - - - - X - Friends—New and Old - - -“‘Last night a group of professional actors, backed by years of -experience on Broadway, television, and radio, presented a stunning -performance of _Angel Street_ to an audience of fewer than twenty -persons. It is this reviewer’s duty to apologize publicly for having -neglected the Kenabeek Summer Theater. Until now he has not had the -pleasure of viewing one of its productions. It is his loss. And he would -like to say that the Summer Theater is one of the finest additions to -our town in many years. It deserves all the support our local residents -and out-of-towners can give it.’ - -“Oh, just listen to that!” Peggy interrupted herself and squealed with -delight as she read Ford Birmingham’s review in the _Gazette_ to Rita, -Alison, and Chris. They were having dinner together before the opening -of _Charley’s Aunt_. Ford Birmingham had timed the appearance of the -review to coincide with the opening of the new play, and tomorrow there -would be yet another review in the _Gazette_. - -“Go on,” Alison urged. - -“‘_Angel Street_ was so electrifying,’” Peggy continued, “‘that despite -the small house, your reviewer was sitting—literally—on the edge of his -hard seat in our high school auditorium. (That he was unaware of his -discomfort is another indication of the quality of the performance.) Do -not make the mistake of assuming that a production given in the high -school is an amateurish effort. The set was excellently executed by Gus -Stevens, a young man, who, we suspect, will shortly be designing for -Broadway. - -“‘Alison Lord, as Mrs. Manningham, gave a controlled, vibrant -performance that was a delight to watch. As that colorful inspector, -Sergeant Bough, our own Howard Miller was simply superb.’” As Peggy read -on, the wonderful words of praise made everyone glow with a feeling of -success and satisfaction. - -“‘Peggy Lane, in the small role of the maid Nancy, was pert and -charming, leaving us with the notion that we’d like to see her do -something else—’” - -“Well, they will,” Chris interrupted, giving Peggy a wink. “Next week, -Peggy the Star!” - -“Oh, Chris,” Peggy laughed. “I’m not really the star—it’s you—and -Alison, too.” - -“Leave me out,” Alison said mockingly. “I had my big chance and no -audience. It’s your turn next, Peggy, and it looks as if you’ll be -luckier.” There was a hint of envy in Alison’s tone that surprised -Peggy. Only last week she had been complaining about having two big -leads in a row. Peggy had thought Alison was looking forward to the -smaller but very good part she had in _For Love or Money_. - -“Doesn’t he say anything about me?” Chris asked. “Go on, Peggy, I can’t -believe he isn’t going to offer any criticism at all.” - -Peggy resumed reading: “‘Rita Stevens was excellent as the housekeeper; -so believable in fact, that one might tend to overlook a program note -which explains that she is much younger than she appeared.’ - -“Oh, and here you are, Chris,” Peggy said. “‘Chris Hill, a romantic -leading man if ever we saw one, made a valiant effort to create the -difficult, heavy role of Mr. Manningham. That he didn’t quite succeed is -no slur on his ability. He was very good indeed and there were moments -in the play when he was truly spine-chilling. We suspect, however, that -underneath those sideburns Mr. Hill is basically just too nice a fellow. -We’re looking forward to him in _Charley’s Aunt_ where, we understand, -he will be playing something closer to his type. This should be a real -treat for the young women of the area, and we assure you, if you’re -interested, that you needn’t look further for a living, breathing -matinee idol!’ - -“Oh, Chris!” Peggy whooped and burst out laughing. - -“Why, Christopher Barrymore Hill!” Alison giggled. “I had no idea you -were such a heart throb!” - -“Heavens! You won’t be able to walk down the street alone after that!” -Rita teased, as Chris got redder and redder and looked as if he would -like to vanish into the floor. - -“Oh, no,” he groaned. “And I was beginning to think that Ford Birmingham -was a pretty nice guy! Why did he have to do this to me?” - -“Because it’s wonderful publicity, that’s why!” Peggy cried. “Oh, Chris, -don’t you see? Look at everything he said—about the quality of the -actors, and then establishing you as a draw. Why,” she declared -brightly, “we’ll have everybody in town rushing up to see you! And -they’ll bring their friends. It’s a beautiful idea!” - -“Umphm,” Chris moaned dismally. “It’s a hideous idea! However, he was -right in his criticism. There were moments when I did feel distant from -the part.” - -“After this, you won’t even have to act any more.” Alison laughed. “Just -be yourself while everyone swoons!” - -“Oh, Alison, cut it out!” Chris pleaded, looking around as if a thousand -eyes were fastened on him. “I wish Birmingham had settled on you for a -drawing card instead.” - -“I wouldn’t mind,” Alison smiled, preening a little. “As a matter of -fact, I’d probably love it!” - -“I’ll bet you would,” Chris muttered, while Peggy frowned uneasily. The -conversation was taking an unpleasant turn, she thought, noticing the -look Alison gave Chris. - -“Well,” Peggy said cheerily, trying to change the subject, “who’s -looking forward to Monday besides me? Personally I can’t wait!” - -Monday was the day that Mr. Vincent had asked the company to give their -first performance at Lake Manor. It would be the last night of the play -each week, as Chuck and Richard had decided to move the opening up one -day to Wednesday instead of Thursday. This meant also that there would -be one day less than usual to get _For Love or Money_ into shape. - -Talking excitedly about the Manor, the group finished dinner in good -spirits and left the restaurant with Mrs. Brady’s wish for good luck -trailing after them. - -From the first night of _Charley’s Aunt_, Ford Birmingham’s review made -its effect felt. There was a difference in everyone’s attitude now that -the theater had gained status. Audiences improved nightly, and Richard -said that if things kept up like this, the theater might even be able to -recoup some of its losses. - -“And this is the way summer stock should be,” Peggy thought as she -greeted each day with the anticipation of a good rehearsal and a -satisfying show. Now she could concentrate more fully on her part in -_For Love of Money_. “A good thing, too, that I’m not worried about the -theater at a time like this,” she realized. For as the week wore on, -Peggy saw more and more that Alison had been right about the role of -Janet. It was a long, demanding lead, and Peggy worked furiously, -knowing that next week she would have to carry the show. - -She found it a strange sensation to work opposite Chris. He was so good -in his part and made it all seem so real that Peggy often caught herself -wondering if she were in a play or doing something right out of life. At -times she forgot herself completely. She was Janet Blake, a young girl -who was gradually growing deeply fond of Preston Mitchell. - -Alison was quite evidently annoyed at the developing friendship between -Chris and Peggy. “Don’t forget, dear, that you’re supposed to be playing -comedy,” she said to Peggy one day at rehearsal. “Sometimes I get a -feeling that you think you’re doing _Camille_.” - -Peggy was worried and hurt, wondering if Alison was right. “Do you think -I’m funny enough?” she asked Rita privately. “Alison is finding fault -with everything I do.” - -“Well, are you going to listen to her or to your director?” Rita -demanded. “Chuck seems satisfied with your work. Look, Peggy, Alison is -jealous because you’re playing opposite Chris. I wouldn’t pay any -attention to anything she says. My own private opinion is that you’re -more interested in Chris than you think—” - -“Rita!” Peggy blushed furiously. “Here we go again! It’s just that I -like Chris enormously and—well—it is exciting to work with him!” - -“I know!” Rita teased her. “It seems to me I told you something like -that ages ago! Don’t say I didn’t warn you, Peggy Lane! Before you know -it, you’ll have a dyed-in-the-wool crush on our new matinee idol!” Both -the girls laughed, remembering how uncomfortable Chris had been with the -role Ford Birmingham had assigned him. - -The week flew by and when Monday arrived, Peggy noticed an excitement -she hadn’t felt since the theater opened. Something new was in the air; -they were to face a fresh audience in unfamiliar surroundings. None of -the cast had seen the famous Lake Manor, and all were intensely curious -as they rode along in the station wagon the Manor had sent for them. - -“This is more like it!” Danny observed gleefully. “Our own private -chauffeur and dinner awaiting—I always did like to live in style!” - -“How could I have missed the Manor on the way up by the bus?” Peggy -wondered as they drove down the highway. “This is the way I came—” - -“Ah, yes, but you don’t see the Manor from the road,” Danny replied -poetically. “It is hidden, like all goodies, a surprise package lurking -in the midst of tall trees and sparkling waters. And as we leave the -highway,” he intoned in travelogue fashion, “we find ourselves driving -under an arch of fir trees, their graceful fronds meeting as they -embrace above the roadway—” - -“Oh, Danny,” Peggy giggled, “we can see it, too.” - -But he wasn’t to be deterred. “And around a winding road which curves -gracefully through acres—and acres—and acres—” - -The cast laughed and joined in the joking as they drove through the -spacious grounds that belonged to the Manor. - -“And finally,” Danny said as the Manor came into view, “as we reach our -destination—Oh, my gosh! It’s a palace!” he concluded abruptly, -forgetting his travelogue as the car stopped under the awning in front -of the entrance. - -“It really is a palace,” Peggy marveled as she stepped out of the car, -“or the next thing to it!” - -The main house of Lake Manor was a huge white building frosted with -turrets and bay windows and surrounded by cottages and a few other -sprawling buildings that appeared to be recreation halls. Peggy saw -stables, tennis courts, and a swimming pool off in the distance. -Ping-pong tables, croquet courts, and lawn chairs dotted the -velvet-green grass. - -“Oh, it’s absolutely beautiful!” Rita exclaimed. “I had no idea anything -like this existed here!” - -Just then Mr. Vincent appeared and, smiling broadly, took the cast on a -short tour of the Manor. - -“It’s early,” he said, showing them the stage in one of the recreation -halls where they would play, “and dinner won’t be served until six -o’clock. Come along and I’ll show you your dining room. We have several, -and I don’t want you to get lost! Then please do anything you’d like to -amuse yourselves. We want you to have a good time!” - -“How about some Ping-pong, Peggy?” Chris asked after Mr. Vincent had -left them. - -“I’d love it,” Peggy said, “but I wish we could look at the stage again -first—Mr. Vincent took us through so quickly.” - -“Don’t you ever think of anything besides the stage, Peggy?” Alison -asked waspishly. “Really, it gets a little boring after a while!” She -turned and left the group in a sudden huff. - -“What’s the matter with her?” Danny asked wonderingly. “I thought she -was all a-flutter about playing at the Manor.” - -“Maybe she was all a-flutter about playing _before_ the show,” Rita said -softly with a knowing look at Peggy. - -Peggy suddenly realized what she meant. Alison was disappointed that -Chris had asked Peggy instead of her. “Oh, for heaven’s sake,” she -thought wearily, “how could Alison possibly be upset over a little thing -like a game of Ping-pong!” When a group of people lived so closely -together, Peggy was beginning to realize, little things could cause -undue friction. A word or a glance could be magnified out of all -proportion. Hadn’t she even been a little guilty of that herself when -Alison had criticized her performance? - -“Your serve, Miss Lane,” Chris reminded her. “Where are you anyway—off -in a dream?” - -“Yes,” Peggy smiled, “I guess I was!” She couldn’t help observing how -handsome Chris was with his wonderful tan and his blond hair gleaming in -the sun. He did look like a movie star, and several people stopped to -watch them play together. Peggy felt almost ashamed to realize that she -was proud to be seen with him. “And a minute ago you were condemning -Alison for the same thing!” she chided herself fiercely. “I think it’s -about time you had a long talk with yourself, Peggy Lane!” She slammed -the ball hard, and it hit the far corner of the table, out of Chris’s -reach. - -“Good play!” he cried. “That’s it.” - -“Who won?” Peggy asked. She hadn’t even noticed. - -“You don’t deserve to know,” he grinned. “You’re off on a cloud -somewhere. Come on, ingénue, let’s go for a walk.” - -They strolled through the lovely grounds, finding that one winding path -led to another even more charming. Most of the landscaping was designed -to offer the best possible view of the lake, and Peggy felt actively -envious watching the boats dart back and forth like large birds. - -“I’ve wanted to tell you, Peggy,” Chris said as they sat down on a large -rock that jutted out over the water, “what fun it is working with you. -So far I’m enjoying _For Love or Money_ more than any other play we’ve -done. It means more to me than just a play,” Chris went on seriously. “I -feel that we do awfully well together—in almost anything.” He stopped, -looking at her intently as Peggy caught her breath. She didn’t know what -to say. Finally, a moment later, she tremulously suggested that they had -better get back to dinner. - -“Dinner!” Chris exclaimed with humorous disgust. “At a time like this, -with romance in the very air around you! Honestly, Peggy, you’re enough -to try anybody’s patience!” - -Peggy wished with all her might that she knew what her real feelings -were in regard to Chris. It was all so confusing, she thought, as they -found their way back to the dining room through the maze of pathways. - -Dinner was a sumptuous affair and a refreshing change from the good but -rather plain food at Mrs. Brady’s. - -“Cheddar cheese soup!” Michael Miller peered at his bowl like a hungry -owl. “Haven’t seen this since Dad took me to New York last year!” - -“Personally, I prefer turtle Madeira,” Alison said languidly, taking a -few sips of the delicious broth. - -“Listen to the prima donna,” Chris whispered to Peggy. “She was fine as -long as she had all the leads, but now wait and see. For the rest of -next week she’ll be impossible. I know—I’ve seen it happen before.” - -“But I thought you liked her,” Peggy said softly. She had decided she -might as well find out how things stood between Chris and Alison. - -“I do,” Chris answered, slightly surprised, “I like her a lot. She’s a -very good actress.” - -Thoughtfully, Peggy wondered if Chris judged people by their acting -ability—if that was the basis of his sudden pronounced interest in her. -Peggy was very conscious of his presence beside her as they finished -dinner together. - -_Charley’s Aunt_ was riotously received by the Lake Manor audience. The -actors had to be unusually alert to restrict their movements -sufficiently to work on the smaller stage. There were several times when -Peggy, almost bumping into another player, came close to breaking up and -laughing out loud. And when an angry bee somehow found his way on stage -and got lost in the tea things, all the cast had a difficult time -controlling themselves. Microphones were suspended overhead to overcome -the poor acoustics in the hall, and the buzz of the bee came loud and -clear over the actors’ voices. The audience loved it! They roared and -applauded when the bee finally made a grand exit over their heads and -out the rear door. - -Weak with laughter, Peggy made her way back toward the tiny, dark -dressing room that was stacked with boxes of costumes and props. The -hall was usually reserved for the individual comedy acts that the Manor -booked for its guests. - -“I’m sure they think we’re just another variation on the same theme!” -Peggy giggled. “That silly bee! He sounded like a dive bomber!” - -“They loved it!” Chris cried exuberantly, whirling Peggy around in the -small hall. Chris was always like this after a show, Peggy noticed. -Excited and gay and ready to go on for the rest of the night. - -“Miss Lane?” one of the stagehands called to her. “There’s someone -outside to see you.” - -“Aha!” Chris intoned dramatically. “An admirer, no doubt. Come along, -Peggy—take me to your stage-door Johnny and I’ll protect you!” Laughing, -they stepped out of the door into the courtyard of the building. - -“Peggy!” A tall, lanky, redheaded boy grinned down at her, stretching -out both hands in greeting. - -“Randy Brewster!” Peggy cried, “Randy—of all people! Well, how on -earth—why—how did you—oh, Randy!” She was so excited and pleased that -she stuttered. - -“I loved the show,” Randy declared happily, hugging her, “and I was so -surprised to see you down here at the Manor! I thought I’d have to wait -to surprise you up at the theater.” - -“Oh, Chris,”—Peggy remembered him—“I’d like you to meet a very dear -friend of mine—I met him when I started in dramatic school. This is -Randy Brewster—Chris Hill.” - -“How nice,” Chris said shortly, his exuberance gone. - -“I certainly enjoyed your performance,” Randy congratulated him. “Very -funny. You have a lot of vitality. Hope I’ll do as well here—” - -“Oh,” Peggy exclaimed with sudden understanding, “is that why you’re -here? The Manor hired you?” - -“Yep,” Randy said. “I’ll be here for a week doing a new comedy routine. -I hope we’ll be able to see each other often. I was so pleased, Peggy, -knowing you’d be in the neighborhood.” He grinned at her with that -funny, warm, crooked smile that Peggy remembered so well. - -“I’m coming to see your opening day after tomorrow,” Randy went on. -“Wouldn’t miss it for anything. I’m glad that I’ll be here while you’re -playing a lead.” - -“Are you familiar with the play?” Chris interrupted suddenly. - -“No,” Randy said with a smile, “but that will make it even more fun.” - -“Well,” Chris said mysteriously, “I don’t know how much fun it will be -for you, but you should certainly find it interesting! You’re familiar -with the old saying, ‘All’s fair in love and war’?” He flashed a teasing -smile at Randy. “Well, we’ll look forward to seeing you, Mr. -Brewster—yes, indeed!” - -Chris left them gaping after him while Randy shook his head. “That’s a -strange fellow,” he puzzled. “He’s very charming, but I’d swear that he -doesn’t like me one little bit! I wonder why! What have you been up to, -Peggy?” - -He looked at her curiously while Peggy wondered if things could -conceivably get any more complicated! She had been so happy to see a -friend from New York—and especially Randy. Now, she realized suddenly, -she would have to play her big lead with the knowledge that Randy was in -the audience, watching her and Chris. “Well,” she thought, shivering -slightly, “that will be quite an experience!” - - - - - XI - Quick Thinking - - -Peggy sat at her dressing table applying her make-up carefully. For the -first time this summer she had to be just as beautiful as possible with -no little tricks or different hair styles for characterization. This -time she could look just like Peggy, only more so. After she had put on -the gown she wore for her entrance, she combed out her thick, glowing -hair that had grown in the past few weeks until it just touched her -shoulders. It framed her face in soft waves, and as she looked at -herself in the mirror, she was pleased. - -“You look absolutely lovely, Peggy,” Rita said, “dreamy, in fact. I -think the audience will go into a tail spin—to say nothing of your -friend Randy.” - -The minute she mentioned his name, Peggy’s knees began to shake. “Here I -go again,” she said nervously. “Opening night! Clammy hands and -butterflies!” - -“Well, don’t worry about it,” Rita said gently. “It’s only because -you’re doing a lead. It’ll go away.” - -But privately, Peggy wasn’t so sure. Was she nervous because of the play -or Randy in the audience? “Oh, I wish he hadn’t told me,” Peggy thought -desperately. “Now I’ll be thinking of him out there—” - -“Five minutes!” Gus called, and Peggy made her way to the wings. - -“Break a leg, leading lady,” Chris whispered as he walked by, “and don’t -worry about a thing.” He grinned at her encouragingly and Peggy thought -again what a wonderful person Chris was. She wished he hadn’t teased -Randy in that manner, but then Chris did everything all the way. No half -measures for him! Peggy watched him close his eyes for a moment, getting -into character and collecting his energy. Chris would be good, Peggy had -no doubt. “And what about me?” she wondered. “I hope I can concentrate -and not be distracted by my own private thoughts.” - -“Curtain!” The play had begun. - -Peggy didn’t make her entrance until the second scene of Act One. Now -she wished that she had stayed in her dressing room instead of watching -from the wings. By the time she walked on she was more nervous than -ever, but fortunately, Janet was supposed to be in an excited state, -too. Peggy was just beginning to relax and feel comfortable, timing her -laugh—when the phone didn’t ring on cue! - -Peggy looked at Chris and Chris looked at Peggy. There was dead silence -for a moment. Something must have gone wrong with the phone bell or, -worse, someone had forgotten! They couldn’t go on, either, until it -rang. The call was necessary to the action. - -“Well”—Peggy plunged in with an improvisation—“I’ve heard of sea gulls -that are supposed to be angels of ships at sea.” Preston and Janet had -just been talking about gulls—perhaps they could continue until the -phone rang. But Chris didn’t pick it up. He looked perfectly blank, and -Peggy read in his eyes that desperation that means an actor is -completely at a loss. In theater terms, Chris had “gone up”—higher than -a kite. - -“I think there was an article about sea gulls in the _Reader’s Digest_,” -Peggy ad libbed valiantly while Chris stayed silent as a tomb. If only -he would come back a little and help her out! Peggy got up from the -couch and strolled around the room as if seeing it for the first time. -If she could disappear in the wings for a moment, she might be able to -signal someone. “I hadn’t noticed what a lovely place you have here, Mr. -Mitchell,” she went on, making her way upstage to the hall. “Is this the -way to the kitchen?” She was out in the hall now and disappeared for a -moment, waving her hand frantically in the wings. - -Chris suddenly came to life and realized what she was doing. “Why, don’t -tell me you’re hungry,” he called after her. “But if you want to snoop -around—go ahead.” - -“I’m not snooping!” Peggy reappeared for a second. This was better—at -least they were improvising in character. “I’m just naturally curious, -that’s all.” She disappeared again, desperately whispering, -“_Sst—sst—where’s the phone?_” - -Michael signaled her that they were working on it, the battery was dead! -“Well, use the doorbell then—anything!” Peggy whispered. She came back -on stage, her ingenuity giving out—but there it was, the ring! Chris -dived for the receiver. Gus had used the doorbell but they managed to -cover well enough and finished the first act with relief. - -“_Whew!_” Chris said when the curtain closed. “Thanks a lot for pulling -me through, Peggy. When that bell didn’t ring, I blew completely. First -time that’s happened in ages.” - -“You were wonderful, Peggy,” Rita said. “I don’t think the audience -noticed a thing!” - -“Gosh, I’m sorry.” Gus came up apologetically. “We should have used the -doorbell right away instead of tinkering with the phone. That was quick -thinking, Peggy.” - -“So I did have my mind on my work after all!” Peggy thought happily. -“How silly of me to worry about it.” - -But as the play progressed to the last act where Preston finally -embraces Janet, Peggy was amazed to find that the simple scene had -suddenly acquired enormous value. All she could think of was Randy out -in the audience! As they took their curtain calls she looked anxiously -for him, wondering what he was thinking. - -“Terrific!” Randy congratulated her with a friendly hug when he came -backstage. “You were funny and wonderful and perfect and you looked like -a vision!” - -“Why don’t you introduce me, Peggy?” Alison asked as she came by. “This -must be your famous friend—” - -“Randolph Clark Brewster,” Peggy said gaily, relieved that Randy had -taken the play as a play. “He’s a wonderful comedian, but his heart -isn’t in it. He wants to be a playwright.” - -“Really!” Alison drawled. “You aren’t related to the Brewsters of Long -Island by any chance?” - -Randy frowned and sent an appealing look to Peggy. He hated anyone to -know about his wealthy family as he was trying his best to be successful -on his own. “Well, uh, yes,” he muttered reluctantly. “Look, Peggy, -change your things, and let’s go out for a snack. This is my night off -and I want to make the most of it!” - -“I always did like that strong, silent type,” Alison said as they -entered the dressing room, “and besides having that wonderful face and -red hair, he comes from a very prominent family. I don’t blame you for -leaving Chris in the lurch for your old friend.” The barb sank in, and -Alison’s contrived innocent smile did nothing to relieve it. - -“Well,” Peggy thought miserably as she took off her make-up, “if people -can’t understand a thing like friendship, then let them think whatever -they like!” - -“Hey, open up, Peggy.” Peggy got up to open the door and saw Bill Slade -standing there. “You were great, Peggy. You’ll have to do another lead -this summer. Want to go out for some coffee?” He smiled, accepting her -silence as consent. - -“Peggy—a small tribute to a great leading lady!” It was Chris, and he -handed her a huge bouquet of roses with an elegantly mocking little bow. -“But let’s eat. I’m famished.” - -“That’s a really fine set,” Randy commented, returning from a tour of -the stage. “Are you ready yet?” - -Peggy hastily excused herself and closed the door while the three boys -waited in the hall, each assuming that she was his special date for the -evening. - - [Illustration: The three boys waited in the hall] - -Rita looked at Peggy’s perplexed expression with undisguised amusement, -finally breaking into laughter. “The only solution, as I found out long -ago, is marriage!” she chuckled. “You’d better start thinking about it, -Peggy!” - -“That is the last thing in the world I’m going to think about—for a long -time!” Peggy said emphatically. She picked up her bag and sighed -heavily, wondering how to handle the situation. - -Alison was grimly combing her hair and putting her make-up away. “I -don’t blame her for feeling left out,” Peggy thought. “Playing a lead -does seem to make a difference in people’s interest—although it -shouldn’t. And taking a back seat isn’t easy for Alison.” Peggy wondered -how Alison would react if she asked her to join them. It would simplify -everything, but she mustn’t appear to do it out of kindness. - -“Are you ready, Alison?” Peggy asked matter-of-factly. - -“Ready for what?” Alison looked up, surprised. - -“Why, to go to Mrs. Brady’s or the inn—or wherever we’re going. I think -we ought to let the boys decide.” Peggy treated it as if it had been -understood from the beginning. “Are you and Gus coming along, too?” she -asked Rita. - -“I’m sorry, we can’t, Peggy. We have to go over the prop list for _You -Can’t Take It with You_. It’s a difficult show on the backstage end, and -I want to help all I can.” - -Peggy nodded. Next week was going to be a challenge for everyone. -“Better hurry, Alison,” she said. “We can’t stay out too late. We have -an early call tomorrow.” - -It worked out just as Peggy had hoped. They went to the inn for -sandwiches and Alison attached herself to Chris, leaving Peggy free to -enjoy Randy’s company. Bill Slade had a marvelous time with all of them. -Alison’s presence prevented Chris from kidding Randy, which, Peggy -suspected, Chris would have loved to do. Just once in the evening, when -Alison excused herself for a moment, Chris leaned across the table and -said, “Say—how’d you like that last act, Randy? Think it was realistic?” - -Randy looked from Chris to Peggy and back again. “Well,” he said with a -slow smile, “it wasn’t exactly the way I would have played it, a little -too theatrical for me. But then, Preston Mitchell _was_ an actor! I’d be -inclined to take that scene too seriously, I’m afraid.” He looked -steadily at Peggy and she thought she understood. Randy was telling her -that Chris’s interest in her was a professional mood—something she had -guessed already. But more important, he was saying that his own feelings -went deeper. Peggy felt comforted and secure. Whatever happened with -their friendship, it would always be a lasting one. Peggy smiled at him -understandingly. - -“What’s your play next week, Peggy?” Randy asked. - -“_You Can’t Take It With You!_ And it’s going to be a job! We have to -use a lot of townspeople because it’s such a large cast—” - -“It’s a great show, though,” Chris added enthusiastically. - -“And the most awful thing, Randy,” Peggy continued, “is that I won’t be -able to see your act down at the Manor.” - -“Well, at least you can say good-by.” Randy smiled. “The day you play -there is the day I leave.” - -“Leave!” Peggy suddenly had an inspiration. “Oh, Randy, why don’t you -stay here for another week? We’re going to need so many people in _You -Can’t Take It with You_—I’m sure Chuck and Richard would love to have -you.” - -“The Russian!” Alison cried. “Everyone’s been biting their nails, -wondering who could play the Russian!” - -“Oh, yes, you’d be perfect, Randy,” Peggy urged. “And I’m doing Essie, -the little ballerina. We could work together—do say you’ll stay!” - -“We-e-ell,” Randy hesitated, “I suppose I don’t have to rush back—” - -“You’re absolutely sure?” Chris asked, raising an eyebrow. “I mean, we -wouldn’t want you to miss anything in New York—” He looked at Peggy for -a moment, and noticing her pained expression, laughed good-naturedly, -leaning across the table to shake Randy’s hand. “Okay. You win, Mr. -Brewster! I can’t compete with old school ties and all that. You would -be great for the part and we’d love to have you.” - -The boys shook hands, grinning at each other, while Peggy looked on, -happy and relieved. Chris had evidently decided to “bury the hatchet.” - -Alison seemed a little mystified. “What’s going on with you two? You -look as though you had a deep, dark secret.” - -“Deep, but not dark, Alison,” Chris laughed. “Light as summer. Which -reminds me, who knows something good for mosquito bites? They’ve decided -all of a sudden that I’m a particularly delectable morsel!” - -“Oh, oh, you’ve come to the right place,” Bill Slade offered eagerly. -“Take it from an old hand—” - -“No, no, I know the best thing of all—” Alison urged. - -“But I found something brand-new—” Peggy started, and then everyone -laughed, plying Chris with their favorite remedies. Randy promised Peggy -that he’d speak to the producers the next day, and the party broke up -with happy expectations of next week’s show. - - - - - XII - Varied Explosions - - -Just as Peggy had expected, the producers were delighted to have Randy -stay an extra week and play the Russian ballet teacher, Kolenkhov, in -_You Can’t Take It with You_. With Randy in the cast and everyone -working comfortably together, Peggy couldn’t remember ever having such -fun at rehearsals! And what a cast! The play needed so many actors that -everyone was pressed into service. Michael Miller and the apprentices -all had small parts, Chuck Crosby played the part of Peggy’s father as -well as directing, Mr. Miller brought some friends of his to fill in, -and even Aunt Hetty was persuaded to play. Mary Hopkins brought a friend -to try out for the part of the Grand Duchess. June Tilson was a lovely -young girl who turned out to have a really fine talent. - -“Where have you been all summer?” Chuck asked when he heard her read for -the first time. “We could have used you before!” - -“She’s been in hiding,” Mary laughed, “or I would have brought her long -ago.” - -“I’ve been at the music camp, actually,” June explained. “You know—the -group of folk singers who have a summer session nearby.” - -“Oh, yes.” Chuck nodded. “We’re giving them the auditorium one night for -a benefit performance. Let’s see—it comes during the week of _Guest in -the House_, I believe.” - -“Oh, will I be glad when we do that play!” Alison said. “I love the -part!” - -“The part of Evelyn?” Chuck asked. - -“Yes, I’ve done it before and I can hardly wait to play it again.” - -“Don’t count too much on having the same part this time,” Chuck -cautioned her. “I’m not sure yet how we’re going to cast the play.” - -Alison shrugged. “Well, of course, I’m doing Evelyn,” she commented -blithely. “That was one of the reasons I came up here!” - -“We’ll discuss it later,” Chuck said firmly. “And now, let’s get to -work. By the way, does anyone have an idea on how to handle the -fireworks?” - -The script of _You Can’t Take It with You_ calls for a display of -fireworks onstage and an explosion offstage during the show. Michael -Miller assured Chuck that he could easily take care of it. - -“I have a workshop, you know, and it won’t be any trouble—be fun, in -fact!” - -“You’ll have to be very careful,” his father warned. - -“Naturally!” Michael said indignantly. - -“And don’t make it too realistic.” Peggy giggled. “Just a loud noise. We -don’t want the auditorium down around our heads.” - -“That Michael Miller is quite a character,” Randy commented to Peggy -during a lull in rehearsal. “He seems so serious and yet sometimes I -catch a gleam of sheer mischief under those horn rims. You don’t think -he’ll do anything silly with the explosion, do you?” - -“Of course not!” Peggy laughed. “Michael’s much too intelligent for -that!” - -Rehearsals went along as smoothly as could be expected with such a large -cast. It was amazing, Peggy thought, that the local people were able to -work so professionally with the rest of the company. Aunt Hetty was a -delight to watch. She was enjoying herself hugely in her small but -important role, and took all the direction that Chuck gave her with the -greatest good humor. - -“She’s a wonderful sport,” Peggy thought, watching her with amusement, -“and I think she really loves this.” - -Randy was so good that it seemed as if he might steal the show. It was -hard for him, too, playing late at the Manor every night and then -rushing to the high school each morning. - -“What a schedule!” he sighed. Randy and Peggy were having a picnic lunch -on the school grounds together. “But after tonight it will all be over.” -It was Randy’s last night at the Manor. - -“For you,” Peggy said, “but not for us. Tomorrow we play _For Love or -Money_ at the Manor, then comes the dress rehearsal and opening of _You -Can’t Take It_, and after that we start on the old-fashioned melodrama. -I wish you could be here for that one, too!” - -“So do I—” Randy smiled affectionately—“but I really will have to get -back to New York soon. Let’s not talk about it now, Peg, we still have a -whole week! And you have two more nights as Janet.” - -_For Love or Money_ had been the most successful play of the season. -People came in droves all week and money flowed into the box office. - -“You think it would have happened anyway, after Mr. Birmingham’s -review,” Randy told her seriously, “but that isn’t the whole story. I -don’t think you realize how good you actually are in that part, Peggy. -People are coming to see _you_—I’ve heard the comments around town!” - -“Oh, Randy!” Peggy beamed at the delicious compliment. Randy was very -cautious with his praise, and coming from him, the words made Peggy -doubly happy. - -“I wouldn’t be surprised if Richard and Chuck gave you another fat lead -to do this summer,” Randy went on. “As a matter of fact, they’d be -foolish if they didn’t.” - -“But there isn’t another lead I could do,” Peggy said, surprised. -“There’s just the little part in the melodrama and then, I suppose, the -model in _Guest in the House_—” - -“What about Evelyn?” Randy asked, looking at her intently. - -“Oh,” Peggy laughed, “that’s Alison’s part. She’s been waiting for it -all summer!” - -Randy nodded and said nothing while Peggy suddenly remembered what Chuck -had said to Alison—not to count on the part. Her heart skipped a beat as -she wondered if Chuck had meant that he might give it to her! Oh! Peggy -took a deep breath, feeling a little giddy. It just couldn’t happen, it -was too good to possibly be true! No, she simply wouldn’t let herself -think about it. She looked at Randy and caught him smiling at her. - -“Yep,” he agreed with her unspoken thought. “Don’t think about it. -You’re quite right. Put it entirely out of your mind!” They laughed -happily and went back to rehearsal. - - -Opening night of _You Can’t Take It with You_ made a permanent place in -the history of Lake Kenabeek. With so many local people in the cast, the -auditorium was overflowing with relatives and friends as well as summer -guests. It was the best house the theater had had. - -Michael Miller arrived with a little package carefully wrapped in cotton -wool and asked Chuck where he should set it off. - -“Set what off?” Chuck demanded, distracted and intent on getting things -settled backstage as well as remembering his own part. - -“My Kenabeek Special!” Michael answered. “You know, the explosion.” He -hadn’t brought it to dress rehearsal with the explanation that there was -only one firecracker. It hadn’t mattered—everyone was too busy to care. -At this point, Chuck was crossing his fingers and trusting to luck that -everything would turn out all right. - -“Is it loud?” Chuck asked hastily. - -“Very,” Michael assured him. “At least I hope so—I followed instructions -to the letter.” - -“What instructions?” Chuck almost yelped. “Didn’t you just make an -ordinary firecracker?” - -“Good heavens no! You can’t trust those things. This is very special and -safe!” - -“Well, put it in an ashcan out on the stairs and set it off there. Be -sure you’re careful!” Chuck called after him. - -“Don’t worry, I will be.” - -The play went unbelievably well. None of the props were missing, -everyone came in on cue, the action zipped along, the audience was in -stitches at the comedy. The end of Act Two approached and Peggy was -onstage with Randy, Chris, Mr. Miller, the apprentices, and June Tilson. -They had paced the show furiously, warming up to the big scene. Mr. -Miller gave the cue for the explosion. A moment of silence—and then they -heard it. - -_Wham!_ - -It sounded as if the roof of the auditorium had been blown off. Huge, -billowing clouds of smoke poured on stage, almost obscuring the actors -as they finished the scene amid coughs and tears, with a hysterical -audience laughing as if their sides would split as the curtain closed. - -The applause was deafening, but the actors hardly heard as they rushed -backstage to see what had happened. There stood Michael Miller, black -with smoke and ashes, peering at them helplessly from glasses that were -absolutely opaque with grime. - -“I put it in the ashcan, Chuck, just like you said,” Michael offered -timidly. “I think it blew the top off.” - -The ashcan was a crumpled mass of tin. The top had been blown across the -stair well and ashes were strewn about, several inches deep. - -“I guess you didn’t look in the can first,” Chuck said very quietly, his -eyes still smarting. - -“I didn’t know it would make so much smoke—” Michael whispered. - -“No, I guess you didn’t,” Chuck agreed softly. - -“I was very careful, but I guess maybe I should have just used a -firecracker.” Michael sat down sorrowfully on the stairs, looking like a -lump of coal in a bin. - -Peggy couldn’t restrain herself any longer. She burst out laughing. “Oh, -Michael,” she gasped, “and you worked so hard! It couldn’t have been -funnier if you’d tried!” - -Nobody could control himself any longer, and they all laughed until -their sides hurt. The play ended without another mishap and the audience -left, still talking about the “bomb.” - -“Your place in folklore is assured, Michael,” his father told him dryly. -“But next time I suggest you take a simple little walk to the store!” - - -The week flew by so quickly that Peggy didn’t know where the time had -gone. They were rehearsing the melodrama, _Love Rides the Rails_, and -during the day Randy would come to the theater to watch and cue the -actors. - -“Only one more day,” Peggy said incredulously, “and then you’ll be off -to New York and we’ll only have three more weeks here! Oh, the summer is -going so fast!” - -“I’ll miss all this,” Randy admitted, “the theater and the lake—and -you!” - -Randy decided to go back to New York on the night bus that left the -Manor right after the last performance of _You Can’t Take It with You_. -Peggy walked with him to the gates to say good-by, feeling that the -nicest part of the summer was going with him. - -“It’s been fun, Randy,” she said shyly. “I’m awfully glad you were -here—” - -“I am too,” he said seriously, taking her hand. “I think maybe I came -along at the right time. Chris is an awfully nice guy, but—well—this is -summer stock, Peggy. Funny things can happen when you act with people. -If you’re really interested in him, I hope you’ll see him in a different -environment—maybe back in New York.” He smiled and suddenly leaned down -and kissed her. “In the meantime, don’t forget me!” - -Randy started to get on the bus and then paused with another thought. -“And don’t forget that you’re an awfully good actress,” he said. “I have -a lot of faith in you. I’d like you to remember that for the next few -weeks.” - -The bus pulled away, leaving Peggy with a funny lump in her throat. -She’d be seeing Randy again in a little while—why did she feel so -strange, she wondered. She suddenly had an acute appreciation of the -difference between Randy’s loyal and generous attitude and the -impulsive, surface interest of Chris Hill. That was it, she realized. -She was a little ashamed of herself for having been swept up in a -current by a dashing leading man, nice as he was. She watched Randy’s -bus turn the corner and disappear, knowing that nobody could quite take -his place. - -The annex seemed strangely quiet the morning of the day _Love Rides the -Rails_ was to open. Rita and Gus were down first as usual, having coffee -and relaxing on the patio before rehearsals started. Peggy joined them, -having hastily dressed in pedal pushers and a halter. - -“It’s getting hotter and hotter,” she remarked, looking for a shady -place to sit down and have her breakfast. - -“But so peaceful after that hectic show,” Rita said lazily. “Really -cozy! Will you ever forget Michael’s bomb?” - -“I thought my hair would stand on end.” Gus laughed. “But it turned out -to be a wonderful show. Your friend Randy certainly did a remarkable -job!” - -“I’m hoping that at last I get to play a nice young woman my own age.” -Rita stretched out luxuriously on the wicker couch. “It doesn’t happen -to me very often, you know!” - -“You mean the wife in _Guest in the House_?” Peggy asked. - -Rita nodded. “The wife to Chris Hill’s husband.” She grinned -mischievously at Gus. “That is, if Gus approves!” - -“Oh, certainly certainly.” Gus smiled and rumpled her hair as he rose. -“Chris may be the Kenabeek heart throb, but I think my place is assured -at home. See you all later—I have to go build a house!” - -“He must really love his work,” Peggy sighed as she watched him go. “I -think he’s worked harder than any of us this summer.” - -“Except maybe Richard and Chuck,” Rita agreed. “I’m going to make him -take a vacation after we’re through here, whether he likes it or not!” - -One by one, the other actors appeared, and after breakfast Chuck started -to hand out the sides for _Guest in the House_. Peggy felt unusually -nervous. She had promised herself not to think of the possibility of -playing Evelyn, but as the moment approached when her part was to be -handed her, Peggy’s heart beat faster and her hand trembled. Chuck gave -her the sides without a word, and after closing her eyes for a moment, -Peggy took a deep breath and looked. - -Evelyn! He had given it to her! She hugged the little pamphlet as if it -were a long-lost friend. Here it was at last—a wonderful, rich, dramatic -role, far, far different from all the ingénues she had played all -summer! - -Rita noticed her ecstatic expression and peeked at the sides. “Well,” -she breathed softly, “I kind of thought so. I’m awfully glad, Peggy. You -should play it!” - -“Just a minute!” Alison’s voice was shrill in the quiet patio. “I’m not -playing the model, Chuck. You gave me the wrong part!” - -“No,” Chuck said firmly. “Peggy is going to do Evelyn and I want you to -play Miriam Blake. You’re right for it, Alison, just as Peggy is right -for Evelyn. It’s the only way to cast this show.” - -“That’s true,” Rita whispered to Peggy. - -“Well, I’m not going to do it!” Alison interrupted. “I’ve played Evelyn -before and this just doesn’t make sense.” - -“She did play it,” Chris broke in cautiously with a concerned look at -Peggy. “We were both in the play last summer—” - -“And who did the model?” Chuck asked. - -“A girl we got from New York. We had to job the part,” Chris replied. - -“Yes, you had to job the part, and we can’t afford to do that. I’m -sorry, Alison,” Chuck said gently, “I know you’d like to do it again and -I’m sure you were wonderful. But you yourself can see that with our -company this is the only possible casting. Peggy is too young and -unsophisticated to play the model. It just wouldn’t work out.” - -“Well, then, get somebody else to play the model,” Alison said -impatiently. “Why not get that June Tilson—what’s the matter with her?” - -“Because audiences want to see Peggy again in a good part.” Chuck was -adamant. “They want to see you, too. That’s part of stock, Alison. Your -summer audiences grow fond of their actors and are interested in seeing -them in varied roles. The model is a perfect part for you, Alison, and -you’ll be good in it. Now let’s start the reading!” - -Peggy had listened anxiously, almost without breathing. Now, as she -looked at Alison, who was obviously seething as she opened her sides, -Peggy wondered if this casting wouldn’t create too many difficulties. -She knew that Chuck was right, though. His explanation made perfect -sense. It was best for the play. But how was Alison going to react? How -would rehearsals go if Alison remained as hostile as she was now? Peggy -watched her worriedly and was shocked to see the hateful glance that -Alison returned. - -Peggy grew more and more nervous as the time approached for her to read. -She hadn’t considered this before, but Alison was a very good actress -with a fine technique. Would Peggy be able to do as well in this part? -Her mouth was dry and she was terribly tense. She stumbled over her -first lines as she felt everyone watching her—Chuck hopefully, Chris and -Danny curiously, Rita with calm compassion, and Alison with a spiteful -expression that said, “All right—let’s see you try and do it!” - -No audience could ever be as critical as this small group of -professional actors. And even though she had a week to work, Peggy knew -that she was being severely judged on this first reading. - - - - - XIII - Double Trouble - - -During the week of rehearsal Peggy found that the drama inherent in the -part itself wasn’t going to be enough to carry her through. Evelyn was a -girl who was emotionally disturbed and there was one scene toward the -end of the play when she broke down altogether and appeared in a state -of unreasonable fear. Peggy worked and worked on the scene, trying it -every conceivable way, while Chuck patiently encouraged her. But it -wasn’t going right and she knew it. Alison was doing a marvelous job as -the model and it was a trial for Peggy to know that she was watching, -criticizing, and comparing Peggy’s efforts with her own past success as -Evelyn. - -“I don’t think I can do it!” Peggy told Chuck miserably one day after -rehearsal. “You should have given the part to Alison after all! I’m -terrible.” - -“You’ll be fine,” Chuck said quietly, but Peggy knew by the tone of his -voice that Chuck had his doubts, too. She hadn’t made a real -identification with the role yet, and it was drawing fearfully close to -opening night. Worried and unhappy, Peggy wondered if she had any right -to call herself an actress after all. If she couldn’t do this part that -she had been so overjoyed to get, what hope was there? - -She was tense and straining and finally even Chuck lost patience. -“What’s the matter with you, Peggy?” he said sharply at rehearsal one -day. “You’re missing this thing by a mile. You’re acting like an insipid -little daisy that’s about to wilt on the stem! Evelyn isn’t like -that—she’s crazy like a fox! She has power in her own strange way—” - -“Could I say something, Chuck?” Alison interrupted, coming out from the -wings where she’d been watching. “It might help Peggy. When I played the -part I did it as though I were perfectly sane. Peggy’s trying to _act_ -crazy and it’s never believable that way.” - -“Yes, that’s true,” Chuck admitted, “it’s a good suggestion, Peggy. Try -the scene again with that in mind.” - -Peggy didn’t protest or try to justify herself, even though she had been -perfectly aware all along of what Alison had just said. She tried again, -doing even more badly than before, terribly conscious of Alison watching -from the wings and judging every move. - -“That was a rotten trick!” Rita fumed in a whisper when the scene was -finished and Peggy, almost in tears, ran off stage. “Alison offering to -help you! She knew exactly what she was doing—trying to draw attention -to herself and make comparisons. Peggy, you’re never going to relax in -this part if you can’t forget that Alison played it before. Can’t you -see what she’s doing?” - -“But it’s too late to give her the part,” Peggy said dully, “so she -can’t be after that. Alison’s never been like this before. I’ve always -liked her, really. What is she trying to do?” - -“Make you give a dreadful performance!” Rita insisted strongly. “I know -Alison Lord like a book. She’s a fine, nice girl as long as she’s in the -limelight, but her career comes first, and she’ll walk roughshod over -anyone who interferes with it!” - -“But this is only a summer stock company—” Peggy protested. - -“Yes, and people go back to New York saying, ‘Gosh, have you seen Peggy -Lane in _Guest in the House_? She was great!’ These things do get -around, Peggy. Alison came up here to be the big cheese, and she wants -it to stay that way. If she can’t play the part at least she figures -that people can say, ‘They really should have given that part to Alison -Lord; Peggy Lane was awful!’” - -Rita spelled it out in no uncertain terms, leaving Peggy feeling bleaker -than ever. She knew that Rita was trying to prod her, make her angry -enough to forget Alison and come through with a good performance. But -Peggy didn’t work that way. She couldn’t act out of spite or anger. She -was aware, too, that other people in the company were disappointed in -her. Danny Dunn couldn’t conceal his surprise or Chris Hill his -impatience. The fine rapport that Peggy and Chris had had in _For Love -or Money_ was a thing of the past. - -Dress rehearsal for _Guest in the House_ took place Tuesday afternoon. -The company had to be out of the theater by five P.M. for the group of -folk singers who had the auditorium for the evening. It was a benefit -affair and the Summer Theater was glad to donate its stage for the -night. Peggy didn’t know if it was the strangeness of working in the -afternoon or if it would have happened in any case, but her performance -was the worst one she had ever given. Not only was she unable to get -into the role at all, but she forgot her lines on several -occasions—something that hadn’t happened all season. Chuck was so -unhappy with the show that he didn’t even criticize her. It was obvious -that he thought it too late. - -Miserably, Peggy took off her make-up and started to leave the theater, -wishing that she had never been given the part at all. Perhaps she would -never attempt to play a dramatic role again. “And I was feeling so -self-satisfied, thinking it was easy!” she thought as she walked out the -stage door. - -“Peggy, how’s it going?” Michael Miller rounded the corner of the -building, coming from the little shack the boys used for a scene shop. - -“Awful.” Peggy tried an unsuccessful smile. - -“What you need is a little relaxation—a change of scenery.” Michael -smiled. “What are you going to do with your first free evening of the -summer?” - -“Tonight?” Peggy shook her head. “Going to work on my part again, I -guess—see if I can come up with something—” - -“Why don’t you forget it for a while?” Michael asked. “I’m going to take -Mary Hopkins over to the other side of the lake for dinner; we’d love to -have you come along.” - -“In your boat?” Peggy asked, feeling a faint stirring of interest. - -“What else?” Michael laughed. “We’re not going to swim, that’s for sure! -Come on, Peggy, it’ll do you good.” - -It would at that, Peggy thought, suddenly feeling a sense of freedom at -the prospect of being far away from the theater for a while, if even -just for dinner. Maybe she could regain her perspective out on the -water; there was nothing like putting a little distance between one’s -self and one’s problem. - -“I will, Michael,” she accepted gratefully. “I’d love to. Goodness, -it’ll be the first boat ride I’ve had all summer!” - -“And long overdue. I promised you a ride once, remember?” - -Peggy felt better than she had all week when they arrived at Michael’s -house and walked down to his dock where Mary Hopkins was already -waiting. - -“Peggy—how nice!” she cried. “Are you coming with us?” - -“I certainly am—if I’m not intruding,” Peggy said, suddenly wondering if -she was interrupting a date. - -“Oh, heavens, no!” Mary laughed. “I’ve been pestering Michael to take me -out in the boat for weeks. This is the first time he’s been free!” - -“I’ll just go and tell Dad we’re off,” Michael said. “That’s a rule -around here when I take out the boat.” - -He was back in a minute and they all got into the trim little craft, -Peggy feeling almost carefree as Michael started the motor and they -zipped away. - -“We call her the _Merry Mac_,” Michael shouted over the noise of the -motor to the two girls. “She’s Dad’s pride and joy—and mine.” - -“I can see why,” Peggy laughed, loving the feel of the water underneath -as they skimmed along. It had been a beautiful day. The lake was -sky-blue and frosted with little points of white whipped up by the wind. - - [Illustration: “Dad’s pride and joy—and mine.”] - -“It’s a little choppy,” Michael called. - -“Fun!” Peggy cried as the spray blew over the windshield and splashed -her face. - -“You’re going to get wet,” Mary warned as Michael passed over the wake -of another boat, the _Merry Mac_ slapping across, the spray leaping to -drench Peggy’s face. - -“I love it!” Peggy cried happily. “The wetter the better! Where are we -going, Michael?” - -“Straight across.” Michael cut his speed a little so he could hear. “See -that cluster of buildings? The Golden Hound is the last one on the left. -Good food and music—very rustic.” - -They were in the middle of the lake now, and Peggy realized that it was -much larger than she had thought. There were islands dotted all around, -some so tiny that there was only room for one or two houses. - -“Private islands,” Michael informed her. “How would you like one of -those, Peggy?” - -“Oh, would I! It would be sheer heaven!” Peggy took a deep breath of the -wonderful fresh air. “No wonder you love this place, Michael. I wouldn’t -ever want to leave if I’d been raised here!” - -“The winters are _cold_, though.” Mary laughed. “How do you feel now, -Peggy? Better?” - -“Marvelous! I’ve almost forgotten about the theater entirely. This is -just what the doctor ordered!” - -Michael slowed the _Merry Mac_ and carefully turned her into the dock in -front of the restaurant. Peggy was impressed by his expert handling of -the boat. - -“Dad would never forgive me if anything happened to our little friend -here, and I’d never forgive myself!” he said as he stepped out and -helped the girls up from the boat. - -They had a wonderful dinner at a lovely candlelit table by a picture -window that afforded a sweeping view of the lake. - -“What a beautiful spot,” Peggy said dreamily as twilight fell, and -lights in the little cottages dotting the shore twinkled on like a -fringe of decoration. “Why haven’t we been here before?” - -“We can come again during the last week of the season,” Michael said. -“I’ll bring everybody over sometime.” - -“Michael, isn’t it getting awfully dark?” Mary interrupted, watching the -sky that had changed from sunset violet to a deep, heavy gray. - -Michael looked at the sky and smiled. “Sure, it’ll be dark before we get -back. You’re not worried about going back at night, are you?” - -“Well,”—Mary hesitated—“do you know how to find your way back at night?” - -Michael laughed. “Mary Hopkins! And you’ve lived at Lake Kenabeek for -sixteen years!” - -“How do you find your way back?” Peggy asked. - -“By my landing light.” Michael was still laughing at Mary. “I take a -straight course from here, across the lake, home. It’s impossible to -miss it. Where have you been all these years, Mary?” - -“Well,” she said with a shy smile, “I guess I just never thought of it -before.” - -They finished dinner in a leisurely fashion, enjoying the music and the -peaceful atmosphere of this beautiful spot. - -“This really has been lovely, Michael,” Peggy thanked him as they left -the restaurant. “I feel so relaxed and different—not half as worried as -I was this afternoon.” - -“You’ll probably knock ’em in the aisles tomorrow night,” Michael said -cheerfully as they got into the _Merry Mac_ again. - -And Peggy thought he might be right, at that. Somehow, getting away from -the part had done her a world of good. She found that she was actually -looking forward to trying it again, and sure that she could improve her -performance. - -“My, it really is rough!” Mary said nervously as they started back. A -high wind had come up and the choppy water was blowing in all -directions, making the boat rock furiously. - -Michael was quite unconcerned. “See—there’s the light, Mary.” He pointed -it out to her dead ahead across the black lake. “We just take a bead on -that, and home we go without obstacles—in the rain, it seems.” - -A freak summer storm had suddenly come up, and the rain pelted down -heavily, mixing with the spray that rose over the sides of the little -boat. - -“This is nothing,” Michael reassured Mary. “I’ve been out in storms much -worse than this. As long as we can see the landing light there’s nothing -to worry about, and it doesn’t look—” - -But Michael had spoken too soon. The rain suddenly poured down in such -force that it was impossible to see. In an instant it descended in -driving torrents and Michael lost the landing light! In a second he had -cut the motor. “I don’t think,” he began—but then it happened. There was -a grinding crash that threw Peggy and Mary forward, their heads hitting -the windshield, while the _Merry Mac_ reared up and came to a shuddering -stop. - -There was dead silence for a moment. Then, “Is anybody hurt?” Michael -asked tightly. - -“No, I don’t think so....” Peggy moved a bit. “Mary, are you all right?” - -“My head,” she said shakily. “No—it’s all right—I just bumped it.” - -“Thank heaven!” Peggy breathed. “And thank goodness you cut the motor so -fast, Michael. If you hadn’t been so quick....” They were all silent, -realizing that it was only Michael’s alert action that had saved them -from a much more serious accident. - -“Where are we?” Peggy finally asked. - -“I don’t know,” Michael said, “but we’d better get out and see. I hope -we’re not on a rock somewhere.” - -The rain was so thick and the night so black that they couldn’t see a -foot in front of them. Michael climbed out first, feeling his way. “It’s -rock, all right,” he said nervously. “No—then it goes on into sand. -Maybe we’re on a small island. Peggy, throw out the cushions from the -seats, will you? I don’t know if the boat is lodged too tightly to sink -or not, but we might as well have them to sit on.” - -Groping in the dark, Peggy withdrew the cushions and handed them to -Michael. Her hands touched something slick and cold. “What’s in the back -seat, Michael?” she asked. - -“Oh, good girl! Oilskin raincoats. I would have forgotten all about -them. We keep them there—for emergencies.” Michael’s voice was hollow -and Peggy knew that he was beginning to feel the situation. Michael had -wrecked his precious boat. Well, there was no time now to think about -that. Peggy took out the coats and wrapped one around Mary, who was -still shivering slightly from shock. - -They climbed up on their hands and knees, feeling their way precariously -from the rocks on which the boat had crashed to the sandy beach. Peggy -bumped into something and shrieked, then she realized it was a tree -trunk. “Michael, we’re in some woods! Come on, Mary, get under cover and -out of the rain!” - -“Why doesn’t somebody light a match?” Mary asked plaintively. “Let’s -make a fire or something.” - -At this, Peggy dropped down on the boat cushion and began to laugh -helplessly. - -“What do you find so funny, may I ask?” Michael questioned sourly from -the gloom beside her. - -“A fire!” Peggy giggled. “A fire in all this rain! I’m sorry, -Michael—it’s just nerves!” - -“Very funny,” Michael said. “Well, I suggest we just sit here until the -storm stops. Then we’ll be able to see where we are.” - -But the storm continued in full fury for hours while the three, drenched -and shivering, waited. Mary lay down on a cushion and, unbelievably, in -a few minutes, was fast asleep. Michael too began to yawn as the hours -passed, and Peggy offered him her cushion to doze on. She couldn’t -possibly have slept. She curled up at the base of a tree, wrapped in her -oilskin, and waited for the rain to stop. By the time the storm had -subsided a little, dawn was breaking in a gray haze that filtered -through the rain and trees and gave Peggy a view of the surroundings. -She judged that they must be on an island, and getting up to look -through the woods, saw a little path. Looking back at her sleeping -comrades, Peggy decided to explore a little before awakening them. She -hadn’t followed the path more than a few yards when she came to a -clearing and a cottage among the trees. All night, a refuge had been -this close! Seeing the house, Peggy realized how cold and exhausted she -was. She raced back to the others and woke them up. - -“I feel like the three bears,” Mary said sleepily. “I hope they have -three beds and a stove; I’m chilled through.” - -“It’s a lucky break we had your raincoats,” Peggy told Michael. “Do you -realize we might all have caught pneumonia?” - -Peggy knocked timidly at the door, hating to rouse anyone at this hour. -It must be close to five in the morning, she guessed. There was no -answer and Michael knocked again, louder this time. - -A sleepy, startled voice called out, “Who is it?” and Peggy knew that -the voice was familiar. Before she could place it, the door opened a -crack and then was flung wide. There stood Mrs. Cook, wide awake now -with the shock of seeing the three young people—wet and bedraggled as -lost kittens. - -“Oh, come in, come in!” she cried. “What on earth happened?” - -If Mrs. Cook was astonished to see them, it was nothing to Peggy’s -surprise at finding her here. “Mrs. Cook!” she exclaimed. “I thought you -were staying at one of the hotels—” - -“Oh, no, we’ve had this house for years, only one on the island.” - -Now the little group knew that they had crashed on one of the little -private islands in the middle of the lake. Within minutes the story was -told and Mrs. Cook had given them all warm bathrobes and hot drinks, -fussing over them as if they were her own children. - -“Now, all of you get some real rest,” she commanded, showing Peggy and -Mary into her own room and giving Michael the couch. “We’ll talk about -everything later after you’ve had some sleep!” - -As she gratefully snuggled down under the warm covers on the comfortable -bed, Peggy sleepily wondered why they hadn’t seen Mr. Cook. But she was -too tired to think for more than a moment. Almost immediately she -dropped off into a deep, dreamless sleep, utterly exhausted. - - - - - XIV - Ups and Downs - - -Hours later Peggy awoke to the sound of rain beating on the windows and -a whining wind that lashed the tree tops mercilessly. It was a bleak -world, dark as evening, and it was only noon. Mary and Michael had been -up for some time, and Peggy found them in the living room, chatting with -Mrs. Cook, who had prepared a hearty breakfast for everybody. - -“Peggy—good!” Mrs. Cook said as she saw her emerging from the bedroom. -“I was going to wake you any minute. You must be ravenous.” - -“I am,” Peggy admitted, sitting down at the table Mrs. Cook had set in -front of the fireplace. “A fire in the summertime! It doesn’t seem -possible.” - -“Well, when these storms come up it can get good and chilly here. The -dampness goes right through you.” Mrs. Cook smiled. - -“Have you called to notify your father that we’re all right?” Peggy -asked Michael. “It just occurred to me that everyone must be terribly -worried about us.” - -“Can’t call,” Michael replied, frowning. “The phone’s out. Wire’s blown -down, I guess. But I’m not too worried. I’m pretty sure Dad will assume -we stayed on the other side of the lake because of the storm. It’s -happened before. He’ll have called Mrs. Hopkins, and the theater for -you, Peggy.” - -Peggy noticed the worry in Michael’s eyes. There was something he wasn’t -telling her, she felt sure. Mrs. Cook came to the rescue, gently putting -her hand on Peggy’s shoulder as she said, “I’m afraid you may have to -stay here all day, dear. My husband took the boat to town and couldn’t -get back last night in the storm. He called to tell me before the phone -went out. None of the boats are out today. We’ll just have to wait until -it clears before you can be picked up.” - -“But the show!” Peggy cried. “I have to get back for the opening.” - -“Well, maybe you can,” Mrs. Cook placated her. “It should clear by -evening, and my husband is sure to return as soon as he can.” - -But as the hours progressed, the storm showed no sign of relenting. The -wind whistled angrily, blowing the rain in blinding sheets. No boat -could dare the lake in weather like this. - -“A fine idea I had!” Michael accused himself grimly. “A little fun, a -little relaxation—and what happens? I not only wreck the _Merry Mac_, -but I’m responsible for your missing the show!” - -“Oh, Michael, it isn’t your fault,” Peggy comforted him. But she was -sick at heart. She had felt so optimistic about her new approach to the -part, ready to play Evelyn tonight as if she had never played it before. -Now she might not even be there. She had no doubt as to what Chuck would -do; he would have Alison play the part and get somebody to read the -model for this one performance. It had been done before in stock. And -there went Peggy’s chance to prove herself, not only to the company, but -to a deep part of her that said, “If I fail this, the opportunity may -never come again.” She wandered over to the window and stood there, -looking out, trying to hold back the tears of disappointment. “Maybe -it’s better this way,” she told herself. “Perhaps I wouldn’t do any -better than I have all week.” But she remembered Randy’s words as he -left her that day on the bus—“You’re a fine actress and I have faith in -you!” Randy must have foreseen both the part and the trouble with -Alison. What he could never have imagined was the possibility of Peggy’s -not being there to play it at all. - -By six o’clock the storm finally showed signs of subsiding. Peggy -anxiously watched the sky, wondering if it would be possible after all -to get back in time for the curtain. At seven-thirty the rain had -stopped and the wind was reduced to a murmur. Mrs. Cook took the group -down to the dock to watch for her husband’s boat. “He’s sure to come -soon,” she said. “I think you’ll make it, Peggy.” - -Peggy strained to see across the lake. The sky was still gray, but in -the distance they could hear a motor. - -“Somebody’s out, Peggy,” Mary cried happily. “I think we will get back!” - -But the boat appeared and it wasn’t Mr. Cook after all. They waved and -shouted frantically, but the owner didn’t see them and he veered off in -the opposite direction. A few minutes later another boat came into view -and Mrs. Cook gave Peggy an impulsive hug. “There he is, dear.” She -laughed. “Get ready to dash!” - -Mr. Cook didn’t have a chance to say hello as he pulled into the -landing. The three young people practically fell into the boat with Mrs. -Cook shouting hasty directions and waving him off as if to a fire. - -“Hurry,” she called as he turned around and sped off. “And good luck, -Peggy—” Her voice trailed away and Peggy gripped the sides of the boat, -her heart in her mouth as the possibility of making the curtain became a -reality. - -“This little runabout isn’t too fast,” Mr. Cook warned, “but I’ll make -her do her best!” He pushed the little boat to her limit and in about -twenty minutes they pulled up at Michael’s landing. “This is the closest -one to the theater, Peggy,” Mr. Cook said. “Run! Don’t say thanks—just -make that curtain!” - -But Peggy was already out and running up the stairs. With a hasty wave -she sprinted up the walk beside Michael’s house and started to run to -the theater. - -The parking lot was jammed with cars, but Peggy didn’t see anyone going -into the theater. Panting, she started to run back to the stage door, -but then realized that Chuck might be out front. She’d better let him -know she was here. She dashed back to the entrance and tore through the -large doors by the box office. Richard was just coming out of the little -room and, seeing her, he grabbed her arm with a sigh of relief. “Thank -goodness, Peggy! We were beginning to think you’d drowned!” - -“Where is everybody?” Peggy gasped. “I’m here—tell Chuck—” - -“Wait a minute,” Richard held on to her with concern. “The show’s -started, Peggy....” - -Breathlessly, Peggy stopped short while it sank in. Of course! Nobody in -the lounge, the doors to the auditorium closed— The audience were in -their seats and the curtain had opened! Still trying to get her breath, -she looked at Richard helplessly while tears came to her eyes. - -“Oh, come on, Peggy.” Richard patted her shoulder kindly. “It isn’t that -important. If you only knew how worried we were about you! I’m so glad -you’re safe and sound I don’t give a hoot about the show!” - -“Thank you,” Peggy managed to say. “I couldn’t help it—I tried to get -back.” - -“I know. You can tell me all about it later. Why don’t you go home now -and get some rest?” - -“No! Oh, no.” Peggy collected herself and took a deep breath. “As long -as I’m here, I’m going to watch!” It was a difficult decision. “Who’s -doing the model?” - -“That girl, June Tilson; she’s winging it.” - -“Well, come on, then.” Peggy smiled bravely. “Aren’t you going to give -me a seat?” - -Richard grinned at her admiringly. “You’re quite a girl, Peggy. I’ll -give you the best seat in the house!” - -But Peggy preferred to watch from the rear of the auditorium, so she and -Richard quietly found places together. It was almost unbearable to see -someone else doing her part, but Peggy grimly watched, determined to be -as objective as possible. It was doubly difficult to admit that Alison -was quite marvelous as Evelyn. She was obviously working on emotion and -excitement, but it didn’t matter. She established herself as the star of -the play, projecting her self-assurance and technique so that the -audience had eyes for no one else on stage. June Tilson did a remarkable -job as the model on such short notice. No one but Peggy or another actor -could have known that she was reading the part in bits and pieces before -she made an entrance, improvising, and finding her lines on the back of -furniture where they had been carefully pasted before the show. - -“She’s good!” Peggy whispered. “My, she’s good! Winging a part like that -takes a lot of courage. I thought she probably would read it.” - -“Chuck said she could, but she wanted to do it this way. She’s a fast -study, too!” Richard nodded in agreement. - -Watching _Guest in the House_ was one of the most painful experiences of -Peggy’s life. By the time the play was over she felt as though she’d -been drawn through a wringer. Wearily, she left her seat, as the actors -were taking curtain calls, and bravos for Alison’s performance were -filling the air. She walked outside and back to the stage door. Alison -deserved her congratulations, and she sincerely wanted to tell June -Tilson how good she had been. - -Alison was still in make-up on stage, flushed with excitement and -satisfaction. Everyone was milling around with words of praise for her -wonderful job. No one would ever know what courage it took for Peggy to -join the group and add her congratulations. Alison was too much in a -whirl with her own triumph to take any special satisfaction from Peggy’s -praise, and Peggy realized how right Rita had been. Alison had no -personal spite; it was only her career that concerned her. - -Everyone was glad to see Peggy back unharmed, but it was impossible to -miss the undercurrent backstage. The company also was relieved that -Alison had played Evelyn and “saved the show.” - -A middle-aged man from the audience drew Alison away from her group of -admirers and took her aside for a private discussion. In a few minutes, -Alison rushed back excitedly, looking for Chuck. “I’ve got a screen -test!” she exulted. “I have to leave tomorrow!” - -“Leave!” The entire company was stunned. Actresses just didn’t walk out -on a theater in the middle of the season. But Alison was blithely -unconcerned. - -“That was Sidney Mitchell, the talent scout from Lion Studios! He said -he’d never been so impressed with a performance in summer stock! He -thinks I’m great, said he couldn’t believe anybody could do a job like -that at the last minute!” - -“But you told him you’d played the part before, didn’t you?” Chris Hill -demanded incredulously. - -“Of course not!” Alison hotly defended herself. “Why should I? Let him -think whatever he likes. The important thing is that he wants to test me -for a part immediately. They’re looking for an unknown, and the part is -of a girl very like Evelyn. Oh,” Alison glowed, looking more beautiful -than ever with her taste of success, “just think, I might actually get -to Hollywood!” - -“Well, of course we can’t ask you to stay,” Chuck said. “I suppose June -won’t mind continuing in your part—” - -“I’d love to,” June agreed, “and by tomorrow I’ll know the lines.” - -“Good.” Chuck smiled. “And Peggy will resume Evelyn tomorrow night.” - -Everyone turned to look thoughtfully at Peggy, only now realizing that -if she hadn’t missed the show, the talent scout would have seen her, -maybe “discovered” her, instead of Alison. Their expressions were easy -to read. Curiosity, pity, and a slight feeling of guilt at their obvious -approval of Alison’s performance. Peggy bravely accepted their glances -and smiled back at Alison. “I hope you do get the part, Alison,” she -said gravely. “Be sure to let us know.” - -Peggy couldn’t wait to get back to the annex and be by herself for a -while. The reaction was just beginning to set in. If she had to stay -another minute, she felt, she would break into tears. Hastily excusing -herself with a promise to recount her adventure the next day, she -started to leave. - -But Rita stopped her at the stage door. “Don’t let it bother you too -much, Peggy,” she said gently. “These things happen all the time. It’s -just rotten luck for you. The only time we’ve had a talent scout all -summer, and you had to have an accident!” - -“It doesn’t matter, Rita,” Peggy said with difficulty. She didn’t want -to talk another minute. - -“But it does—I mean Alison’s lying like that....” - -“But she wasn’t lying,” Peggy protested. - -“Well, it amounts to the same thing, withholding the fact that she’d -played the part before—that wasn’t very honest. I just thought you ought -to know that everyone feels the same way about that. It wasn’t very -ethical.” - -“Let’s talk about it tomorrow,” Peggy pleaded, and Rita, understanding -that she wanted to be alone, gave her a comforting pat and let her go. - -Once in the privacy of her tiny bedroom, Peggy finally broke down and -wept. It _was_ rotten luck, she admitted to herself. The one chance -she’d had all summer, and she’d missed it. Why did Mr. Mitchell have to -pick this particular night to come? - -“It isn’t that I don’t wish Alison good luck,” she cried softly, “but at -least he could have seen both of us in the play. He would probably have -picked Alison anyway, because she’s good movie material. But if he had -only seen my work—it would have been something to take back to New York -with me.” - -And on top of that she had missed the opportunity to play Evelyn at the -peak of her feeling about the part. Would she be able to do it at all -tomorrow night? She buried her face in the pillow and sobbed until she -was too exhausted to cry any more. Then, blessedly, sleep came. - -Alison was gone by the time Peggy awoke the next morning. It seemed -unbelievable that she had managed to assemble her things and pack in -such a short time, but her little room was as stark and bare as if no -one had been in it all summer. - -The cast didn’t attempt to disguise their disapproval of Alison’s hasty -exit. “That’s typical of anybody so career-minded,” sniffed Danny Dunn. -“No gratitude. Alison doesn’t have the least conception of anyone’s -problems except her own.” - -“Thank goodness we have June Tilson to take her place,” Rita echoed. “I -don’t know what Chuck and Richard would have done.” - -By evening Peggy was so exhausted that she almost didn’t care how the -play went. She was tired of questioning looks and concern. Tired of -thinking about Evelyn. She put on her make-up and dressed for her -entrance, as unconcerned as if she were simply going out to dinner. She -watched the other actors begin the play and waited for her cue with such -a lack of emotion that she wondered for a moment if she could possibly -be coming down with a cold or a fever. She simply didn’t care. Her cue -came up, and marshaling as much energy as possible under the -circumstances, Peggy walked on stage. - -For the two hours that she played Evelyn, Peggy worked with a most -peculiar sensation. She felt as though she were standing beside herself, -looking on. She watched Evelyn, heard Evelyn, moved her around like a -puppet, with an objective, detached viewpoint completely new to her. She -felt nothing whatsoever inside. - -After the play Peggy took her solo curtain call and received the most -tremendous ovation she had ever heard in the theater. She bowed and -smiled, wondering what all the shouting was about, and was utterly -astonished to see Chuck come to her with real tears in his eyes. - -“That was one of the most beautiful performances I have ever seen in my -life,” he said, looking at her with something like awe. “I won’t even -ask you what happened. It was too wonderful to spoil by trying to -analyze it!” - -Ford Birmingham came back to congratulate her, too. “I haven’t yet -written my review, Peggy, because I heard what happened last night. I -saw both of you play it. Alison was awfully good, but I haven’t seen a -job like yours in years! I’m truly grateful for having had the -opportunity to see you!” - -The entire cast looked at Peggy with a respect so new and surprising -that Peggy didn’t know what to think. “You’re not fooling me, are you, -Chuck?” she whispered. “I didn’t feel a thing out there. Was I really -that good?” - -“Oho!” Chuck grinned at her mysteriously. “So our little ingénue has -discovered another secret—and all by accident! Listen, Peggy, sometimes -it happens that way. Just when you feel dead inside you’ll give a -performance so electrifying that everybody wonders what happened. It -doesn’t always work, you can’t always be so objective. But I guess -that’s what happened to you tonight. Tomorrow it’ll be different, but -you’ll never have trouble with Evelyn again!” - -And Peggy never did. Whether it was because Alison was no longer in the -wings, watching and criticizing, or just because Peggy had finally -“caught” it, she finished the week giving a glorious performance that -brought more and more people to the theater, and sent them away knowing -that they’d had a rare experience. - -“This is what really counts,” Peggy thought gratefully. “Not a screen -test or my ‘career,’ but the knowledge that I can really contribute -something to the theater. Play a part with the author’s intention, not -from my personal viewpoint.” Peggy felt immensely gratified to know that -she was beginning to return a little of what the theater had already -given to her. - - - - - XV - Summer Stock - - -The season closed with a rollicking farce that drew a full house every -night. Enough money poured into the box office to pay back the investors -and the Chamber of Commerce and even leave something over for the new -science lab. On the last night of _See How They Run_, a tremendous party -was held backstage after the show. Everybody was there. Aunt Hetty was -hostess, beaming and brusque as ever, with lavish promises of what the -theater would do with her barn next summer. For it was certainly -established now that the Kenabeek Summer Theater was here to stay! - -The directors of the Chamber of Commerce and the members of the School -Board were there; all the apprentices and their families came; Mr. -Bladen read a special poem of praise for the theater; Mr. and Mrs. Cook -and Mrs. Hopkins and all their friends joined the celebration. Mr. -Miller and Michael were happy to report that the _Merry Mac_ had not -been damaged beyond repair after all, and that next summer she would be -back, ready to take the cast across the lake to the Golden Hound for -dinner. - -“Are you game, Peggy?” Michael asked with a twinkle. - -“Any time,” Peggy laughed. “Tonight if you like!” - -“Well! That certainly speaks well for my son’s seamanship,” Mr. Miller -declared. - -“If it weren’t for him, we’d all be at the bottom of Lake Kenabeek,” -Mary Hopkins said. “Wreck or no wreck, Michael’s a mighty good sailor!” - -“And the _Merry Mac_ was a smart boat to pick the Cooks’ island out of -all the islands in the lake!” Peggy said. “I’d trust her again any -time.” - -“And the Cooks have practically put Bladen’s Antiques out of business,” -Mr. Bladen added, winking at Peggy. “After your boys cleaned up my shop, -the Cooks couldn’t seem to take things away fast enough. Then their -friends started to come! Pretty soon, I’ll have to start buying more -antiques or just stick to poetry!” - -Bill Slade dashed into the theater, breathlessly waving an envelope and -calling for everyone to be quiet. “I know this is going to be a huge -shock,” he cried excitedly, “but you all know how much our business has -improved since the Kenabeek Summer Theater came to town—for many -reasons.” He grinned at Peggy. “Well! Although my brother Max is too -shy, and to be honest, still too stiff-necked to come here personally -and admit a mistake, he’s tried to redeem himself in a mighty concrete -way!” With a huge smile of satisfaction, Bill dramatically opened the -envelope. “Here’s a check to match whatever the Summer Theater is -donating to the high school—from Maximilian W. Slade! You just fill in -the amount!” - -Amid cheers and hurrahs, the School Board gratefully accepted the check. - -“Oh, Bill, that’s just about the nicest thing that’s happened all -summer!” Peggy cried. - -“It makes me very happy!” Bill said, grinning from ear to ear. “Next -summer, Max might even put in an appearance at a play!” - -Richard Wallace made a short, funny speech, thanking everyone for their -cooperation, and at the end giving a word of special praise to the -actors who “worked together without undue friction, without too many -complaints, and with only a minimum of backstage feuds, which is -probably a ‘first’ for any Adirondack stock company! Or any other, for -that matter!” - -There were toasts to the actors, toasts to Gus and the apprentices, -toasts to everyone, including the _Merry Mac_, the annex, Lake Manor, -the audiences, and Mrs. Brady’s food. The party lasted long, with all -the actors talking about the possible jobs that awaited them in New -York. - -“What do you think you’ll do when you get back to New York, Peggy?” -Chris Hill asked. “Do you suppose we’ll have a chance to work together -again?” - -“I hope so,” Peggy replied, glad to know that she could now talk to -Chris naturally and calmly, as actor to actor. “I’m going home for a -visit first, but after that anything can happen!” - -“And next time we won’t let personal feelings interfere with our work, -right?” Chris beamed at her, his handsome face teasing a little, but now -Peggy understood. - -“Right!” Peggy smiled. - -“And give Randy my regards,” Chris added seriously. “He’s a great guy, -and I really hope to see him again sometime.” - -The party finally broke up, with everyone going back to the annex to -start packing. Chuck and Richard had to stay after the close of the -season to wind things up, but almost everybody else was leaving Lake -Kenabeek on tomorrow’s bus. Peggy remained quietly in the theater after -everyone had gone. She wanted to be alone for a little in this theater -that she might never see again. - -The flats had been stacked away for the party, and now only the -worklight was left, its circle casting a small pool of light on the -empty stage. Peggy stood there alone, looking out at the silent -auditorium and thinking of everything that had happened this summer. She -remembered the first time Rita and Gus had brought her up to the -theater—the stage had looked just like this. That night she had had her -first taste of the hectic backstage activity of painting flats. She had -learned so much this summer, Peggy thought gratefully. She had learned -about the theater and about working with people—even about summer -romance and handsome leading men! Peggy smiled wistfully, wishing that -Randy could be here with her now. He was the only person she knew who -could share her feelings about a dark theater like this—the smell and -the memories and the ghosts. - -For it seemed to her that the house was filled with echoes from all the -plays they had done that summer, that all the parts and the plays and -the authors were still alive here somehow. This emotion was the magic -that had brought Peggy to the theater in the first place—this sense of -life, of living literature, of a communication that was nowhere else so -special as between actor and audience. - -Peggy remembered the first time she had walked out on this stage in -_Dear Ruth_. How nervous she had been! And then as the weeks progressed, -her sureness had developed, her professionalism had increased. She had -learned from Rita and Gus and Chuck, from Richard and Danny and Alison. -Yes, perhaps most of all from Alison Lord, who had shown her the -contrast between career and dedication. - -“I hope I will come back here sometime,” Peggy said aloud in farewell. -She was sentimental enough to wish to say a private good-by to her -summer. “And thank you,” she whispered, “thank you for everything.” - -As she finally walked out the stage door for the last time, her make-up -kit tucked under her arm, she could already hear the questions her -parents would ask when she arrived home for her visit. - -“Well! What did you do this summer, Peggy?” they would say. “What -happened? Tell us all about it.” - -“My goodness,” Peggy wondered, smiling at the stars, “how can I possibly -tell them?” - - [Illustration: Endpapers] - - - [Illustration: Back cover] - - - - - PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT - - -Peggy Lane’s education in the theater and in life is “accelerated,” the -summer she takes to the Straw Hat Circuit. Signed with the newly -organized Kenabeek Summer Theater, Peggy is thinking only of her work -when she arrives at the Adirondack resort. But acting turns out to be -only one of her problems. - -Immediately, she learns that the Summer Theater is opposed by Max Slade, -the local movie theater owner, who is exerting every effort to force the -“competition” to leave town. And she meets Chris Hill, blond, exciting, -romantic leading man of the company—who can make any girl feel she’s his -One and Only, and not realize himself that he’s insincere. Finally, -there’s the back-breaking, bone-wearying, nerve-jangling job of mounting -a new play a week—never knowing if it will open! - -The maneuvering—legal and personal—as the actors fight to save their -theater is as dramatic as their nightly shows. But in the end it is -Peggy’s own warmth, charm, and intelligence which precipitate the -surprising climax to their efforts to make the theater an accepted part -of the community! - - - _Peggy Lane Theater Stories_ - - Peggy Finds the Theater - Peggy Plays Off-Broadway - Peggy Goes Straw Hat - Peggy on the Road - - - - - Transcriber’s Notes - - ---Copyright notice provided as in the original—this e-text is public - domain in the country of publication. - ---In the text versions, delimited italics text in _underscores_ (the - HTML version reproduces the font form of the printed book.) - ---Silently corrected palpable typos; left non-standard spellings and - dialect unchanged. - - - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT *** - -***** This file should be named 55826-0.txt or 55826-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/8/2/55826/ - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/55826-0.zip b/old/55826-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6169472..0000000 --- a/old/55826-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h.zip b/old/55826-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index aacce99..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/55826-h.htm b/old/55826-h/55826-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 1f6caa2..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/55826-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5794 +0,0 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> -<meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0" /> -<title>Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes: a Project Gutenberg eBook</title> -<meta name="author" content="Virginia Hughes" /> -<meta name="pss.pubdate" content="1963" /> -<link rel="schema.DC" href="http://dublincore.org/documents/1998/09/dces/" /> -<meta name="DC.Title" content="Peggy Goes Straw Hat" /> -<meta name="DC.Language" content="en" /> -<meta name="DC.Format" content="text/html" /> -<meta name="DC.Created" content="1963" /> -<meta name="DC.Creator" content="Virginia Hughes (ps.)" /> -<style type="text/css"> -xbody, table.twocol tr td { margin-left:2em; margin-right:2em; } /* BODY */ - -h1, h3, h5, h6, .titlepg p { text-align:center; clear:right; text-indent:0; } /* HEADINGS */ -h1 { margin-top:3em; margin-left:auto;margin-right:auto; max-width:15em; } -.box h1, .box h2 { margin-top:1em; } -h3 { margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:2em; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width: 17em; } -h2 { max-width:35em; text-align:center; clear:both; font-size:100%; margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:3em; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; } -h2 .h2line1 { font-size:100%; } -h2 .h2line2 { font-size:150%; font-style:italic; } -h3 { font-size:110%; max-width: 22em; } -.box h3 { margin-top:1em; } -h6 { font-size:100%; font-style:italic; } -h6.var { font-size:80%; font-style:normal; } -.titlepg { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; border-style:double; clear:both; } - -/* == BOXES == */ -.dbox { border-style:double; } -div.box, .dbox { margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; max-width:25em;} -.nbox { margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; max-width:18em;} -div.box, div.subbox, div.nbox { border-style:solid; border-width:1px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em; } -div.subbox { margin:.2em; } -div.box dl dd, div.subbox dl dd, div.nbox dl dd {margin-left:2em; font-size:90%; } -div.box dl dt, div.subbox dl dt, div.nbox dl dt {margin-left:1em; } -div.box p {margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em; max-width:70em; } -h4 { font-size:80%; text-align:center; clear:right; } -span.chaptertitle { font-style:normal; display:block; text-align:center; font-size:150%; text-indent:0; } - -p, blockquote, li { text-align:justify; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } /* PARAGRAPHS */ -p.bq, blockquote { margin-left:2em; margin-right:2em; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em; } -blockquote p.bq { margin-left:1em; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em;} -div.verse { font-size:100%; } -p.indent {text-indent:2em; text-align:left; } -p.tb, p.tbcenter { margin-top:2em; } - -span.pb, div.pb, dt.pb, p.pb /* PAGE BREAKS */ -{ text-align:right; float:right; margin-right:0em; clear:right; } -div.pb { display:inline; } -.pb, dt.pb, dl.toc dt.pb, dl.tocl dt.pb, .index dt.pb, dl.undent dt.pb { text-align:right; float:right; margin-left: 1.5em; - margin-top:.5em; margin-bottom:.5em; display:inline; text-indent:0; - font-size:80%; font-style:normal; font-weight:bold; - color:gray; border:1px solid gray;padding:1px 3px; } -div.index .pb { display:block; } -.bq div.pb, .bq span.pb { font-size:90%; margin-right:2em; } - - /* IMAGES */ -div.img, body a img, .imgcenter {text-align:center; margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:0em; clear:both; } -.caption {margin-top:0em; font-weight:bold; font-size:90%; } - -sup, a.fn { font-size:75%; vertical-align:100%; line-height:50%; font-weight:normal; } -.center, .tbcenter, .csmallest, .csmaller, .caption { text-align:center; clear:both; text-indent:0; } /* TEXTUAL MARKUP */ -table.center { clear:both; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } -.small { font-size:80%; } -.smaller, .csmaller { font-size:66%; } -.smallest, .csmallest { font-size:50%; } -.larger, .xlarge { font-size:150%; } -.large { font-size:125%; } -.gs { letter-spacing:1em; } -.gs3 { letter-spacing:1.5em; } -.gslarge { letter-spacing:.3em; font-size:110%; } -.sc { font-variant:small-caps; font-style:normal; } -.sc i { font-variant:normal; } -.ss { font-family:sans-serif; } -.rubric { color:red; font-weight:bold; } -hr { width:40%; margin-left:30%; } -.shorthr { width:20%; } -.jl { text-align:left; } -span.jl { float:left; } -.jr, .jr1 { text-align:right; } -span.jr, span.jr1, span.center, span.jl { display:block; } -.jr1 { margin-right:2em; } -.ind1 { text-align:left; margin-left:2em; } -.u { text-decoration:underline; } - -table.center { border-style: groove; } -table.center, table.hymntab { clear:both; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - -dd.t { text-align:left; margin-left: 5.5em; } - -span.date, span.author { text-align:right; font-variant:small-caps; display:block; margin-right:1em; } -span.center { text-align:center; display:block; text-indent:0; } -span.hst { margin-left:1.5em; } -.biblio dt { margin-top:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; } -.biblio dd { font-size:90%; } - -/* FOOTNOTE BLOCKS */ -div.notes p { margin-left:1em; text-indent:-1em; text-align:justify; max-width:25em; } -.fnblock { margin-top:2em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; max-width:25em; } -.fndef { text-align:justify; margin-top:1.5em; margin-left:1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em; } -.fndef p.fncont, .fndef dl { margin-left:0em; text-indent:0em; } -.fndef p.fnbq, .fndef dl { margin-left:1em; text-indent:0em; } - -.lnum { text-align:right; float:right; margin-left:.5em; /* POETRY LINE NUMBER */ -display:inline; } - -.hymn { text-align:left; } /* HYMN AND VERSE: HTML */ -.verse { text-align:left; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:0em; } -p.t0, p.l, .t0, .l, div.l, l { margin-left:4em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.tw, div.tw, .tw { margin-left:1em; text-indent:-1em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t, div.t, .t { margin-left:5em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t2, div.t2, .t2 { margin-left:6em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t3, div.t3, .t3 { margin-left:7em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t4, div.t4, .t4 { margin-left:8em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t5, div.t5, .t5 { margin-left:9em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t6, div.t6, .t6 { margin-left:10em; text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t7, div.t7, .t7 { margin-left:11em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t8, div.t8, .t8 { margin-left:12em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t9, div.t9, .t9 { margin-left:13em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t10,div.t10,.t10 { margin-left:14em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t11,div.t11,.t11 { margin-left:15em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t12,div.t12,.t12 { margin-left:16em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t13,div.t13,.t13 { margin-left:17em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t14,div.t14,.t14 { margin-left:18em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } -p.t15,div.t15,.t15 { margin-left:19em;text-indent:-3em; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-align:left; } - - /* CONTENTS (.TOC) */ - .toc dt.center { text-align:center; clear:both; margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:1em; text-indent:0; } - .toc dt { text-align:right; clear:left; - margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:25em; } - .toc dt .cn { font-style:normal; } - .toc dt.jr { text-align:right; } - .toc dt.smaller { max-width:25em; } - .toc dd { text-align:right; clear:both; margin-left:2em; } - .toc dd.t { text-align:right; clear:both; margin-left:4em; text-indent:0em; } - .toc dt a, .toc dd a { text-align:left; clear:right; float:left; } - .toc dt.sc { text-align:right; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; } - .toc dt.scl { text-align:left; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; } - .toc dt.sct { text-align:right; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; margin-left:1em; } - .toc dt.jl { text-align:left; clear:both; font-variant:normal; } - .toc dt.scc { text-align:center; clear:both; font-variant:small-caps; text-indent:0; } - .toc dt span.lj { text-align:left; display:block; float:left; } - .toc dt.jr { font-style:normal; } - .toc dt a span.cn, .toc dt span.cn, dt span.cn { width:2em; text-align:right; margin-right:.7em; float:left; } - dt .large {font-weight:bold; } - -.clear { clear:both; } -.htab { margin-left:8em; } - /* MAXWIDTH FOR JUVENILE BOOKS */ - p, blockquote, li, dd, dt, div.bcat, pre { text-align:justify; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - p, li, dd, dt, div.bcat, pre.internal dl { max-width:25em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - p.csmaller, p.smaller { max-width:37.5em; } - p.csmallest { max-width:40em; } - blockquote { max-width:23em; } - div.verse { max-width:25em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - div.bq { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:23em; } - - /* book advertisements */ - div.bcat dl dd { margin-left:4em; max-width:21em; } - div.bcat dl dt { text-indent:-2em; margin-left:2em; } - p.bkad {font-size:125%; font-weight:bold; margin-top:2em; max-width:20em; margin-right:auto; margin-left:auto; } - p.bkpr {font-size:90%; } - p.bkrv { } - dl.blist dt { margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; } - dl.blist, dl.biblio { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:25em; } - - dl.int { margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; max-width:25em; } - dl.int dt {margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; } - dl.int dd {margin-left:2em; } -</style> -</head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Peggy Goes Straw Hat - Peggy Lane Theater Stories, #3 - -Author: Virginia Hughes - -Illustrator: Sergio Leone - -Release Date: October 27, 2017 [EBook #55826] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT *** - - - - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - -<div class="img"> -<img class="cover" id="coverpage" src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Peggy Goes Straw Hat" width="500" height="756" /> -</div> -<div class="img" id="pic1"> -<img src="images/p01.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="610" /> -<p class="caption"><i>“I’ve wanted to tell you, Peggy,” said Chris, “what fun it is working with you.”</i></p> -</div> -<div class="box"> -<p class="center">PEGGY LANE THEATER STORIES</p> -<h1><i>Peggy Goes Straw Hat</i></h1> -<p class="center">By VIRGINIA HUGHES</p> -<p class="center"><span class="small">Illustrated by <span class="sc">Sergio Leone</span></span></p> -<p class="center"><span class="small">GROSSET & DUNLAP</span> <span class="hst"><i>Publishers</i></span> -<br /><span class="smaller">NEW YORK</span></p> -</div> -<p class="center smaller">© GROSSET & DUNLAP, INC., 1963 -<br />ALL RIGHTS RESERVED</p> -<p class="center smaller">MANUFACTURED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA</p> -<h2>CONTENTS</h2> -<dl class="toc"> -<dt><span class="cn">1 </span><a href="#c1"><span class="sc">The Arrival</span></a> 1</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">2 </span><a href="#c2"><span class="sc">A Serious Complication</span></a> 15</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">3 </span><a href="#c3"><span class="sc">A Broadcast</span></a> 27</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">4 </span><a href="#c4"><span class="sc">A Favorable Decision</span></a> 41</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">5 </span><a href="#c5"><span class="sc">Opening Night</span></a> 48</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">6 </span><a href="#c6"><span class="sc">Chance Encounter</span></a> 58</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">7 </span><a href="#c7"><span class="sc">Unfair Play</span></a> 74</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">8 </span><a href="#c8"><span class="sc">An Explanation</span></a> 85</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">9 </span><a href="#c9"><span class="sc">A Lifeline</span></a> 96</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">10 </span><a href="#c10"><span class="sc">Friends—New and Old</span></a> 108</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">11 </span><a href="#c11"><span class="sc">Quick Thinking</span></a> 121</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">12 </span><a href="#c12"><span class="sc">Varied Explosions</span></a> 131</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">13 </span><a href="#c13"><span class="sc">Double Trouble</span></a> 143</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">14 </span><a href="#c14"><span class="sc">Ups and Downs</span></a> 156</dt> -<dt><span class="cn">15 </span><a href="#c15"><span class="sc">Summer Stock</span></a> 168</dt> -</dl> -<div class="pb" id="Page_1">1</div> -<p class="center">PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT</p> -<h2 id="c1"><span class="h2line1">I</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">The Arrival</span></h2> -<p>Eight hours after leaving New York City, the rickety -old Pathways Bus lurched to a bouncing halt in a -small Adirondack mountain town. Peggy Lane rose -from her seat and somewhat shakily managed to collect -her handbag, a small suitcase, a hatbox, two -coats, and her precious tin make-up kit.</p> -<p>“I wonder if I really look like an actress or more -like a walking luggage rack?” she thought excitedly as -she stepped down from the bus. The scene that -greeted her was breath-taking; Peggy gasped aloud -with delight. Before her, Lake Kenabeek lay gleaming -like a jewel in the afternoon sun. Pine trees rose -everywhere and although it was summer there was -a delicious nip and tang in the air. Peggy’s heart -raced with eagerness and the familiar nervous anticipation -she always felt when approaching something -new. She had been hired as resident ingénue for eight -wonderful weeks with her first summer stock company. -Each week she would be playing a different -part, gaining invaluable experience, and learning new -phases of life backstage.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_2">2</div> -<p>“And I got the job all on my own!” Peggy thought -exultantly. “Just by reading for the producers! That -must mean something—at least, it means that I’m -really a professional actress now and don’t have to -depend on friends and ‘contacts’ for my work!” She -smiled happily, taking a deep breath of the fragrant, -pine-scented air.</p> -<p>“Miss Lane?” A voice interrupted Peggy’s thoughts. -She turned and saw a spectacled, studious-looking -boy about seventeen who was wearing dungarees and -a paint-smeared shirt. Offering her a slightly stained -hand, he grinned shyly. “Scene paint,” he explained, -“but it’s clean.”</p> -<p>Peggy could hardly shake his hand, laden down as -she was, and the boy stammered with embarrassment. -“Oh, I’m so sorry—I was so busy looking at you, I -didn’t notice.” He relieved her of some of her bags, -giving her a frankly admiring stare. “You sure look -like a good ingénue!”</p> -<p>“I do?” Peggy beamed.</p> -<p>“Just what I had in mind.” He smiled, taking in -Peggy’s trim little figure, dark chestnut hair and -fresh, mobile face. “I’m Michael Miller, and I have -the jeep waiting to take you to your hotel.”</p> -<p>The jeep had been painted bright blue with an eye-catching -sign on the hood. <span class="sc">Kenabeek Summer Theater</span>, -it proclaimed in large white letters.</p> -<p>“Good advertising,” Michael confided as they deposited -Peggy’s bags in the rear. “But then, you’re -not bad advertising either!” He nodded in the direction -of a few bystanders who were casting curious -glances at Peggy. Peggy smiled back at the townspeople, -and as she climbed into the front seat, her -nervousness unexpectedly dropped away. She was -really here at last, she realized, an actress with a season’s -contract—and suddenly she felt very professional.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_3">3</div> -<p>As they drove carefully up the winding mountain -road, Peggy discovered that Michael was one of three -local boys who were to work as apprentices—helping -the scene designer, doing odd chores, and playing -small parts when needed. Michael’s father was Howard -Miller, a retired theater man, who was to do all -the older character parts during the season.</p> -<p>“Oh, I’ve heard of him!” Peggy exclaimed. “He’s -supposed to be a wonderful actor, and we’re lucky -to have him. You know how hard it is to get good -character men for stock. Michael,” she went on eagerly, -“do you think the theater will be a success?”</p> -<p>Michael considered a moment. “I don’t honestly -know,” he replied thoughtfully. “This is a very small -town, and actually we don’t have a large enough population -to carry a summer theater all on our own. But -one of the ideas behind this venture is to bring in -more summer resort business.”</p> -<p>Peggy nodded. She knew that Richard Wallace, -one of the two young producers, was a resident of -Lake Kenabeek, and wanted to help improve his -town—both culturally and financially.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_4">4</div> -<p>“Of course Richard’s Aunt Hetty is vice-president -of the Chamber of Commerce,” Michael continued, -“and the Chamber of Commerce put up half the -financial backing for the theater. So we do have solid -support there. But some people here resisted the idea -of a group of actors—you know, they think that -actors are a strange, Bohemian breed—” He glanced -at Peggy and laughed. “Bohemian, huh! All they need -is to take one look at you, or any of the other actors -who have come up from New York.”</p> -<p>Peggy smiled gratefully. She knew that a lot of -people didn’t realize what honest, hard work the theater -could be. But obviously this intelligent young -boy had a deep feeling for the profession and knew -that an actress’ life wasn’t only curtain calls and -bouquets after the performance.</p> -<p>“Yes, we do have a lovely group of people,” Peggy -agreed earnestly. She had met most of them in New -York during the tryouts and been impressed, not only -by their acting ability, but by their responsible and -intelligent attitude. “And we have a really good director, -wonderful plays, and at least half the town is behind -us. That should be enough if we work hard!” -she concluded with a twinkle.</p> -<p>Michael turned from the twisting, ribbonlike shore -line and drew up in front of a large, old-fashioned, -rustic building. “Here we are,” he announced grandly, -“Kenabeek Inn! But you’re not in the main building; -your company is staying in the annex.”</p> -<p>Peggy followed him around the side of the inn, -down a little path fringed with fir trees. In a small -clearing, well away from the kitchen noises issuing -from the rear of the inn, Peggy saw a tiny, two-story -building. There was a roofed-over patio outside with -two sofas, some chairs, and a table on which stood a -hot plate and stacked cups and saucers. Peggy smiled -to herself, recognizing the sure sign of an actors’ residence—coffee, -coffee, and more coffee.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_5">5</div> -<p>Rita Stevens came bursting out of the door, a radiant -smile transforming her rather plain features. -“Margaret, ‘Peggy’ Lane—Star of Stage, Screen, Radio, -Television, and Summer Stock! Welcome!” she -cried, running up and giving Peggy a hug.</p> -<p>They grinned at each other happily. “Oh, I’m so -glad to see you!” Rita bubbled. “I’ve been positively -frantic for some female company around here. We’ve -been up for three days and Gus has spent every single -minute at the theater—”</p> -<p>Rita was married to Gus Stevens, the scene designer—a -lucky combination for the company. Although -young, Rita had one of those ageless faces -and a maturity which made her a perfect character -woman. Peggy had liked her the instant they met at -the readings in New York.</p> -<p>“No women?” Peggy asked, “Hasn’t Alison Lord -arrived yet?”</p> -<p>“Oh, no, my deah,” Rita intoned in a stagy accent. -“No, our leading lady is being flown up in someone’s -private plane and isn’t expected until tomorrow -morning.” She waved a hand airily, imitating perfectly -a prima donna.</p> -<p>“Oh, no!” Michael grimaced in disgust. “Is she -really like that?”</p> -<p>“No, Mike,” Peggy said with a laugh, “she’s really -quite friendly and nice—and a very good actress. -Just a little theatrical, but I’m sure you’ll like her.”</p> -<p>“Well, I hope so,” Michael said, obviously still -doubtful. “Look, I’ve got to scoot back to the theater. -May I leave your things here, Peggy?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_6">6</div> -<p>“Oh, I’ll take them, Mike.” Rita grabbed some of -Peggy’s luggage and started up the stairs of the little -house. “See you later, Mike.”</p> -<p>“And thanks for the ride and everything,” Peggy -called after him.</p> -<p>“He’s such a sweet kid,” Rita commented as they -climbed. “A wonderful help to Gus—I have a feeling -Michael may make this business his life work. Here’s -where you live, Peggy!”</p> -<p>They stepped into a tiny white room, sparsely -furnished with only a day bed, a large bureau, a folding -screen, straight chair, and a bedside table.</p> -<p>“The manager of the inn must know something -about summer stock companies,” Rita observed ruefully. -“Obviously he has a good idea of just how -much time we’ll be spending in our rooms.”</p> -<p>Peggy looked at her questioningly and Rita laughed. -“It’s your first season, I know—but just you wait and -see!”</p> -<p>“My trunk!” Peggy interrupted with a sudden disturbing -thought. “I sent it ahead by Railway Express. -Hasn’t it come?”</p> -<p>“Right here, madame.” Rita folded back the screen -and revealed Peggy’s large, black wardrobe trunk, -which was somewhat dented and worn, parts of old -labels still sticking to it here and there. “You know, -for a girl who hasn’t done stock before, or been on the -road, this trunk is really strange. What did you do?” -she asked with a teasing smile. “Stick on labels, and -tear them off, and then jump up and down on it -wielding a hammer?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_7">7</div> -<p>Peggy hooted. “Rita Stevens, you have a very suspicious -mind! I want you to know that this trunk -belonged to a friend of my father’s—a wonderful -woman who was in the theater years ago.” Peggy’s -face softened wistfully. “And I imagine that this battered -old trunk has seen more drama—on stage and -off—than we can even imagine.”</p> -<p>The girls looked at it thoughtfully, a picture of the -old, romantic days of the theater—great plays, great -producers, great stars—all the golden history of the -stage firing their imagination.</p> -<p>Peggy broke the spell, “Well, anyway, May Berriman -gave it to me. She runs the rooming house where -I live in New York, you know. And believe me, I’m -grateful! Besides needing a trunk, I think of it as a -symbol of good luck. Some time soon, Rita, would -you mind taking a look at my wardrobe? I think I -brought enough, but I’d like to be sure.”</p> -<p>“I’d love to,” Rita said. “But now let me show you -where everything is in our little annex, and then you’d -better rest awhile. I’m sure you’re tired, and we have -a company call tonight.”</p> -<p>Alison Lord would be in the room across the hall -from Peggy. Rita and Gus were also upstairs, on the -opposite side of the house. Danny Dunn, Chris Hill -and Chuck Crosby, the director, were all downstairs. -The patio was community property for coffee, line -rehearsals, and just plain relaxation. It seemed like -a good arrangement. Rita showed Peggy where she -could shower and freshen up and said she would call -her in time for dinner.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_8">8</div> -<p>But Peggy was too keyed up to take a real nap. -She sat on the edge of her bed, thinking of all the -steps that had led her here, to this place, at this time. -Her love of acting, the school plays, the productions -in college, coming to New York, the long, hard work -at the Dramatic Academy and in the Penthouse Theater. -She was grateful for a private room where she -could be quiet and think.</p> -<p>She remembered her home town of Rockport, Wisconsin, -and suddenly had a vision of that other gay -little bedroom where she had often sat quietly and -thought—much as she was doing now. She remembered -her mother’s kind, attractive face and her encouragement -and understanding. Her father, too, -would be glad to hear of this job, Peggy thought, and -would probably run an article about her in his paper, -the <i>Rockport Eagle</i>. She smiled, visualizing the headline—<span class="sc">Local -Girl Signed in New York</span>—or something -like that. Thomas Lane was a good newspaper -man and would try to “hook” them with the headline. -Nothing so simple as <span class="sc">Local Girl Makes Good</span>.</p> -<p>Peggy promised herself to write them good long -letters as soon as possible. And she should write to -May Berriman, and to her housemate in New York, -Amy Preston. Well, there was a lot to do—and a lot -ahead. Peggy sighed and opened a suitcase to change -into something fresh for the evening.</p> -<p>After dinner, Peggy, Rita, and her young husband, -Gus, walked up the road to the theater. Gus had -joined them for dinner in the little roadside restaurant -where the cast had made arrangements for meals -at a percentage off the regular cost.</p> -<p>“Mrs. Brady, who runs the place, is anxious to do -all she can for the theater,” Rita explained.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_9">9</div> -<p>“To say nothing of the extra customers she hopes to -attract by having real actors in her dining room,” Gus -added. “Not that I’m a candidate for glamour, you -understand—”</p> -<p>The girls laughed. Gus had hastily donned a clean -shirt and a fresh pair of blue jeans, but the unmistakable -signs of sheer hard work still showed on his -pleasant, tanned face.</p> -<p>Rita squeezed his hand affectionately as they hurried -up the road. “I do wish you’d let up a little,” she -said. “After all, we do have nine days before opening.”</p> -<p>“And it’s going to take every minute!” Gus nodded -emphatically. “You haven’t seen the auditorium yet, -have you, Peggy?”</p> -<p>“No, I haven’t. You know,” Peggy confessed, “I was -really disappointed when I learned that we were -playing in the high school. I had visions of a rustic -barn with candlelight, bats in the wings and mice -for rehearsals—”</p> -<p>“There is one.” Gus chuckled warmly. “Aunt Hetty -has a barn that we can remodel next summer if this -season is a success. But we couldn’t afford to do it -this year. It’s better to rent the school and see what -happens. If it bothers you, Peggy,” he added, looking -at her with amusement, “hold on to the thought that -we’re helping education! We are, too. The school -needs the money.”</p> -<p>The front doors of the school auditorium faced the -highway. A large sign for the theater gleamed brightly -under the floodlights that played on it. “It’s never too -early to advertise,” Gus observed as they walked to -the back of the building.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_10">10</div> -<p>Entering the stage door, they came through the -wings and walked out on a dark stage, only a single -worklight throwing a white circle on the bare boards. -The heavy drapes were pulled back, framing the -empty house, the vacant seats ghostlike in the silence.</p> -<p>“Well, where is everybody?” Peggy gasped in the -eerie quiet.</p> -<p>Gus and Rita roared. “We just thought you’d like -to see the stage, Peggy,” Gus laughed.</p> -<p>“You didn’t think we were going to rehearse tonight, -did you?” Rita teased, and then took Peggy’s -hand. “Come on, dear, we’re only kidding. Everybody’s -down here.”</p> -<p>They crossed the stage, descended some stairs, and -entered a door that led directly into the school gym. -“Here’s our ingénue,” Rita called as she ushered -Peggy in, “ready to work!”</p> -<p>Peggy blinked, coming into the sudden light and -busy scene. The gym was bright as daytime. A huge -canvas ground cloth covered the floor and several -people knelt, beside cans, buckets, and paintbrushes, -over the scenery flats that were strewn from one end -of the gym to the other. Peggy had difficulty recognizing -anyone. They were all spotted and paint-smeared, -in a variety of strange work clothes.</p> -<p>“Hi!” someone called, raising a hand with a dripping -brush. Peggy peered intently at the slight figure -and dark hair, and recognized Chuck Crosby, their -intense young director. “Get to work,” he ordered -with a smile and went back to his painting.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_11">11</div> -<p>A well-built young man with a heavy mass of light-brown -hair rose with his can and beckoned to her. -Peggy picked her way through buckets and flats, following -him.</p> -<p>“Danny Dunn!” she said with a shock of surprise. -“How on earth am I supposed to know you under that -disguise?” Danny was to do juvenile and some character -parts for the company. Now he looked like a -clown as he smiled at her with a paint-dotted mouth.</p> -<p>“Tomorrow is another day!” he quoted dramatically. -“Tomorrow and tomorrow—I can hardly wait! -By the way, sorry I couldn’t join you all for dinner, -but I just had a sandwich here. Tell me everything -tomorrow—if I’m still alive.” He made a face, “Here, -ingénue, fill a can.”</p> -<p>In a clear corner near the wall, Michael Miller sat -hunched over a hot plate with a bubbling pot of melting -glue. He looked like an ancient alchemist as he -stirred and poured, mixing paint, whiting, and glue -into large buckets.</p> -<p>“The white cliffs of Dover,” Michael muttered romantically, -taking a bag of powdered chalk and measuring -it into his caldron.</p> -<p>“Sure, double, double, and all that,” Danny replied, -nodding kindly. “Well, just keep steady, old chap, -we’re all a little tired tonight.”</p> -<p>“It really is the white cliffs of Dover,” Michael -protested as Danny walked away. “For the ground -coat,” he added, peering up at Peggy through his -steaming glasses. “Here, have fun.” He waved her -away.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_12">12</div> -<p>For the next four hours Peggy knelt on her hands -and knees, laboriously painting flats. These were -frames of white pine, over which was stretched unbleached -muslin, like a painter’s canvas. They had -already been sized with a solution of glue and water -until they were drum-tight. Over the ground coat -that Peggy was painting, Gus would design wallpaper -for interiors, fireplaces, outdoor scenes. Peggy’s back -ached as she worked silently. No one said a word.</p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p02.jpg" alt="Painting flats." width="500" height="286" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_13">13</div> -<p>“A funny way to begin,” thought Peggy, sighing. -She had expected a line reading, even some work on -stage. “And Chuck hardly said how-do-you-do, and -I don’t know half the people here.” She glanced -around, guessing that the young boys must be Michael -Miller’s friends, and that older man by the -other wall his father, Howard Miller. He noticed -Peggy looking at him and smiled.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_14">14</div> -<p>“Well,” Peggy decided, acknowledging him with -a sigh, “if a man his age thinks nothing of working -like this until all hours of the night, I guess I can do -it too!” She worked on with renewed energy. By the -time all the flats were finished, it was after midnight.</p> -<p>“Rehearsal promptly at nine o’clock in the morning,” -Chuck announced crisply as they cleaned up -and prepared to go home.</p> -<p>“Heavens to Betsy!” Peggy thought wearily as she -lay in her bed, her back aching, muscles jumping -from the unaccustomed effort. “Now I know why -everyone was so quiet. They’d been at it all day—and -I feel like this after only a few hours!” Her head spun -dizzily as she closed her eyes. “Well, I’m part of a -company,” she mused dreamily, “and that’s what -counts. Even if I don’t like the parts I’m given—even -if I have to do other things than act.” Plays and -parts and costumes danced before her like a mirage. -“I guess this is summer stock, all right!” she thought -as she fell asleep.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_15">15</div> -<h2 id="c2"><span class="h2line1">II</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">A Serious Complication</span></h2> -<p>“Not quite so serious, Peggy.” Chuck Crosby pulled -on a lock of his straight, black hair as he listened to -her read. “If you don’t have a slight tongue-in-cheek -attitude, it’s not going to be funny. She is an earnest -young girl, but it’s got to be exaggerated in a comic -way.”</p> -<p>Peggy tried again. “Dad, I’m disappointed in you,” -she read. “The world’s on fire and you’re occupied -with a cigarette lighter!”</p> -<p>“Thank you,” Howard Miller answered dryly. He -was reading the part of Peggy’s father in their opening -show, <i>Dear Ruth</i>.</p> -<p>The cast was having its first line rehearsal on the -sunny patio of the annex. Peggy had awakened excitedly -with the expectation of working on stage, -only to find that the company would be at the annex -all day. She had wondered, in a resigned way, if she -would ever see the stage at all. But now, as they progressed -to the second scene of Act One, her disappointment -was forgotten. She was concentrating on -her part of Miriam, “Dear Ruth’s” younger sister.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_16">16</div> -<p>“We can <i>use</i> you,” Peggy read on, addressing her -father. “We can use anybody we can get!” She read -the last line in a hopeless, adolescent fashion, timing -it carefully, and the cast spontaneously laughed.</p> -<p>“That’s it,” Chuck cried. “That’s the quality I -want.”</p> -<p>A pretty local girl, Mary Hopkins, who was playing -the part of the maid, Dora, didn’t come in on her cue. -Everyone looked at her as she nervously rattled her -papers, looking quite lost.</p> -<p>“That’s your cue, Mary,” Chuck said patiently. -“Miriam says, ‘We can use anybody we can get,’ and -you enter.”</p> -<p>“I don’t see it,” Mary replied helplessly.</p> -<p>“Right here.” Rita was sitting beside her and -pointed it out. “Anybody we can get.”</p> -<p>“But that’s not the whole line—oh, I see.” Mary -blushed.</p> -<p>“We’re using sides, Mary,” Chuck said kindly. They -were half sheets of paper bound like a small pamphlet. -“I have the master script here with the whole -play, but you’ll find only about four or five words of -the preceding speech printed on your sides. You can -fill in the other words if you find it easier.”</p> -<p>Peggy gave Mary an understanding smile. She had -been busy writing in speeches herself, as she found -the short sides difficult to work from. Peggy liked to -think of the play as a whole, but she knew that some -actors worked better from short cue lines, and that -for stock, with so many different parts to learn each -week, sides were often faster.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_17">17</div> -<p>Rita read the part of the mother with assurance -and humor. She made a perfect partner for Howard -Miller, and one could tell that she was used to this -type of part. Miriam made her exit, and then Ruth -appeared for a short scene with her father and -mother. Before her next cue, Peggy had time to examine, -with a certain fascination, their leading lady.</p> -<p>Alison Lord had arrived that morning, making a -grand and breathless entrance at exactly nine A.M. -Her luggage was still stacked in the patio, and -peering at it, Peggy raised her eyebrows. “And I -thought I had a lot!” She wondered how many -costumes Alison expected to wear on stage, but judging -by the stunning outfit she was wearing for rehearsal, -Alison must intend to dress as glamorously -off stage as on. Her bright auburn hair was caught up -under an eye-catching sun hat of fringed red straw. -The color exactly matched the sleeveless blouse she -wore over a beautiful pair of beige, basket-weave -slacks. With her enormous straw bag, gay sandals, -and dark glasses, she looked like a visiting star. And a -really beautiful girl underneath all that, Peggy -thought, noticing the careful make-up that enhanced -Alison’s features.</p> -<p>Peggy glanced down at her simple, peasant skirt -and blouse. It was pretty, but hardly spectacular like -Alison’s attire. For a moment she wished that she had -thought of bringing more colorful everyday clothes—was -it good advertising for the theater perhaps?—but -then she laughed at herself. “You’re just a little bit -envious, Peggy Lane, and you know it! Now just forget -about clothes, and tend to your knitting!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_18">18</div> -<p>Her cue came, and she jumped back into her -part with gusto, really enjoying it now that she had -caught the flavor of Miriam. She found that playing -with Alison was fun. She was even better than Peggy -remembered. She had a certain awareness of herself, -a special “here I am” quality that would make an audience -notice her. She wasn’t a very deep actress, but -she had poise and presence and moved the play -along.</p> -<p>Chuck was pleased with the reading. He looked at -his watch and called a break. “Take five. Chris ought -to be here any minute, and there’s no point in going -on now without him.”</p> -<p>The cast paused for coffee, waiting for their leading -man to arrive. Chris Hill, who was to play the -part of Bill opposite Alison in <i>Dear Ruth</i>, was the -only cast member Peggy hadn’t met. He had been -held up in New York with a last-minute television -show, and was due on the ten-thirty bus.</p> -<p>“What’s he like?” Peggy asked Rita as she broke off -a piece of doughnut to share with her. The cast kept -snacks in an old-fashioned icebox on the patio.</p> -<p>“Oh, he’s lovely!” Rita grinned mischievously. -“He’s quite tall and very blond, tanned and terribly -handsome, blue eyes, a great smile, romantic—”</p> -<p>“Really! He’s all that, hm?” Peggy teased back. -“Well, all I want to know is, can he act?”</p> -<p>“He certainly can. I’ve worked with him before—” -Rita looked at Peggy curiously. “It will be very interesting -to see your reaction to Chris. It’s a shame that -you didn’t have a chance to meet him before and -more or less prepare yourself.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_19">19</div> -<p>“Oh, Rita!” Peggy exclaimed, shaking her head in -protest. She didn’t know what a picture she was with -the sunlight striking her dark hair and framing her -pretty face. Rita watched her, noticing the fine, high -cheekbones, straight nose, and soft, wide mouth.</p> -<p>“You really have a captivating quality, Peggy,” -Rita said thoughtfully. “I wouldn’t be surprised if -Chris Hill is quite taken with you.”</p> -<p>“With me?” Peggy blurted in astonishment. “Oh, -Rita, I haven’t even met him yet, and anyway,” she -added, “I’m not really interested in anyone.” She was -remembering Randy Brewster in New York, and all -the fun they’d had together in dramatic school and -in the off-Broadway production they’d been involved -in. Kind, steady Randy, with the marvelous sense of -humor. It would have to be somebody quite wonderful -to share the special place that Randy occupied in -Peggy’s thoughts. “Why, there’s no time for romance -here, Rita,” she said. “We’re all too busy. And besides, -I should think Alison would be more his type.”</p> -<p>“Um-hm. Maybe,” Rita interrupted rather mysteriously -and nudged Peggy. “You’ll soon have a chance -to find out.”</p> -<p>Following her glance, Peggy looked up the little -path and saw Chris Hill, a duffel bag slung over one -shoulder, hurrying down with long, energetic strides. -His appearance was certainly everything Rita had -said and more. She glanced at Rita, her eyes wide, -and Rita returned a bland “I-told-you-so” expression.</p> -<p>Chris ran the last few yards, dumped his bag carelessly -on the patio, and with a wide, completely engaging -smile, announced, “Reporting for duty—on -the dot, I hope!” He shook Chuck’s hand. “Svengali, -how are you? You picked a beautiful spot—it’s just -great. Alison!” He leaned over her chair, planting an -audible kiss on her cheek. Peggy’s eyes popped.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_20">20</div> -<p>“Doesn’t mean a thing,” Rita whispered to Peggy. -“Watch.”</p> -<p>“Darling!” Alison replied extravagantly. “What -kept you so long? Did you come up by dogcart?”</p> -<p>Chris noticed Rita and ran over, swooping her up -in a big bear hug and giving her a kiss, too. “My favorite -actress!” he laughed, standing back and looking -at her with delight. “And where’s her favorite husband? -Don’t tell me—he’s up to his ears in flats! -When do I see him? Don’t tell me—probably never!”</p> -<p>Rita laughed. “Such energy, Chris! How do you do -it after all night on a bus? Chris, here’s someone you -haven’t met—our ingénue, Peggy Lane. Star of Stage, -Screen, Radio—”</p> -<p>“Television and Summer Stock!” Chris finished for -her. “Don’t mind us, Peggy, it’s an old joke from -another summer company. Well!”</p> -<p>He stopped and Peggy couldn’t tell whether he -was pausing for breath or from the interest in her -which his look seemed to indicate.</p> -<p>“Well!” he said again, and there was something in -his voice that caused an unexpected flurry in Peggy’s -emotions.</p> -<p>“Hello,” Peggy said tremulously. She would never -know what his next words might have been, because -just then Chuck interrupted with a call to resume -the reading.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_21">21</div> -<p>The company sat down again, and Peggy forgot -Chris Hill, the young man, as she listened to Chris -Hill, the actor. He read the part of Bill with so much -energy and interest one would think he had just returned -from a long vacation instead of a grueling bus -trip. He <i>was</i> a good actor, Peggy thought. He brought -a special kind of magic to the play, and as they finished -the first act, Peggy had a sudden feeling that -<i>Dear Ruth</i> would be a hit. Chuck couldn’t have -chosen a better opening bill for the cast. It was perfect -for their company, and she looked at him with -renewed respect.</p> -<p>After lunch the furniture was rearranged on the -patio as it would be on stage. Chuck wanted to block -the first act. Pencils in hand, they busily scribbled on -their sides, marking movements as Chuck directed -them. He had blocked the play in advance, but it was -still a long process, as, with the actors in front of him, -he saw many necessary changes.</p> -<p>Mary Hopkins had to be told that Stage Right was -her right, and not the right of the audience. She -caught on quickly, though, and very soon Peggy -noticed that she was lightly penciling in initials—C.U.L. -and D.R., instead of writing out “Cross Up -Left” and “Down Right.”</p> -<p>Danny Dunn was enjoying himself enormously. He -had the part of Albert, a stuffy, amusing character -who is engaged to Ruth before Bill captures her heart. -Peggy was struck by this boy’s amazing versatility. -She had read with him in New York and knew how -well he did juvenile parts. Yet, here he was, playing -a slightly older man and doing a perfectly wonderful -job. Danny had a face almost like putty; he could -do anything with it he wished, and Peggy realized -that here was a true actor—who would never be -typed, who could play anything he was given.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_22">22</div> -<p>“Hello, Mother. Hello, Dad.” Danny made his -entrance, and Peggy stifled a laugh. He was really -very funny.</p> -<p>They finished the second scene of Act One and -Chuck called, “Curtain!” There was a sound of hands -clapping, and a voice said, “Bravo!” Peggy looked -around. She had been so engrossed in her work that -she hadn’t noticed Richard Wallace standing near the -patio, looking on. Beside him stood a tall, white-haired -woman with strong, craggy features, and -sparkling blue eyes framed by a network of tiny lines.</p> -<p>“What a wonderful face!” Peggy exclaimed to herself, -realizing that this must be the famous Aunt -Hetty.</p> -<p>“Bravo!” Richard repeated in a deep voice. He was -a large young man, mature for his age, with the same -observant blue eyes as his aunt.</p> -<p>“It’s a pity to think that all this work may go to -waste,” he said bitterly, coming on to their outdoor -stage.</p> -<p>There was a stunned silence. Peggy didn’t know -what to think—was this Richard’s way of kidding? -Chuck got up to give Aunt Hetty a seat, and plunking -herself down heavily, she stated matter-of-factly, -“You’re all so good—so much better than I expected—I’ll -hate to see you go!”</p> -<p>The cast looked blank. Chuck was struck dumb for -a moment, and then he suddenly exploded. “What are -you talking about? We’re having a rehearsal here and -this is not the time for idiotic jokes!” He looked at -Aunt Hetty and controlled himself. “Excuse me, but -really, Richard knows better than to interrupt us like -this.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_23">23</div> -<p>“It’s no joke, young man,” Aunt Hetty said bluntly. -“Richard, tell them all about it.” She peered closely -at Chuck. “And you ought to know better, Mr. -Crosby, than to think we’d intrude for anything less -than a very good reason!”</p> -<p>“My!” Peggy thought. “It certainly isn’t wise to -cross Aunt Hetty. She’s a stubborn old girl. No wonder -she got all that backing from the Chamber of -Commerce—they could hardly say no.”</p> -<p>“I imagine you haven’t seen this,” Richard said, -holding up a newspaper so the cast could see the -front page.</p> -<p>The <i>Kenabeek Gazette</i>, Peggy read on the masthead, -and right underneath was a headline: <span class="sc">Theater -In School Illegal</span>.</p> -<p>“I hate to bring you bad news,” Richard said as the -cast gathered around, “but the man who was responsible -for this may be right.”</p> -<p>Peggy looked at the bottom of the column and saw -that it was signed “Ford Birmingham.”</p> -<p>“No, that’s just the man who wrote it,” Richard -said, noticing Peggy’s glance. “Ford Birmingham covers -art, music, theater, and local features for the paper—he’s -supposed to write our reviews, too. But the man -behind this article is either Max Slade or his brother -William—or both. The Slade brothers run the local -movie house and they’ve opposed this theater from -the beginning, thinking it will affect their business—”</p> -<p>“But it shouldn’t.” Peggy couldn’t help interrupting, -and Richard agreed with her.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_24">24</div> -<p>“No, of course, it shouldn’t. Our theater could even -help their business by exposing more people to entertainment -and thereby drawing them to the movies, -too. However, the Slade brothers don’t see it that -way.”</p> -<p>“The Slade brothers don’t see much of anything at -all,” commented Aunt Hetty brusquely. “Not even -their own movies, from what I gather. If they used -better judgment in selecting films, they might have -better business.”</p> -<p>“Why, I’ve known Max Slade for years,” said Howard -Miller, coming over to Aunt Hetty. “I realized -that he didn’t exactly approve of the summer theater, -but what’s all this about our not being legal?” He ran -a hand through his handsome, graying hair, frowning.</p> -<p>“Read it and weep, Howard,” Aunt Hetty responded. -“Apparently they’ve found a loophole.”</p> -<p>“The article claims that a high school cannot legally -be used by a profit-making organization such -as a summer theater,” Richard explained.</p> -<p>“But we’re helping the school by paying rent to -them,” Chuck protested.</p> -<p>“Sure, but the Slade brothers aren’t concerned -about the school,” Richard continued. “They’re thinking -of themselves and are willing to use any means to -get us out of town. This article says that we will be -taken to court if we don’t suspend our operation.”</p> -<p>“Can they?” asked Chris Hill. “I mean, wouldn’t -the case be thrown out?”</p> -<p>“No,” Richard answered seriously, “I don’t think -it would be thrown out, because there’s a chance—a -good chance—that they’re right!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_25">25</div> -<p>“Marvelous!” Alison Lord exclaimed ironically. -“Just wonderful! And I guess we’re just supposed to -sit here and take it!”</p> -<p>“No, why should we?” Peggy rushed in with a sudden -thought. “Why can’t we stop the case before it -even gets to court?”</p> -<p>“Right!” Richard smiled at her. “That’s exactly -what I’m going to do, Peggy. I’m flying up to Albany -tonight to see the commissioner of education. But,” -he said earnestly, “his decision may go against us, and -you’ll all have to be prepared for that. That’s really -why I’m here. If we can’t play in the school, we can’t -play at all this year. I want to know if you’re willing -to go on rehearsing on the slight chance that we’ll be -able to open. I’ll probably be gone for several days, -and you may be working for nothing. It’s up to you.”</p> -<p>A determined chorus of voices responded.</p> -<p>“Of course, we’ll work.”</p> -<p>“I want to go on.”</p> -<p>“We’ll open or else—”</p> -<p>“I’d like to meet this Max Slade—”</p> -<p>Mary Hopkins’ little voice trailed on after everyone -else’s, “... and besides all the boxes of crackerjack, -I see that the script calls for dozens of bunches -of lilacs. I may be able to make them for you”—she -faltered, a little embarrassed—“I—I’m kind of good -with my hands.”</p> -<p>Everyone applauded, and Aunt Hetty came over to -give her a hug. “Good girl, Mary. You sound like the -other professionals.” She beamed at the cast, displaying -an unexpected warmth, and then, as if remembering -a role, barked gruffly, “Back to work, then!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_26">26</div> -<p>“Why, she’s really soft and sentimental under that -brusque exterior,” Peggy thought, watching Aunt -Hetty walk stiffly away. “She’s in love with this theater -and it would break her heart to see it fold.”</p> -<p>Everyone wished Richard luck in the state capital -as he walked away toward the interview that meant -everything to this little group of actors.</p> -<p>Chuck Crosby turned to face them, and with a -resolute look that reflected the feelings of all, he -firmly called, “Places!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_27">27</div> -<h2 id="c3"><span class="h2line1">III</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">A Broadcast</span></h2> -<p>The next few days were almost a mirage of feverish -activity. Never had Peggy worked so hard! Rehearsals -morning and afternoon, helping Gus with the scenery -at night, and always, in back of everyone’s mind, the -big question—would the theater open at all?</p> -<p>“What do you think, Rita?” Peggy asked late one -night when the two exhausted girls returned to her -room. They had stayed late at the theater helping -Gus, for tomorrow with the set finally up, the cast -would have its first rehearsal on stage.</p> -<p>“I think we’re going to open!” Rita answered hopefully. -“At least I’m working with that idea. It is disturbing -not to hear from Richard again, though.”</p> -<p>Richard had wired the company from Albany the -disquieting news that the commissioner of education -was off on a fishing trip and could not be reached. -Now, on top of everything else, a new problem—would -the commissioner return in time? And if he -did, would Richard be able to persuade him to come -to a favorable decision? It was already Sunday, and -<i>Dear Ruth</i> was scheduled to open Thursday.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_28">28</div> -<p>Thinking of all this, Peggy sighed loudly, unconsciously -repeating the heavy stage sigh she used in -the play.</p> -<p>“All right, Miriam,” Rita laughed, “better be quiet -or you’ll wake our leading lady!”</p> -<p>Alison had returned to the annex early after rehearsal, -saying that it was about time she had some -sleep.</p> -<p>“I do think she might have stayed to help, too,” -Peggy whispered indignantly. “After all, we’re all in -this together, and I’m sure we’re all equally tired. -Gus needed the help—he’s still up there, for goodness -sake!”</p> -<p>“Well,” Rita said, “that’s Alison. And maybe she -didn’t realize how much was involved here.”</p> -<p>“Then why did she come?” Peggy persisted. “She -must have known beforehand that she’d be asked to -do other things besides act.”</p> -<p>“Oh, a good company to work with, I suppose, and -a good director and parts that she wanted to play. -Maybe she’s interested in the leading man!” Rita -laughed softly. “If there’s another reason, I’m sure -I don’t know it. Peggy,” she added eagerly, “while -we’re here, why don’t I take a look at your wardrobe? -Unless you’re ready for bed—”</p> -<p>“I couldn’t sleep right now on a bed of down!” -Peggy agreed enthusiastically as she opened her -trunk. “I’m too tired, and it always takes me awhile -to wind down. Gosh! I wonder if I’ll really be using -all these things!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_29">29</div> -<p>The trunk stood flat against the wall, rather like a -second bureau, with drawers on one side and hangers -on the other. “I tried to think of everything,” Peggy -said. “If we don’t open, this certainly will be a monument -to wasted effort!”</p> -<p>The girls worked quickly through Peggy’s wardrobe. -She had tried to bring an average of three -changes apiece for eight different plays, knowing that -summer audiences don’t like to see actresses wearing -the same thing twice. Besides appearing in a different -costume each time, Peggy had to think of the seasons -of the plays and be prepared to dress appropriately -for spring, summer, fall, and winter.</p> -<p>Suits, dresses, jumpers, skirts, evening gowns, -housecoats, sweaters, blouses, shoes, hats, coats, -aprons, scarfs! Rita exclaimed, “My! If there’s anything -you haven’t remembered, Peggy, I’d like to -know what it is. You’re beautifully prepared. It looks -as if I might be borrowing from you! And this would -look lovely on Alison.” She lifted a silver-sequined -jacket from a bed of tissue paper. “I can just see her -in it, making a spectacular entrance!”</p> -<p>“Why, I’d be glad to lend it to her,” Peggy said. -“I borrowed it myself. But is that done?” She was -surprised. “I mean, we all do borrow from each other -at the Gramercy Arms—my home in New York. In -fact, that’s how I managed this wardrobe. I just -couldn’t have done it without help. But somehow, -well,” she confessed, “I didn’t think it would be very -professional in stock.”</p> -<p>“Pooh,” Rita chuckled. “Nobody ever has all the -things she needs in stock, Peggy. We all borrow from -each other.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_30">30</div> -<p>“I doubt if Alison will want anything, anyway,” -Peggy said, reflecting on the piles of luggage Alison -had brought. “Oh, Rita, here we are, talking as if the -theater will actually open, and for all we know, -Thursday night may come and we’ll all be on the bus -going back to New York!”</p> -<p>She sank dejectedly on her bed while Rita carefully -folded the little jacket. “We might be,” Rita -conceded cheerfully, “but I don’t think we will! -You’re forgetting your trunk, Peggy. Remember? -Your symbol of good luck!” She patted it with a smile -as she left the room, leaving Peggy some of her contagious -optimism.</p> -<p class="tb">On stage at last! Peggy could hardly believe it. She -ran lightly up the steps from the auditorium floor, -crossed the stage, tried each piece of furniture, moving -back and forth—</p> -<p>“What on earth are you doing?” Alison called from -the front row where she was seated, holding a coffee -container while she waited for rehearsal to begin.</p> -<p>“Getting the feel of the set,” Peggy called happily -as she ran to the stairs up left, crossed down right, -and exited. “Where’s the prop phone?” she asked, reappearing -from the wings.</p> -<p>“Michael’s out getting props,” Gus answered, coming -on stage with a paintbrush to put the finishing -touches on the banister.</p> -<p>Peggy ran down to the auditorium floor again, -walked up the aisle, and stood looking at the stage. -Gus had done a beautiful job, she realized with a -thrill. For their opening show an effective set was -important, and Gus had transformed the flats with -a miracle of paint and imagination. The room was so -realistic that Peggy felt she could touch the molding -on the walls.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_31">31</div> -<p>“You’d think you never saw a stage before in your -life,” Alison commented lazily, getting up and stretching.</p> -<p>“I feel like this every time,” Peggy said. “There’s -something absolutely magical about a good set—like -moving into a brand-new home. I love it!”</p> -<p>“Well, let’s just hope it will be home for a week,” -Alison remarked. “Personally, I have my doubts.”</p> -<p>“Act One,” Chuck called, and the cast scrambled -for the wings. “Places.”</p> -<p>At noon, Aunt Hetty presented herself at the theater -and asked for two people to do a radio interview -at the station in Merion Falls about twenty miles -away.</p> -<p>“Anybody,” she said briskly, “as long as they’re part -of the resident company. John Hamilton wants people -from New York—and we’ll be gone all afternoon, -Chuck, so give me someone you don’t need.”</p> -<p>“I need everybody,” Chuck said with a laugh, “but -advertising is important too, so—let’s see.” He looked -around at the cast. “Peggy, you’ll go—I need the rest -of the family and Albert, but there should be a man -along, too—Chris! Your scenes with Ruth are going -well—I won’t need you today. Go along with Peggy.”</p> -<p>“Have fun, you lucky people,” Danny called after -them. “This may be your first and last day off!”</p> -<p>“And don’t let on that there’s any doubt about -opening!” Chuck reminded Chris and Peggy. “Tell -them we’re doing fine!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_32">32</div> -<p>“Just fine!” Alison echoed, smiling grimly. Looking -back at her, Peggy realized with sudden surprise -that Alison wanted to go too! Why? Peggy wondered. -Surely she didn’t think a local radio show was that -important to her career? And then Peggy recalled -what Rita had said. She looked curiously at Chris as -he walked along beside her to Aunt Hetty’s car. -Maybe Rita was right and Alison <i>was</i> interested in -the leading man! Oh, well, it wasn’t any of her business, -anyway, Peggy told herself as she got into the -car.</p> -<p>“Sorry to take you off like this so suddenly,” Aunt -Hetty was saying, “but it’s quite important. I promised -Richard to get in as much advertising as I could -while he’s gone, and John Hamilton requested this -interview on the spur of the moment.”</p> -<p>“Will he ask us to play a scene?” Chris questioned.</p> -<p>“Oh, I don’t think so. I imagine he’ll just want you -to talk about what you’ve done in the theater—personal -stuff. Now you two hush and don’t bother me -with questions. I like to keep my mind on the road!”</p> -<p>Peggy and Chris exchanged amused glances. Aunt -Hetty drove as carefully and slowly as if she were on -eggshells. Peggy could see why they would indeed -be all day getting to Merion Falls and she sat back -with resignation to enjoy the scenery. Chris winced as -he watched Aunt Hetty at the wheel, holding it so -tightly with both hands that her knuckles were actually -white. He was itching to drive himself, and -Peggy smiled as she watched his inner struggle—whether -or not to ask. Aunt Hetty won. Looking at -her determined shoulders from the back seat, he -evidently decided that she would never relinquish the -wheel. Chris sighed in defeat and slumped back. As -he met Peggy’s twinkling eyes, they both had to -cover their laughter.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_33">33</div> -<p>A good while later, when they finally reached -Merion Falls, there was barely time to find the radio -station and John Hamilton’s studio. Aunt Hetty -plumped herself down in the booth with the engineer, -and Peggy and Chris took seats at a little table with -Mr. Hamilton and a microphone.</p> -<p>Looking at the large clock over the booth, Mr. -Hamilton shook his head. “Four minutes to go,” he -said anxiously. “I wish we had more time to prepare, -but this will have to do. I’ll just ask you both about -your background, and then you can plug your theater -all you like. We want to hear about your players and -something about the plays if there’s time—”</p> -<p>“Can I hear some voices?” the engineer’s voice interrupted -him from the booth.</p> -<p>Peggy and Chris spoke into the microphone while -the engineer tested sound. “Okay. Fine,” he said. -“One minute—” They watched his hand, held up in -the air while the minute hand of the clock made a -full circle, and then he brought his arm down sharply.</p> -<p>“Good afternoon. This is John Hamilton again, with -another interview of interest for residents of the lake -area—”</p> -<p>Peggy was impressed, listening to this suave young -man and the competent way he handled himself at -the microphone. She felt a beginning, just a twinge, -of mike fright, but then Mr. Hamilton introduced her, -and as she said a few words, Peggy felt easier. As the -interview went on, she was fascinated to hear details -of Chris Hill’s background that she hadn’t known.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_34">34</div> -<p>“Then you’ve really been a professional actor for -only two years or so?” Mr. Hamilton was asking Chris.</p> -<p>“Yes, since I was discharged from the Army—but -before that, of course, I did a lot of work in college -and little theaters—and in the Army I was attached -to Special Services overseas.”</p> -<p>“Soldier shows?”</p> -<p>“Partly, but my main job was ferreting out good -civilian actors to work with us—to bring about a better -feeling between the local population and the -Army.”</p> -<p>John Hamilton laughed. “Sounds as if you were -doing shows in two languages—”</p> -<p>“Oh, no,” Chris said easily. “They had to be English-speaking, -of course. It was a wonderful experience -all around, but then I was in a skiing accident in -Bavaria. Broke my leg. That finished both the job -and the Army for me, and I came straight to New -York.”</p> -<p>Mr. Hamilton handled the questions and conversation -so skillfully that soon Peggy and Chris almost -forgot this was a radio interview. They spoke about -theater and sketched the plot of <i>Dear Ruth</i>, talking -up Alison Lord as the star of the show.</p> -<p>“And the idea behind this theater, as I understand -it,” Mr. Hamilton said, “is to attract more visitors to -our area, isn’t that right?”</p> -<p>Peggy and Chris agreed enthusiastically.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_35">35</div> -<p>“Then certainly it should be a good thing for Lake -Kenabeek,” Mr. Hamilton went on, “and I want to -wish you a lot of luck. But I’ve heard a rumor recently -that you two might set straight while we have -the opportunity here. People are saying that you are -operating illegally in the high school—”</p> -<p>Peggy gasped, but Hamilton didn’t give them a -chance to reply just then.</p> -<p>“—and that you may not be able to open at all!” he -continued. “Now, what about this rumor? I’m sure -our listening audience would like to hear.” He sat -back and looked at them—“as if we were two fish on -a hook,” Peggy thought, aghast at his question.</p> -<p>In the booth, Aunt Hetty had turned beet red and -looked as though she might explode. Chris’s mouth -tightened and Peggy found that she was becoming -angrier by the moment. Of all the dirty tricks—John -Hamilton asking them here to “plug” their theater, -and then bringing out this issue! But Peggy had had -enough experience with her father’s newspaper to -know how newsmen operated—and she knew how -to counter. Before Chris had a chance to reply, and -in the face of Aunt Hetty gesturing frantically from -the booth to say nothing, Peggy lashed back.</p> -<p>“Oh, yes,” she said quite calmly. “We saw that little -piece in the paper. Rather childish, wasn’t it? Do you -know that if we weren’t renting the auditorium the -high school wouldn’t make a penny this summer? I’m -sure you’ve heard of the great need for a new science -lab. By the way,” she went on in a new vein, “I -wouldn’t be surprised if you could help raise funds -for the school, too—with your radio program. I’m -sure people would be glad to donate to a cause like -that!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_36">36</div> -<p>It was John Hamilton’s turn to flush, which he did, -as they looked at each other like two sparring partners -in a contest. Ignoring Peggy’s thrust, he came back -firmly to the question. “Is it true that the theater may -not open at all?”</p> -<p>In the booth, Peggy could see the engineer signaling -thirty seconds to go. If she hesitated, a lot of -potential theatergoers might tune out this program -thinking of the Kenabeek Summer Theater as a myth, -as a good idea that failed. She couldn’t lie, but perhaps -there was another way. She thought quickly, and -her pretty voice sounded young and gay as it traveled -through the microphone.</p> -<p>“The theater is scheduled to open this Thursday -night, curtain at eight-forty, for <i>Dear Ruth</i>. We’ll be -looking forward to seeing you, Mr. Hamilton, and we -hope your listening audience will be there, too.”</p> -<p>Peggy had timed her speech carefully, and Mr. -Hamilton had barely time to say, “This is John Hamilton, -good day.” The red light blinked off, and they -were off the air!</p> -<p>John Hamilton took out a handkerchief and wiped -his brow. Then he looked at Peggy, laughed good-naturedly, -and shook her hand. “You were a charming -guest! And a tough opponent! But you win, I won’t -say another word about your theater until you do -open—and then I’d like to have you both back.” He -shook Chris’s hand. “I know you were angry, but -that’s the news business. Sorry. I’ll be there for your -opening if I can make it.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_37">37</div> -<p>Aunt Hetty looked grimly at Peggy as they walked -out the studio door. “I hope you knew what you were -doing, young lady,” she said under her breath. “You -shouldn’t have said a thing! If we don’t open, you’ll -have made a laughingstock of my nephew’s name and -mine—to say nothing of the theater!”</p> -<p>Aunt Hetty drove back in a silence so thick that -Peggy and Chris didn’t have the courage to break it. -Peggy felt acutely miserable. Had she done wrong? -She leaned over to Chris and whispered, “What else -could I do? But maybe she’s right. Maybe I should -have let you speak instead. Now I’ve probably messed -everything up!”</p> -<p>“But I would have said the same thing!” Chris -whispered back. “I was <i>mad</i>!” He nodded at Peggy -warmly, and she smiled back. She liked Chris Hill, -there was no question about that. He was impulsive, -but wonderfully kind and engaging.</p> -<p>Aunt Hetty dropped them off in front of the high -school and was about to drive away when Danny -Dunn came racing out of the stage door.</p> -<p>“Wait a minute!” he yelled, tearing over to the car -and waving a piece of paper in the air. “We opened -it,” he panted, handing Aunt Hetty the telegram. “It’s -to you and all of us, but we couldn’t wait. Where’s -that <i>brilliant</i> girl!” He gave Peggy a tremendous pat -on the back. “We listened to you—and we nearly had -heart failure when he pinned you down. There wasn’t -time to call you at the studio, but—”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_38">38</div> -<p>“I suppose I owe you an apology,” Aunt Hetty interrupted, -handing the telegram to Peggy, “but I still -think you were taking a terrible chance. Terrible,” -she repeated, but her eyes were twinkling.</p> -<blockquote> -<p>EVERYTHING OK STOP COMMISSIONER GIVES GO AHEAD -STOP DETAILS ON RETURN TOMORROW STOP HALLELUJAH -RICHARD</p> -</blockquote> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p03.jpg" alt="Chris was still standing beside the car." width="500" height="266" /> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_39">39</div> -<p>“Oh, thank goodness!” Peggy cried. She could have -almost wept with relief, but Danny’s excitement affected -them all, and instead of tears there were hugs -and handshakes and Danny pulling Peggy back to the -theater to display “the most intelligent girl who ever -graced a stock company!”</p> -<p>“Intelligent!” Peggy laughed. “Oh, Danny, just -lucky!”</p> -<p>“Mental telepathy,” Danny insisted, “and that takes -intelligence!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_40">40</div> -<p>“Have everybody come to my house after rehearsal,” -Aunt Hetty called. “We’ll celebrate the good -news. That’s a nice girl,” she remarked to Chris, who -was still standing by the car. “Even if she is a little -hasty. Not that you wouldn’t have said the same -thing.”</p> -<p>Startled, Chris stared at Aunt Hetty, who gave him -an understanding smile. Even in a whisper, it seemed, -there was very little that Aunt Hetty missed.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_41">41</div> -<h2 id="c4"><span class="h2line1">IV</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">A Favorable Decision</span></h2> -<p>When Richard returned from Albany the next day -he couldn’t find enough words to praise Peggy for -what she had said on the radio.</p> -<p>“But your aunt <i>was</i> upset,” Peggy exclaimed, “and -she might have been right! Just suppose we couldn’t -have opened—”</p> -<p>“It wouldn’t have made a bit of difference,” Richard -said. “But if you had said we might not open, -think of all the audience we would have lost!”</p> -<p>“That’s exactly what I was thinking of,” Peggy declared -happily. “That’s why I went ahead.”</p> -<p>Richard called the cast together on stage to tell -them what had happened in Albany. “I got panicky -when I heard that the commissioner was out of town—almost -decided to hire a guide and try to trail him -in the woods! But then he sent a wire from some little -town saying he’d return Monday, so I decided to -wait.”</p> -<p>“By the way,” Chuck interrupted, “you know we -have dress rehearsal tomorrow night, and the next -night we open! Have you sent anything to the papers -yet? Does the town know we’re going to open?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_42">42</div> -<p>Richard gave Chuck an amused “where-do-you-think-I’ve-been” -look. “Mr. Crosby, I sent out at least -six press releases Monday afternoon from Albany. -Not only to Lake Kenabeek, but to the New York -papers, too. The Albany paper is running a long article -on this—it’s an interesting issue, you know. I -wouldn’t be surprised if we get a good press all -around. The Slade brothers may have actually helped -this theater!”</p> -<p>Chris laughed out loud. “I’ll bet they love that -idea!”</p> -<p>“Oh, certainly! They’ll be here with bells on Thursday -night,” Alison drawled.</p> -<p>Michael Miller was listening, too, covered with -scene paint as usual, and wearing his carpenter’s -apron stuffed with tools. “I’ll bet anything that when -they hear about this, we’ll be hearing from them -again! Those boys don’t give up so easily!”</p> -<p>“Oh, now, Michael,” his father remonstrated, -“they’re not as bad as all that—”</p> -<p>“I want to hear what happened!” Rita urged Richard. -“We don’t know how you wangled this or what -the commissioner said—”</p> -<p>“Well, I explained our problem to him,” Richard -began. “That someone had questioned the legality of -operating a profit-making business in a school, and -that we were threatened with court proceedings if -we continued. I told him who was behind it and why—the -brothers Slade and their movie house—and I -also explained that we were helping the school by our -rent. Of course, he couldn’t have agreed more with -that, knowing as much as he does about educational -funds! And I ranted—really ranted—about what the -Kenabeek Summer Theater could do for this town—and -the whole area—and the school.” Richard was -declaiming now as he walked back and forth in front -of the stage, and the cast was highly amused.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_43">43</div> -<p>“So, the commissioner promised to look into the -matter some time soon.” Richard stopped dramatically. -“Some time soon,” he repeated, obviously enjoying -the effect on the cast.</p> -<p>“Why, he’s a regular ham!” Peggy thought, grinning.</p> -<p>“Well, you should have seen me,” Richard continued, -laughing himself. “I got up from my seat, -leaned over the desk, stared him straight in the eye, -and said, as if this was the biggest thing since the end -of the Ice Age, ‘The Kenabeek Summer Theater opens -on Thursday. <i>This</i> Thursday!’”</p> -<p>“What did he do? What happened?” Mary Hopkins -asked breathlessly.</p> -<p>“He decided that he’d better do something about -it!” Richard laughed. “He was galvanized! He told -his secretary to drop everything, and together we -went through a list of all the companies operating in -the state. We found that two other companies were -playing in high schools! If we couldn’t go ahead here, -those theaters would have to fold, too!</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_44">44</div> -<p>“Well, it didn’t seem fair, and yet, since no one had -ever before questioned the legality of playing in a -school, there was no precedent to go by. And no time -to get a court decision!” Richard was very serious -now, and the cast listened interestedly, hanging on -every word. “So, the commissioner decided that the -only thing he could do legally was to <i>postpone a -decision</i> until Labor Day! If anyone raises the question -again, they will be informed that nothing can be -done about it until after Labor Day—and by that -time, of course, all the theaters will have finished -their seasons!”</p> -<p>“Very clever!” Mr. Miller nodded thoughtfully. -“Very clever indeed!”</p> -<p>“Yes, but there’s one other little thing,” Richard -added. “It was also decided, in order to squelch any -rumors or new questions, that this theater will operate -on a non-profit basis.”</p> -<p>“We are now a non-profit organization?” Chuck -asked slowly.</p> -<p>“We are indeed,” Richard replied. “Any money left -over at the end of the season, after expenses, goes to -the Kenabeek High School toward their new science -lab.”</p> -<p>“Well!” Chuck exclaimed, looking perfectly blank.</p> -<p>“Oh, what a pity!” Rita cried. “Then you two won’t -make any money this summer!” She knew that Chuck -and Richard were working for nothing beyond their -living expenses. They weren’t even on regular salaries -like the rest of the company. Every penny would be -poured back into the theater to pay back the Chamber -of Commerce and the individual investors.</p> -<p>Chuck laughed. “I had hoped to have something -left over at the end of the season, but I can’t imagine -that we need the profits as much as the school does. -Actually, I’m glad about this arrangement!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_45">45</div> -<p>“There probably won’t be too much left over, anyway,” -Richard added. “Did you ever hear of a summer -theater making a real profit on a first season? I -agree with Chuck. We just want to have a season -successful enough to warrant a return next year.”</p> -<p>“We won’t have a season <i>this</i> year if we don’t get -back to work!” Chuck declared. “We have a lot to -clean up today. Places for the second act, everybody, -Scene Two.”</p> -<p>“Congratulations, Richard,” Peggy said as she took -a seat in the auditorium. She had some time before -she was due on stage, and she wanted to watch the -other actors. “I think you did a wonderful job!”</p> -<p>“The Chamber of Commerce is going to be awfully -pleased with the way this turned out,” Mr. Miller -said, shaking Richard’s hand. “And the School Board -will be delighted.”</p> -<p>“Thanks, Mr. Miller,” Richard said. “I hope Max -Slade will change his mind about us now, too.”</p> -<p>“He might,” Mr. Miller agreed. “He just might. If -I have an opportunity, I’ll try to speak with him about -it. Well, back to work, now. Congratulations again, -Richard.”</p> -<p>Watching him go, Peggy was struck again by the -company’s good fortune in having Howard Miller. -He was such a finished actor and lent dignity to the -theater by his position with the Chamber of Commerce -and the School Board. “Mr. Miller did a lot in -the theater in his time, didn’t he?” Peggy whispered -to Richard as the act began.</p> -<p>“He certainly did. His background’s very impressive!”</p> -<p>“Do you think he might be able to work something -out with Max Slade?” Peggy asked.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_46">46</div> -<p>“It’s possible, but if he can’t,” Richard whispered -with a twinkle, “maybe I’ll sic you on the job! You -did just fine with John Hamilton.”</p> -<p>Peggy laughed. “Oh, Richard! All I said was that -<i>Dear Ruth</i> would open Thursday. What on earth -would I say to Max Slade?”</p> -<p>“I would leave that entirely up to you!” Richard -teased. “I’m sure you’d think of something!”</p> -<p>“But not until after Thursday,” Peggy said with -mock seriousness.</p> -<p>“No, no, certainly not until after Thursday!” Richard -agreed, chuckling. “We couldn’t take a chance on -losing you opening night! He might lock you up in -the movies!”</p> -<p>“And I’d have to look at one of those awful pictures -twelve times.” They both laughed. “But isn’t it exciting, -really?” Peggy said. “I mean the opening—only -two more days! It doesn’t seem possible.”</p> -<p>“Two more days,” Richard echoed thoughtfully, -“and there’s such a lot to do.”</p> -<p>“NO!” Chuck suddenly shouted from the orchestra, -and Peggy and Richard both jumped. “No! How -many times do I have to tell you—you cannot throw -that line away!”</p> -<p>He ran up on stage and motioned Danny out of the -way, saying, “Now watch this! I hate to show you -how to do your part, but we can’t get hung up on this -every time we play the scene!”</p> -<p>Peggy’s eyes opened wide. She had never seen -Chuck Crosby like this before.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_47">47</div> -<p>“You <i>pause</i> after you say, ‘I got to the turnstile,’ -etc. <i>Then</i> you say, ‘I didn’t have a nickel’—and you -<i>don’t</i> throw it away! You’ll kill your next line if it -isn’t just right. Now watch.”</p> -<p>“I see,” Danny said when Chuck had finished. -“Thanks, Chuck.”</p> -<p>“This is not Chekhov we’re playing, it’s a Norman -Krasna <i>comedy</i>!” Chuck said, speaking to everybody. -“Now suppose we get to work! And stop playing Alison -Lord and Chris Hill and Danny Dunn—<i>and</i> -Peggy Lane, radio heroine.” He pointed straight at -her. “Let’s play <i>Dear Ruth</i>!”</p> -<p>He jumped off the stage and resumed his place -down front. “Take it again,” he called, “from the beginning!”</p> -<p>And he was right. Watching him, Peggy knew that -it was time to get down to serious work. In two days -they had to have a play ready. Really ready, not half-way. -And Chuck, like all good directors, was giving -them the impetus and the drive to do it.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_48">48</div> -<h2 id="c5"><span class="h2line1">V</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Opening Night</span></h2> -<p>Thursday! Peggy woke up with a funny feeling in the -pit of her stomach and for a moment wondered why. -Then she remembered—opening night!</p> -<p>“Oh!” she groaned and turned over, feeling the -butterflies come and go somewhere in the region of -her chest. “Oh,” she moaned again and turned over -on her back.</p> -<p>“Good morning!” There was a knock at her door, -and Rita entered bearing a steaming cup of coffee. -The cup rattled a bit in the saucer as she put it down, -spilling coffee over the sides.</p> -<p>“You, too?” Peggy asked, sitting upright.</p> -<p>“Naturally!” Rita held her arm out, showing Peggy -her trembling hand.</p> -<p>“That’s nothing!” Peggy scoffed. “Look at this!” -They compared hands, and indeed, Peggy’s was much -the shakier.</p> -<p>“Well, you haven’t been up as long as I have,” Rita -said. “Wait awhile.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_49">49</div> -<p>“I know. It’ll get better, and by noon I’ll feel fine, -and by dinnertime I’ll wish I’d never thought of being -an actress in the first place. Oh dear!” Peggy steadied -herself with a sip of coffee. “I wonder how Alison -feels.”</p> -<p>“I’d better wake her up, too,” Rita said and went -out for more coffee. In a moment she was back, and -Alison, beautifully sleepy-eyed, joined them in Peggy’s -room.</p> -<p>“Why, oh, why did I ever decide to be an actress -in the first place?” Alison muttered over her coffee.</p> -<p>Peggy and Rita went off into gales of laughter -while Alison looked at them indignantly. “It isn’t -funny,” she said. “I don’t feel funny in the least.”</p> -<p>“We know!” Peggy laughed. “It’s just exactly what -I said a minute ago—I mean what I said I would be -saying about eight o’clock tonight!”</p> -<p>“Well, but you don’t have to carry the show,” Alison -said, still glum. “I’ll blow up, I know I will—or -I’ll trip over the stairs coming down—I’ll probably -fall flat on my face on my first entrance. Oh, I wish it -were over! Heavens, my hair! I’ve got to wash and set -my hair!” She gulped down the last of her coffee and -fled to the shower.</p> -<p>Peggy and Rita watched her go with real compassion—they -knew exactly how she felt!</p> -<p>Chuck Crosby knew what he was about when he -called the cast together for a morning reading of next -week’s play, <i>Angel Street</i>. By the time the cast had -finished, they had forgotten their anxiety about opening -night. It helped to be reminded that <i>Dear Ruth</i> -was not the only play of the season. There would be -other opening nights, too. But this was the big one—everyone -felt that as the day wore on and nervousness -slowly returned.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_50">50</div> -<p>The company gathered together at a large table -for an early dinner at Mrs. Brady’s. They seldom ate -<i>en masse</i> like this, but tonight they did, almost huddled -together for support.</p> -<p>“It feels like the last meal!” Danny mourned as he -stirred his soup listlessly.</p> -<p>“I can’t even stand the thought of food!” Alison declared, -looking at her bowl with distaste.</p> -<p>Even Chris was nervous. Peggy couldn’t help giggling -as she watched him break cracker after cracker -into his soup until it looked like a snowbank. He -didn’t have the slightest idea of what he was doing. -Rita plowed into her food, grimly determined to put -something into her stomach, and urged Peggy to do -the same.</p> -<p>“Never mind how you feel about it—you’ll have -more energy.”</p> -<p>“I can’t,” Peggy said, still giggling. “I just can’t. -There’s something absolutely ridiculous about food -at a time like this! Imagine—tomato soup and <i>Dear -Ruth</i>—they just don’t mix!” She started laughing -again, and everyone looked at her accusingly. “I can’t -help it.” She giggled helplessly. “I always do this—it’s -just nerves. It’ll stop in a while!” She took a deep -breath, trying to calm down, but then another -thought sent her off again. “What do you imagine -your husband is having for dinner tonight?” she -asked Rita. “I can just see him up at the theater, decorating -the set and eating lilacs dipped in crackerjack!”</p> -<p>“Oh, Peggy, please stop!” Danny protested as he -choked on a mouthful of soup. “Stop talking and eat.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_51">51</div> -<p>“Please!” everyone echoed, and Peggy subsided, -trying to force down some food. It was worse, though, -than nervous giggles. The palms of her hands were -first icy and then hot, her stomach felt as if a thousand -birds were migrating through, and the very -thought of walking on stage gave her a shiver from -head to toe.</p> -<p>“Well, the worst is over!” Rita said with relief as -they finished dinner and left, with Mrs. Brady’s good -wishes following them.</p> -<p>And she was right. Somehow the food, the sparkling -night air, the familiar feeling of the auditorium, -and the good smell of grease paint in their dressing -rooms relaxed everyone. This was their job—it was -opening night. In half an hour when they walked -on stage, they would be fine—and everybody knew -it.</p> -<p>“It’s funny how the anticipation is always worse -than the fact,” Rita mused as she started to put on -her make-up. “And that dinner is the most dreadful -thing of all. It’ll never be that bad again.”</p> -<p>“Aren’t you nervous?” Mary Hopkins asked innocently -from her table. The girls all shared one large -dressing room, and the men another.</p> -<p>“What a question!” Peggy laughed. “Aren’t you?”</p> -<p>“Well, a little,” Mary replied. “Not much.”</p> -<p>“That’s because you’re not a professional,” Alison -said. “If you ever become one—just watch. You’re -not nervous at first, but the more you work, the more -nervous you get.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_52">52</div> -<p>“I think that’s because in the beginning we all -think we’re just wonderful,” Peggy said, “but after -a while, we realize how much we have still to learn.”</p> -<p>“Zip me up, please?” Alison asked Peggy. She -looked perfectly beautiful, Peggy thought, in her -pretty two-piece dress, and marvelous make-up. Alison -sat down again and took a little black candle -out of her make-up kit. She lit it and tilted it over a -small tin cup.</p> -<p>“Is that some kind of a ritual?” Peggy asked in -amazement. “What on earth are you doing, Alison?”</p> -<p>“Eyelashes,” Alison replied, dipping a brush in the -cup and carefully lifting it to her eyes. “I always do -this last.”</p> -<p>“Eyelashes!” Peggy exclaimed—and looked into -the little cup. It held black wax melted by the flame, -which thickened when Alison applied it, making her -lashes look thick and long.</p> -<p>“I don’t like to wear false lashes,” Alison explained, -“and this works just as well if not better.”</p> -<p>“If you’ll put a little white at the outer corner of -your eyelid, Peggy,” Rita offered, “it will give you a -young effect—and a dot of red in the inner corner -helps, too.”</p> -<p>Peggy tried it and it worked.</p> -<p>“No line under your eyes,” Rita said. “That makes -you look older, and you have to shave off about five -years since Miriam is supposed to be about fourteen. -Now, bring your rouge up a little closer to your eyes -and not so far out on your cheek—you want to have -a round effect. There!” Rita looked at Peggy appraisingly. -“What do you think?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_53">53</div> -<p>Peggy looked at herself and was pleased. She -would appear about fourteen on stage, she thought. -She hadn’t been quite satisfied with her make-up -at dress rehearsal. She put on her little navy-blue -jumper and white blouse, brushed on her powder -and was done.</p> -<p>“Telegrams!” a voice outside the door announced. -“Are you decent?”</p> -<p>“We are, come in,” Rita said, and Richard came -through with a stack of yellow envelopes, handing -them to the girls.</p> -<p>“I have to get out front,” Richard said, “but I know -you’ll be terrific. Break a leg!”</p> -<p>“Break a leg!” Mary gasped as he left. “Why—what -a thing to say!”</p> -<p>“It means good luck,” Peggy explained as she put -her telegrams in front of her mirror. “Theater people -always say that, or something like it—it’s an old -superstition.”</p> -<p>“I see. Why don’t you open your telegrams?” Mary -asked.</p> -<p>“Oh, we never do,” Alison answered. “Not until -after the show.”</p> -<p>“That’s in case any of them are bad news,” Rita -explained.</p> -<p>“But they’re just good-luck wires, aren’t they?”</p> -<p>“Of course,” Peggy laughed, “but it’s another old -superstition—like whistling in the dressing room!”</p> -<p>“Fifteen minutes!” Gus called, rapping a tattoo on -the door.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_54">54</div> -<p>“Where’s the music?” Chuck asked, coming by. -“Get that turntable going, Gus—and better check the -door buzzer again.” He came into the room. “Alison, -don’t worry about the orange juice—if you’re shaky -about drinking it tonight, let it go. Peggy, let’s see -your make-up. Good! That’s much better! Now listen—I -know it’s opening night and I know it means a lot—to -all of us. And I know we’re all excited and nervous—but -I know you’re going to be just fine!</p> -<p>“Remember—pace it! Keep it moving! It’s a terrific -comedy and it ought to carry you along. It will, -if you just keep it moving. I’ll be watching, but I -don’t think you’ll see me until after the show unless -there’s someone I can’t hear. Mary, watch that. I -couldn’t hear you in the last row last night.” He -paused a moment. “What else? Guess that’s it. -Break a leg, everyone!”</p> -<p>As Chuck left, the girls heard the music begin, and -Gus came by, calling, “Five minutes!”</p> -<p>There was a sudden silence in the dressing room -as everyone felt the mounting tension. It was a different -excitement, though, from their morning nerves. -Peggy began to yawn while Rita took very deep -breaths and Alison did a bending exercise. All these -things helped their systems adjust to the impending -effort.</p> -<p>Peggy felt that she had to move. Movement always -helped and it was time, anyway. She walked backstage -and took her place in the wings.</p> -<p>“Peggy,” a voice whispered behind her, “have a lot -of fun.”</p> -<p>“Thanks, Michael,” Peggy replied shakily. “Do you -know what kind of a house we have?”</p> -<p>“I think it’s pretty good—there’s a peephole in the -curtain if you want to look.”</p> -<p>“No, not tonight—”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_55">55</div> -<p>“Have fun, Dad,” Michael said to his father as -Howard Miller took his place beside Peggy.</p> -<p>“How do you feel, Peggy?” Mr. Miller asked.</p> -<p>“Nervous!” Peggy smiled. “Break a leg, Dad.”</p> -<p>“House lights!” they heard Gus call to Michael, -who was at the lightboard. “Music! Spots!”</p> -<p>Peggy took a deep breath and adjusted the little -beret she wore for her entrance. Suddenly her knees -felt like water. “What’s my first line?” she thought -frantically. “I don’t remember what I’m supposed to -say—”</p> -<p>“Curtain!” Gus said, and the heavy drapes swept -back.</p> -<p>There was dead silence for a moment, and then -Peggy heard a gasp from the audience followed by -a wave of applause for the set. It was evident they -hadn’t expected anything so charming and good.</p> -<p>“Morning, Mis’ Wilkins.” Mary Hopkins entered -with her first line.</p> -<p>“Good morning, Dora,” Rita said, her voice clear -and steady.</p> -<p>Five more lines before Peggy’s entrance. She was -desperately trying to remember her first line....</p> -<p>“... and that’s the last box of Kleenex,” Mary -said. That was it—Peggy’s cue.</p> -<p>Almost in a trance she made her entrance. “Good -morning, Dora,” she said, the words coming from -somewhere—and the minute she spoke, bathed in the -bright lights of the familiar, homey set, everything -connected, everything fell into place.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_56">56</div> -<p>Peggy began to act easily, feeling out the audience, -trying to sense its mood. It was a curious, rather -tight house in the beginning. She felt the spectators -were silently saying, “Show me!”</p> -<p>Mr. Miller and Alison got nice hands on their entrances, -but nothing seemed to “zip” yet—the audience -still seemed too polite. Peggy watched from the -wings when Chris made his entrance—and then it -happened. That magical moment when a play suddenly -comes to life. Chris entered with exuberance -and power, carrying the audience right along with -him, and the play began to move. It did have pace -and rhythm, just as Chuck had said. The whole cast -could feel it and the audience began to laugh. At the -end of the first act there was a resounding wave of -applause.</p> -<p>Chuck couldn’t wait out front as he had said he -would. He came running backstage with a huge grin. -“It’s great,” he cried, slapping everybody on the back. -“It’s great—just great! Keep it up—keep it moving—it’s -great!” Vocabulary had apparently deserted -Chuck Crosby, and his praise made the actors very -happy. They knew how he felt out there, watching -his actors, as nervous as they were, and probably -praying that they would come through. Directing -was a big responsibility.</p> -<p>There were six curtain calls! Richard presented -Alison Lord with a big bouquet of flowers from the -Chamber of Commerce—a nice gesture for a special -opening, and by the way the applause went on and -on, the cast knew that this audience didn’t want to -leave. A sure indication that they had really had a -wonderful time!</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_57">57</div> -<p>Gus finally turned on the music, the curtains closed -on the company, and opening night of <i>Dear Ruth</i> was -over.</p> -<p>Almost over. There was to be a party later in the -dining room of the Kenabeek Inn, and now there -were congratulations and backstage visitors, and the -exhilaration that always follows a good show.</p> -<p>As she rubbed cold cream on her face in the dressing -room, Peggy finally read her telegrams. <span class="sc">BREAK A -LEG LITTLE ONE</span>, from her big brother, David, now off -in San Francisco on an assignment for his news service. -<span class="sc">BEST WISHES FOR A GRAND OPENING STOP WE KNOW -YOU AND THE COMPANY WILL BE WONDERFUL</span>, from -Mother and Dad. A wire from May Berriman and all -the girls in New York; and another from Randy Brewster, -<span class="sc">THINKING ABOUT A VERY SPECIAL ACTRESS</span>.</p> -<p>The telegrams brought family and friends backstage -as if they were right here, congratulating her -now. Peggy looked at Rita, remembering the way -they had felt in the morning. “Did I ever say I didn’t -want to be an actress?” she asked, and they laughed, -comparing absolutely steady hands this time.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_58">58</div> -<h2 id="c6"><span class="h2line1">VI</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Chance Encounter</span></h2> -<p>There was no review of <i>Dear Ruth</i> in the <i>Kenabeek -Gazette</i> the next day! The cast sat around the patio -after blocking the first act of <i>Angel Street</i>, glum and -disheartened. The wonderful elation of last night’s -opening had left them.</p> -<p>“Isn’t Ford Birmingham going to review us at all?” -Peggy wondered unhappily. “Isn’t it his job? Doesn’t -he have to?”</p> -<p>“Oh, he’ll probably write a token piece—it would -be too obvious if he didn’t,” Chuck answered grimly. -“But I imagine he won’t do it until the middle of the -week when we’re almost finished with <i>Dear Ruth</i>. By -that time we’ll have lost an audience—people will -lose interest in our theater.”</p> -<p>“But didn’t he like the play?” Alison demanded. -“Everyone else simply loved it!”</p> -<p>“He wasn’t there,” Chuck said shortly. “He didn’t -come last night, and I doubt if he’ll come at all. Max -Slade must have that man wrapped around his little -finger! We had an audience last night only because -of our own advertising and publicity. But people expect -reviews! And if Birmingham doesn’t give us one -next week on opening night—I’ll write one myself!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_59">59</div> -<p>“Oh, you can’t!” Peggy said anxiously. “If you do, -he’ll be sure to bring it out in the paper, and then -we’ll seem like amateurs!”</p> -<p>Chuck sighed. “I know, Peggy. I wouldn’t, of -course, but I just don’t see any other way!”</p> -<p>“Well, for heaven’s sake!” Alison protested. “He -can’t write a review unless he comes to see a play!”</p> -<p>“Sure he can,” Chris Hill returned. “Easy. He’ll -write about two lines to the effect that <i>Dear Ruth</i> -opened at the high school last Thursday, and in the -cast were..., et cetera and et cetera. By saying -nothing he’ll create the impression we were terrible!”</p> -<p>Peggy looked uneasily at Chris. He was terribly -angry. She had a momentary vision of him storming -into the offices of the <i>Kenabeek Gazette</i> and demanding -to have it out with Mr. Birmingham. She wasn’t -far wrong.</p> -<p>“Why don’t I go to see him?” Chris fumed. “I’d -love to see that guy and—”</p> -<p>“—tell him just exactly what you think of him!” -Chuck finished. “Yes, I know. So would I, but that’s -probably what they expect us to do, so we’d better -not. Better sit tight.”</p> -<p>“Just what is the connection between Max Slade -and Birmingham?” Peggy persisted. “It seems very -mysterious to me. I can’t imagine why a newspaperman -would be working hand in glove with a theater -manager—it doesn’t make sense. Newsmen usually -just want news! Period!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_60">60</div> -<p>“Who knows?” Chuck shrugged. “All I know is that -we’ll be able to judge from the house tonight how it’s -going to go from now on without a review. It’s too -early to tell—maybe people will come anyway. But if -they don’t, I can tell you this theater isn’t going to -last long!”</p> -<p>Watching Chuck, Peggy felt worried. She noticed -that Chris was looking at their director too, and -catching his eye, she knew that he felt as she did. This -meant so much to Chuck, and he had worked so hard. -If there were only something she could do....</p> -<p>“Peggy,” Chuck said, as if in answer to her thought, -“would you mind going with Danny and Mike Miller -this afternoon to hunt for furniture?” He was going -to work on the second act of <i>Angel Street</i>, in which -Peggy didn’t appear. “You don’t have to—I know you -need a rest—but if you feel like it, it would be a great -help.”</p> -<p>“I’d love to!” Peggy beamed cheerfully. “Really, -I would. It’ll give me a chance to see the town.”</p> -<p>Chuck smiled gratefully. “Well, if you’re sure—”</p> -<p>“Anything that’s Victorian?” Peggy asked as she -collected her sides and pencil, dropping them into -the large knitting bag she carried to rehearsals.</p> -<p>“Mike has the furniture and prop list up at the -theater,” Chuck said. “I’d like you to keep an eye -out for decoration. Knickknacks and pictures and -maybe a statue—you know.”</p> -<p>“They shouldn’t be hard to find here,” Peggy called -gaily as she left the annex. “These houses look as if -they’re stuffed with Victorian antiques!”</p> -<p>“Thanks, Peggy.” The cast went back to rehearsal, -and Peggy started up to the theater.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_61">61</div> -<p>“We need a chaise longue, a desk, two tables, four -straight chairs, two easy chairs, and a hall table plus -extras.” Danny Dunn checked the list as Michael -Miller turned the little blue jeep out of the school -driveway and down the main road.</p> -<p>“Are you sorry not to be in <i>Angel Street</i>?” Peggy -asked him. Danny would not be playing next week -and had taken the job of stage-managing instead, -giving Gus an opportunity to concentrate on the set -alone.</p> -<p>“Not a bit!” Danny grinned. “You know I’ve played -Sergeant Rough before, and although I enjoyed doing -it, I felt I was a little young. It will be a real treat -to see Howard Miller in the part. I think he’ll be -fabulous!”</p> -<p>Peggy chuckled. Danny’s remarks were always liberally -peppered with words like <i>fabulous</i>, <i>terrific</i>, -<i>fantastic</i>, <i>out of this world</i>. Danny asked why she -laughed and Peggy told him.</p> -<p>“Well,” he pronounced expansively, “the theater <i>is</i> -a little bit out of this world—and I’m in the theater. -So where am I?”</p> -<p>“Passing the office of that ‘fantastic’ paper, the -<i>Kenabeek Gazette</i>,” Michael informed him, laughing. -“There it is, children, look your fill.”</p> -<p>Peggy and Danny whipped around in their seats -to look. “The building looks just like my father’s -newspaper in Rockport,” Peggy said, “only a little -smaller. I wonder if Ford Birmingham is in.”</p> -<p>“Well, you won’t have a chance to find out,” Michael -said. “I’m taking you across town to see Mary -Hopkins’ mother. Mary said they might have some -things we could use.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_62">62</div> -<p>Peggy looked eagerly around the little town of -Lake Kenabeek as they drove through. It was only a -few buildings on either side of the main highway. A -post office, drugstore, general store, and sporting -goods shop, the newspaper building, and a couple of -restaurants. The residents’ houses and cottages were -almost all off the main highway, on twisting roads, -hidden behind the profusion of pine trees and thick -forest growth.</p> -<p>Peggy wished she could have just a few minutes -to stroll around. “Goodness,” she said, “I’ve been here -ten days, and this is the first time I’ve been into town -since I got off that bus!”</p> -<p>“You mean ten years!” Michael retorted. “I’ve felt -at least ten years go by since I first saw you that afternoon!”</p> -<p>Danny and Peggy laughed. Looking at Michael, -though, Peggy realized that he wasn’t far wrong -about himself. He had grown up in the past week! -And he seemed to be having more fun. He wasn’t as -serious and shy as he had been at the start. For his -sake, Peggy was glad of the change.</p> -<p>“The jeep has aged, too,” Danny commented. -“Don’t I detect a cough in the engine?”</p> -<p>“Oh, no, that’s only her way of saying hello.” Michael -patted the wheel as if the jeep were alive. -“Look—there it is—the ogre!” Michael pointed to -the movie house and shook a fist playfully as they -drove by.</p> -<p>“Well, you certainly don’t seem too worried about -the state of affairs!” Danny commented.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_63">63</div> -<p>“I’m not!” Michael responded. “I have absolute -faith in the ultimate triumph of the Kenabeek Summer -Theater! Hey!” Michael suddenly braked the jeep -and pulled to the side of the road. “Bladen’s Antiques! -I’d forgotten about them. This is the one antique -store in the area, Peggy.”</p> -<p>They looked at the little house at the side of the -road. Outside, by the gate, was a huge iron elk carrying -the shop’s sign on his antlers. The yard was -strewn with marble pedestals, bird cages hanging -from trees, and a huge red sleigh with massive iron -runners. There was even a small weather-beaten totem -pole leaning rather precariously to one side.</p> -<p>“Is that the real thing?” Peggy asked Michael.</p> -<p>“Well, if it wasn’t when they put it up, it’s certainly -an antique by now! No, it’s not a real Indian one, -Peggy. It’s a fake, like a lot of souvenir items up here. -But we don’t pretend they’re real.”</p> -<p>“Think we might borrow one of those pedestals?” -Peggy asked. “We could use one on the set.”</p> -<p>“Couldn’t carry it back—they’re too heavy,” Michael -answered. “Why don’t I drop you here, Peggy, -and you can browse around inside? We’ll pick you up -on our way back from Mrs. Hopkins’.”</p> -<p>“Well, all right,” Peggy agreed doubtfully, climbing -out. “But suppose they don’t want to lend us anything?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_64">64</div> -<p>“Make a big pitch about the program credit. Say -it’s great advertising! See you later.” They drove off, -leaving Peggy feeling even more dubious. She had -never been very good at this type of thing—program -credit or not. She remembered a time when she had -been asked to sell advertising for the high school -yearbook at home, and how shy she had felt about it. -Acting was one thing, but this was another.</p> -<p>Some people didn’t realize that actors and actresses -didn’t always make good salesmen, she thought, as -she entered the gate and walked up the little flagstone -path to the shop. She wished that Richard Wallace -were with her. He could talk anybody into anything! -But then, Peggy recalled, he seemed to think -the same of her. She smiled, remembering how he -had kidded about sending her to see Max Slade. Well, -even if that had been a joke, at least she could try to -do something useful here.</p> -<p>Chimes rang above her head as she opened the -door, and Peggy blinked, coming into a room so -stuffed with bric-a-brac and furniture that she could -hardly see her way. There was a narrow path of clear -space, only about a foot wide, that led to the counter. -She had to avoid things hanging from the ceiling: -bunches of toy bark canoes on strings, birds carved -out of wood that danced merrily in the air at the -breeze from the door. Leaning down from the wall -behind the counter and staring at her roundly was a -huge, stuffed owl, his eyes gleaming strangely in the -dim light. Peggy stared back at the owl, fascinated.</p> -<p>“Yes, may I help you?” For a moment Peggy almost -thought the owl had spoken, but then she saw a -little splinter of a man, so fragile and old that it -seemed as if he might break into a thousand pieces -at any moment.</p> -<p>“Oh dear!” Peggy thought. “He’s so old, and probably -can’t hear very well, and won’t know what I’m -talking about!” But she had to begin somewhere.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_65">65</div> -<p>“Why, yes,” she said, speaking clearly in hopes -he could hear. “I’m Peggy Lane from the Kenabeek -Summer Theater, and we hoped you might be able to -help us. We’re doing a Victorian play next week—<i>Angel -Street</i>—and we thought you might have some -furniture or decoration we could use on our set....” -Peggy stopped lamely while the old man just smiled -and said nothing. Obviously, he hadn’t understood a -word.</p> -<p>“We couldn’t pay you for them, of course,” she -rushed on, determined to finish at any rate. “But if -you’d be interested, we’d give you a good credit in -our programs, and that’s free advertising for you, -you know.”</p> -<p>Peggy felt bumbling and awkward, at a loss for -words. Well, there was only one thing left to say. -She would finish and leave quickly. “We would take -very good care of whatever you lent us,” she mumbled -faintly—it didn’t matter, he couldn’t hear anyway. -“Well, I’ve certainly made a mess of this,” -Peggy thought. “They should have sent somebody -who knows the old man and how to talk to him!”</p> -<p>“Ah, yes. <i>Angel Street</i> is an excellent play!” Peggy -could hardly believe her ears as the old man spoke. -“Quite a thriller, yes, indeed. I made a special trip to -New York to see that play once—type of thing I like. -I was waiting for you to say something about taking -care of anything I might lend you,” he went on. -“You see, some of my things here are quite valuable -and I would have to be sure they were in responsible -hands.”</p> -<p>“Oh, of course,” Peggy said eagerly.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_66">66</div> -<p>“If you hadn’t mentioned that, I might not have -said anything at all! Might have let you leave thinking -I was deaf as a stone!” He cocked his head humorously -on one side, giving Peggy a wink that reminded -her of the wise old owl.</p> -<p>“I’m Mr. Bladen,” the old man said as he came -out from behind the counter and threaded his way -among the piles of stuff on the floor, crooking a finger -for Peggy to follow. There was hardly room to -squeeze through, but she valiantly held her breath -and went sideways, picking her way carefully around -the vases, picture frames, statues, tables, and chairs.</p> -<p>“Been here forty years,” he added, leading her over -to one wall under a window. He drew back the curtains -and a dust cloud rose as he pinned them back -to get some light. Peggy sneezed. “<i>Gesundheit!</i>” Mr. -Bladen said.</p> -<p>Peggy sneezed again. “<i>Gesundheit!</i>” he repeated, -and Peggy giggled.</p> -<p>“Think I’m a funny old codger, don’t you?” he -said, his eyes twinkling. “And you’re right—I am—I -am! Can’t get to be as old as I am and not be funny -somehow! Now look—” He started removing a pile -of odds and ends that were burying a piece of furniture -covered with a dusty red shawl. “Take this and -put it somewhere.” He handed Peggy a plaster cast -of a nymph blowing a conch shell. Peggy looked -around and placed it on a table already filled with -other figurines. “And this—and this—” He gave her -pictures, frames, little boxes, lamps. Peggy was hard -pressed to find a place for them, but somehow she -managed. Finally they reached bottom and Mr. -Bladen pulled off the shawl. After the cloud of dust -had subsided, among more sneezes and <i>Gesundheits</i>, -Peggy looked at the “buried treasure” and gasped. -It was a perfect Victorian chaise longue with a curving, -dark mahogany frame, beautifully upholstered -in red and gold striped satin.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_67">67</div> -<p>“It’s perfect!” Peggy cried excitedly. “Oh, Mr. -Bladen, it’s simply perfect! We couldn’t find anything -better if we looked for a million years! Oh, may we -use it, really?” She clasped her hands eagerly.</p> -<p>“Of course!” Mr. Bladen laughed, his thin, sensitive -fingers patting the edge of the sofa. “I know it’s -perfect. Just like the one they used in New York—noticed -it myself when I saw the play. Been waiting, -really, to find a use for it. Nobody would ever discover -it under all this stuff!”</p> -<p>Peggy looked around, wondering how many other -lovely pieces were hidden under the incredible litter.</p> -<p>“Yep,” Mr. Bladen said, “I have a lot of nice things -here, but can’t ever find the time to straighten things -up so they can be seen. Too old, I guess—and then -there’s my work.”</p> -<p>Peggy’s surprise was evident. His work? Wasn’t -this his work? Mr. Bladen answered her unspoken -question with another conspiratorial wink.</p> -<p>“Write poetry, you see—only thing worth doing at -my age. Wouldn’t you agree?”</p> -<p>Peggy was charmed. She hadn’t met anyone so delightful -as Mr. Bladen for a long time. Wouldn’t her -parents love to hear about this wonderful old man -with his fantastic little shop and his poetry!</p> -<p>“Then of course you’d know about the theater and -plays and everything,” she cried with sudden understanding. -“No wonder!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_68">68</div> -<div class="img" id="pic2"> -<img src="images/p04.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="659" /> -<p class="caption"><i>“It’s perfect!” Peggy cried excitedly.</i></p> -</div> -<div class="pb" id="Page_69">69</div> -<p>“Yes,” Mr. Bladen answered cheerfully. “And it’s -nice to know that someone’s bringing the theater to -us here. Town needs it—wish you a lot of luck. Anxious -to help all I can. Now, let’s see if we can’t find -some little extras for that set—” He poked around, -and like a magician drawing rabbits out of a hat, triumphantly -produced pictures, ornaments, a student -lamp, and two beautiful porcelain vases.</p> -<p>“Think you’ll need these,” he told Peggy, holding -up the vases. “Seems to me I remember something -special about a vase—”</p> -<p>“That’s right.” Peggy smiled. “The rubies are hidden -in a vase. But those are much too good, Mr. Bladen!”</p> -<p>“Nonsense,” he scoffed. “You want to be realistic, -don’t you? Now you just take these vases and scoot -along. I’ll put them in your care. Here, take this along -with you now, too.” He balanced the student lamp -precariously between the vases that Peggy held in -each hand. The china shade was just under her chin.</p> -<p>“But I really don’t think—” Peggy started.</p> -<p>“Send somebody back for the rest of the things.” -Mr. Bladen ignored her protest. “I’m here all the -time,” he said as he opened the door.</p> -<p>“Well, now about the advertising for the program—”</p> -<p>“Worry about that later—have to get back to work -now. Run along and good luck.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_70">70</div> -<p>Mr. Bladen closed the door firmly, the chimes -ringing good-by as Peggy found herself outside. She -hadn’t even thanked him, she realized, looking back -at the house. Why was he in such a sudden hurry, -she wondered? And then she remembered—poetry! -Peggy laughed softly. Mr. Bladen must have had a -new idea and wanted to write it down quickly. She -wondered if the poem would be about the theater, or -<i>Angel Street</i>, or if the sofa could have given him an -idea, or the vases. It could be anything! Peggy smiled -broadly as she stepped down the little path to the -gate, carefully holding the vases and lamp. What a -surprise to find someone like Mr. Bladen in Lake -Kenabeek! It proved that it paid to get into town -once in a while—there might be other fascinating -people to meet in this resort.</p> -<p>Peggy leaned forward to open the gate and the -lamp started to tumble. Grabbing it, she almost let -go of one of the precious vases which started to slide -out of her hand. It kept slipping and she couldn’t get -a secure grasp on it. In a flash she saw an awful picture -of shattered porcelain, and Mr. Bladen’s disappointment -at having entrusted something so valuable -to her. Just as it was about to fall entirely and crash -on the pavement, two hands reached over the gate, -grabbed the vase, and removed the lamp from her -arms.</p> -<p>“Now maybe you’ll be able to see where you’re going!” -A handsome young man in a conservative summer -suit stood there smiling, and Peggy sighed with -relief.</p> -<p>“Thank you so much!” she said gratefully. “I don’t -know what I’d have done if they’d been broken. -You’ve really saved the day—I can’t thank you -enough!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_71">71</div> -<p>“Well, I don’t know about that,” the young man -said, grinning, “It may be enough to know that I’ve -saved the day! How have I saved the day, by the -way?” He looked amused and interested, and Peggy -laughed.</p> -<p>“By the way, you’ve saved the day and helped the -play!” she rhymed. “Really you have. And you’ve also -saved one of Mr. Bladen’s precious antiques!”</p> -<p>He raised an eyebrow, turning the vase over in his -hand. “Is it really good?” he asked. “And what does -it have to do with a play?”</p> -<p>“We’re going to use them in <i>Angel Street</i>,” Peggy -explained. She liked this friendly young man who -somehow made her feel as if she’d known him for -years. Was he another interesting resident, she wondered. -“I’m Peggy Lane from the Summer Theater,” -she said, “and next week’s play is <i>Angel Street</i>.”</p> -<p>“Oh,” he said slowly, and Peggy was surprised to -see him frown slightly. But then he smiled again, -handing back the vase. “How are you going to manage -all this?” he asked, still holding on to the lamp. -“I don’t think you can carry them all without breaking -something. Can I drop you somewhere?”</p> -<p>Peggy noticed a car parked a few feet away and -shook her head, declining, “No, thank you—”</p> -<p>“I realize we haven’t met formally,” he said, bowing -a little, “but in Lake Kenabeek we’re not very -formal. I’d be glad to drive you to the theater.”</p> -<p>He hadn’t introduced himself, Peggy realized suddenly, -but he seemed so well-mannered that she -imagined it was just a slip. “No, thanks again, but -the jeep is coming back for me. I’d better wait.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_72">72</div> -<p>He gave her a regretful glance and put the lamp -carefully on the ground. “Well, I’m sorry,” he said. -“It would be a pleasure to help you. A real pleasure,” -he added softly, almost under his breath. “But -perhaps we’ll meet again sometime.” He looked -at her as if about to add something, but then, apparently -changing his mind, gave her a peculiar smile -and walked to his car. “Good luck,” he called as he -got in, leaving Peggy thoroughly puzzled.</p> -<p>The little blue jeep was coming back just as the -young man drove away, and they passed each other -on the road. Michael turned and pulled up in front -of Peggy, exclaiming when he saw the lamp and -vases.</p> -<p>“Success! They look wonderful, Peggy, and look -what we have!”</p> -<p>The back of the jeep was crammed with chairs and -tables. “Mrs. Hopkins has taken care of the table and -chair department, and all we have left now of any -real importance is that couch. Can’t seem to find -one,” Danny said.</p> -<p>“I’ve found it!” Peggy declared. “And wait until -you see it! But we have to come back for it later. Oh, -I have such a lot to tell you!” She handed Danny the -lamp and climbed into the front seat, carefully holding -the vases.</p> -<p>“By the way,” Michael said as they drove back to -the theater, “did you see one of the ogres? He drove -right past you—back there in front of Bladen’s.”</p> -<p>“Who? What ogre?” Peggy asked. “Where?”</p> -<p>“Remember the car that passed us just as we came -back for you?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_73">73</div> -<p>Peggy certainly did remember, and her heart sank -as she guessed what Michael’s next words would be.</p> -<p>“That, my girl,” he confirmed, “was none other than -our Mr. Slade!”</p> -<p>“Max Slade!” Peggy breathed softly. “Why, it -doesn’t seem possible....”</p> -<p>“No, not Max,” Michael corrected. “That was his -shadow—his younger brother, Bill.”</p> -<p>Peggy had such a peculiar expression that Danny -worriedly asked, “What’s the matter, Peggy? You all -right?”</p> -<p>“Why, I don’t know,” she said slowly, hardly hearing -as she recalled Bill Slade’s parting words—</p> -<p>“... it would be a pleasure to help you ... a -real pleasure.”</p> -<p>“Oh, Michael,” Peggy cried, “I’ve got to see your -father and Richard Wallace right away! There may -be a lot more to all this than we realize! There may -even be a way to help the theater!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_74">74</div> -<h2 id="c7"><span class="h2line1">VII</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Unfair Play</span></h2> -<p>“I think you should send someone to see him. I’m -sure he’d really like to help!” Peggy was saying. She -had dropped into Aunt Hetty’s home with Richard -and Mr. Miller to discuss her meeting with Bill Slade. -“I had the feeling when he spoke that he doesn’t approve -of what his brother’s doing, doesn’t like this -feud—”</p> -<p>“Whether he approves or not, there’s nothing he -can do about it!” Aunt Hetty said firmly. “They both -run the movie house, but it’s Max who makes the -decisions and Bill just follows along.”</p> -<p>“That’s right, Peggy,” Howard Miller agreed. “I’d -hate to stir up any friction between those two -brothers. I spoke at length to Max the other night, -and I’ve never heard him so unreasonable about anything -in all the years I’ve known him! He won’t even -discuss the problem. He’s so terrified that we’re going -to ruin his business that he just clams up.”</p> -<p>“Was Bill Slade there when you saw him?” Peggy -asked curiously.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_75">75</div> -<p>Mr. Miller nodded. “And he didn’t say a word. I -hate to disappoint you about Bill, Peggy, but he’s -never been strong enough to stand up to his brother; -and no matter how he impressed you, I don’t think -this issue is the one to change his character.”</p> -<p>Peggy sighed. “Well, I guess that’s that,” she said -regretfully. “I’m sorry—for a while I thought something -could be done. He seemed so nice—and sad -somehow. It’s a shame.”</p> -<p>“How’s <i>Angel Street</i> going?” Aunt Hetty asked, -tactfully closing the subject of Bill Slade.</p> -<p>“Wonderful,” Richard said. “It’s going to be even -better than <i>Dear Ruth</i>—if that’s possible! Come on, -Peggy,” he said, “I’ll walk you home.”</p> -<p>“Thank you for the coffee and the cake,” Peggy -said to Aunt Hetty. “It was wonderful to have something -homemade for a change!”</p> -<p>“Remind you of home?” Aunt Hetty asked.</p> -<p>“Yes—it all does,” Peggy said wistfully, looking -around the comfortable living room with the beamed -ceiling, fireplace, and gay chintz coverings on the -furniture. “But then,” she laughed, “anything like this -is a startling change from the annex! It makes me -wonder if I shouldn’t go home for a visit after the season -is over....”</p> -<p>“Good idea,” Aunt Hetty agreed. “You’ll need a -rest.”</p> -<p>“Are you staying, Mr. Miller?” Richard asked.</p> -<p>“Yes, I want to go over some things with your aunt, -Richard. We have to give a report soon to the Chamber -of Commerce.”</p> -<p>“And I want to talk over some more promotion -ideas with you,” Richard said, “if you’ll be here when -I get back.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_76">76</div> -<p>“Your aunt and Mr. Miller make a nice couple,” -Peggy observed as she and Richard started back to -the annex. “Have you ever noticed?”</p> -<p>Richard grinned at Peggy. “You mean that just -occurred to you? Why, I guess everybody in town -has seen that for years. We’re all just waiting for Aunt -Hetty and Mr. Miller to wake up and notice it, too!</p> -<p>“I’m sorry that we had to squelch your idea of -appealing to Bill Slade,” Richard went on seriously, -“and believe me, we wouldn’t if there were the slightest -chance of his making any headway with his -brother. But I’m afraid Mr. Miller’s right. Bill Slade -is a pretty weak character. If he really felt strongly -about this, he’d do something about it on his own. -Don’t you think so, Peggy?”</p> -<p>“Yes, I do,” Peggy said thoughtfully. “And do you -know, Richard, I wouldn’t be surprised if he did do -something! Maybe he isn’t as weak as all of you think. -I just have a feeling—”</p> -<p>“Woman’s feelings!” Richard laughed. “For once, -I’m afraid your intuition is wrong, Peggy!”</p> -<p>And as the week wore on, it seemed that Richard -was right. By the night of dress rehearsal for <i>Angel -Street</i>, the cast was terribly dispirited, having seen -audiences diminish little by little each night for <i>Dear -Ruth</i>. Apparently Max Slade was talking down the -theater at every opportunity—calling them amateurs, -and saying that if Ford Birmingham wouldn’t even -bother to go, the townspeople could certainly judge -from that. Unfortunately, the company hadn’t been -playing long enough to secure the loyal audience -that could keep it going regardless.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_77">77</div> -<p>Alison Lord, who was playing the very demanding -lead of “Mrs. Manningham” in <i>Angel Street</i>, was particularly -upset.</p> -<p>“It’s bad enough to be under the strain of doing -this part,” she said tearfully to Chuck. “Sometimes -I wonder why I bother at all—why not just quit? It -doesn’t seem worth the effort!”</p> -<p>“It will, tomorrow night, when we open,” Chuck -reassured her. “You’re doing a beautiful job, Alison, -and, of course, it’s worth while!”</p> -<p>“Cheer up, Mrs. Manningham,” Howard Miller -said, patting Alison on the shoulder, “you and I are -going to have a wonderful time out there, audience -or not. Right?”</p> -<p>“I guess so.” Alison dried her tears and smiled -ironically. “I’m unhappy enough really to feel like -Mrs. Manningham, anyway. If this keeps up, I won’t -have to work very hard!” She went to the dressing -room to change into her costume. Peggy followed, -worried about Alison’s mood. “Mrs. Manningham” -was on stage almost constantly and really carried the -show. If some of Alison’s fire was gone, even the fine -performance that Howard Miller was giving wouldn’t -be enough to save the play.</p> -<p>“How is your costume?” Peggy asked Alison, thinking -that clothes and make-up always seemed to have -a magical effect on the leading lady. “Have you unpacked -it yet?” The large boxes of costumes had arrived -earlier in the afternoon from New York. Because -<i>Angel Street</i> was a period piece, everything -had to be rented. Measurements had been sent, and -now the girls could only hope that everything fitted -properly. If not, there would be last-minute sewing—a -difficult project to fit into the next few short hours.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_78">78</div> -<p>“It’s dull,” Alison replied disinterestedly, “but it -fits. At least I don’t have to worry about that!” She -put on a smock and sat down at the table to apply her -make-up. Watching her draw in the tiny lines on her -forehead, and apply blue shadow under her eyes, -Peggy had to giggle.</p> -<p>“Oh, Alison!” She laughed. “Forgive me, but really, -what a change!”</p> -<p>Alison stared blankly into her mirror and then had -to smile at herself. Gone was the bright, vivacious -“Ruth,” and even beautiful Alison. In her place was -a wan, haunted woman about thirty, with circles -under her eyes and an expression of fear. “For once -I look just the way I feel,” said Alison, and as Peggy -and Rita laughed, even she had to join in.</p> -<p>“I really should be a blonde for this,” Peggy considered -as she put up her hair, arranging it in little -curls on the top of her head. She was playing the -pert, saucy maid, Nancy.</p> -<p>“You could spray your hair,” Rita told her, “but it’s -a mess, and I wouldn’t advise it. I think you’re all -right just like that.”</p> -<p>“Except that my skirt is too long,” Peggy noticed -as she walked about the dressing room, strutting a bit -as “Nancy” did, with a rustle of taffeta. “I’ll trip on it, -I’m afraid.”</p> -<p>“Here, maybe I can pin it,” Rita offered.</p> -<p>Finally, dressed in their costumes and make-up, -the girls walked out on stage for an inspection under -lights.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_79">79</div> -<p>“What base are you using, Alison?” Chuck called -from the aisle. “You’re too yellow under all this amber -light. Gus, kill that spot and let me see what happens. -Now, will you walk over and sit on the sofa, Alison? -And Peggy, let me see you up by the fireplace.”</p> -<p>The girls moved around the stage while Gus -worked with the lights, changing filters and spots -until Chuck was satisfied. It was a wonderful, eerie -set, Peggy thought. Gus had stenciled a wallpaper -design on the flats, and with the couch that Mr. -Bladen had lent them, and the other Victorian pieces -and bric-a-brac, the room had a heavy, mysterious -quality. The atmosphere affected Peggy strongly. She -felt as if some dire event was going to take place. She -walked down to the auditorium to look at the stage.</p> -<p>“Now try the bracket circuit,” Chuck called. “Let -me see how they dim. Where’s Mr. Miller? Get him -and take that bit in Act Two, Alison, where the lights -go down.”</p> -<p>Already nine o’clock, and dress rehearsal hadn’t -even started yet. It would go on until the early hours -of the morning, Peggy knew. Missing props would be -found and put in place, movements changed, and -last-minute touches made to the set. Peggy settled -down, curling up as comfortably as she could on the -hard seat, as she waited for rehearsal to begin.</p> -<p>Chris Hill walked out on stage, his appearance -completely transformed with the mustache, small -beard, and sideburns that he used for Mr. Manningham. -Even his attitude was different, Peggy noticed. -He seemed a lot older and his voice was deep and -serious as he checked his make-up with Chuck.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_80">80</div> -<p>Finally, at nine-thirty, they were ready. The curtains -were drawn, Alison settled herself in her chair, -Chris stretched out on the couch, and Peggy took -her place in the wings. Even a dress rehearsal, she -thought, as she mentally prepared for her entrance, -had a feeling of excitement and pressure. Well, this -was their one chance to feel the play as it would be -on opening night—to rehearse with continuity.</p> -<p>“I’m not going to stop you,” Chuck called. “I’ll be -taking notes and we’ll iron out the flaws later. Ready, -Danny?”</p> -<p>“All set,” Danny affirmed, his hands on the curtain.</p> -<p>“All right then; make it a performance, everyone.”</p> -<p>The first half of Act One went well. Peggy had a -very small part and was able to watch almost continuously -from the wings. Chris was really sinister, -she thought, shivering as she observed his scene with -Alison. And Alison was wonderful. She was a little -young to play Mrs. Manningham but her own personality -had disappeared in the part, and she was -completely believable.</p> -<p>“How I would love to play that part someday!” -Peggy dreamed. “Or something like it. I wish I had -just one dramatic part to do this summer!” She sighed -as she thought of the season ahead—one comedy part -after another.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_81">81</div> -<p>Chris made his exit with a slam of the door, and -Rita, as the housekeeper, came on to announce the -arrival of Sergeant Rough. Peggy drew up a box near -Gus at the switchboard, and leaned forward excitedly -to watch. With his old-fashioned cape-coat and painstaking -make-up, Howard Miller was the very picture -of a Scotland Yard Inspector. Peggy tensed as the -suspense mounted; even Gus at the lights was so engrossed -in the play that he almost forgot to dim the -lights at the right time.</p> -<p>“Gus,” Peggy whispered, “the lights! Gus, isn’t that -your cue?”</p> -<p>He started, quickly dimmed the lights, and then -shook his head sheepishly. “Thanks, Peggy!”</p> -<p>“I’m afraid you are married to a tolerably dangerous -gentleman,” Sergeant Rough said to Mrs. Manningham, -and as she stood there, slowly realizing his -meaning, the curtain closed on Act One.</p> -<p>“House lights,” Chuck called. “Open the curtain, -Danny, and everybody on stage.”</p> -<p>Surprised, the cast gathered on the set.</p> -<p>“I thought we were doing a straight run-through” -Alison complained crossly. “I need it, Chuck, to get -a feeling of the continuity!”</p> -<p>“I know, Alison,” Chuck said, “I’m sorry. But something’s -come up that you’ll all know about tomorrow, -and it might ruin opening night. I’d rather tell you -now so you can work it out during rehearsal. Better -a bad dress rehearsal than a dreary opening.”</p> -<p>“What now?” Peggy wondered. She had never seen -Chuck so depressed or listless. All his energy seemed -to have left him as he walked forward and looked up -at everybody.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_82">82</div> -<p>“You’re all wonderful,” he said slowly, “and you’re -doing a job that’s worthy of Broadway—honestly, -you are.” He watched Alison closely as he spoke, letting -the words sink in. “Now, I don’t want this to -throw you. Just hear it quietly, and then we’ll finish -rehearsal. Aunt Hetty dropped in a minute ago—she’d -been in town and happened to drive past the -movie house. She saw the advertisement for the new -bill which opens tomorrow night.”</p> -<p>“Oh, no!” Chris broke in with instant comprehension.</p> -<p>“I’m afraid so, Chris,” Chuck said quietly. “They -are showing the movie of <i>Angel Street</i> this week. -Under another title, of course, but everybody knows -it’s the same play. The story’s too famous. Slade is -counting on the stars of the film to draw audiences -away from our production.” Chuck tried to think of -something else to say, but it was no good. Everyone -recognized the seriousness of this move, and what it -could mean. “I—I’m sorry.” Chuck concluded lamely.</p> -<p>Alison was standing stiffly, her hands clenched and -her mouth tight as she tried to control her tears. But -then she broke. “I told you it wasn’t worth the effort,” -she sobbed. “I’m not going to ruin my health and -nerves doing this part and then have nobody in the -audience! They can all go to the movies as far as I’m -concerned! This whole theater has been a fiasco from -the beginning, and the sooner we close the better. -You can give the part to somebody else—I’m -through!” She ran off the stage and to the dressing -room as the rest of the cast looked after her unhappily.</p> -<p>Rita started to follow her, but Chuck shook his -head. “Let her go,” he said. “She doesn’t really mean -it, and she might as well get it out of her system. The -part is a terrific strain, and I’m not surprised at her -reaction!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_83">83</div> -<p>Peggy dropped onto the couch beside Howard Miller, -who was sitting there twirling his hat thoughtfully. -“I had a feeling something was going to happen,” -Peggy said sadly, “but I never dreamed it would -be this. Guess I really was all wrong about Bill Slade. -If he didn’t make an effort to stop his brother this -time, I guess he never will. Maybe he’s just as opposed -to the theater as Max.”</p> -<p>“I don’t know, Peggy,” Mr. Miller replied, “I’m beginning -to wonder if we shouldn’t have had someone -go to see him as you suggested. Perhaps any try -would have been better than none at all. This move -of theirs may ruin the theater for good. We can’t -possibly stay open if business drops off any more.” He -frowned. “The Chamber of Commerce will never -want to hear of a summer theater again, and we can’t -afford the loss of money either.”</p> -<p>“Do you think it’s too late?” Peggy questioned intently. -“Too late to see Bill Slade?”</p> -<p>“I’m afraid so,” he said. “I’ve already spoken to -Max. Aunt Hetty is so furious that she won’t talk to -either one of them, and they won’t speak to Richard -or Chuck.” He smiled ruefully. “Impasse. Like nations -trying to get together without a common language.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_84">84</div> -<p>Peggy was silent, remembering that Bill Slade had -seemed to speak her language. Could she have been -so very wrong about that, after all? Why couldn’t she -see him herself? Why did it have to be one of the -directors of the theater or of the Chamber of Commerce? -If the Slades were too stubborn or unreasonable -to talk with “authority,” maybe they—or at least -Bill—would be freer with her. She laughed softly to -herself, thinking of the Hatfields and McCoys. This -feud was every bit as unreasonable and silly—and in -the stories, it was always the younger generation that -somehow managed to work things out! Feeling a little -like a heroine in a legend, Peggy decided to try.</p> -<p>But how? All through the rest of the rehearsal—with -Alison back and working just as Chuck had predicted—Peggy -thought about it. She couldn’t call -and ask for an appointment. It had to be subtler than -that. She would have to arrange something that -seemed quite accidental. Yes, a chance meeting with -Bill Slade! But how?</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_85">85</div> -<h2 id="c8"><span class="h2line1">VIII</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">An Explanation</span></h2> -<p>“Chuck, are you up yet?” Peggy knocked cautiously -on the door of his combination office-living quarters -on the lower floor of the annex. It was eleven o’clock -and the tired company hadn’t turned in until three-thirty -in the morning.</p> -<p>“Come in, Peggy.” Chuck opened the door and motioned -her in. His desk was covered with work, and -crumpled wads of paper littered the floor. “Been up -for hours,” he said. “I was just going over the budget.” -His eyes were hollow and ringed from lack of sleep. -“The answer is, <i>what</i> budget?” He tore up the piece -of paper he was holding and dropped it in the waste-basket. -“It doesn’t look good, Peggy.”</p> -<p>“Oh, Chuck, I’m sorry!” Peggy felt dreadful, realizing -the enormous amount of work that he had put -into the theater, and the possible futility of it all. But -she couldn’t reveal her plan, much as she would like -to, even to offer him some hope. It might not work -out after all, and Chuck was so depressed that he -would probably try to dissuade her from seeing Bill -Slade. She had determined to try, at any cost, and she -must do it very quietly and all alone.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_86">86</div> -<p>“Could I possibly be excused from the reading today?” -Peggy asked. “There are so many things I need -from town, and I haven’t had a chance yet to catch -up on shopping—”</p> -<p>“Go ahead,” Chuck answered dully. “There isn’t -going to be a reading, anyway. I don’t know if we’ll -even be open after this week, so I’m not going to work -you any harder than I have to. Today everyone gets -a rest; tomorrow we’ll begin again.”</p> -<p>“Thank you,” Peggy said, wishing she could wave -a magic wand and set everything right. “Is there anything -I can get for you while I’m in town?”</p> -<p>“No, thanks, Peggy. By the way, we will have a line -rehearsal before the show tonight. Five o’clock here.”</p> -<p>Five o’clock. Peggy calculated. Yes, that would -work out. She could be about her business and get -back in plenty of time. She left quietly, hoping that -nobody noticed her as she walked up the little path -around the side of the inn and down the hill to the -highway.</p> -<p>The weather was changing, Peggy noticed, as she -walked along. When she had arrived a hint of spring -had still been in the air, but now it was hot and beginning -to feel like real summer. Wouldn’t it be fun -to enjoy some of the pleasures of the resort, she -thought, looking at the beautiful blue of the lake -dotted with sails and speedboats. Michael had promised -to take her out in his boat someday. Someday! -Everyone had been so busy that even Michael hadn’t -had an opportunity to be out on the water that he so -dearly loved.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_87">87</div> -<p>“When we get settled into a routine,” the company -had dreamed optimistically. “In a few weeks, after -things are going smoothly, well, then we’ll have time -to swim once in a while and go boating!”</p> -<p>Peggy sighed, taking off the little jacket that -topped her gaily flowered summer dress. It could still -work out, she thought, things could run smoothly if -everyone knew that the theater would stay open. -This uncertainty, though, was terrible for everyone’s -morale and left no time for play. Actors needed relaxation, -too, she mused. The theater was fun, but it -was hard work as well.</p> -<p>“And today I’m free for a while!” She smiled with -a sudden sharp enjoyment at being outdoors and -away from the theater.</p> -<p>As Peggy passed the offices of the <i>Kenabeek Gazette</i>, -she paused for a moment. She needed a newspaper -and wondered if she should go in. But no, she -decided, somebody might recognize her, so she hastened -on and walked into the drugstore. There were -several copies of the paper left and Peggy bought one -along with some cosmetics she needed. Outside again, -she flipped through the paper, seeking the information -she wanted. There it was—the first showing of -the movie today would be at noon. She had just -enough time. Hurriedly, she walked on, nodding back -at several people who smiled at her, apparently part -of their grateful, if small, audience.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_88">88</div> -<p>“Oh, Miss Lane—” A middle-aged woman, smartly -attired in sports clothes, stopped her on the sidewalk. -“I just want to tell you how much my husband and I -enjoyed you in <i>Dear Ruth</i>. We saw it on Broadway -years ago and I must say we were surprised at the -professional excellence of your cast. Tell me, who did -that lovely set?”</p> -<p>“Oh, thank you.” Peggy smiled. “Our set designer -is Gus Stevens. He’s the husband of the girl you saw -playing the part of the mother. And she was awfully -good, wasn’t she?”</p> -<p>“Wonderful,” the woman agreed warmly. “Just -wonderful. You know, we’ve been coming up here to -Lake Kenabeek for years—our son goes to a camp -nearby. This is the first summer that we’ve had any -real entertainment! You tell your director that we -wish him a lot of luck—and the whole cast. We hope -you’ll be here every year from now on!”</p> -<p>Peggy left her thoughtfully, realizing that if the -theater should have to close, it would affect more -than just the company and the Chamber of Commerce. -People here really wanted entertainment. -Surely there was room for a summer theater and the -movies to exist side by side!</p> -<p>She bought her ticket for the film, hoping that the -woman in the booth didn’t recognize her. Probably -not, Peggy thought. It might be a sin for anyone employed -at the movies to go to the Summer Theater! -She shook her head impatiently and went into the -dark interior. Now that she was here, Peggy wondered -if her plan had been so ingenious after all. Perhaps -Bill Slade wouldn’t even be here today. Perhaps -instead of finding him, she would run smack into his -brother Max! And that was a prospect she didn’t particularly -want to face.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_89">89</div> -<p>Peggy took a seat in the first row at the side of the -balcony. Here she was close enough to the mezzanine -to get up frequently and look around the lounge -where a sign on a door announced, <span class="sc">Office of the -Manager</span>. Looking at it doubtfully as she left her seat -for what must have been the tenth time, Peggy wondered -if anyone was inside. She might have to stay -here all day, seeing the film several times as she -waited for someone to emerge. Two ushers walked -by and Peggy heard one of the girls say, “No, Mr. -Slade isn’t here yet. He said he’d be in around five-thirty. -But you’re off duty then, aren’t you?” They -went on, leaving Peggy feeling that her brilliant idea -hadn’t been so brilliant after all! She was just about -to go back and watch the end of the movie, when the -door opened and Bill Slade walked out!</p> -<p>Peggy was in luck! It must be Max who was expected -later on.</p> -<p>Bill Slade saw her standing there, and an incredulous -expression suffused his face. “Why—why, it’s -you!” he blurted, in utter astonishment.</p> -<p>“Oh, Mr. Slade! How nice to run into you again!” -Peggy’s acting experience came in handy right now. -She hoped she seemed genuinely surprised.</p> -<p>“And you know my name now, it seems,” he said, -reddening slightly as he came over to her. “I’m sorry -about that. I didn’t dare introduce myself that day, -not knowing how you’d feel about it.”</p> -<p>Something tugged at Peggy’s heart. She felt she -had never met anyone so basically nice or so unhappy -with a situation.</p> -<p>“What on earth are you doing here?” he asked, -frowning a little as if he had only just realized where -they were.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_90">90</div> -<p>Peggy had planned the answer. “Why, I was -having a little difficulty with my part this week,” she -said easily, “and I thought I’d take a look at the movie -to see how it was done.” From the balcony, the sound -of the closing music of the film swelled around them, followed -by the martial strains of music for the news-reel.</p> -<p>“You missed the end,” Bill Slade observed, looking -at her closely.</p> -<p>“Oh, that doesn’t matter.” Peggy was slightly flustered. -“I’m not in the end, anyway. I’m just playing -the maid.” She hoped it sounded logical.</p> -<p>Bill laughed. “No wonder you were having trouble,” -he said. “That’s miscasting if I ever heard of it!”</p> -<p>“Oh, no, it isn’t.” Peggy smiled back. “You just -come to see the play and you’ll see what a good character -actress I can be!”</p> -<p>Again she noticed that sad expression come into his -eyes, but then he brightened and said, “Miss Peggy -Lane, why don’t we do something utterly insane and -go out for some lemonade or something together? Do -you have time?”</p> -<p>Peggy glowed. This invitation was exactly what -she had hoped for! “I’d love to,” she agreed happily.</p> -<p>Bill Slade walked with her back to the drugstore -and they took one of the little booths in the rear, well -away from curious eyes. In the middle of the afternoon -there were few people in the store, and they -could speak freely without being overheard.</p> -<p>“I wish you would come up to the theater just -once,” Peggy implored. “I think you’d enjoy seeing -a play for a change.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_91">91</div> -<p>“I know I would,” Bill said slowly. “I love the theater, -Miss Lane—”</p> -<p>“Peggy, please!” she twinkled.</p> -<p>“Peggy!” he agreed. “All right. But we might as -well not beat about the bush. You know how my -brother feels about the theater! I’ve talked to him, -Peggy, believe it or not.” He looked at her pleadingly, -and she wondered how an attractive, intelligent -young man like this could bear to remain so entirely -under his brother’s influence. Bill Slade looked as -though he should have a more independent role.</p> -<p>“But what does your brother have to do with it?” -Peggy asked, hoping to jolt him a little. “Surely, if -you would like to be on our side—and I gathered -from the way you spoke that day that you would—?”</p> -<p>Bill answered her implied question with an emphatic -nod.</p> -<p>“Well, then,” Peggy urged, “why not take a stand? -Come up to the theater and let your brother know -exactly how you feel.”</p> -<p>“He does know,” Bill said softly.</p> -<p>“I don’t see why we have to be in competition,” -Peggy went on earnestly. “Don’t you think the two -forms of entertainment could complement each -other? For instance, we’re doing a melodrama this -week, and if instead of choosing the same story, you -had run a comedy film, both our businesses would -have benefited. Or don’t you agree?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_92">92</div> -<p>She looked at him anxiously over her glass of lemonade, -her large eyes serious and her pretty dress -making a splash of color against the dull gray of the -seat. Bill Slade smiled, saying, “You make an incongruous -picture, Peggy! You’re much too young and -pretty to be carrying the weight of rival businesses on -your shoulders. Tell me—” he leaned forward intently—“did -anyone ask you to come and see me -about this? I can’t quite believe your story about the -movie!”</p> -<p>Peggy decided to be completely honest with him. -“No, no one asked me to come—but I did hope to see -you. I came with that intention. I thought perhaps if -we talked together, you might see our point of view -and persuade your brother to put an end to this silly -feud!”</p> -<p>“I have tried to persuade him, Peggy,” Bill said -uneasily. “I’ve argued about it from the beginning. -Then when he decided to run this particular movie -this week—well, it was almost the last straw!”</p> -<p>“Well, then,” Peggy cried, “why not let it <i>be</i> the -last straw? Why don’t <i>you</i> choose a picture for once -instead of your brother? He doesn’t have everything -to say about your business, does he?”</p> -<p>Bill looked at her unhappily. “There’s a lot you -don’t know, Peggy,” he said. “We are partners, yes, -but partners in name only. You see, when we bought -that theater, Max was the one who put up the money. -He was older, and had been in a very successful public -relations business in New York. His dream had -always been to come back here to live, with a business -of his own. I had just come out of the Army and -didn’t have any money to invest.”</p> -<p>“And your brother bought the theater all on his -own?” Peggy asked. “My! He must have saved a lot!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_93">93</div> -<p>“No, not entirely on his own,” Bill said. “I don’t -know why I’m telling you all this, Peggy—” he smiled -as her wistfully—“I guess it’s because I want you to -like me, and I want to clear myself. But please promise -me that anything I say will be a confidential matter -between us.”</p> -<p>“Of course,” Peggy agreed warmly. She was glad -to know that Bill Slade trusted her, and thought that -it was probably a very good thing for him to talk to -somebody. She had an impression that he was very -lonely.</p> -<p>“Max couldn’t have done it all on his own,” Bill -confided. “He had another investor—a silent partner -whom almost nobody knows about. Not that there’s -anything wrong about it, but—”</p> -<p>“Ford Birmingham!” Peggy guessed excitedly as -the pieces began to fall into place.</p> -<p>“That’s right. Ford put up the rest of the money. -He keeps his partnership silent because of his job on -the paper. He loves the newspaper business and writing, -and manages to carry both jobs very well. However, -if people knew he was a partner, they might -think his movie reviews were prejudiced!” Bill -laughed. “They’re not, of course. Ford is a painfully -honest critic!”</p> -<p>“And he goes right along with your brother’s attitude -about us?” Peggy asked incredulously.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_94">94</div> -<p>“Well, you see, I’m afraid that Max has said some -pretty awful things about your theater to Ford.” Bill -seemed almost ashamed. “Not about the people personally,” -he added hastily, “but professionally. Max -honestly thinks you’re all amateurs and he’s persuaded -Ford of that.” He shook his head ruefully. -“And Max resents a little company of newcomers -coming into the town and possibly drawing away his -business. He—he’s not a very happy man, Peggy, and -he is my brother. I have to understand how he feels.”</p> -<p>“Of course,” Peggy said sympathetically. “I know -some people like that in my home town. They’re terrified -of anything new and become completely unreasonable -about it.”</p> -<p>Bill nodded. “If Max would just let me choose some -of the films, as you said, I think our own business -would pick up. It’s been terrible lately, but I know -why. It isn’t the Summer Theater, as Max thinks. It’s -his choice of old, dull movies that nobody wants to -see. This is the first good one we’ve shown in a long -time!” He sighed ironically. “And it took your theater -to make him choose it—for all the wrong reasons!”</p> -<p>They were silent, each thinking of the seemingly -impossible situation. Now that she saw the design -more clearly, Peggy couldn’t think of a way out. Apparently, -neither could Bill. He frowned and shook -his head again. “I’m sorry, Peggy, but there just -doesn’t seem to be anything I can do. I wish I could. -Believe me, I wish I could!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_95">95</div> -<p>Peggy walked back to the annex for the line rehearsal, -feeling disconsolate and subdued. It was -really almost hopeless, she thought, mulling over all -the problems. Without any real authority in the business, -Bill couldn’t be of much help. But she had been -right about one thing. Bill Slade was certainly not the -weak, spineless creature that people imagined! He -had good reason for his actions, and actually, it was -wonderfully loyal and brave of him to stick by his -brother in the face of a lot of criticism. Peggy didn’t -doubt that more persons than those concerned with -the Summer Theater regarded Bill as his brother’s -younger shadow—possibly even Ford Birmingham!</p> -<p>Peggy thought of the little paragraph Mr. Birmingham -had written on <i>Dear Ruth</i> toward the end of the -week—just as Chuck had predicted. Chris had been -right, too. It had said almost less than nothing—a -mere notice, in fact! Well, it was all a shame, Peggy -thought sadly, a terrible and unnecessary shame!</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_96">96</div> -<h2 id="c9"><span class="h2line1">IX</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">A Lifeline</span></h2> -<p><i>Angel Street</i> opened to a house of twelve persons!</p> -<p>Fortunately, Alison was so engrossed in her work -that she was not aware of the ridiculously small audience -until curtain calls, when they showed their intense -appreciation of the play by standing while they -applauded and shouted, “Bravo!” It was indicative of -the fine performances the actors had given and a deliberate -gesture of support. Almost everyone in the -audience came backstage after the show, congratulating -the company and telling Alison and Howard -Miller in particular how wonderful they had been. -Aunt Hetty was singularly impressed. “I knew you -were a good actress, Alison,” she complimented her, -“but I really had no idea you could do a demanding, -difficult part like this so well!”</p> -<p>Overhearing, Peggy couldn’t help wishing again -that she could have a chance to sink her teeth into -a dramatic part, too. Not that she was at all envious -of Alison—or was she, Peggy wondered? No, she -didn’t think so. It was just that seeing someone else -in a serious role opened up a part of Peggy that hadn’t -been tapped this summer and wished to be used.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_97">97</div> -<p>There was something else to it, too, Peggy thought, -smiling secretly. Something that almost nobody outside -of the theater knew. And it wasn’t such a bad -idea to keep audiences in ignorance about it—otherwise -their enjoyment might be lessened. The secret -was that in many ways it was really easier to play -a dramatic part than a comedy role. Comedy was the -hardest thing of all.</p> -<p>Peggy suddenly saw Mr. Bladen, who was popping -about on stage like a sprightly old bird, nodding with -satisfaction at the set. The friendly woman Peggy -had met on the street that morning had come with -her husband, and they were speaking with Richard -Wallace. She noticed Peggy and smiled, beckoning -her to come and join their group.</p> -<p>“I’d like you to meet Mr. and Mrs. Cook, Peggy,” -Richard said. “They’re interested in our theater and -in some of the furniture we’re using this week.”</p> -<p>“Oh,” Peggy exclaimed. “Well, I met part of the -family this morning.” She smiled at Mrs. Cook. “And -if you’re interested in the pieces on stage, you might -speak to Mr. Bladen. He’s here somewhere—”</p> -<p>“I noticed in the program that he loaned the -couch,” Mr. Cook said. “We think it’s such a beautiful -piece that we’d be very interested in buying it.”</p> -<p>“Well, wait a minute, and I’ll find him for you.” -Peggy beamed and hurried away. Wouldn’t it be wonderful -if the theater could be of assistance to Mr. -Bladen, too! She found him behind a flat, looking -curiously at a prop table and, pinned above it, the list -of scenes in which the things were used.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_98">98</div> -<p>“Neat. Very neat,” Mr. Bladen said. “Haven’t been -backstage since I was a boy. It smells wonderful!”</p> -<p>Peggy laughed. She knew exactly what he meant. -There was a very special aroma about backstage. It -had a hint of glue, paint, make-up, and even the -peculiar, musty odor of ropes and pulleys.</p> -<p>“I think you’ve sold your chaise longue,” Peggy -told him happily. “That is, if you’re interested in selling -it!” She brought him back to meet the Cooks, and -soon all were engrossed in a discussion of antiques. -Peggy saw that it might indeed be a fruitful night for -Mr. Bladen. When the boys returned the props and -furniture after <i>Angel Street</i> was over, maybe they -would be willing to clean up Mr. Bladen’s shop a bit. -It was little enough to do in return for the things he -had lent them. Peggy made a mental note to remind -Michael and his friends.</p> -<p>The audiences for the rest of the week were uniformly -small. Either people were going to the movie -instead of the play, as Max Slade had hoped, or his -comments about the company were having their -effect. The absence of anything in the paper except -their own advertisements was keeping people away, -too. If only Ford Birmingham would break down and -come to the theater, Peggy thought!</p> -<p>The company began rehearsals for the next play, -<i>Charley’s Aunt</i>, not knowing if they would even have -an opportunity to play it! Rehearsals had never gone -so badly. All the fire had left Chuck’s direction, and -the cast responded just as dully. Toward the middle -of the week, Richard and Chuck called everyone together -and announced that the theater would definitely -have to close unless everyone took a cut in -salary. If the actors were willing to do this and work -just for expenses, they might be able to pull through -another week.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_99">99</div> -<p>Rita and Gus looked at each other gloomily. Peggy -knew that they had counted on saving something -this summer to take a long-dreamed-of vacation. In -the four years they’d been married, they had never -had a honeymoon! Still, Rita and Gus were the first -to say they’d be glad to forego their salaries.</p> -<p>Rita even laughed about it. “It’s fate, that’s all. We -might have known it! And if we did leave now, we’d -only have to go back unemployed to New York. It’s -too late to get other jobs this summer. Might as well -stay here another week and enjoy the scenery!”</p> -<p>Everyone else felt the same way. There was little -point in not making one last effort, even though -they knew the theater couldn’t last long.</p> -<p>“Maybe I can talk the manager of Kenabeek Inn -into letting us stay for a few days after we close,” -Chuck added glumly. “Then you could all at least -have a little leisure and swimming after your work!”</p> -<p>“Do you remember when we had all that space in -the paper after the commissioner of education made -his decision about the theater?” Chris Hill asked. “It -probably accounted for the good house we had opening -night of <i>Dear Ruth</i>. Couldn’t we somehow find -something else that would bring us space in the paper—maybe -to be mentioned in some of the social columns—anything, -as long as they write about us!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_100">100</div> -<p>“I’ve tried,” Richard said. “I’ve been to see everyone -on that paper who could do us the slightest bit -of good, and Aunt Hetty has used her influence, too. -We do get things in. But the social columns aren’t the -answer, Chris, as long as people regard us as amateurs. -They don’t want to spend money on anything -that isn’t professional! That’s why we only get the -same small audience over and over again. Even people -who bought season tickets before we opened -aren’t using them! They’re beginning to regard their -investment as some kind of charity to help the town! -No, Chris, I’m afraid we’re licked.”</p> -<p>And for the first time, Peggy thought so, too. Until -now she always had felt a stirring of hope, an optimistic -sense that the theater would pull through somehow. -But now everything looked too bleak. It would -be unrealistic to hope for a miracle at this point.</p> -<p>Peggy began to visualize the letters she would -shortly have to write home: “Sorry, we folded! How -would you like a visitor for a while?” If, she thought -dismally, she could even manage a ticket home now -with the cut in salary. It would be too defeating to -ask her parents for that. Maybe she wouldn’t be able -to go home after all!</p> -<p>On the last night of <i>Angel Street</i> a pall hung over -the entire theater. It was so thick the company could -almost taste it. All the magic had deserted the dressing -rooms and the stage, and Peggy realized anew -how much the theater was a two-way romance. Plays -needed an audience. One couldn’t work to a vacuum. -Still, there was a job to be done, and although the -actors had long since lost their excitement, they began -the play with a determination to do the best possible -job, and with that inexplicable feeling of loss -that always occurred on the last night of a show. It -was sad, saying good-by to a part and a story. <i>Angel -Street</i> wouldn’t live again until some other company -somewhere took it and molded it into being.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_101">101</div> -<p>The curtain fell to loud but scattered applause, and -the actors, too enervated to rush to their dressing -rooms tonight, stood about on stage longer than -usual. Peggy was talking to Rita about <i>Charley’s -Aunt</i>, when a movement in the wings caught her eye, -and she turned to see a sight so astonishing that she -literally dropped onto Mr. Bladen’s couch.</p> -<p>Bill Slade, accompanied by two other men, was -walking onto the stage and heading straight for -Chuck Crosby with a purposeful air and a broad -smile.</p> -<p>Peggy gasped, unwilling to trust her eyes! The men -were all talking to Chuck now, and he seemed as -flabbergasted as Peggy.</p> -<p>Rita pulled on her sleeve, “Who are they, Peggy? -What’s it all about?”</p> -<p>“That’s Bill Slade, one of them,” Peggy said. “I -don’t know who the others are.”</p> -<p>“Bill Slade!” Rita exclaimed in disbelief. “Well, for -heaven’s sake!”</p> -<p>Suddenly the little group laughed, and Bill turned -to smile at Peggy. “I took your advice, you see,” he -said, coming over to her. “I know I’m a little late getting -here, but I wanted to bring someone with me. -Peggy, this is Ford Birmingham!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_102">102</div> -<p>Ford Birmingham! Everyone heard the name and -stared openly. Mr. Birmingham was an interesting, -distinguished-looking man, younger than Peggy had -imagined, with streaks of premature gray in his hair. -As he spoke to her, Peggy felt a quality of integrity -in everything he said.</p> -<p>“I’m so sorry that I didn’t come on my own initiative -sooner. I feel that I owe you all an apology—particularly -in view of the superb play I saw tonight! I’m -afraid I misjudged you. I had no idea it would be like -this.”</p> -<p>He was kind enough to see each member of the -company personally and offer his apologies. Peggy -was struck by the graciousness of the gesture. It -couldn’t be easy for him.</p> -<p>“So that is Ford Birmingham!” she exclaimed to -Bill. “He’s so—so entirely different from my picture -of him!”</p> -<p>“Thought you’d like him.” Bill smiled. “And I think -there’s another surprise for the cast, Peggy!” He indicated -the other member of the trio, who was still -deep in conversation with Chuck.</p> -<p>“Who is he?” Peggy asked curiously. But before -Bill could answer, Chuck, grinning from ear to ear, -asked the cast to gather around.</p> -<p>“Someone here has a proposition for us,” Chuck -said, introducing Mr. Eugene Vincent, the entertainment -director for Lake Manor, a huge resort hotel -three miles down the highway.</p> -<p>“If you people would be interested,” Mr. Vincent -said, his plump face wreathed with good humor, “I’d -like to have you play one night a week down at the -Manor! It would be a wonderful addition to our program, -and you wouldn’t have to worry about a thing. -We’d do our own sets for your plays, take care of -moving your props, and transport you back and forth. -All you have to do is act!” He beamed at them. “How -does that sound to you?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_103">103</div> -<p>“It might mean that we’d be able to continue our -season,” Chuck broke in anxiously. “I’m not sure yet, -but the additional money might carry us through—”</p> -<p>“And there’s one other inducement,” Mr. Vincent -added. “You’d come early for dinner on performance -days, and have the recreation facilities available for -your use at any time. Swimming, Ping-pong, volleyball....” -He raised his eyebrows and peered at -them like a genie offering infinite temptations.</p> -<p>They couldn’t believe their ears. After a stunned -silence, Chris Hill was the first to give a mighty -whoop. “Mr. Vincent,” he exclaimed, pumping his -hand furiously, “I have always believed in Santa -Claus, and now that you have come along, I <i>know</i> -it’s true!” He turned to the company. “What about -the rest of you? Don’t you believe in miracles?”</p> -<p>“You mean it’s true,” Danny said, with a perfectly -blank expression. Then as it sank in he grinned, -and grabbing Peggy, began to waltz about on stage.</p> -<p>“It’s true,” he sang, “it’s terrific, it’s fantastic, it’s -the most amazing ever!”</p> -<p>The cast merrily congratulated one another, -showering Mr. Vincent with handshakes and praise, -and finally dragging him and even Ford Birmingham -into an impromptu conga line about the stage. Gus -turned on the music and it wasn’t long before a real -party developed. Michael Miller went out to bring -back sandwiches and soft drinks, and the set of <i>Angel -Street</i> changed, miraculously, from a gloomy room to -one of brightness and gaiety.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_104">104</div> -<p>“How did it all happen?” Peggy asked Bill Slade -breathlessly during a lull in the dancing.</p> -<p>“Simple,” he answered, smiling. “It occurred to me -after our talk that there was one effort I could make -in your behalf. I had never spoken seriously to Ford -about the theater. I took it for granted that he knew -how I felt, but then I remembered that I’d never actually -told him so. He’d only heard Max’s side of the -story. So”—he grinned at her—“after I saw you that -day, I went to see Ford. It took all week to persuade -him to come up here, but I finally managed.”</p> -<p>“But what did you say to him?” Peggy questioned, -her eyes alight with interest. “It must have been -good!”</p> -<p>“I appealed to his sense of honor,” Bill said. “Since -we’re all in the same business, I felt he should make -an effort to understand your side of the question, too. -And after enough insistence that you were really professional, -and that he ought to check that for himself, -well—he agreed. You know,” Bill added rather sheepishly, -“I was terribly impressed. I really didn’t think -the play would be as good as it was. Will you forgive -me?”</p> -<p>Peggy laughed delightedly, “Oh, Bill! Of course!”</p> -<p>“I think Ford will give you a terrific review,” Bill -said.</p> -<p>“And what about Mr. Vincent?” Peggy asked, “Was -that your doing, too?”</p> -<p>“No.” Bill shook his head shyly. “Just a coincidence, -Peggy. Ford was having dinner with him—”</p> -<p>“And you persuaded both of them to come!” Peggy -cried. “Now don’t deny it, Bill Slade, I know you did!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_105">105</div> -<p>“Well,” he admitted reluctantly, “I just said that it -might be interesting.”</p> -<p>“Oh, Bill, how will we ever be able to thank you!” -Peggy’s face was flushed with gratitude. “And I’ll bet -Chuck and Richard don’t know a thing about this—” -She got up with every intention of telling them, but -Bill put out his hand to stop her.</p> -<p>“No, please don’t, Peggy,” he pleaded. “They think -we came out of simple curiosity and were pleasantly -surprised. If the real story should get back to Max, it -might hurt him dreadfully. I’d rather keep the whole -thing as quiet as possible.”</p> -<p>“Of course,” Peggy agreed, sitting down again. “I -hadn’t thought of that. Bill, what are you going to -do about your brother? I’m sure he thought the theater -would close, and he’ll be furious at this new development.”</p> -<p>“Well,” Bill said slowly, “he’s bound to know I had -something to do with it, but he doesn’t have to know -how much—until I prove to him that your theater -isn’t the problem! I’ve already talked with Ford and -together we’re going to try to improve our choice of -films. Ford’s on my side about that.” He smiled ruefully. -“If I’d only spoken to him before, Peggy! I -guess it took a nudge from you to open my eyes!”</p> -<p>“Say! When’s this set coming down?” Gus Stevens -asked everyone. “Do you people know what time it -is?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_106">106</div> -<p>And it was late—so late that no one could think of -leaving Gus and the boys to work all alone. Everyone, -including Ford Birmingham and Mr. Vincent, pitched -in to help. The wonderful night ended as the last flat -was stacked away and Mr. Vincent, dusting himself -off, waved good-by with the cheery promise, “Be seeing -you next week at the Manor!”</p> -<p>Bill said good-by to Peggy, holding her hand for -a moment as he reminded her, “Don’t forget, Peggy, -if you’re grateful to me, that I have a lot to thank -you for, too. A lot!”</p> -<p>“Well,” Chris observed as he watched Bill drive -away with his friends, “I think there’s more to this -than meets the eye! You two seem to know each other -very well!” He looked at Peggy curiously as they -started the walk back to the annex together under -a bright night sky so clear that it looked like a canopy -of diamonds.</p> -<p>“Oh, well, you heard the story of my meeting Bill -Slade when I went to Mr. Bladen’s that day,” Peggy -reminded him, hoping that it would satisfy Chris. She -didn’t want anyone to know of their further talk.</p> -<p>“And you two became such fast friends in all of -about five minutes?” Chris raised his eyebrows. “Oh, -now, Peggy! I watched you together tonight and I -still say—there’s more to this than meets the eye!”</p> -<p>“Well”—Peggy was glad of the night that effectively -covered her blush—“he’s really nice, Chris.” -She wasn’t very good at evasion and wished that she -could tell the whole story, but for Bill’s sake she -mustn’t.</p> -<p>“I see,” Chris said softly. “Yes, he is a pleasant fellow, -Peggy, but you know there are other people -around, too. I hope you won’t forget that when you’re -thinking of Mr. Slade.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_107">107</div> -<p>“What does he mean?” Peggy wondered in silence -all the way home. Could Chris possibly be putting -a different interpretation on her friendship with Bill -Slade? “Oh dear,” Peggy thought, “I may have -helped untangle the theater, but I’ve certainly tangled -up my personal affairs!” She sighed, remembering -a little nervously that tomorrow <i>For Love or -Money</i> would go into rehearsal and she would be -playing a romantic lead opposite Chris Hill!</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_108">108</div> -<h2 id="c10"><span class="h2line1">X</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Friends—New and Old</span></h2> -<p>“‘Last night a group of professional actors, backed -by years of experience on Broadway, television, and -radio, presented a stunning performance of <i>Angel -Street</i> to an audience of fewer than twenty persons. -It is this reviewer’s duty to apologize publicly for having -neglected the Kenabeek Summer Theater. Until -now he has not had the pleasure of viewing one of -its productions. It is his loss. And he would like to say -that the Summer Theater is one of the finest additions -to our town in many years. It deserves all the -support our local residents and out-of-towners can -give it.’</p> -<p>“Oh, just listen to that!” Peggy interrupted herself -and squealed with delight as she read Ford Birmingham’s -review in the <i>Gazette</i> to Rita, Alison, and Chris. -They were having dinner together before the opening -of <i>Charley’s Aunt</i>. Ford Birmingham had timed -the appearance of the review to coincide with the -opening of the new play, and tomorrow there would -be yet another review in the <i>Gazette</i>.</p> -<p>“Go on,” Alison urged.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_109">109</div> -<p>“‘<i>Angel Street</i> was so electrifying,’” Peggy continued, -“‘that despite the small house, your reviewer -was sitting—literally—on the edge of his hard seat -in our high school auditorium. (That he was unaware -of his discomfort is another indication of the quality -of the performance.) Do not make the mistake of -assuming that a production given in the high school -is an amateurish effort. The set was excellently -executed by Gus Stevens, a young man, who, we suspect, -will shortly be designing for Broadway.</p> -<p>“‘Alison Lord, as Mrs. Manningham, gave a controlled, -vibrant performance that was a delight to -watch. As that colorful inspector, Sergeant Bough, -our own Howard Miller was simply superb.’” As -Peggy read on, the wonderful words of praise made -everyone glow with a feeling of success and satisfaction.</p> -<p>“‘Peggy Lane, in the small role of the maid Nancy, -was pert and charming, leaving us with the notion -that we’d like to see her do something else—’”</p> -<p>“Well, they will,” Chris interrupted, giving Peggy -a wink. “Next week, Peggy the Star!”</p> -<p>“Oh, Chris,” Peggy laughed. “I’m not really the -star—it’s you—and Alison, too.”</p> -<p>“Leave me out,” Alison said mockingly. “I had my -big chance and no audience. It’s your turn next, Peggy, -and it looks as if you’ll be luckier.” There was a hint of -envy in Alison’s tone that surprised Peggy. Only last -week she had been complaining about having two -big leads in a row. Peggy had thought Alison was -looking forward to the smaller but very good part she -had in <i>For Love or Money</i>.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_110">110</div> -<p>“Doesn’t he say anything about me?” Chris asked. -“Go on, Peggy, I can’t believe he isn’t going to offer -any criticism at all.”</p> -<p>Peggy resumed reading: “‘Rita Stevens was excellent -as the housekeeper; so believable in fact, that one -might tend to overlook a program note which explains -that she is much younger than she appeared.’</p> -<p>“Oh, and here you are, Chris,” Peggy said. “‘Chris -Hill, a romantic leading man if ever we saw one, -made a valiant effort to create the difficult, heavy role -of Mr. Manningham. That he didn’t quite succeed is -no slur on his ability. He was very good indeed and -there were moments in the play when he was truly -spine-chilling. We suspect, however, that underneath -those sideburns Mr. Hill is basically just too nice a -fellow. We’re looking forward to him in <i>Charley’s -Aunt</i> where, we understand, he will be playing something -closer to his type. This should be a real treat for -the young women of the area, and we assure you, if -you’re interested, that you needn’t look further for -a living, breathing matinee idol!’</p> -<p>“Oh, Chris!” Peggy whooped and burst out laughing.</p> -<p>“Why, Christopher Barrymore Hill!” Alison giggled. -“I had no idea you were such a heart throb!”</p> -<p>“Heavens! You won’t be able to walk down the -street alone after that!” Rita teased, as Chris got redder -and redder and looked as if he would like to -vanish into the floor.</p> -<p>“Oh, no,” he groaned. “And I was beginning to -think that Ford Birmingham was a pretty nice guy! -Why did he have to do this to me?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_111">111</div> -<p>“Because it’s wonderful publicity, that’s why!” -Peggy cried. “Oh, Chris, don’t you see? Look at everything -he said—about the quality of the actors, and -then establishing you as a draw. Why,” she declared -brightly, “we’ll have everybody in town rushing up to -see you! And they’ll bring their friends. It’s a beautiful -idea!”</p> -<p>“Umphm,” Chris moaned dismally. “It’s a hideous -idea! However, he was right in his criticism. There -were moments when I did feel distant from the part.”</p> -<p>“After this, you won’t even have to act any more.” -Alison laughed. “Just be yourself while everyone -swoons!”</p> -<p>“Oh, Alison, cut it out!” Chris pleaded, looking -around as if a thousand eyes were fastened on him. -“I wish Birmingham had settled on you for a drawing -card instead.”</p> -<p>“I wouldn’t mind,” Alison smiled, preening a little. -“As a matter of fact, I’d probably love it!”</p> -<p>“I’ll bet you would,” Chris muttered, while Peggy -frowned uneasily. The conversation was taking an -unpleasant turn, she thought, noticing the look Alison -gave Chris.</p> -<p>“Well,” Peggy said cheerily, trying to change the -subject, “who’s looking forward to Monday besides -me? Personally I can’t wait!”</p> -<p>Monday was the day that Mr. Vincent had asked -the company to give their first performance at Lake -Manor. It would be the last night of the play each -week, as Chuck and Richard had decided to move -the opening up one day to Wednesday instead of -Thursday. This meant also that there would be one -day less than usual to get <i>For Love or Money</i> into -shape.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_112">112</div> -<p>Talking excitedly about the Manor, the group finished -dinner in good spirits and left the restaurant -with Mrs. Brady’s wish for good luck trailing after -them.</p> -<p>From the first night of <i>Charley’s Aunt</i>, Ford Birmingham’s -review made its effect felt. There was a -difference in everyone’s attitude now that the theater -had gained status. Audiences improved nightly, and -Richard said that if things kept up like this, the theater -might even be able to recoup some of its losses.</p> -<p>“And this is the way summer stock should be,” -Peggy thought as she greeted each day with the anticipation -of a good rehearsal and a satisfying show. -Now she could concentrate more fully on her part in -<i>For Love of Money</i>. “A good thing, too, that I’m not -worried about the theater at a time like this,” she -realized. For as the week wore on, Peggy saw more -and more that Alison had been right about the role -of Janet. It was a long, demanding lead, and Peggy -worked furiously, knowing that next week she would -have to carry the show.</p> -<p>She found it a strange sensation to work opposite -Chris. He was so good in his part and made it all -seem so real that Peggy often caught herself wondering -if she were in a play or doing something right out -of life. At times she forgot herself completely. She -was Janet Blake, a young girl who was gradually -growing deeply fond of Preston Mitchell.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_113">113</div> -<p>Alison was quite evidently annoyed at the developing -friendship between Chris and Peggy. “Don’t -forget, dear, that you’re supposed to be playing comedy,” -she said to Peggy one day at rehearsal. “Sometimes -I get a feeling that you think you’re doing -<i>Camille</i>.”</p> -<p>Peggy was worried and hurt, wondering if Alison -was right. “Do you think I’m funny enough?” she -asked Rita privately. “Alison is finding fault with -everything I do.”</p> -<p>“Well, are you going to listen to her or to your -director?” Rita demanded. “Chuck seems satisfied -with your work. Look, Peggy, Alison is jealous because -you’re playing opposite Chris. I wouldn’t pay -any attention to anything she says. My own private -opinion is that you’re more interested in Chris than -you think—”</p> -<p>“Rita!” Peggy blushed furiously. “Here we go again! -It’s just that I like Chris enormously and—well—it is -exciting to work with him!”</p> -<p>“I know!” Rita teased her. “It seems to me I told -you something like that ages ago! Don’t say I didn’t -warn you, Peggy Lane! Before you know it, you’ll -have a dyed-in-the-wool crush on our new matinee -idol!” Both the girls laughed, remembering how uncomfortable -Chris had been with the role Ford Birmingham -had assigned him.</p> -<p>The week flew by and when Monday arrived, Peggy -noticed an excitement she hadn’t felt since the theater -opened. Something new was in the air; they were -to face a fresh audience in unfamiliar surroundings. -None of the cast had seen the famous Lake Manor, -and all were intensely curious as they rode along in -the station wagon the Manor had sent for them.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_114">114</div> -<p>“This is more like it!” Danny observed gleefully. -“Our own private chauffeur and dinner awaiting—I -always did like to live in style!”</p> -<p>“How could I have missed the Manor on the way -up by the bus?” Peggy wondered as they drove down -the highway. “This is the way I came—”</p> -<p>“Ah, yes, but you don’t see the Manor from the -road,” Danny replied poetically. “It is hidden, like all -goodies, a surprise package lurking in the midst of -tall trees and sparkling waters. And as we leave -the highway,” he intoned in travelogue fashion, “we -find ourselves driving under an arch of fir trees, their -graceful fronds meeting as they embrace above the -roadway—”</p> -<p>“Oh, Danny,” Peggy giggled, “we can see it, too.”</p> -<p>But he wasn’t to be deterred. “And around a winding -road which curves gracefully through acres—and -acres—and acres—”</p> -<p>The cast laughed and joined in the joking as they -drove through the spacious grounds that belonged to -the Manor.</p> -<p>“And finally,” Danny said as the Manor came into -view, “as we reach our destination—Oh, my gosh! -It’s a palace!” he concluded abruptly, forgetting his -travelogue as the car stopped under the awning in -front of the entrance.</p> -<p>“It really is a palace,” Peggy marveled as she -stepped out of the car, “or the next thing to it!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_115">115</div> -<p>The main house of Lake Manor was a huge white -building frosted with turrets and bay windows and -surrounded by cottages and a few other sprawling -buildings that appeared to be recreation halls. Peggy -saw stables, tennis courts, and a swimming pool off in -the distance. Ping-pong tables, croquet courts, and -lawn chairs dotted the velvet-green grass.</p> -<p>“Oh, it’s absolutely beautiful!” Rita exclaimed. “I -had no idea anything like this existed here!”</p> -<p>Just then Mr. Vincent appeared and, smiling -broadly, took the cast on a short tour of the Manor.</p> -<p>“It’s early,” he said, showing them the stage in one -of the recreation halls where they would play, “and -dinner won’t be served until six o’clock. Come along -and I’ll show you your dining room. We have several, -and I don’t want you to get lost! Then please do anything -you’d like to amuse yourselves. We want you to -have a good time!”</p> -<p>“How about some Ping-pong, Peggy?” Chris asked -after Mr. Vincent had left them.</p> -<p>“I’d love it,” Peggy said, “but I wish we could look -at the stage again first—Mr. Vincent took us through -so quickly.”</p> -<p>“Don’t you ever think of anything besides the stage, -Peggy?” Alison asked waspishly. “Really, it gets a -little boring after a while!” She turned and left the -group in a sudden huff.</p> -<p>“What’s the matter with her?” Danny asked wonderingly. -“I thought she was all a-flutter about playing -at the Manor.”</p> -<p>“Maybe she was all a-flutter about playing <i>before</i> -the show,” Rita said softly with a knowing look at -Peggy.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_116">116</div> -<p>Peggy suddenly realized what she meant. Alison -was disappointed that Chris had asked Peggy instead -of her. “Oh, for heaven’s sake,” she thought wearily, -“how could Alison possibly be upset over a little thing -like a game of Ping-pong!” When a group of people -lived so closely together, Peggy was beginning to -realize, little things could cause undue friction. A -word or a glance could be magnified out of all proportion. -Hadn’t she even been a little guilty of that -herself when Alison had criticized her performance?</p> -<p>“Your serve, Miss Lane,” Chris reminded her. -“Where are you anyway—off in a dream?”</p> -<p>“Yes,” Peggy smiled, “I guess I was!” She couldn’t -help observing how handsome Chris was with his -wonderful tan and his blond hair gleaming in the sun. -He did look like a movie star, and several people -stopped to watch them play together. Peggy felt almost -ashamed to realize that she was proud to be seen -with him. “And a minute ago you were condemning -Alison for the same thing!” she chided herself -fiercely. “I think it’s about time you had a long talk -with yourself, Peggy Lane!” She slammed the ball -hard, and it hit the far corner of the table, out of -Chris’s reach.</p> -<p>“Good play!” he cried. “That’s it.”</p> -<p>“Who won?” Peggy asked. She hadn’t even noticed.</p> -<p>“You don’t deserve to know,” he grinned. “You’re -off on a cloud somewhere. Come on, ingénue, let’s go -for a walk.”</p> -<p>They strolled through the lovely grounds, finding -that one winding path led to another even more -charming. Most of the landscaping was designed to -offer the best possible view of the lake, and Peggy -felt actively envious watching the boats dart back -and forth like large birds.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_117">117</div> -<p>“I’ve wanted to tell you, Peggy,” Chris said as they -sat down on a large rock that jutted out over the -water, “what fun it is working with you. So far I’m -enjoying <i>For Love or Money</i> more than any other -play we’ve done. It means more to me than just a -play,” Chris went on seriously. “I feel that we do awfully -well together—in almost anything.” He stopped, -looking at her intently as Peggy caught her breath. -She didn’t know what to say. Finally, a moment later, -she tremulously suggested that they had better get -back to dinner.</p> -<p>“Dinner!” Chris exclaimed with humorous disgust. -“At a time like this, with romance in the very air -around you! Honestly, Peggy, you’re enough to try -anybody’s patience!”</p> -<p>Peggy wished with all her might that she knew -what her real feelings were in regard to Chris. It was -all so confusing, she thought, as they found their way -back to the dining room through the maze of pathways.</p> -<p>Dinner was a sumptuous affair and a refreshing -change from the good but rather plain food at Mrs. -Brady’s.</p> -<p>“Cheddar cheese soup!” Michael Miller peered at -his bowl like a hungry owl. “Haven’t seen this since -Dad took me to New York last year!”</p> -<p>“Personally, I prefer turtle Madeira,” Alison said -languidly, taking a few sips of the delicious broth.</p> -<p>“Listen to the prima donna,” Chris whispered to -Peggy. “She was fine as long as she had all the leads, -but now wait and see. For the rest of next week she’ll -be impossible. I know—I’ve seen it happen before.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_118">118</div> -<p>“But I thought you liked her,” Peggy said softly. -She had decided she might as well find out how things -stood between Chris and Alison.</p> -<p>“I do,” Chris answered, slightly surprised, “I like -her a lot. She’s a very good actress.”</p> -<p>Thoughtfully, Peggy wondered if Chris judged -people by their acting ability—if that was the basis of -his sudden pronounced interest in her. Peggy was -very conscious of his presence beside her as they -finished dinner together.</p> -<p><i>Charley’s Aunt</i> was riotously received by the Lake -Manor audience. The actors had to be unusually alert -to restrict their movements sufficiently to work on the -smaller stage. There were several times when Peggy, -almost bumping into another player, came close to -breaking up and laughing out loud. And when an -angry bee somehow found his way on stage and got -lost in the tea things, all the cast had a difficult time -controlling themselves. Microphones were suspended -overhead to overcome the poor acoustics in the hall, -and the buzz of the bee came loud and clear over the -actors’ voices. The audience loved it! They roared and -applauded when the bee finally made a grand exit -over their heads and out the rear door.</p> -<p>Weak with laughter, Peggy made her way back toward -the tiny, dark dressing room that was stacked -with boxes of costumes and props. The hall was usually -reserved for the individual comedy acts that the -Manor booked for its guests.</p> -<p>“I’m sure they think we’re just another variation on -the same theme!” Peggy giggled. “That silly bee! He -sounded like a dive bomber!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_119">119</div> -<p>“They loved it!” Chris cried exuberantly, whirling -Peggy around in the small hall. Chris was always like -this after a show, Peggy noticed. Excited and gay and -ready to go on for the rest of the night.</p> -<p>“Miss Lane?” one of the stagehands called to her. -“There’s someone outside to see you.”</p> -<p>“Aha!” Chris intoned dramatically. “An admirer, -no doubt. Come along, Peggy—take me to your stage-door -Johnny and I’ll protect you!” Laughing, they -stepped out of the door into the courtyard of the -building.</p> -<p>“Peggy!” A tall, lanky, redheaded boy grinned -down at her, stretching out both hands in greeting.</p> -<p>“Randy Brewster!” Peggy cried, “Randy—of all -people! Well, how on earth—why—how did you—oh, -Randy!” She was so excited and pleased that she -stuttered.</p> -<p>“I loved the show,” Randy declared happily, hugging -her, “and I was so surprised to see you down -here at the Manor! I thought I’d have to wait to surprise -you up at the theater.”</p> -<p>“Oh, Chris,”—Peggy remembered him—“I’d like -you to meet a very dear friend of mine—I met him -when I started in dramatic school. This is Randy -Brewster—Chris Hill.”</p> -<p>“How nice,” Chris said shortly, his exuberance -gone.</p> -<p>“I certainly enjoyed your performance,” Randy congratulated -him. “Very funny. You have a lot of vitality. -Hope I’ll do as well here—”</p> -<p>“Oh,” Peggy exclaimed with sudden understanding, -“is that why you’re here? The Manor hired you?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_120">120</div> -<p>“Yep,” Randy said. “I’ll be here for a week doing -a new comedy routine. I hope we’ll be able to see -each other often. I was so pleased, Peggy, knowing -you’d be in the neighborhood.” He grinned at her -with that funny, warm, crooked smile that Peggy remembered -so well.</p> -<p>“I’m coming to see your opening day after tomorrow,” -Randy went on. “Wouldn’t miss it for anything. -I’m glad that I’ll be here while you’re playing a lead.”</p> -<p>“Are you familiar with the play?” Chris interrupted -suddenly.</p> -<p>“No,” Randy said with a smile, “but that will make -it even more fun.”</p> -<p>“Well,” Chris said mysteriously, “I don’t know how -much fun it will be for you, but you should certainly -find it interesting! You’re familiar with the old saying, -‘All’s fair in love and war’?” He flashed a teasing smile -at Randy. “Well, we’ll look forward to seeing you, Mr. -Brewster—yes, indeed!”</p> -<p>Chris left them gaping after him while Randy shook -his head. “That’s a strange fellow,” he puzzled. “He’s -very charming, but I’d swear that he doesn’t like me -one little bit! I wonder why! What have you been up -to, Peggy?”</p> -<p>He looked at her curiously while Peggy wondered -if things could conceivably get any more complicated! -She had been so happy to see a friend from New York—and -especially Randy. Now, she realized suddenly, -she would have to play her big lead with the knowledge -that Randy was in the audience, watching her -and Chris. “Well,” she thought, shivering slightly, -“that will be quite an experience!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_121">121</div> -<h2 id="c11"><span class="h2line1">XI</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Quick Thinking</span></h2> -<p>Peggy sat at her dressing table applying her make-up -carefully. For the first time this summer she had to be -just as beautiful as possible with no little tricks or -different hair styles for characterization. This time -she could look just like Peggy, only more so. After she -had put on the gown she wore for her entrance, she -combed out her thick, glowing hair that had grown in -the past few weeks until it just touched her shoulders. -It framed her face in soft waves, and as she looked at -herself in the mirror, she was pleased.</p> -<p>“You look absolutely lovely, Peggy,” Rita said, -“dreamy, in fact. I think the audience will go into -a tail spin—to say nothing of your friend Randy.”</p> -<p>The minute she mentioned his name, Peggy’s knees -began to shake. “Here I go again,” she said nervously. -“Opening night! Clammy hands and butterflies!”</p> -<p>“Well, don’t worry about it,” Rita said gently. “It’s -only because you’re doing a lead. It’ll go away.”</p> -<p>But privately, Peggy wasn’t so sure. Was she nervous -because of the play or Randy in the audience? -“Oh, I wish he hadn’t told me,” Peggy thought desperately. -“Now I’ll be thinking of him out there—”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_122">122</div> -<p>“Five minutes!” Gus called, and Peggy made her -way to the wings.</p> -<p>“Break a leg, leading lady,” Chris whispered as he -walked by, “and don’t worry about a thing.” He -grinned at her encouragingly and Peggy thought -again what a wonderful person Chris was. She wished -he hadn’t teased Randy in that manner, but then -Chris did everything all the way. No half measures -for him! Peggy watched him close his eyes for a moment, -getting into character and collecting his energy. -Chris would be good, Peggy had no doubt. “And what -about me?” she wondered. “I hope I can concentrate -and not be distracted by my own private thoughts.”</p> -<p>“Curtain!” The play had begun.</p> -<p>Peggy didn’t make her entrance until the second -scene of Act One. Now she wished that she had -stayed in her dressing room instead of watching from -the wings. By the time she walked on she was more -nervous than ever, but fortunately, Janet was supposed -to be in an excited state, too. Peggy was just -beginning to relax and feel comfortable, timing her -laugh—when the phone didn’t ring on cue!</p> -<p>Peggy looked at Chris and Chris looked at Peggy. -There was dead silence for a moment. Something -must have gone wrong with the phone bell or, worse, -someone had forgotten! They couldn’t go on, either, -until it rang. The call was necessary to the action.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_123">123</div> -<p>“Well”—Peggy plunged in with an improvisation—“I’ve -heard of sea gulls that are supposed to be -angels of ships at sea.” Preston and Janet had just -been talking about gulls—perhaps they could continue -until the phone rang. But Chris didn’t pick -it up. He looked perfectly blank, and Peggy read in -his eyes that desperation that means an actor is completely -at a loss. In theater terms, Chris had “gone -up”—higher than a kite.</p> -<p>“I think there was an article about sea gulls in the -<i>Reader’s Digest</i>,” Peggy ad libbed valiantly while -Chris stayed silent as a tomb. If only he would come -back a little and help her out! Peggy got up from the -couch and strolled around the room as if seeing it for -the first time. If she could disappear in the wings for -a moment, she might be able to signal someone. “I -hadn’t noticed what a lovely place you have here, Mr. -Mitchell,” she went on, making her way upstage to -the hall. “Is this the way to the kitchen?” She was -out in the hall now and disappeared for a moment, -waving her hand frantically in the wings.</p> -<p>Chris suddenly came to life and realized what she -was doing. “Why, don’t tell me you’re hungry,” he -called after her. “But if you want to snoop around—go -ahead.”</p> -<p>“I’m not snooping!” Peggy reappeared for a second. -This was better—at least they were improvising in -character. “I’m just naturally curious, that’s all.” She -disappeared again, desperately whispering, “<i>Sst—sst—where’s -the phone?</i>”</p> -<p>Michael signaled her that they were working on it, -the battery was dead! “Well, use the doorbell then—anything!” -Peggy whispered. She came back on stage, -her ingenuity giving out—but there it was, the ring! -Chris dived for the receiver. Gus had used the doorbell -but they managed to cover well enough and finished -the first act with relief.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_124">124</div> -<p>“<i>Whew!</i>” Chris said when the curtain closed. -“Thanks a lot for pulling me through, Peggy. When -that bell didn’t ring, I blew completely. First time -that’s happened in ages.”</p> -<p>“You were wonderful, Peggy,” Rita said. “I don’t -think the audience noticed a thing!”</p> -<p>“Gosh, I’m sorry.” Gus came up apologetically. “We -should have used the doorbell right away instead of -tinkering with the phone. That was quick thinking, -Peggy.”</p> -<p>“So I did have my mind on my work after all!” -Peggy thought happily. “How silly of me to worry -about it.”</p> -<p>But as the play progressed to the last act where -Preston finally embraces Janet, Peggy was amazed to -find that the simple scene had suddenly acquired -enormous value. All she could think of was Randy out -in the audience! As they took their curtain calls she -looked anxiously for him, wondering what he was -thinking.</p> -<p>“Terrific!” Randy congratulated her with a friendly -hug when he came backstage. “You were funny and -wonderful and perfect and you looked like a vision!”</p> -<p>“Why don’t you introduce me, Peggy?” Alison -asked as she came by. “This must be your famous -friend—”</p> -<p>“Randolph Clark Brewster,” Peggy said gaily, relieved -that Randy had taken the play as a play. “He’s -a wonderful comedian, but his heart isn’t in it. He -wants to be a playwright.”</p> -<p>“Really!” Alison drawled. “You aren’t related to the -Brewsters of Long Island by any chance?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_125">125</div> -<p>Randy frowned and sent an appealing look to -Peggy. He hated anyone to know about his wealthy -family as he was trying his best to be successful on his -own. “Well, uh, yes,” he muttered reluctantly. “Look, -Peggy, change your things, and let’s go out for a -snack. This is my night off and I want to make the -most of it!”</p> -<p>“I always did like that strong, silent type,” Alison -said as they entered the dressing room, “and besides -having that wonderful face and red hair, he comes -from a very prominent family. I don’t blame you for -leaving Chris in the lurch for your old friend.” The -barb sank in, and Alison’s contrived innocent smile -did nothing to relieve it.</p> -<p>“Well,” Peggy thought miserably as she took off -her make-up, “if people can’t understand a thing like -friendship, then let them think whatever they like!”</p> -<p>“Hey, open up, Peggy.” Peggy got up to open the -door and saw Bill Slade standing there. “You were -great, Peggy. You’ll have to do another lead this summer. -Want to go out for some coffee?” He smiled, -accepting her silence as consent.</p> -<p>“Peggy—a small tribute to a great leading lady!” -It was Chris, and he handed her a huge bouquet of -roses with an elegantly mocking little bow. “But let’s -eat. I’m famished.”</p> -<p>“That’s a really fine set,” Randy commented, returning -from a tour of the stage. “Are you ready yet?”</p> -<p>Peggy hastily excused herself and closed the door -while the three boys waited in the hall, each assuming -that she was his special date for the evening.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_126">126</div> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p05.jpg" alt="The three boys waited in the hall" width="500" height="374" /> -</div> -<p>Rita looked at Peggy’s perplexed expression with -undisguised amusement, finally breaking into laughter. -“The only solution, as I found out long ago, is -marriage!” she chuckled. “You’d better start thinking -about it, Peggy!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_127">127</div> -<p>“That is the last thing in the world I’m going to -think about—for a long time!” Peggy said emphatically. -She picked up her bag and sighed heavily, wondering -how to handle the situation.</p> -<p>Alison was grimly combing her hair and putting her -make-up away. “I don’t blame her for feeling left out,” -Peggy thought. “Playing a lead does seem to make a -difference in people’s interest—although it shouldn’t. -And taking a back seat isn’t easy for Alison.” Peggy -wondered how Alison would react if she asked her -to join them. It would simplify everything, but she -mustn’t appear to do it out of kindness.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_128">128</div> -<p>“Are you ready, Alison?” Peggy asked matter-of-factly.</p> -<p>“Ready for what?” Alison looked up, surprised.</p> -<p>“Why, to go to Mrs. Brady’s or the inn—or wherever -we’re going. I think we ought to let the boys decide.” -Peggy treated it as if it had been understood -from the beginning. “Are you and Gus coming along, -too?” she asked Rita.</p> -<p>“I’m sorry, we can’t, Peggy. We have to go over the -prop list for <i>You Can’t Take It with You</i>. It’s a difficult -show on the backstage end, and I want to help all -I can.”</p> -<p>Peggy nodded. Next week was going to be a challenge -for everyone. “Better hurry, Alison,” she said. -“We can’t stay out too late. We have an early call -tomorrow.”</p> -<p>It worked out just as Peggy had hoped. They went -to the inn for sandwiches and Alison attached herself -to Chris, leaving Peggy free to enjoy Randy’s company. -Bill Slade had a marvelous time with all of -them. Alison’s presence prevented Chris from kidding -Randy, which, Peggy suspected, Chris would have -loved to do. Just once in the evening, when Alison -excused herself for a moment, Chris leaned across the -table and said, “Say—how’d you like that last act, -Randy? Think it was realistic?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_129">129</div> -<p>Randy looked from Chris to Peggy and back again. -“Well,” he said with a slow smile, “it wasn’t exactly -the way I would have played it, a little too theatrical -for me. But then, Preston Mitchell <i>was</i> an actor! I’d -be inclined to take that scene too seriously, I’m -afraid.” He looked steadily at Peggy and she thought -she understood. Randy was telling her that Chris’s -interest in her was a professional mood—something -she had guessed already. But more important, he was -saying that his own feelings went deeper. Peggy felt -comforted and secure. Whatever happened with their -friendship, it would always be a lasting one. Peggy -smiled at him understandingly.</p> -<p>“What’s your play next week, Peggy?” Randy -asked.</p> -<p>“<i>You Can’t Take It With You!</i> And it’s going to be a -job! We have to use a lot of townspeople because it’s -such a large cast—”</p> -<p>“It’s a great show, though,” Chris added enthusiastically.</p> -<p>“And the most awful thing, Randy,” Peggy continued, -“is that I won’t be able to see your act down -at the Manor.”</p> -<p>“Well, at least you can say good-by.” Randy smiled. -“The day you play there is the day I leave.”</p> -<p>“Leave!” Peggy suddenly had an inspiration. “Oh, -Randy, why don’t you stay here for another week? -We’re going to need so many people in <i>You Can’t -Take It with You</i>—I’m sure Chuck and Richard -would love to have you.”</p> -<p>“The Russian!” Alison cried. “Everyone’s been biting -their nails, wondering who could play the Russian!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_130">130</div> -<p>“Oh, yes, you’d be perfect, Randy,” Peggy urged. -“And I’m doing Essie, the little ballerina. We could -work together—do say you’ll stay!”</p> -<p>“We-e-ell,” Randy hesitated, “I suppose I don’t -have to rush back—”</p> -<p>“You’re absolutely sure?” Chris asked, raising an -eyebrow. “I mean, we wouldn’t want you to miss anything -in New York—” He looked at Peggy for a moment, -and noticing her pained expression, laughed -good-naturedly, leaning across the table to shake -Randy’s hand. “Okay. You win, Mr. Brewster! I can’t -compete with old school ties and all that. You would -be great for the part and we’d love to have you.”</p> -<p>The boys shook hands, grinning at each other, while -Peggy looked on, happy and relieved. Chris had evidently -decided to “bury the hatchet.”</p> -<p>Alison seemed a little mystified. “What’s going on -with you two? You look as though you had a deep, -dark secret.”</p> -<p>“Deep, but not dark, Alison,” Chris laughed. “Light -as summer. Which reminds me, who knows something -good for mosquito bites? They’ve decided all of -a sudden that I’m a particularly delectable morsel!”</p> -<p>“Oh, oh, you’ve come to the right place,” Bill Slade -offered eagerly. “Take it from an old hand—”</p> -<p>“No, no, I know the best thing of all—” Alison -urged.</p> -<p>“But I found something brand-new—” Peggy -started, and then everyone laughed, plying Chris -with their favorite remedies. Randy promised Peggy -that he’d speak to the producers the next day, and -the party broke up with happy expectations of next -week’s show.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_131">131</div> -<h2 id="c12"><span class="h2line1">XII</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Varied Explosions</span></h2> -<p>Just as Peggy had expected, the producers were delighted -to have Randy stay an extra week and play -the Russian ballet teacher, Kolenkhov, in <i>You Can’t -Take It with You</i>. With Randy in the cast and everyone -working comfortably together, Peggy couldn’t -remember ever having such fun at rehearsals! And -what a cast! The play needed so many actors that -everyone was pressed into service. Michael Miller -and the apprentices all had small parts, Chuck Crosby -played the part of Peggy’s father as well as directing, -Mr. Miller brought some friends of his to fill in, and -even Aunt Hetty was persuaded to play. Mary Hopkins -brought a friend to try out for the part of the -Grand Duchess. June Tilson was a lovely young girl -who turned out to have a really fine talent.</p> -<p>“Where have you been all summer?” Chuck asked -when he heard her read for the first time. “We could -have used you before!”</p> -<p>“She’s been in hiding,” Mary laughed, “or I would -have brought her long ago.”</p> -<p>“I’ve been at the music camp, actually,” June explained. -“You know—the group of folk singers who -have a summer session nearby.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_132">132</div> -<p>“Oh, yes.” Chuck nodded. “We’re giving them the -auditorium one night for a benefit performance. Let’s -see—it comes during the week of <i>Guest in the House</i>, -I believe.”</p> -<p>“Oh, will I be glad when we do that play!” Alison -said. “I love the part!”</p> -<p>“The part of Evelyn?” Chuck asked.</p> -<p>“Yes, I’ve done it before and I can hardly wait to -play it again.”</p> -<p>“Don’t count too much on having the same part -this time,” Chuck cautioned her. “I’m not sure yet -how we’re going to cast the play.”</p> -<p>Alison shrugged. “Well, of course, I’m doing Evelyn,” -she commented blithely. “That was one of the -reasons I came up here!”</p> -<p>“We’ll discuss it later,” Chuck said firmly. “And -now, let’s get to work. By the way, does anyone have -an idea on how to handle the fireworks?”</p> -<p>The script of <i>You Can’t Take It with You</i> calls for -a display of fireworks onstage and an explosion offstage -during the show. Michael Miller assured Chuck -that he could easily take care of it.</p> -<p>“I have a workshop, you know, and it won’t be any -trouble—be fun, in fact!”</p> -<p>“You’ll have to be very careful,” his father warned.</p> -<p>“Naturally!” Michael said indignantly.</p> -<p>“And don’t make it too realistic.” Peggy giggled. -“Just a loud noise. We don’t want the auditorium -down around our heads.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_133">133</div> -<p>“That Michael Miller is quite a character,” Randy -commented to Peggy during a lull in rehearsal. “He -seems so serious and yet sometimes I catch a gleam -of sheer mischief under those horn rims. You don’t -think he’ll do anything silly with the explosion, do -you?”</p> -<p>“Of course not!” Peggy laughed. “Michael’s much -too intelligent for that!”</p> -<p>Rehearsals went along as smoothly as could be -expected with such a large cast. It was amazing, -Peggy thought, that the local people were able to -work so professionally with the rest of the company. -Aunt Hetty was a delight to watch. She was enjoying -herself hugely in her small but important role, and -took all the direction that Chuck gave her with the -greatest good humor.</p> -<p>“She’s a wonderful sport,” Peggy thought, watching -her with amusement, “and I think she really loves -this.”</p> -<p>Randy was so good that it seemed as if he might -steal the show. It was hard for him, too, playing late -at the Manor every night and then rushing to the -high school each morning.</p> -<p>“What a schedule!” he sighed. Randy and Peggy -were having a picnic lunch on the school grounds together. -“But after tonight it will all be over.” It was -Randy’s last night at the Manor.</p> -<p>“For you,” Peggy said, “but not for us. Tomorrow -we play <i>For Love or Money</i> at the Manor, then comes -the dress rehearsal and opening of <i>You Can’t Take It</i>, -and after that we start on the old-fashioned melodrama. -I wish you could be here for that one, too!”</p> -<p>“So do I—” Randy smiled affectionately—“but I -really will have to get back to New York soon. Let’s -not talk about it now, Peg, we still have a whole -week! And you have two more nights as Janet.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_134">134</div> -<p><i>For Love or Money</i> had been the most successful -play of the season. People came in droves all week -and money flowed into the box office.</p> -<p>“You think it would have happened anyway, after -Mr. Birmingham’s review,” Randy told her seriously, -“but that isn’t the whole story. I don’t think you realize -how good you actually are in that part, Peggy. -People are coming to see <i>you</i>—I’ve heard the comments -around town!”</p> -<p>“Oh, Randy!” Peggy beamed at the delicious compliment. -Randy was very cautious with his praise, and -coming from him, the words made Peggy doubly -happy.</p> -<p>“I wouldn’t be surprised if Richard and Chuck gave -you another fat lead to do this summer,” Randy went -on. “As a matter of fact, they’d be foolish if they -didn’t.”</p> -<p>“But there isn’t another lead I could do,” Peggy -said, surprised. “There’s just the little part in the -melodrama and then, I suppose, the model in <i>Guest -in the House</i>—”</p> -<p>“What about Evelyn?” Randy asked, looking at her -intently.</p> -<p>“Oh,” Peggy laughed, “that’s Alison’s part. She’s -been waiting for it all summer!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_135">135</div> -<p>Randy nodded and said nothing while Peggy suddenly -remembered what Chuck had said to Alison—not -to count on the part. Her heart skipped a beat -as she wondered if Chuck had meant that he might -give it to her! Oh! Peggy took a deep breath, feeling -a little giddy. It just couldn’t happen, it was too good -to possibly be true! No, she simply wouldn’t let herself -think about it. She looked at Randy and caught -him smiling at her.</p> -<p>“Yep,” he agreed with her unspoken thought. -“Don’t think about it. You’re quite right. Put it entirely -out of your mind!” They laughed happily and -went back to rehearsal.</p> -<p class="tb">Opening night of <i>You Can’t Take It with You</i> made -a permanent place in the history of Lake Kenabeek. -With so many local people in the cast, the auditorium -was overflowing with relatives and friends as well as -summer guests. It was the best house the theater had -had.</p> -<p>Michael Miller arrived with a little package carefully -wrapped in cotton wool and asked Chuck where -he should set it off.</p> -<p>“Set what off?” Chuck demanded, distracted and -intent on getting things settled backstage as well as -remembering his own part.</p> -<p>“My Kenabeek Special!” Michael answered. “You -know, the explosion.” He hadn’t brought it to dress -rehearsal with the explanation that there was only one -firecracker. It hadn’t mattered—everyone was too -busy to care. At this point, Chuck was crossing his -fingers and trusting to luck that everything would -turn out all right.</p> -<p>“Is it loud?” Chuck asked hastily.</p> -<p>“Very,” Michael assured him. “At least I hope so—I -followed instructions to the letter.”</p> -<p>“What instructions?” Chuck almost yelped. “Didn’t -you just make an ordinary firecracker?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_136">136</div> -<p>“Good heavens no! You can’t trust those things. -This is very special and safe!”</p> -<p>“Well, put it in an ashcan out on the stairs and set -it off there. Be sure you’re careful!” Chuck called after -him.</p> -<p>“Don’t worry, I will be.”</p> -<p>The play went unbelievably well. None of the -props were missing, everyone came in on cue, the action -zipped along, the audience was in stitches at the -comedy. The end of Act Two approached and Peggy -was onstage with Randy, Chris, Mr. Miller, the apprentices, -and June Tilson. They had paced the show -furiously, warming up to the big scene. Mr. Miller -gave the cue for the explosion. A moment of silence—and -then they heard it.</p> -<p><i>Wham!</i></p> -<p>It sounded as if the roof of the auditorium had been -blown off. Huge, billowing clouds of smoke poured -on stage, almost obscuring the actors as they finished -the scene amid coughs and tears, with a hysterical -audience laughing as if their sides would split as the -curtain closed.</p> -<p>The applause was deafening, but the actors hardly -heard as they rushed backstage to see what had happened. -There stood Michael Miller, black with smoke -and ashes, peering at them helplessly from glasses -that were absolutely opaque with grime.</p> -<p>“I put it in the ashcan, Chuck, just like you said,” -Michael offered timidly. “I think it blew the top off.”</p> -<p>The ashcan was a crumpled mass of tin. The top -had been blown across the stair well and ashes were -strewn about, several inches deep.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_137">137</div> -<p>“I guess you didn’t look in the can first,” Chuck -said very quietly, his eyes still smarting.</p> -<p>“I didn’t know it would make so much smoke—” -Michael whispered.</p> -<p>“No, I guess you didn’t,” Chuck agreed softly.</p> -<p>“I was very careful, but I guess maybe I should -have just used a firecracker.” Michael sat down sorrowfully -on the stairs, looking like a lump of coal in -a bin.</p> -<p>Peggy couldn’t restrain herself any longer. She -burst out laughing. “Oh, Michael,” she gasped, “and -you worked so hard! It couldn’t have been funnier if -you’d tried!”</p> -<p>Nobody could control himself any longer, and they -all laughed until their sides hurt. The play ended -without another mishap and the audience left, still -talking about the “bomb.”</p> -<p>“Your place in folklore is assured, Michael,” his -father told him dryly. “But next time I suggest you -take a simple little walk to the store!”</p> -<p class="tb">The week flew by so quickly that Peggy didn’t -know where the time had gone. They were rehearsing -the melodrama, <i>Love Rides the Rails</i>, and during the -day Randy would come to the theater to watch and -cue the actors.</p> -<p>“Only one more day,” Peggy said incredulously, -“and then you’ll be off to New York and we’ll only -have three more weeks here! Oh, the summer is going -so fast!”</p> -<p>“I’ll miss all this,” Randy admitted, “the theater -and the lake—and you!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_138">138</div> -<p>Randy decided to go back to New York on the night -bus that left the Manor right after the last performance -of <i>You Can’t Take It with You</i>. Peggy walked -with him to the gates to say good-by, feeling that the -nicest part of the summer was going with him.</p> -<p>“It’s been fun, Randy,” she said shyly. “I’m awfully -glad you were here—”</p> -<p>“I am too,” he said seriously, taking her hand. “I -think maybe I came along at the right time. Chris is -an awfully nice guy, but—well—this is summer stock, -Peggy. Funny things can happen when you act with -people. If you’re really interested in him, I hope -you’ll see him in a different environment—maybe -back in New York.” He smiled and suddenly leaned -down and kissed her. “In the meantime, don’t forget -me!”</p> -<p>Randy started to get on the bus and then paused -with another thought. “And don’t forget that you’re -an awfully good actress,” he said. “I have a lot of -faith in you. I’d like you to remember that for the -next few weeks.”</p> -<p>The bus pulled away, leaving Peggy with a funny -lump in her throat. She’d be seeing Randy again in a -little while—why did she feel so strange, she wondered. -She suddenly had an acute appreciation of the -difference between Randy’s loyal and generous attitude -and the impulsive, surface interest of Chris Hill. -That was it, she realized. She was a little ashamed of -herself for having been swept up in a current by a -dashing leading man, nice as he was. She watched -Randy’s bus turn the corner and disappear, knowing -that nobody could quite take his place.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_139">139</div> -<p>The annex seemed strangely quiet the morning -of the day <i>Love Rides the Rails</i> was to open. Rita and -Gus were down first as usual, having coffee and relaxing -on the patio before rehearsals started. Peggy -joined them, having hastily dressed in pedal pushers -and a halter.</p> -<p>“It’s getting hotter and hotter,” she remarked, looking -for a shady place to sit down and have her breakfast.</p> -<p>“But so peaceful after that hectic show,” Rita said -lazily. “Really cozy! Will you ever forget Michael’s -bomb?”</p> -<p>“I thought my hair would stand on end.” Gus -laughed. “But it turned out to be a wonderful show. -Your friend Randy certainly did a remarkable job!”</p> -<p>“I’m hoping that at last I get to play a nice young -woman my own age.” Rita stretched out luxuriously -on the wicker couch. “It doesn’t happen to me very -often, you know!”</p> -<p>“You mean the wife in <i>Guest in the House</i>?” Peggy -asked.</p> -<p>Rita nodded. “The wife to Chris Hill’s husband.” -She grinned mischievously at Gus. “That is, if Gus -approves!”</p> -<p>“Oh, certainly certainly.” Gus smiled and rumpled -her hair as he rose. “Chris may be the Kenabeek heart -throb, but I think my place is assured at home. See -you all later—I have to go build a house!”</p> -<p>“He must really love his work,” Peggy sighed as -she watched him go. “I think he’s worked harder -than any of us this summer.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_140">140</div> -<p>“Except maybe Richard and Chuck,” Rita agreed. -“I’m going to make him take a vacation after we’re -through here, whether he likes it or not!”</p> -<p>One by one, the other actors appeared, and after -breakfast Chuck started to hand out the sides for -<i>Guest in the House</i>. Peggy felt unusually nervous. -She had promised herself not to think of the possibility -of playing Evelyn, but as the moment approached -when her part was to be handed her, -Peggy’s heart beat faster and her hand trembled. -Chuck gave her the sides without a word, and after -closing her eyes for a moment, Peggy took a deep -breath and looked.</p> -<p>Evelyn! He had given it to her! She hugged the -little pamphlet as if it were a long-lost friend. Here -it was at last—a wonderful, rich, dramatic role, far, -far different from all the ingénues she had played -all summer!</p> -<p>Rita noticed her ecstatic expression and peeked -at the sides. “Well,” she breathed softly, “I kind of -thought so. I’m awfully glad, Peggy. You should -play it!”</p> -<p>“Just a minute!” Alison’s voice was shrill in the -quiet patio. “I’m not playing the model, Chuck. You -gave me the wrong part!”</p> -<p>“No,” Chuck said firmly. “Peggy is going to do -Evelyn and I want you to play Miriam Blake. You’re -right for it, Alison, just as Peggy is right for Evelyn. -It’s the only way to cast this show.”</p> -<p>“That’s true,” Rita whispered to Peggy.</p> -<p>“Well, I’m not going to do it!” Alison interrupted. -“I’ve played Evelyn before and this just doesn’t make -sense.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_141">141</div> -<p>“She did play it,” Chris broke in cautiously with -a concerned look at Peggy. “We were both in the -play last summer—”</p> -<p>“And who did the model?” Chuck asked.</p> -<p>“A girl we got from New York. We had to job the -part,” Chris replied.</p> -<p>“Yes, you had to job the part, and we can’t afford -to do that. I’m sorry, Alison,” Chuck said gently, “I -know you’d like to do it again and I’m sure you were -wonderful. But you yourself can see that with our -company this is the only possible casting. Peggy is -too young and unsophisticated to play the model. It -just wouldn’t work out.”</p> -<p>“Well, then, get somebody else to play the model,” -Alison said impatiently. “Why not get that June Tilson—what’s -the matter with her?”</p> -<p>“Because audiences want to see Peggy again in -a good part.” Chuck was adamant. “They want to -see you, too. That’s part of stock, Alison. Your summer -audiences grow fond of their actors and are interested -in seeing them in varied roles. The model -is a perfect part for you, Alison, and you’ll be good -in it. Now let’s start the reading!”</p> -<p>Peggy had listened anxiously, almost without -breathing. Now, as she looked at Alison, who was -obviously seething as she opened her sides, Peggy -wondered if this casting wouldn’t create too many -difficulties. She knew that Chuck was right, though. -His explanation made perfect sense. It was best for -the play. But how was Alison going to react? How -would rehearsals go if Alison remained as hostile as -she was now? Peggy watched her worriedly and -was shocked to see the hateful glance that Alison -returned.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_142">142</div> -<p>Peggy grew more and more nervous as the time -approached for her to read. She hadn’t considered -this before, but Alison was a very good actress with -a fine technique. Would Peggy be able to do as well -in this part? Her mouth was dry and she was terribly -tense. She stumbled over her first lines as she felt -everyone watching her—Chuck hopefully, Chris and -Danny curiously, Rita with calm compassion, and -Alison with a spiteful expression that said, “All right—let’s -see you try and do it!”</p> -<p>No audience could ever be as critical as this small -group of professional actors. And even though she -had a week to work, Peggy knew that she was being -severely judged on this first reading.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_143">143</div> -<h2 id="c13"><span class="h2line1">XIII</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Double Trouble</span></h2> -<p>During the week of rehearsal Peggy found that the -drama inherent in the part itself wasn’t going to be -enough to carry her through. Evelyn was a girl who -was emotionally disturbed and there was one scene -toward the end of the play when she broke down altogether -and appeared in a state of unreasonable -fear. Peggy worked and worked on the scene, trying -it every conceivable way, while Chuck patiently encouraged -her. But it wasn’t going right and she knew -it. Alison was doing a marvelous job as the model -and it was a trial for Peggy to know that she was -watching, criticizing, and comparing Peggy’s efforts -with her own past success as Evelyn.</p> -<p>“I don’t think I can do it!” Peggy told Chuck -miserably one day after rehearsal. “You should have -given the part to Alison after all! I’m terrible.”</p> -<p>“You’ll be fine,” Chuck said quietly, but Peggy -knew by the tone of his voice that Chuck had his -doubts, too. She hadn’t made a real identification -with the role yet, and it was drawing fearfully close -to opening night. Worried and unhappy, Peggy wondered -if she had any right to call herself an actress -after all. If she couldn’t do this part that she had -been so overjoyed to get, what hope was there?</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_144">144</div> -<p>She was tense and straining and finally even Chuck -lost patience. “What’s the matter with you, Peggy?” -he said sharply at rehearsal one day. “You’re missing -this thing by a mile. You’re acting like an insipid little -daisy that’s about to wilt on the stem! Evelyn isn’t -like that—she’s crazy like a fox! She has power in her -own strange way—”</p> -<p>“Could I say something, Chuck?” Alison interrupted, -coming out from the wings where she’d been -watching. “It might help Peggy. When I played the -part I did it as though I were perfectly sane. Peggy’s -trying to <i>act</i> crazy and it’s never believable that -way.”</p> -<p>“Yes, that’s true,” Chuck admitted, “it’s a good suggestion, -Peggy. Try the scene again with that in -mind.”</p> -<p>Peggy didn’t protest or try to justify herself, even -though she had been perfectly aware all along of -what Alison had just said. She tried again, doing -even more badly than before, terribly conscious of -Alison watching from the wings and judging every -move.</p> -<p>“That was a rotten trick!” Rita fumed in a whisper -when the scene was finished and Peggy, almost in -tears, ran off stage. “Alison offering to help you! She -knew exactly what she was doing—trying to draw -attention to herself and make comparisons. Peggy, -you’re never going to relax in this part if you can’t -forget that Alison played it before. Can’t you see -what she’s doing?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_145">145</div> -<p>“But it’s too late to give her the part,” Peggy said -dully, “so she can’t be after that. Alison’s never been -like this before. I’ve always liked her, really. What -is she trying to do?”</p> -<p>“Make you give a dreadful performance!” Rita insisted -strongly. “I know Alison Lord like a book. -She’s a fine, nice girl as long as she’s in the limelight, -but her career comes first, and she’ll walk roughshod -over anyone who interferes with it!”</p> -<p>“But this is only a summer stock company—” -Peggy protested.</p> -<p>“Yes, and people go back to New York saying, -‘Gosh, have you seen Peggy Lane in <i>Guest in the -House</i>? She was great!’ These things do get around, -Peggy. Alison came up here to be the big cheese, and -she wants it to stay that way. If she can’t play the -part at least she figures that people can say, ‘They -really should have given that part to Alison Lord; -Peggy Lane was awful!’”</p> -<p>Rita spelled it out in no uncertain terms, leaving -Peggy feeling bleaker than ever. She knew that Rita -was trying to prod her, make her angry enough to -forget Alison and come through with a good performance. -But Peggy didn’t work that way. She -couldn’t act out of spite or anger. She was aware, too, -that other people in the company were disappointed -in her. Danny Dunn couldn’t conceal his surprise or -Chris Hill his impatience. The fine rapport that -Peggy and Chris had had in <i>For Love or Money</i> was -a thing of the past.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_146">146</div> -<p>Dress rehearsal for <i>Guest in the House</i> took place -Tuesday afternoon. The company had to be out of the -theater by five <span class="sc">P.M.</span> for the group of folk singers who -had the auditorium for the evening. It was a benefit -affair and the Summer Theater was glad to donate -its stage for the night. Peggy didn’t know if it was -the strangeness of working in the afternoon or if it -would have happened in any case, but her performance -was the worst one she had ever given. Not only -was she unable to get into the role at all, but she -forgot her lines on several occasions—something that -hadn’t happened all season. Chuck was so unhappy -with the show that he didn’t even criticize her. It was -obvious that he thought it too late.</p> -<p>Miserably, Peggy took off her make-up and started -to leave the theater, wishing that she had never been -given the part at all. Perhaps she would never attempt -to play a dramatic role again. “And I was feeling -so self-satisfied, thinking it was easy!” she thought -as she walked out the stage door.</p> -<p>“Peggy, how’s it going?” Michael Miller rounded -the corner of the building, coming from the little -shack the boys used for a scene shop.</p> -<p>“Awful.” Peggy tried an unsuccessful smile.</p> -<p>“What you need is a little relaxation—a change of -scenery.” Michael smiled. “What are you going to do -with your first free evening of the summer?”</p> -<p>“Tonight?” Peggy shook her head. “Going to work -on my part again, I guess—see if I can come up with -something—”</p> -<p>“Why don’t you forget it for a while?” Michael -asked. “I’m going to take Mary Hopkins over to the -other side of the lake for dinner; we’d love to have -you come along.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_147">147</div> -<p>“In your boat?” Peggy asked, feeling a faint stirring -of interest.</p> -<p>“What else?” Michael laughed. “We’re not going -to swim, that’s for sure! Come on, Peggy, it’ll do you -good.”</p> -<p>It would at that, Peggy thought, suddenly feeling -a sense of freedom at the prospect of being far away -from the theater for a while, if even just for dinner. -Maybe she could regain her perspective out on the -water; there was nothing like putting a little distance -between one’s self and one’s problem.</p> -<p>“I will, Michael,” she accepted gratefully. “I’d love -to. Goodness, it’ll be the first boat ride I’ve had all -summer!”</p> -<p>“And long overdue. I promised you a ride once, -remember?”</p> -<p>Peggy felt better than she had all week when they -arrived at Michael’s house and walked down to his -dock where Mary Hopkins was already waiting.</p> -<p>“Peggy—how nice!” she cried. “Are you coming -with us?”</p> -<p>“I certainly am—if I’m not intruding,” Peggy said, -suddenly wondering if she was interrupting a date.</p> -<p>“Oh, heavens, no!” Mary laughed. “I’ve been pestering -Michael to take me out in the boat for weeks. -This is the first time he’s been free!”</p> -<p>“I’ll just go and tell Dad we’re off,” Michael said. -“That’s a rule around here when I take out the boat.”</p> -<p>He was back in a minute and they all got into the -trim little craft, Peggy feeling almost carefree as -Michael started the motor and they zipped away.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_148">148</div> -<p>“We call her the <i>Merry Mac</i>,” Michael shouted -over the noise of the motor to the two girls. “She’s -Dad’s pride and joy—and mine.”</p> -<p>“I can see why,” Peggy laughed, loving the feel of -the water underneath as they skimmed along. It had -been a beautiful day. The lake was sky-blue and -frosted with little points of white whipped up by the -wind.</p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/p06.jpg" alt="“Dad’s pride and joy—and mine.”" width="500" height="370" /> -</div> -<p>“It’s a little choppy,” Michael called.</p> -<p>“Fun!” Peggy cried as the spray blew over the -windshield and splashed her face.</p> -<p>“You’re going to get wet,” Mary warned as Michael -passed over the wake of another boat, the -<i>Merry Mac</i> slapping across, the spray leaping to -drench Peggy’s face.</p> -<p>“I love it!” Peggy cried happily. “The wetter the -better! Where are we going, Michael?”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_149">149</div> -<p>“Straight across.” Michael cut his speed a little so -he could hear. “See that cluster of buildings? The -Golden Hound is the last one on the left. Good food -and music—very rustic.”</p> -<p>They were in the middle of the lake now, and -Peggy realized that it was much larger than she had -thought. There were islands dotted all around, some -so tiny that there was only room for one or two -houses.</p> -<p>“Private islands,” Michael informed her. “How -would you like one of those, Peggy?”</p> -<p>“Oh, would I! It would be sheer heaven!” Peggy -took a deep breath of the wonderful fresh air. “No -wonder you love this place, Michael. I wouldn’t ever -want to leave if I’d been raised here!”</p> -<p>“The winters are <i>cold</i>, though.” Mary laughed. -“How do you feel now, Peggy? Better?”</p> -<p>“Marvelous! I’ve almost forgotten about the theater -entirely. This is just what the doctor ordered!”</p> -<p>Michael slowed the <i>Merry Mac</i> and carefully -turned her into the dock in front of the restaurant. -Peggy was impressed by his expert handling of the -boat.</p> -<p>“Dad would never forgive me if anything happened -to our little friend here, and I’d never forgive -myself!” he said as he stepped out and helped the -girls up from the boat.</p> -<p>They had a wonderful dinner at a lovely candlelit -table by a picture window that afforded a sweeping -view of the lake.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_150">150</div> -<p>“What a beautiful spot,” Peggy said dreamily as -twilight fell, and lights in the little cottages dotting -the shore twinkled on like a fringe of decoration. -“Why haven’t we been here before?”</p> -<p>“We can come again during the last week of the -season,” Michael said. “I’ll bring everybody over -sometime.”</p> -<p>“Michael, isn’t it getting awfully dark?” Mary -interrupted, watching the sky that had changed from -sunset violet to a deep, heavy gray.</p> -<p>Michael looked at the sky and smiled. “Sure, it’ll -be dark before we get back. You’re not worried about -going back at night, are you?”</p> -<p>“Well,”—Mary hesitated—“do you know how to -find your way back at night?”</p> -<p>Michael laughed. “Mary Hopkins! And you’ve -lived at Lake Kenabeek for sixteen years!”</p> -<p>“How do you find your way back?” Peggy asked.</p> -<p>“By my landing light.” Michael was still laughing -at Mary. “I take a straight course from here, across -the lake, home. It’s impossible to miss it. Where have -you been all these years, Mary?”</p> -<p>“Well,” she said with a shy smile, “I guess I just -never thought of it before.”</p> -<p>They finished dinner in a leisurely fashion, enjoying -the music and the peaceful atmosphere of this -beautiful spot.</p> -<p>“This really has been lovely, Michael,” Peggy -thanked him as they left the restaurant. “I feel so relaxed -and different—not half as worried as I was -this afternoon.”</p> -<p>“You’ll probably knock ’em in the aisles tomorrow -night,” Michael said cheerfully as they got into the -<i>Merry Mac</i> again.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_151">151</div> -<p>And Peggy thought he might be right, at that. -Somehow, getting away from the part had done her -a world of good. She found that she was actually -looking forward to trying it again, and sure that she -could improve her performance.</p> -<p>“My, it really is rough!” Mary said nervously as -they started back. A high wind had come up and the -choppy water was blowing in all directions, making -the boat rock furiously.</p> -<p>Michael was quite unconcerned. “See—there’s the -light, Mary.” He pointed it out to her dead ahead -across the black lake. “We just take a bead on that, -and home we go without obstacles—in the rain, it -seems.”</p> -<p>A freak summer storm had suddenly come up, and -the rain pelted down heavily, mixing with the spray -that rose over the sides of the little boat.</p> -<p>“This is nothing,” Michael reassured Mary. “I’ve -been out in storms much worse than this. As long as -we can see the landing light there’s nothing to worry -about, and it doesn’t look—”</p> -<p>But Michael had spoken too soon. The rain suddenly -poured down in such force that it was impossible -to see. In an instant it descended in driving torrents -and Michael lost the landing light! In a second -he had cut the motor. “I don’t think,” he began—but -then it happened. There was a grinding crash that -threw Peggy and Mary forward, their heads hitting -the windshield, while the <i>Merry Mac</i> reared up and -came to a shuddering stop.</p> -<p>There was dead silence for a moment. Then, “Is -anybody hurt?” Michael asked tightly.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_152">152</div> -<p>“No, I don’t think so....” Peggy moved a bit. -“Mary, are you all right?”</p> -<p>“My head,” she said shakily. “No—it’s all right—I -just bumped it.”</p> -<p>“Thank heaven!” Peggy breathed. “And thank -goodness you cut the motor so fast, Michael. If you -hadn’t been so quick....” They were all silent, realizing -that it was only Michael’s alert action that -had saved them from a much more serious accident.</p> -<p>“Where are we?” Peggy finally asked.</p> -<p>“I don’t know,” Michael said, “but we’d better get -out and see. I hope we’re not on a rock somewhere.”</p> -<p>The rain was so thick and the night so black that -they couldn’t see a foot in front of them. Michael -climbed out first, feeling his way. “It’s rock, all right,” -he said nervously. “No—then it goes on into sand. -Maybe we’re on a small island. Peggy, throw out the -cushions from the seats, will you? I don’t know if the -boat is lodged too tightly to sink or not, but we might -as well have them to sit on.”</p> -<p>Groping in the dark, Peggy withdrew the cushions -and handed them to Michael. Her hands touched -something slick and cold. “What’s in the back seat, -Michael?” she asked.</p> -<p>“Oh, good girl! Oilskin raincoats. I would have forgotten -all about them. We keep them there—for -emergencies.” Michael’s voice was hollow and Peggy -knew that he was beginning to feel the situation. -Michael had wrecked his precious boat. Well, there -was no time now to think about that. Peggy took out -the coats and wrapped one around Mary, who was -still shivering slightly from shock.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_153">153</div> -<p>They climbed up on their hands and knees, feeling -their way precariously from the rocks on which the -boat had crashed to the sandy beach. Peggy bumped -into something and shrieked, then she realized it was -a tree trunk. “Michael, we’re in some woods! Come -on, Mary, get under cover and out of the rain!”</p> -<p>“Why doesn’t somebody light a match?” Mary -asked plaintively. “Let’s make a fire or something.”</p> -<p>At this, Peggy dropped down on the boat cushion -and began to laugh helplessly.</p> -<p>“What do you find so funny, may I ask?” Michael -questioned sourly from the gloom beside her.</p> -<p>“A fire!” Peggy giggled. “A fire in all this rain! I’m -sorry, Michael—it’s just nerves!”</p> -<p>“Very funny,” Michael said. “Well, I suggest we -just sit here until the storm stops. Then we’ll be able -to see where we are.”</p> -<p>But the storm continued in full fury for hours while -the three, drenched and shivering, waited. Mary lay -down on a cushion and, unbelievably, in a few minutes, -was fast asleep. Michael too began to yawn as -the hours passed, and Peggy offered him her cushion -to doze on. She couldn’t possibly have slept. She -curled up at the base of a tree, wrapped in her oilskin, -and waited for the rain to stop. By the time the -storm had subsided a little, dawn was breaking in a -gray haze that filtered through the rain and trees -and gave Peggy a view of the surroundings. She -judged that they must be on an island, and getting -up to look through the woods, saw a little path. -Looking back at her sleeping comrades, Peggy decided -to explore a little before awakening them. She -hadn’t followed the path more than a few yards -when she came to a clearing and a cottage among -the trees. All night, a refuge had been this close! -Seeing the house, Peggy realized how cold and exhausted -she was. She raced back to the others and -woke them up.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_154">154</div> -<p>“I feel like the three bears,” Mary said sleepily. -“I hope they have three beds and a stove; I’m chilled -through.”</p> -<p>“It’s a lucky break we had your raincoats,” Peggy -told Michael. “Do you realize we might all have -caught pneumonia?”</p> -<p>Peggy knocked timidly at the door, hating to rouse -anyone at this hour. It must be close to five in the -morning, she guessed. There was no answer and Michael -knocked again, louder this time.</p> -<p>A sleepy, startled voice called out, “Who is it?” and -Peggy knew that the voice was familiar. Before she -could place it, the door opened a crack and then was -flung wide. There stood Mrs. Cook, wide awake now -with the shock of seeing the three young people—wet -and bedraggled as lost kittens.</p> -<p>“Oh, come in, come in!” she cried. “What on earth -happened?”</p> -<p>If Mrs. Cook was astonished to see them, it was -nothing to Peggy’s surprise at finding her here. “Mrs. -Cook!” she exclaimed. “I thought you were staying -at one of the hotels—”</p> -<p>“Oh, no, we’ve had this house for years, only one -on the island.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_155">155</div> -<p>Now the little group knew that they had crashed -on one of the little private islands in the middle of -the lake. Within minutes the story was told and Mrs. -Cook had given them all warm bathrobes and hot -drinks, fussing over them as if they were her own -children.</p> -<p>“Now, all of you get some real rest,” she commanded, -showing Peggy and Mary into her own room -and giving Michael the couch. “We’ll talk about -everything later after you’ve had some sleep!”</p> -<p>As she gratefully snuggled down under the warm -covers on the comfortable bed, Peggy sleepily wondered -why they hadn’t seen Mr. Cook. But she was -too tired to think for more than a moment. Almost -immediately she dropped off into a deep, dreamless -sleep, utterly exhausted.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_156">156</div> -<h2 id="c14"><span class="h2line1">XIV</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Ups and Downs</span></h2> -<p>Hours later Peggy awoke to the sound of rain beating -on the windows and a whining wind that lashed -the tree tops mercilessly. It was a bleak world, dark -as evening, and it was only noon. Mary and Michael -had been up for some time, and Peggy found them -in the living room, chatting with Mrs. Cook, who had -prepared a hearty breakfast for everybody.</p> -<p>“Peggy—good!” Mrs. Cook said as she saw her -emerging from the bedroom. “I was going to wake -you any minute. You must be ravenous.”</p> -<p>“I am,” Peggy admitted, sitting down at the table -Mrs. Cook had set in front of the fireplace. “A fire -in the summertime! It doesn’t seem possible.”</p> -<p>“Well, when these storms come up it can get good -and chilly here. The dampness goes right through -you.” Mrs. Cook smiled.</p> -<p>“Have you called to notify your father that we’re -all right?” Peggy asked Michael. “It just occurred to -me that everyone must be terribly worried about -us.”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_157">157</div> -<p>“Can’t call,” Michael replied, frowning. “The -phone’s out. Wire’s blown down, I guess. But I’m not -too worried. I’m pretty sure Dad will assume we -stayed on the other side of the lake because of the -storm. It’s happened before. He’ll have called Mrs. -Hopkins, and the theater for you, Peggy.”</p> -<p>Peggy noticed the worry in Michael’s eyes. There -was something he wasn’t telling her, she felt sure. -Mrs. Cook came to the rescue, gently putting her -hand on Peggy’s shoulder as she said, “I’m afraid you -may have to stay here all day, dear. My husband took -the boat to town and couldn’t get back last night in -the storm. He called to tell me before the phone went -out. None of the boats are out today. We’ll just have -to wait until it clears before you can be picked up.”</p> -<p>“But the show!” Peggy cried. “I have to get back -for the opening.”</p> -<p>“Well, maybe you can,” Mrs. Cook placated her. -“It should clear by evening, and my husband is sure -to return as soon as he can.”</p> -<p>But as the hours progressed, the storm showed no -sign of relenting. The wind whistled angrily, blowing -the rain in blinding sheets. No boat could dare the -lake in weather like this.</p> -<p>“A fine idea I had!” Michael accused himself -grimly. “A little fun, a little relaxation—and what -happens? I not only wreck the <i>Merry Mac</i>, but I’m -responsible for your missing the show!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_158">158</div> -<p>“Oh, Michael, it isn’t your fault,” Peggy comforted -him. But she was sick at heart. She had felt so optimistic -about her new approach to the part, ready to -play Evelyn tonight as if she had never played it before. -Now she might not even be there. She had no -doubt as to what Chuck would do; he would have -Alison play the part and get somebody to read the -model for this one performance. It had been done -before in stock. And there went Peggy’s chance to -prove herself, not only to the company, but to a deep -part of her that said, “If I fail this, the opportunity -may never come again.” She wandered over to the -window and stood there, looking out, trying to hold -back the tears of disappointment. “Maybe it’s better -this way,” she told herself. “Perhaps I wouldn’t do -any better than I have all week.” But she remembered -Randy’s words as he left her that day on the -bus—“You’re a fine actress and I have faith in you!” -Randy must have foreseen both the part and the -trouble with Alison. What he could never have imagined -was the possibility of Peggy’s not being there -to play it at all.</p> -<p>By six o’clock the storm finally showed signs of -subsiding. Peggy anxiously watched the sky, wondering -if it would be possible after all to get back in -time for the curtain. At seven-thirty the rain had -stopped and the wind was reduced to a murmur. -Mrs. Cook took the group down to the dock to watch -for her husband’s boat. “He’s sure to come soon,” she -said. “I think you’ll make it, Peggy.”</p> -<p>Peggy strained to see across the lake. The sky was -still gray, but in the distance they could hear a motor.</p> -<p>“Somebody’s out, Peggy,” Mary cried happily. “I -think we will get back!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_159">159</div> -<p>But the boat appeared and it wasn’t Mr. Cook -after all. They waved and shouted frantically, but -the owner didn’t see them and he veered off in the -opposite direction. A few minutes later another boat -came into view and Mrs. Cook gave Peggy an impulsive -hug. “There he is, dear.” She laughed. “Get -ready to dash!”</p> -<p>Mr. Cook didn’t have a chance to say hello as he -pulled into the landing. The three young people practically -fell into the boat with Mrs. Cook shouting -hasty directions and waving him off as if to a fire.</p> -<p>“Hurry,” she called as he turned around and sped -off. “And good luck, Peggy—” Her voice trailed away -and Peggy gripped the sides of the boat, her heart in -her mouth as the possibility of making the curtain -became a reality.</p> -<p>“This little runabout isn’t too fast,” Mr. Cook -warned, “but I’ll make her do her best!” He pushed -the little boat to her limit and in about twenty minutes -they pulled up at Michael’s landing. “This is the -closest one to the theater, Peggy,” Mr. Cook said. -“Run! Don’t say thanks—just make that curtain!”</p> -<p>But Peggy was already out and running up the -stairs. With a hasty wave she sprinted up the walk -beside Michael’s house and started to run to the -theater.</p> -<p>The parking lot was jammed with cars, but Peggy -didn’t see anyone going into the theater. Panting, -she started to run back to the stage door, but then realized -that Chuck might be out front. She’d better -let him know she was here. She dashed back to the -entrance and tore through the large doors by the box -office. Richard was just coming out of the little room -and, seeing her, he grabbed her arm with a sigh of -relief. “Thank goodness, Peggy! We were beginning -to think you’d drowned!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_160">160</div> -<p>“Where is everybody?” Peggy gasped. “I’m here—tell -Chuck—”</p> -<p>“Wait a minute,” Richard held on to her with concern. -“The show’s started, Peggy....”</p> -<p>Breathlessly, Peggy stopped short while it sank in. -Of course! Nobody in the lounge, the doors to the -auditorium closed— The audience were in their seats -and the curtain had opened! Still trying to get her -breath, she looked at Richard helplessly while tears -came to her eyes.</p> -<p>“Oh, come on, Peggy.” Richard patted her shoulder -kindly. “It isn’t that important. If you only knew -how worried we were about you! I’m so glad you’re -safe and sound I don’t give a hoot about the show!”</p> -<p>“Thank you,” Peggy managed to say. “I couldn’t -help it—I tried to get back.”</p> -<p>“I know. You can tell me all about it later. Why -don’t you go home now and get some rest?”</p> -<p>“No! Oh, no.” Peggy collected herself and took a -deep breath. “As long as I’m here, I’m going to -watch!” It was a difficult decision. “Who’s doing the -model?”</p> -<p>“That girl, June Tilson; she’s winging it.”</p> -<p>“Well, come on, then.” Peggy smiled bravely. -“Aren’t you going to give me a seat?”</p> -<p>Richard grinned at her admiringly. “You’re quite a -girl, Peggy. I’ll give you the best seat in the house!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_161">161</div> -<p>But Peggy preferred to watch from the rear of the -auditorium, so she and Richard quietly found places -together. It was almost unbearable to see someone -else doing her part, but Peggy grimly watched, determined -to be as objective as possible. It was doubly -difficult to admit that Alison was quite marvelous as -Evelyn. She was obviously working on emotion and -excitement, but it didn’t matter. She established -herself as the star of the play, projecting her self-assurance -and technique so that the audience had eyes -for no one else on stage. June Tilson did a remarkable -job as the model on such short notice. No one -but Peggy or another actor could have known that -she was reading the part in bits and pieces before -she made an entrance, improvising, and finding her -lines on the back of furniture where they had been -carefully pasted before the show.</p> -<p>“She’s good!” Peggy whispered. “My, she’s good! -Winging a part like that takes a lot of courage. I -thought she probably would read it.”</p> -<p>“Chuck said she could, but she wanted to do it -this way. She’s a fast study, too!” Richard nodded in -agreement.</p> -<p>Watching <i>Guest in the House</i> was one of the most -painful experiences of Peggy’s life. By the time the -play was over she felt as though she’d been drawn -through a wringer. Wearily, she left her seat, as the -actors were taking curtain calls, and bravos for Alison’s -performance were filling the air. She walked -outside and back to the stage door. Alison deserved -her congratulations, and she sincerely wanted to tell -June Tilson how good she had been.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_162">162</div> -<p>Alison was still in make-up on stage, flushed with -excitement and satisfaction. Everyone was milling -around with words of praise for her wonderful job. -No one would ever know what courage it took for -Peggy to join the group and add her congratulations. -Alison was too much in a whirl with her own triumph -to take any special satisfaction from Peggy’s praise, -and Peggy realized how right Rita had been. Alison -had no personal spite; it was only her career that concerned -her.</p> -<p>Everyone was glad to see Peggy back unharmed, -but it was impossible to miss the undercurrent backstage. -The company also was relieved that Alison had -played Evelyn and “saved the show.”</p> -<p>A middle-aged man from the audience drew Alison -away from her group of admirers and took her aside -for a private discussion. In a few minutes, Alison -rushed back excitedly, looking for Chuck. “I’ve got a -screen test!” she exulted. “I have to leave tomorrow!”</p> -<p>“Leave!” The entire company was stunned. Actresses -just didn’t walk out on a theater in the middle -of the season. But Alison was blithely unconcerned.</p> -<p>“That was Sidney Mitchell, the talent scout from -Lion Studios! He said he’d never been so impressed -with a performance in summer stock! He thinks I’m -great, said he couldn’t believe anybody could do a -job like that at the last minute!”</p> -<p>“But you told him you’d played the part before, -didn’t you?” Chris Hill demanded incredulously.</p> -<p>“Of course not!” Alison hotly defended herself. -“Why should I? Let him think whatever he likes. The -important thing is that he wants to test me for a part -immediately. They’re looking for an unknown, and -the part is of a girl very like Evelyn. Oh,” Alison -glowed, looking more beautiful than ever with her -taste of success, “just think, I might actually get to -Hollywood!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_163">163</div> -<p>“Well, of course we can’t ask you to stay,” Chuck -said. “I suppose June won’t mind continuing in your -part—”</p> -<p>“I’d love to,” June agreed, “and by tomorrow I’ll -know the lines.”</p> -<p>“Good.” Chuck smiled. “And Peggy will resume -Evelyn tomorrow night.”</p> -<p>Everyone turned to look thoughtfully at Peggy, -only now realizing that if she hadn’t missed the show, -the talent scout would have seen her, maybe “discovered” -her, instead of Alison. Their expressions were -easy to read. Curiosity, pity, and a slight feeling of -guilt at their obvious approval of Alison’s performance. -Peggy bravely accepted their glances and -smiled back at Alison. “I hope you do get the part, -Alison,” she said gravely. “Be sure to let us know.”</p> -<p>Peggy couldn’t wait to get back to the annex and -be by herself for a while. The reaction was just beginning -to set in. If she had to stay another minute, -she felt, she would break into tears. Hastily excusing -herself with a promise to recount her adventure the -next day, she started to leave.</p> -<p>But Rita stopped her at the stage door. “Don’t let -it bother you too much, Peggy,” she said gently. -“These things happen all the time. It’s just rotten -luck for you. The only time we’ve had a talent scout -all summer, and you had to have an accident!”</p> -<p>“It doesn’t matter, Rita,” Peggy said with difficulty. -She didn’t want to talk another minute.</p> -<p>“But it does—I mean Alison’s lying like that....”</p> -<p>“But she wasn’t lying,” Peggy protested.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_164">164</div> -<p>“Well, it amounts to the same thing, withholding -the fact that she’d played the part before—that -wasn’t very honest. I just thought you ought to know -that everyone feels the same way about that. It -wasn’t very ethical.”</p> -<p>“Let’s talk about it tomorrow,” Peggy pleaded, and -Rita, understanding that she wanted to be alone, -gave her a comforting pat and let her go.</p> -<p>Once in the privacy of her tiny bedroom, Peggy -finally broke down and wept. It <i>was</i> rotten luck, she -admitted to herself. The one chance she’d had all -summer, and she’d missed it. Why did Mr. Mitchell -have to pick this particular night to come?</p> -<p>“It isn’t that I don’t wish Alison good luck,” she -cried softly, “but at least he could have seen both of -us in the play. He would probably have picked Alison -anyway, because she’s good movie material. But if he -had only seen my work—it would have been something -to take back to New York with me.”</p> -<p>And on top of that she had missed the opportunity -to play Evelyn at the peak of her feeling about the -part. Would she be able to do it at all tomorrow -night? She buried her face in the pillow and sobbed -until she was too exhausted to cry any more. Then, -blessedly, sleep came.</p> -<p>Alison was gone by the time Peggy awoke the next -morning. It seemed unbelievable that she had managed -to assemble her things and pack in such a short -time, but her little room was as stark and bare as if -no one had been in it all summer.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_165">165</div> -<p>The cast didn’t attempt to disguise their disapproval -of Alison’s hasty exit. “That’s typical of anybody -so career-minded,” sniffed Danny Dunn. “No -gratitude. Alison doesn’t have the least conception of -anyone’s problems except her own.”</p> -<p>“Thank goodness we have June Tilson to take her -place,” Rita echoed. “I don’t know what Chuck and -Richard would have done.”</p> -<p>By evening Peggy was so exhausted that she almost -didn’t care how the play went. She was tired of -questioning looks and concern. Tired of thinking -about Evelyn. She put on her make-up and dressed -for her entrance, as unconcerned as if she were simply -going out to dinner. She watched the other actors -begin the play and waited for her cue with such a lack -of emotion that she wondered for a moment if she -could possibly be coming down with a cold or a fever. -She simply didn’t care. Her cue came up, and marshaling -as much energy as possible under the circumstances, -Peggy walked on stage.</p> -<p>For the two hours that she played Evelyn, Peggy -worked with a most peculiar sensation. She felt as -though she were standing beside herself, looking on. -She watched Evelyn, heard Evelyn, moved her -around like a puppet, with an objective, detached -viewpoint completely new to her. She felt nothing -whatsoever inside.</p> -<p>After the play Peggy took her solo curtain call and -received the most tremendous ovation she had ever -heard in the theater. She bowed and smiled, wondering -what all the shouting was about, and was utterly -astonished to see Chuck come to her with real -tears in his eyes.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_166">166</div> -<p>“That was one of the most beautiful performances -I have ever seen in my life,” he said, looking at her -with something like awe. “I won’t even ask you what -happened. It was too wonderful to spoil by trying to -analyze it!”</p> -<p>Ford Birmingham came back to congratulate her, -too. “I haven’t yet written my review, Peggy, because -I heard what happened last night. I saw both of you -play it. Alison was awfully good, but I haven’t seen a -job like yours in years! I’m truly grateful for having -had the opportunity to see you!”</p> -<p>The entire cast looked at Peggy with a respect so -new and surprising that Peggy didn’t know what to -think. “You’re not fooling me, are you, Chuck?” she -whispered. “I didn’t feel a thing out there. Was I -really that good?”</p> -<p>“Oho!” Chuck grinned at her mysteriously. “So our -little ingénue has discovered another secret—and all -by accident! Listen, Peggy, sometimes it happens -that way. Just when you feel dead inside you’ll give a -performance so electrifying that everybody wonders -what happened. It doesn’t always work, you can’t -always be so objective. But I guess that’s what happened -to you tonight. Tomorrow it’ll be different, -but you’ll never have trouble with Evelyn again!”</p> -<p>And Peggy never did. Whether it was because -Alison was no longer in the wings, watching and -criticizing, or just because Peggy had finally “caught” -it, she finished the week giving a glorious performance -that brought more and more people to the theater, -and sent them away knowing that they’d had a -rare experience.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_167">167</div> -<p>“This is what really counts,” Peggy thought gratefully. -“Not a screen test or my ‘career,’ but the knowledge -that I can really contribute something to the -theater. Play a part with the author’s intention, not -from my personal viewpoint.” Peggy felt immensely -gratified to know that she was beginning to return a -little of what the theater had already given to her.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_168">168</div> -<h2 id="c15"><span class="h2line1">XV</span> -<br /><span class="h2line2">Summer Stock</span></h2> -<p>The season closed with a rollicking farce that drew -a full house every night. Enough money poured into -the box office to pay back the investors and the -Chamber of Commerce and even leave something -over for the new science lab. On the last night of -<i>See How They Run</i>, a tremendous party was held -backstage after the show. Everybody was there. Aunt -Hetty was hostess, beaming and brusque as ever, with -lavish promises of what the theater would do with -her barn next summer. For it was certainly established -now that the Kenabeek Summer Theater was -here to stay!</p> -<p>The directors of the Chamber of Commerce and -the members of the School Board were there; all the -apprentices and their families came; Mr. Bladen read -a special poem of praise for the theater; Mr. and Mrs. -Cook and Mrs. Hopkins and all their friends joined -the celebration. Mr. Miller and Michael were happy -to report that the <i>Merry Mac</i> had not been damaged -beyond repair after all, and that next summer she -would be back, ready to take the cast across the lake -to the Golden Hound for dinner.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_169">169</div> -<p>“Are you game, Peggy?” Michael asked with a -twinkle.</p> -<p>“Any time,” Peggy laughed. “Tonight if you like!”</p> -<p>“Well! That certainly speaks well for my son’s seamanship,” -Mr. Miller declared.</p> -<p>“If it weren’t for him, we’d all be at the bottom of -Lake Kenabeek,” Mary Hopkins said. “Wreck or no -wreck, Michael’s a mighty good sailor!”</p> -<p>“And the <i>Merry Mac</i> was a smart boat to pick the -Cooks’ island out of all the islands in the lake!” Peggy -said. “I’d trust her again any time.”</p> -<p>“And the Cooks have practically put Bladen’s Antiques -out of business,” Mr. Bladen added, winking -at Peggy. “After your boys cleaned up my shop, the -Cooks couldn’t seem to take things away fast enough. -Then their friends started to come! Pretty soon, I’ll -have to start buying more antiques or just stick to -poetry!”</p> -<p>Bill Slade dashed into the theater, breathlessly -waving an envelope and calling for everyone to be -quiet. “I know this is going to be a huge shock,” he -cried excitedly, “but you all know how much our -business has improved since the Kenabeek Summer -Theater came to town—for many reasons.” He -grinned at Peggy. “Well! Although my brother Max -is too shy, and to be honest, still too stiff-necked to -come here personally and admit a mistake, he’s tried -to redeem himself in a mighty concrete way!” With -a huge smile of satisfaction, Bill dramatically opened -the envelope. “Here’s a check to match whatever the -Summer Theater is donating to the high school—from -Maximilian W. Slade! You just fill in the amount!”</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_170">170</div> -<p>Amid cheers and hurrahs, the School Board gratefully -accepted the check.</p> -<p>“Oh, Bill, that’s just about the nicest thing that’s -happened all summer!” Peggy cried.</p> -<p>“It makes me very happy!” Bill said, grinning from -ear to ear. “Next summer, Max might even put in an -appearance at a play!”</p> -<p>Richard Wallace made a short, funny speech, -thanking everyone for their cooperation, and at the -end giving a word of special praise to the actors who -“worked together without undue friction, without too -many complaints, and with only a minimum of backstage -feuds, which is probably a ‘first’ for any Adirondack -stock company! Or any other, for that matter!”</p> -<p>There were toasts to the actors, toasts to Gus and -the apprentices, toasts to everyone, including the -<i>Merry Mac</i>, the annex, Lake Manor, the audiences, -and Mrs. Brady’s food. The party lasted long, with -all the actors talking about the possible jobs that -awaited them in New York.</p> -<p>“What do you think you’ll do when you get back -to New York, Peggy?” Chris Hill asked. “Do you suppose -we’ll have a chance to work together again?”</p> -<p>“I hope so,” Peggy replied, glad to know that she -could now talk to Chris naturally and calmly, as actor -to actor. “I’m going home for a visit first, but after -that anything can happen!”</p> -<p>“And next time we won’t let personal feelings interfere -with our work, right?” Chris beamed at her, -his handsome face teasing a little, but now Peggy understood.</p> -<p>“Right!” Peggy smiled.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_171">171</div> -<p>“And give Randy my regards,” Chris added seriously. -“He’s a great guy, and I really hope to see -him again sometime.”</p> -<p>The party finally broke up, with everyone going -back to the annex to start packing. Chuck and Richard -had to stay after the close of the season to wind -things up, but almost everybody else was leaving -Lake Kenabeek on tomorrow’s bus. Peggy remained -quietly in the theater after everyone had gone. She -wanted to be alone for a little in this theater that she -might never see again.</p> -<p>The flats had been stacked away for the party, and -now only the worklight was left, its circle casting a -small pool of light on the empty stage. Peggy stood -there alone, looking out at the silent auditorium and -thinking of everything that had happened this summer. -She remembered the first time Rita and Gus had -brought her up to the theater—the stage had looked -just like this. That night she had had her first taste of -the hectic backstage activity of painting flats. She -had learned so much this summer, Peggy thought -gratefully. She had learned about the theater and -about working with people—even about summer romance -and handsome leading men! Peggy smiled -wistfully, wishing that Randy could be here with her -now. He was the only person she knew who could -share her feelings about a dark theater like this—the -smell and the memories and the ghosts.</p> -<div class="pb" id="Page_172">172</div> -<p>For it seemed to her that the house was filled with -echoes from all the plays they had done that summer, -that all the parts and the plays and the authors were -still alive here somehow. This emotion was the magic -that had brought Peggy to the theater in the first -place—this sense of life, of living literature, of a -communication that was nowhere else so special as -between actor and audience.</p> -<p>Peggy remembered the first time she had walked -out on this stage in <i>Dear Ruth</i>. How nervous she had -been! And then as the weeks progressed, her sureness -had developed, her professionalism had increased. She -had learned from Rita and Gus and Chuck, from -Richard and Danny and Alison. Yes, perhaps most of -all from Alison Lord, who had shown her the contrast -between career and dedication.</p> -<p>“I hope I will come back here sometime,” Peggy -said aloud in farewell. She was sentimental enough -to wish to say a private good-by to her summer. “And -thank you,” she whispered, “thank you for everything.”</p> -<p>As she finally walked out the stage door for the -last time, her make-up kit tucked under her arm, she -could already hear the questions her parents would -ask when she arrived home for her visit.</p> -<p>“Well! What did you do this summer, Peggy?” they -would say. “What happened? Tell us all about it.”</p> -<p>“My goodness,” Peggy wondered, smiling at the -stars, “how can I possibly tell them?”</p> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/endpaper.jpg" alt="Endpapers" width="500" height="383" /> -</div> -<hr /> -<div class="img"> -<img src="images/back.jpg" alt="Back cover" width="500" height="402" /> -</div> -<h2 id="c16"><span class="h2line1">PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT</span></h2> -<p>Peggy Lane’s education in the theater and in life -is “accelerated,” the summer she takes to the Straw Hat -Circuit. Signed with the newly organized Kenabeek Summer -Theater, Peggy is thinking only of her work when -she arrives at the Adirondack resort. But acting turns out -to be only one of her problems.</p> -<p>Immediately, she learns that the Summer Theater is -opposed by Max Slade, the local movie theater owner, -who is exerting every effort to force the “competition” -to leave town. And she meets Chris Hill, blond, exciting, -romantic leading man of the company—who can make -any girl feel she’s his One and Only, and not realize himself -that he’s insincere. Finally, there’s the back-breaking, -bone-wearying, nerve-jangling job of mounting a new -play a week—never knowing if it will open!</p> -<p>The maneuvering—legal and personal—as the actors -fight to save their theater is as dramatic as their nightly -shows. But in the end it is Peggy’s own warmth, charm, -and intelligence which precipitate the surprising climax -to their efforts to make the theater an accepted part of -the community!</p> -<h3 id="c17"><i>Peggy Lane Theater Stories</i></h3> -<p class="center"><span class="sc">Peggy Finds the Theater</span> -<br /><span class="sc">Peggy Plays Off-Broadway</span> -<br /><span class="sc">Peggy Goes Straw Hat</span> -<br /><span class="sc">Peggy on the Road</span></p> -<h2>Transcriber’s Notes</h2> -<ul> -<li>Copyright notice provided as in the original—this e-text is public domain in the country of publication.</li> -<li>In the text versions, delimited italics text in _underscores_ (the HTML version reproduces the font form of the printed book.)</li> -<li>Silently corrected palpable typos; left non-standard spellings and dialect unchanged.</li> -</ul> - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT *** - -***** This file should be named 55826-h.htm or 55826-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/8/2/55826/ - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/back.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/back.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c9f3a40..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/back.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 75bf5fa..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/endpaper.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/endpaper.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5007fef..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/endpaper.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/p01.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/p01.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ba06a93..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/p01.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/p02.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/p02.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 730d395..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/p02.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/p03.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/p03.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 12feb6f..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/p03.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/p04.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/p04.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f4b80b5..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/p04.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/p05.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/p05.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f3402e..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/p05.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826-h/images/p06.jpg b/old/55826-h/images/p06.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 625e67b..0000000 --- a/old/55826-h/images/p06.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55826.txt b/old/55826.txt deleted file mode 100644 index f8fdf7e..0000000 --- a/old/55826.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5416 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Peggy Goes Straw Hat - Peggy Lane Theater Stories, #3 - -Author: Virginia Hughes - -Illustrator: Sergio Leone - -Release Date: October 27, 2017 [EBook #55826] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ASCII - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT *** - - - - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -[Illustration: _"I've wanted to tell you, Peggy," said Chris, "what fun -it is working with you."_] - - PEGGY LANE THEATER STORIES - - - - - _Peggy Goes Straw Hat_ - - - By VIRGINIA HUGHES - - Illustrated by Sergio Leone - - GROSSET & DUNLAP _Publishers_ - NEW YORK - - (c) GROSSET & DUNLAP, INC., 1963 - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED - - MANUFACTURED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA - - - - - CONTENTS - - - 1 The Arrival 1 - 2 A Serious Complication 15 - 3 A Broadcast 27 - 4 A Favorable Decision 41 - 5 Opening Night 48 - 6 Chance Encounter 58 - 7 Unfair Play 74 - 8 An Explanation 85 - 9 A Lifeline 96 - 10 Friends--New and Old 108 - 11 Quick Thinking 121 - 12 Varied Explosions 131 - 13 Double Trouble 143 - 14 Ups and Downs 156 - 15 Summer Stock 168 - - - - - PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT - - - - - I - The Arrival - - -Eight hours after leaving New York City, the rickety old Pathways Bus -lurched to a bouncing halt in a small Adirondack mountain town. Peggy -Lane rose from her seat and somewhat shakily managed to collect her -handbag, a small suitcase, a hatbox, two coats, and her precious tin -make-up kit. - -"I wonder if I really look like an actress or more like a walking -luggage rack?" she thought excitedly as she stepped down from the bus. -The scene that greeted her was breath-taking; Peggy gasped aloud with -delight. Before her, Lake Kenabeek lay gleaming like a jewel in the -afternoon sun. Pine trees rose everywhere and although it was summer -there was a delicious nip and tang in the air. Peggy's heart raced with -eagerness and the familiar nervous anticipation she always felt when -approaching something new. She had been hired as resident ingenue for -eight wonderful weeks with her first summer stock company. Each week she -would be playing a different part, gaining invaluable experience, and -learning new phases of life backstage. - -"And I got the job all on my own!" Peggy thought exultantly. "Just by -reading for the producers! That must mean something--at least, it means -that I'm really a professional actress now and don't have to depend on -friends and 'contacts' for my work!" She smiled happily, taking a deep -breath of the fragrant, pine-scented air. - -"Miss Lane?" A voice interrupted Peggy's thoughts. She turned and saw a -spectacled, studious-looking boy about seventeen who was wearing -dungarees and a paint-smeared shirt. Offering her a slightly stained -hand, he grinned shyly. "Scene paint," he explained, "but it's clean." - -Peggy could hardly shake his hand, laden down as she was, and the boy -stammered with embarrassment. "Oh, I'm so sorry--I was so busy looking -at you, I didn't notice." He relieved her of some of her bags, giving -her a frankly admiring stare. "You sure look like a good ingenue!" - -"I do?" Peggy beamed. - -"Just what I had in mind." He smiled, taking in Peggy's trim little -figure, dark chestnut hair and fresh, mobile face. "I'm Michael Miller, -and I have the jeep waiting to take you to your hotel." - -The jeep had been painted bright blue with an eye-catching sign on the -hood. Kenabeek Summer Theater, it proclaimed in large white letters. - -"Good advertising," Michael confided as they deposited Peggy's bags in -the rear. "But then, you're not bad advertising either!" He nodded in -the direction of a few bystanders who were casting curious glances at -Peggy. Peggy smiled back at the townspeople, and as she climbed into the -front seat, her nervousness unexpectedly dropped away. She was really -here at last, she realized, an actress with a season's contract--and -suddenly she felt very professional. - -As they drove carefully up the winding mountain road, Peggy discovered -that Michael was one of three local boys who were to work as -apprentices--helping the scene designer, doing odd chores, and playing -small parts when needed. Michael's father was Howard Miller, a retired -theater man, who was to do all the older character parts during the -season. - -"Oh, I've heard of him!" Peggy exclaimed. "He's supposed to be a -wonderful actor, and we're lucky to have him. You know how hard it is to -get good character men for stock. Michael," she went on eagerly, "do you -think the theater will be a success?" - -Michael considered a moment. "I don't honestly know," he replied -thoughtfully. "This is a very small town, and actually we don't have a -large enough population to carry a summer theater all on our own. But -one of the ideas behind this venture is to bring in more summer resort -business." - -Peggy nodded. She knew that Richard Wallace, one of the two young -producers, was a resident of Lake Kenabeek, and wanted to help improve -his town--both culturally and financially. - -"Of course Richard's Aunt Hetty is vice-president of the Chamber of -Commerce," Michael continued, "and the Chamber of Commerce put up half -the financial backing for the theater. So we do have solid support -there. But some people here resisted the idea of a group of actors--you -know, they think that actors are a strange, Bohemian breed--" He glanced -at Peggy and laughed. "Bohemian, huh! All they need is to take one look -at you, or any of the other actors who have come up from New York." - -Peggy smiled gratefully. She knew that a lot of people didn't realize -what honest, hard work the theater could be. But obviously this -intelligent young boy had a deep feeling for the profession and knew -that an actress' life wasn't only curtain calls and bouquets after the -performance. - -"Yes, we do have a lovely group of people," Peggy agreed earnestly. She -had met most of them in New York during the tryouts and been impressed, -not only by their acting ability, but by their responsible and -intelligent attitude. "And we have a really good director, wonderful -plays, and at least half the town is behind us. That should be enough if -we work hard!" she concluded with a twinkle. - -Michael turned from the twisting, ribbonlike shore line and drew up in -front of a large, old-fashioned, rustic building. "Here we are," he -announced grandly, "Kenabeek Inn! But you're not in the main building; -your company is staying in the annex." - -Peggy followed him around the side of the inn, down a little path -fringed with fir trees. In a small clearing, well away from the kitchen -noises issuing from the rear of the inn, Peggy saw a tiny, two-story -building. There was a roofed-over patio outside with two sofas, some -chairs, and a table on which stood a hot plate and stacked cups and -saucers. Peggy smiled to herself, recognizing the sure sign of an -actors' residence--coffee, coffee, and more coffee. - -Rita Stevens came bursting out of the door, a radiant smile transforming -her rather plain features. "Margaret, 'Peggy' Lane--Star of Stage, -Screen, Radio, Television, and Summer Stock! Welcome!" she cried, -running up and giving Peggy a hug. - -They grinned at each other happily. "Oh, I'm so glad to see you!" Rita -bubbled. "I've been positively frantic for some female company around -here. We've been up for three days and Gus has spent every single minute -at the theater--" - -Rita was married to Gus Stevens, the scene designer--a lucky combination -for the company. Although young, Rita had one of those ageless faces and -a maturity which made her a perfect character woman. Peggy had liked her -the instant they met at the readings in New York. - -"No women?" Peggy asked, "Hasn't Alison Lord arrived yet?" - -"Oh, no, my deah," Rita intoned in a stagy accent. "No, our leading lady -is being flown up in someone's private plane and isn't expected until -tomorrow morning." She waved a hand airily, imitating perfectly a prima -donna. - -"Oh, no!" Michael grimaced in disgust. "Is she really like that?" - -"No, Mike," Peggy said with a laugh, "she's really quite friendly and -nice--and a very good actress. Just a little theatrical, but I'm sure -you'll like her." - -"Well, I hope so," Michael said, obviously still doubtful. "Look, I've -got to scoot back to the theater. May I leave your things here, Peggy?" - -"Oh, I'll take them, Mike." Rita grabbed some of Peggy's luggage and -started up the stairs of the little house. "See you later, Mike." - -"And thanks for the ride and everything," Peggy called after him. - -"He's such a sweet kid," Rita commented as they climbed. "A wonderful -help to Gus--I have a feeling Michael may make this business his life -work. Here's where you live, Peggy!" - -They stepped into a tiny white room, sparsely furnished with only a day -bed, a large bureau, a folding screen, straight chair, and a bedside -table. - -"The manager of the inn must know something about summer stock -companies," Rita observed ruefully. "Obviously he has a good idea of -just how much time we'll be spending in our rooms." - -Peggy looked at her questioningly and Rita laughed. "It's your first -season, I know--but just you wait and see!" - -"My trunk!" Peggy interrupted with a sudden disturbing thought. "I sent -it ahead by Railway Express. Hasn't it come?" - -"Right here, madame." Rita folded back the screen and revealed Peggy's -large, black wardrobe trunk, which was somewhat dented and worn, parts -of old labels still sticking to it here and there. "You know, for a girl -who hasn't done stock before, or been on the road, this trunk is really -strange. What did you do?" she asked with a teasing smile. "Stick on -labels, and tear them off, and then jump up and down on it wielding a -hammer?" - -Peggy hooted. "Rita Stevens, you have a very suspicious mind! I want you -to know that this trunk belonged to a friend of my father's--a wonderful -woman who was in the theater years ago." Peggy's face softened -wistfully. "And I imagine that this battered old trunk has seen more -drama--on stage and off--than we can even imagine." - -The girls looked at it thoughtfully, a picture of the old, romantic days -of the theater--great plays, great producers, great stars--all the -golden history of the stage firing their imagination. - -Peggy broke the spell, "Well, anyway, May Berriman gave it to me. She -runs the rooming house where I live in New York, you know. And believe -me, I'm grateful! Besides needing a trunk, I think of it as a symbol of -good luck. Some time soon, Rita, would you mind taking a look at my -wardrobe? I think I brought enough, but I'd like to be sure." - -"I'd love to," Rita said. "But now let me show you where everything is -in our little annex, and then you'd better rest awhile. I'm sure you're -tired, and we have a company call tonight." - -Alison Lord would be in the room across the hall from Peggy. Rita and -Gus were also upstairs, on the opposite side of the house. Danny Dunn, -Chris Hill and Chuck Crosby, the director, were all downstairs. The -patio was community property for coffee, line rehearsals, and just plain -relaxation. It seemed like a good arrangement. Rita showed Peggy where -she could shower and freshen up and said she would call her in time for -dinner. - -But Peggy was too keyed up to take a real nap. She sat on the edge of -her bed, thinking of all the steps that had led her here, to this place, -at this time. Her love of acting, the school plays, the productions in -college, coming to New York, the long, hard work at the Dramatic Academy -and in the Penthouse Theater. She was grateful for a private room where -she could be quiet and think. - -She remembered her home town of Rockport, Wisconsin, and suddenly had a -vision of that other gay little bedroom where she had often sat quietly -and thought--much as she was doing now. She remembered her mother's -kind, attractive face and her encouragement and understanding. Her -father, too, would be glad to hear of this job, Peggy thought, and would -probably run an article about her in his paper, the _Rockport Eagle_. -She smiled, visualizing the headline--Local Girl Signed in New York--or -something like that. Thomas Lane was a good newspaper man and would try -to "hook" them with the headline. Nothing so simple as Local Girl Makes -Good. - -Peggy promised herself to write them good long letters as soon as -possible. And she should write to May Berriman, and to her housemate in -New York, Amy Preston. Well, there was a lot to do--and a lot ahead. -Peggy sighed and opened a suitcase to change into something fresh for -the evening. - -After dinner, Peggy, Rita, and her young husband, Gus, walked up the -road to the theater. Gus had joined them for dinner in the little -roadside restaurant where the cast had made arrangements for meals at a -percentage off the regular cost. - -"Mrs. Brady, who runs the place, is anxious to do all she can for the -theater," Rita explained. - -"To say nothing of the extra customers she hopes to attract by having -real actors in her dining room," Gus added. "Not that I'm a candidate -for glamour, you understand--" - -The girls laughed. Gus had hastily donned a clean shirt and a fresh pair -of blue jeans, but the unmistakable signs of sheer hard work still -showed on his pleasant, tanned face. - -Rita squeezed his hand affectionately as they hurried up the road. "I do -wish you'd let up a little," she said. "After all, we do have nine days -before opening." - -"And it's going to take every minute!" Gus nodded emphatically. "You -haven't seen the auditorium yet, have you, Peggy?" - -"No, I haven't. You know," Peggy confessed, "I was really disappointed -when I learned that we were playing in the high school. I had visions of -a rustic barn with candlelight, bats in the wings and mice for -rehearsals--" - -"There is one." Gus chuckled warmly. "Aunt Hetty has a barn that we can -remodel next summer if this season is a success. But we couldn't afford -to do it this year. It's better to rent the school and see what happens. -If it bothers you, Peggy," he added, looking at her with amusement, -"hold on to the thought that we're helping education! We are, too. The -school needs the money." - -The front doors of the school auditorium faced the highway. A large sign -for the theater gleamed brightly under the floodlights that played on -it. "It's never too early to advertise," Gus observed as they walked to -the back of the building. - -Entering the stage door, they came through the wings and walked out on a -dark stage, only a single worklight throwing a white circle on the bare -boards. The heavy drapes were pulled back, framing the empty house, the -vacant seats ghostlike in the silence. - -"Well, where is everybody?" Peggy gasped in the eerie quiet. - -Gus and Rita roared. "We just thought you'd like to see the stage, -Peggy," Gus laughed. - -"You didn't think we were going to rehearse tonight, did you?" Rita -teased, and then took Peggy's hand. "Come on, dear, we're only kidding. -Everybody's down here." - -They crossed the stage, descended some stairs, and entered a door that -led directly into the school gym. "Here's our ingenue," Rita called as -she ushered Peggy in, "ready to work!" - -Peggy blinked, coming into the sudden light and busy scene. The gym was -bright as daytime. A huge canvas ground cloth covered the floor and -several people knelt, beside cans, buckets, and paintbrushes, over the -scenery flats that were strewn from one end of the gym to the other. -Peggy had difficulty recognizing anyone. They were all spotted and -paint-smeared, in a variety of strange work clothes. - -"Hi!" someone called, raising a hand with a dripping brush. Peggy peered -intently at the slight figure and dark hair, and recognized Chuck -Crosby, their intense young director. "Get to work," he ordered with a -smile and went back to his painting. - -A well-built young man with a heavy mass of light-brown hair rose with -his can and beckoned to her. Peggy picked her way through buckets and -flats, following him. - -"Danny Dunn!" she said with a shock of surprise. "How on earth am I -supposed to know you under that disguise?" Danny was to do juvenile and -some character parts for the company. Now he looked like a clown as he -smiled at her with a paint-dotted mouth. - -"Tomorrow is another day!" he quoted dramatically. "Tomorrow and -tomorrow--I can hardly wait! By the way, sorry I couldn't join you all -for dinner, but I just had a sandwich here. Tell me everything -tomorrow--if I'm still alive." He made a face, "Here, ingenue, fill a -can." - -In a clear corner near the wall, Michael Miller sat hunched over a hot -plate with a bubbling pot of melting glue. He looked like an ancient -alchemist as he stirred and poured, mixing paint, whiting, and glue into -large buckets. - -"The white cliffs of Dover," Michael muttered romantically, taking a bag -of powdered chalk and measuring it into his caldron. - -"Sure, double, double, and all that," Danny replied, nodding kindly. -"Well, just keep steady, old chap, we're all a little tired tonight." - -"It really is the white cliffs of Dover," Michael protested as Danny -walked away. "For the ground coat," he added, peering up at Peggy -through his steaming glasses. "Here, have fun." He waved her away. - -For the next four hours Peggy knelt on her hands and knees, laboriously -painting flats. These were frames of white pine, over which was -stretched unbleached muslin, like a painter's canvas. They had already -been sized with a solution of glue and water until they were drum-tight. -Over the ground coat that Peggy was painting, Gus would design wallpaper -for interiors, fireplaces, outdoor scenes. Peggy's back ached as she -worked silently. No one said a word. - - [Illustration: Painting flats.] - -"A funny way to begin," thought Peggy, sighing. She had expected a line -reading, even some work on stage. "And Chuck hardly said how-do-you-do, -and I don't know half the people here." She glanced around, guessing -that the young boys must be Michael Miller's friends, and that older man -by the other wall his father, Howard Miller. He noticed Peggy looking at -him and smiled. - -"Well," Peggy decided, acknowledging him with a sigh, "if a man his age -thinks nothing of working like this until all hours of the night, I -guess I can do it too!" She worked on with renewed energy. By the time -all the flats were finished, it was after midnight. - -"Rehearsal promptly at nine o'clock in the morning," Chuck announced -crisply as they cleaned up and prepared to go home. - -"Heavens to Betsy!" Peggy thought wearily as she lay in her bed, her -back aching, muscles jumping from the unaccustomed effort. "Now I know -why everyone was so quiet. They'd been at it all day--and I feel like -this after only a few hours!" Her head spun dizzily as she closed her -eyes. "Well, I'm part of a company," she mused dreamily, "and that's -what counts. Even if I don't like the parts I'm given--even if I have to -do other things than act." Plays and parts and costumes danced before -her like a mirage. "I guess this is summer stock, all right!" she -thought as she fell asleep. - - - - - II - A Serious Complication - - -"Not quite so serious, Peggy." Chuck Crosby pulled on a lock of his -straight, black hair as he listened to her read. "If you don't have a -slight tongue-in-cheek attitude, it's not going to be funny. She is an -earnest young girl, but it's got to be exaggerated in a comic way." - -Peggy tried again. "Dad, I'm disappointed in you," she read. "The -world's on fire and you're occupied with a cigarette lighter!" - -"Thank you," Howard Miller answered dryly. He was reading the part of -Peggy's father in their opening show, _Dear Ruth_. - -The cast was having its first line rehearsal on the sunny patio of the -annex. Peggy had awakened excitedly with the expectation of working on -stage, only to find that the company would be at the annex all day. She -had wondered, in a resigned way, if she would ever see the stage at all. -But now, as they progressed to the second scene of Act One, her -disappointment was forgotten. She was concentrating on her part of -Miriam, "Dear Ruth's" younger sister. - -"We can _use_ you," Peggy read on, addressing her father. "We can use -anybody we can get!" She read the last line in a hopeless, adolescent -fashion, timing it carefully, and the cast spontaneously laughed. - -"That's it," Chuck cried. "That's the quality I want." - -A pretty local girl, Mary Hopkins, who was playing the part of the maid, -Dora, didn't come in on her cue. Everyone looked at her as she nervously -rattled her papers, looking quite lost. - -"That's your cue, Mary," Chuck said patiently. "Miriam says, 'We can use -anybody we can get,' and you enter." - -"I don't see it," Mary replied helplessly. - -"Right here." Rita was sitting beside her and pointed it out. "Anybody -we can get." - -"But that's not the whole line--oh, I see." Mary blushed. - -"We're using sides, Mary," Chuck said kindly. They were half sheets of -paper bound like a small pamphlet. "I have the master script here with -the whole play, but you'll find only about four or five words of the -preceding speech printed on your sides. You can fill in the other words -if you find it easier." - -Peggy gave Mary an understanding smile. She had been busy writing in -speeches herself, as she found the short sides difficult to work from. -Peggy liked to think of the play as a whole, but she knew that some -actors worked better from short cue lines, and that for stock, with so -many different parts to learn each week, sides were often faster. - -Rita read the part of the mother with assurance and humor. She made a -perfect partner for Howard Miller, and one could tell that she was used -to this type of part. Miriam made her exit, and then Ruth appeared for a -short scene with her father and mother. Before her next cue, Peggy had -time to examine, with a certain fascination, their leading lady. - -Alison Lord had arrived that morning, making a grand and breathless -entrance at exactly nine A.M. Her luggage was still stacked in the -patio, and peering at it, Peggy raised her eyebrows. "And I thought I -had a lot!" She wondered how many costumes Alison expected to wear on -stage, but judging by the stunning outfit she was wearing for rehearsal, -Alison must intend to dress as glamorously off stage as on. Her bright -auburn hair was caught up under an eye-catching sun hat of fringed red -straw. The color exactly matched the sleeveless blouse she wore over a -beautiful pair of beige, basket-weave slacks. With her enormous straw -bag, gay sandals, and dark glasses, she looked like a visiting star. And -a really beautiful girl underneath all that, Peggy thought, noticing the -careful make-up that enhanced Alison's features. - -Peggy glanced down at her simple, peasant skirt and blouse. It was -pretty, but hardly spectacular like Alison's attire. For a moment she -wished that she had thought of bringing more colorful everyday -clothes--was it good advertising for the theater perhaps?--but then she -laughed at herself. "You're just a little bit envious, Peggy Lane, and -you know it! Now just forget about clothes, and tend to your knitting!" - -Her cue came, and she jumped back into her part with gusto, really -enjoying it now that she had caught the flavor of Miriam. She found that -playing with Alison was fun. She was even better than Peggy remembered. -She had a certain awareness of herself, a special "here I am" quality -that would make an audience notice her. She wasn't a very deep actress, -but she had poise and presence and moved the play along. - -Chuck was pleased with the reading. He looked at his watch and called a -break. "Take five. Chris ought to be here any minute, and there's no -point in going on now without him." - -The cast paused for coffee, waiting for their leading man to arrive. -Chris Hill, who was to play the part of Bill opposite Alison in _Dear -Ruth_, was the only cast member Peggy hadn't met. He had been held up in -New York with a last-minute television show, and was due on the -ten-thirty bus. - -"What's he like?" Peggy asked Rita as she broke off a piece of doughnut -to share with her. The cast kept snacks in an old-fashioned icebox on -the patio. - -"Oh, he's lovely!" Rita grinned mischievously. "He's quite tall and very -blond, tanned and terribly handsome, blue eyes, a great smile, -romantic--" - -"Really! He's all that, hm?" Peggy teased back. "Well, all I want to -know is, can he act?" - -"He certainly can. I've worked with him before--" Rita looked at Peggy -curiously. "It will be very interesting to see your reaction to Chris. -It's a shame that you didn't have a chance to meet him before and more -or less prepare yourself." - -"Oh, Rita!" Peggy exclaimed, shaking her head in protest. She didn't -know what a picture she was with the sunlight striking her dark hair and -framing her pretty face. Rita watched her, noticing the fine, high -cheekbones, straight nose, and soft, wide mouth. - -"You really have a captivating quality, Peggy," Rita said thoughtfully. -"I wouldn't be surprised if Chris Hill is quite taken with you." - -"With me?" Peggy blurted in astonishment. "Oh, Rita, I haven't even met -him yet, and anyway," she added, "I'm not really interested in anyone." -She was remembering Randy Brewster in New York, and all the fun they'd -had together in dramatic school and in the off-Broadway production -they'd been involved in. Kind, steady Randy, with the marvelous sense of -humor. It would have to be somebody quite wonderful to share the special -place that Randy occupied in Peggy's thoughts. "Why, there's no time for -romance here, Rita," she said. "We're all too busy. And besides, I -should think Alison would be more his type." - -"Um-hm. Maybe," Rita interrupted rather mysteriously and nudged Peggy. -"You'll soon have a chance to find out." - -Following her glance, Peggy looked up the little path and saw Chris -Hill, a duffel bag slung over one shoulder, hurrying down with long, -energetic strides. His appearance was certainly everything Rita had said -and more. She glanced at Rita, her eyes wide, and Rita returned a bland -"I-told-you-so" expression. - -Chris ran the last few yards, dumped his bag carelessly on the patio, -and with a wide, completely engaging smile, announced, "Reporting for -duty--on the dot, I hope!" He shook Chuck's hand. "Svengali, how are -you? You picked a beautiful spot--it's just great. Alison!" He leaned -over her chair, planting an audible kiss on her cheek. Peggy's eyes -popped. - -"Doesn't mean a thing," Rita whispered to Peggy. "Watch." - -"Darling!" Alison replied extravagantly. "What kept you so long? Did you -come up by dogcart?" - -Chris noticed Rita and ran over, swooping her up in a big bear hug and -giving her a kiss, too. "My favorite actress!" he laughed, standing back -and looking at her with delight. "And where's her favorite husband? -Don't tell me--he's up to his ears in flats! When do I see him? Don't -tell me--probably never!" - -Rita laughed. "Such energy, Chris! How do you do it after all night on a -bus? Chris, here's someone you haven't met--our ingenue, Peggy Lane. -Star of Stage, Screen, Radio--" - -"Television and Summer Stock!" Chris finished for her. "Don't mind us, -Peggy, it's an old joke from another summer company. Well!" - -He stopped and Peggy couldn't tell whether he was pausing for breath or -from the interest in her which his look seemed to indicate. - -"Well!" he said again, and there was something in his voice that caused -an unexpected flurry in Peggy's emotions. - -"Hello," Peggy said tremulously. She would never know what his next -words might have been, because just then Chuck interrupted with a call -to resume the reading. - -The company sat down again, and Peggy forgot Chris Hill, the young man, -as she listened to Chris Hill, the actor. He read the part of Bill with -so much energy and interest one would think he had just returned from a -long vacation instead of a grueling bus trip. He _was_ a good actor, -Peggy thought. He brought a special kind of magic to the play, and as -they finished the first act, Peggy had a sudden feeling that _Dear Ruth_ -would be a hit. Chuck couldn't have chosen a better opening bill for the -cast. It was perfect for their company, and she looked at him with -renewed respect. - -After lunch the furniture was rearranged on the patio as it would be on -stage. Chuck wanted to block the first act. Pencils in hand, they busily -scribbled on their sides, marking movements as Chuck directed them. He -had blocked the play in advance, but it was still a long process, as, -with the actors in front of him, he saw many necessary changes. - -Mary Hopkins had to be told that Stage Right was her right, and not the -right of the audience. She caught on quickly, though, and very soon -Peggy noticed that she was lightly penciling in initials--C.U.L. and -D.R., instead of writing out "Cross Up Left" and "Down Right." - -Danny Dunn was enjoying himself enormously. He had the part of Albert, a -stuffy, amusing character who is engaged to Ruth before Bill captures -her heart. Peggy was struck by this boy's amazing versatility. She had -read with him in New York and knew how well he did juvenile parts. Yet, -here he was, playing a slightly older man and doing a perfectly -wonderful job. Danny had a face almost like putty; he could do anything -with it he wished, and Peggy realized that here was a true actor--who -would never be typed, who could play anything he was given. - -"Hello, Mother. Hello, Dad." Danny made his entrance, and Peggy stifled -a laugh. He was really very funny. - -They finished the second scene of Act One and Chuck called, "Curtain!" -There was a sound of hands clapping, and a voice said, "Bravo!" Peggy -looked around. She had been so engrossed in her work that she hadn't -noticed Richard Wallace standing near the patio, looking on. Beside him -stood a tall, white-haired woman with strong, craggy features, and -sparkling blue eyes framed by a network of tiny lines. - -"What a wonderful face!" Peggy exclaimed to herself, realizing that this -must be the famous Aunt Hetty. - -"Bravo!" Richard repeated in a deep voice. He was a large young man, -mature for his age, with the same observant blue eyes as his aunt. - -"It's a pity to think that all this work may go to waste," he said -bitterly, coming on to their outdoor stage. - -There was a stunned silence. Peggy didn't know what to think--was this -Richard's way of kidding? Chuck got up to give Aunt Hetty a seat, and -plunking herself down heavily, she stated matter-of-factly, "You're all -so good--so much better than I expected--I'll hate to see you go!" - -The cast looked blank. Chuck was struck dumb for a moment, and then he -suddenly exploded. "What are you talking about? We're having a rehearsal -here and this is not the time for idiotic jokes!" He looked at Aunt -Hetty and controlled himself. "Excuse me, but really, Richard knows -better than to interrupt us like this." - -"It's no joke, young man," Aunt Hetty said bluntly. "Richard, tell them -all about it." She peered closely at Chuck. "And you ought to know -better, Mr. Crosby, than to think we'd intrude for anything less than a -very good reason!" - -"My!" Peggy thought. "It certainly isn't wise to cross Aunt Hetty. She's -a stubborn old girl. No wonder she got all that backing from the Chamber -of Commerce--they could hardly say no." - -"I imagine you haven't seen this," Richard said, holding up a newspaper -so the cast could see the front page. - -The _Kenabeek Gazette_, Peggy read on the masthead, and right underneath -was a headline: Theater In School Illegal. - -"I hate to bring you bad news," Richard said as the cast gathered -around, "but the man who was responsible for this may be right." - -Peggy looked at the bottom of the column and saw that it was signed -"Ford Birmingham." - -"No, that's just the man who wrote it," Richard said, noticing Peggy's -glance. "Ford Birmingham covers art, music, theater, and local features -for the paper--he's supposed to write our reviews, too. But the man -behind this article is either Max Slade or his brother William--or both. -The Slade brothers run the local movie house and they've opposed this -theater from the beginning, thinking it will affect their business--" - -"But it shouldn't." Peggy couldn't help interrupting, and Richard agreed -with her. - -"No, of course, it shouldn't. Our theater could even help their business -by exposing more people to entertainment and thereby drawing them to the -movies, too. However, the Slade brothers don't see it that way." - -"The Slade brothers don't see much of anything at all," commented Aunt -Hetty brusquely. "Not even their own movies, from what I gather. If they -used better judgment in selecting films, they might have better -business." - -"Why, I've known Max Slade for years," said Howard Miller, coming over -to Aunt Hetty. "I realized that he didn't exactly approve of the summer -theater, but what's all this about our not being legal?" He ran a hand -through his handsome, graying hair, frowning. - -"Read it and weep, Howard," Aunt Hetty responded. "Apparently they've -found a loophole." - -"The article claims that a high school cannot legally be used by a -profit-making organization such as a summer theater," Richard explained. - -"But we're helping the school by paying rent to them," Chuck protested. - -"Sure, but the Slade brothers aren't concerned about the school," -Richard continued. "They're thinking of themselves and are willing to -use any means to get us out of town. This article says that we will be -taken to court if we don't suspend our operation." - -"Can they?" asked Chris Hill. "I mean, wouldn't the case be thrown out?" - -"No," Richard answered seriously, "I don't think it would be thrown out, -because there's a chance--a good chance--that they're right!" - -"Marvelous!" Alison Lord exclaimed ironically. "Just wonderful! And I -guess we're just supposed to sit here and take it!" - -"No, why should we?" Peggy rushed in with a sudden thought. "Why can't -we stop the case before it even gets to court?" - -"Right!" Richard smiled at her. "That's exactly what I'm going to do, -Peggy. I'm flying up to Albany tonight to see the commissioner of -education. But," he said earnestly, "his decision may go against us, and -you'll all have to be prepared for that. That's really why I'm here. If -we can't play in the school, we can't play at all this year. I want to -know if you're willing to go on rehearsing on the slight chance that -we'll be able to open. I'll probably be gone for several days, and you -may be working for nothing. It's up to you." - -A determined chorus of voices responded. - -"Of course, we'll work." - -"I want to go on." - -"We'll open or else--" - -"I'd like to meet this Max Slade--" - -Mary Hopkins' little voice trailed on after everyone else's, "... and -besides all the boxes of crackerjack, I see that the script calls for -dozens of bunches of lilacs. I may be able to make them for you"--she -faltered, a little embarrassed--"I--I'm kind of good with my hands." - -Everyone applauded, and Aunt Hetty came over to give her a hug. "Good -girl, Mary. You sound like the other professionals." She beamed at the -cast, displaying an unexpected warmth, and then, as if remembering a -role, barked gruffly, "Back to work, then!" - -"Why, she's really soft and sentimental under that brusque exterior," -Peggy thought, watching Aunt Hetty walk stiffly away. "She's in love -with this theater and it would break her heart to see it fold." - -Everyone wished Richard luck in the state capital as he walked away -toward the interview that meant everything to this little group of -actors. - -Chuck Crosby turned to face them, and with a resolute look that -reflected the feelings of all, he firmly called, "Places!" - - - - - III - A Broadcast - - -The next few days were almost a mirage of feverish activity. Never had -Peggy worked so hard! Rehearsals morning and afternoon, helping Gus with -the scenery at night, and always, in back of everyone's mind, the big -question--would the theater open at all? - -"What do you think, Rita?" Peggy asked late one night when the two -exhausted girls returned to her room. They had stayed late at the -theater helping Gus, for tomorrow with the set finally up, the cast -would have its first rehearsal on stage. - -"I think we're going to open!" Rita answered hopefully. "At least I'm -working with that idea. It is disturbing not to hear from Richard again, -though." - -Richard had wired the company from Albany the disquieting news that the -commissioner of education was off on a fishing trip and could not be -reached. Now, on top of everything else, a new problem--would the -commissioner return in time? And if he did, would Richard be able to -persuade him to come to a favorable decision? It was already Sunday, and -_Dear Ruth_ was scheduled to open Thursday. - -Thinking of all this, Peggy sighed loudly, unconsciously repeating the -heavy stage sigh she used in the play. - -"All right, Miriam," Rita laughed, "better be quiet or you'll wake our -leading lady!" - -Alison had returned to the annex early after rehearsal, saying that it -was about time she had some sleep. - -"I do think she might have stayed to help, too," Peggy whispered -indignantly. "After all, we're all in this together, and I'm sure we're -all equally tired. Gus needed the help--he's still up there, for -goodness sake!" - -"Well," Rita said, "that's Alison. And maybe she didn't realize how much -was involved here." - -"Then why did she come?" Peggy persisted. "She must have known -beforehand that she'd be asked to do other things besides act." - -"Oh, a good company to work with, I suppose, and a good director and -parts that she wanted to play. Maybe she's interested in the leading -man!" Rita laughed softly. "If there's another reason, I'm sure I don't -know it. Peggy," she added eagerly, "while we're here, why don't I take -a look at your wardrobe? Unless you're ready for bed--" - -"I couldn't sleep right now on a bed of down!" Peggy agreed -enthusiastically as she opened her trunk. "I'm too tired, and it always -takes me awhile to wind down. Gosh! I wonder if I'll really be using all -these things!" - -The trunk stood flat against the wall, rather like a second bureau, with -drawers on one side and hangers on the other. "I tried to think of -everything," Peggy said. "If we don't open, this certainly will be a -monument to wasted effort!" - -The girls worked quickly through Peggy's wardrobe. She had tried to -bring an average of three changes apiece for eight different plays, -knowing that summer audiences don't like to see actresses wearing the -same thing twice. Besides appearing in a different costume each time, -Peggy had to think of the seasons of the plays and be prepared to dress -appropriately for spring, summer, fall, and winter. - -Suits, dresses, jumpers, skirts, evening gowns, housecoats, sweaters, -blouses, shoes, hats, coats, aprons, scarfs! Rita exclaimed, "My! If -there's anything you haven't remembered, Peggy, I'd like to know what it -is. You're beautifully prepared. It looks as if I might be borrowing -from you! And this would look lovely on Alison." She lifted a -silver-sequined jacket from a bed of tissue paper. "I can just see her -in it, making a spectacular entrance!" - -"Why, I'd be glad to lend it to her," Peggy said. "I borrowed it myself. -But is that done?" She was surprised. "I mean, we all do borrow from -each other at the Gramercy Arms--my home in New York. In fact, that's -how I managed this wardrobe. I just couldn't have done it without help. -But somehow, well," she confessed, "I didn't think it would be very -professional in stock." - -"Pooh," Rita chuckled. "Nobody ever has all the things she needs in -stock, Peggy. We all borrow from each other." - -"I doubt if Alison will want anything, anyway," Peggy said, reflecting -on the piles of luggage Alison had brought. "Oh, Rita, here we are, -talking as if the theater will actually open, and for all we know, -Thursday night may come and we'll all be on the bus going back to New -York!" - -She sank dejectedly on her bed while Rita carefully folded the little -jacket. "We might be," Rita conceded cheerfully, "but I don't think we -will! You're forgetting your trunk, Peggy. Remember? Your symbol of good -luck!" She patted it with a smile as she left the room, leaving Peggy -some of her contagious optimism. - - -On stage at last! Peggy could hardly believe it. She ran lightly up the -steps from the auditorium floor, crossed the stage, tried each piece of -furniture, moving back and forth-- - -"What on earth are you doing?" Alison called from the front row where -she was seated, holding a coffee container while she waited for -rehearsal to begin. - -"Getting the feel of the set," Peggy called happily as she ran to the -stairs up left, crossed down right, and exited. "Where's the prop -phone?" she asked, reappearing from the wings. - -"Michael's out getting props," Gus answered, coming on stage with a -paintbrush to put the finishing touches on the banister. - -Peggy ran down to the auditorium floor again, walked up the aisle, and -stood looking at the stage. Gus had done a beautiful job, she realized -with a thrill. For their opening show an effective set was important, -and Gus had transformed the flats with a miracle of paint and -imagination. The room was so realistic that Peggy felt she could touch -the molding on the walls. - -"You'd think you never saw a stage before in your life," Alison -commented lazily, getting up and stretching. - -"I feel like this every time," Peggy said. "There's something absolutely -magical about a good set--like moving into a brand-new home. I love it!" - -"Well, let's just hope it will be home for a week," Alison remarked. -"Personally, I have my doubts." - -"Act One," Chuck called, and the cast scrambled for the wings. "Places." - -At noon, Aunt Hetty presented herself at the theater and asked for two -people to do a radio interview at the station in Merion Falls about -twenty miles away. - -"Anybody," she said briskly, "as long as they're part of the resident -company. John Hamilton wants people from New York--and we'll be gone all -afternoon, Chuck, so give me someone you don't need." - -"I need everybody," Chuck said with a laugh, "but advertising is -important too, so--let's see." He looked around at the cast. "Peggy, -you'll go--I need the rest of the family and Albert, but there should be -a man along, too--Chris! Your scenes with Ruth are going well--I won't -need you today. Go along with Peggy." - -"Have fun, you lucky people," Danny called after them. "This may be your -first and last day off!" - -"And don't let on that there's any doubt about opening!" Chuck reminded -Chris and Peggy. "Tell them we're doing fine!" - -"Just fine!" Alison echoed, smiling grimly. Looking back at her, Peggy -realized with sudden surprise that Alison wanted to go too! Why? Peggy -wondered. Surely she didn't think a local radio show was that important -to her career? And then Peggy recalled what Rita had said. She looked -curiously at Chris as he walked along beside her to Aunt Hetty's car. -Maybe Rita was right and Alison _was_ interested in the leading man! Oh, -well, it wasn't any of her business, anyway, Peggy told herself as she -got into the car. - -"Sorry to take you off like this so suddenly," Aunt Hetty was saying, -"but it's quite important. I promised Richard to get in as much -advertising as I could while he's gone, and John Hamilton requested this -interview on the spur of the moment." - -"Will he ask us to play a scene?" Chris questioned. - -"Oh, I don't think so. I imagine he'll just want you to talk about what -you've done in the theater--personal stuff. Now you two hush and don't -bother me with questions. I like to keep my mind on the road!" - -Peggy and Chris exchanged amused glances. Aunt Hetty drove as carefully -and slowly as if she were on eggshells. Peggy could see why they would -indeed be all day getting to Merion Falls and she sat back with -resignation to enjoy the scenery. Chris winced as he watched Aunt Hetty -at the wheel, holding it so tightly with both hands that her knuckles -were actually white. He was itching to drive himself, and Peggy smiled -as she watched his inner struggle--whether or not to ask. Aunt Hetty -won. Looking at her determined shoulders from the back seat, he -evidently decided that she would never relinquish the wheel. Chris -sighed in defeat and slumped back. As he met Peggy's twinkling eyes, -they both had to cover their laughter. - -A good while later, when they finally reached Merion Falls, there was -barely time to find the radio station and John Hamilton's studio. Aunt -Hetty plumped herself down in the booth with the engineer, and Peggy and -Chris took seats at a little table with Mr. Hamilton and a microphone. - -Looking at the large clock over the booth, Mr. Hamilton shook his head. -"Four minutes to go," he said anxiously. "I wish we had more time to -prepare, but this will have to do. I'll just ask you both about your -background, and then you can plug your theater all you like. We want to -hear about your players and something about the plays if there's time--" - -"Can I hear some voices?" the engineer's voice interrupted him from the -booth. - -Peggy and Chris spoke into the microphone while the engineer tested -sound. "Okay. Fine," he said. "One minute--" They watched his hand, held -up in the air while the minute hand of the clock made a full circle, and -then he brought his arm down sharply. - -"Good afternoon. This is John Hamilton again, with another interview of -interest for residents of the lake area--" - -Peggy was impressed, listening to this suave young man and the competent -way he handled himself at the microphone. She felt a beginning, just a -twinge, of mike fright, but then Mr. Hamilton introduced her, and as she -said a few words, Peggy felt easier. As the interview went on, she was -fascinated to hear details of Chris Hill's background that she hadn't -known. - -"Then you've really been a professional actor for only two years or so?" -Mr. Hamilton was asking Chris. - -"Yes, since I was discharged from the Army--but before that, of course, -I did a lot of work in college and little theaters--and in the Army I -was attached to Special Services overseas." - -"Soldier shows?" - -"Partly, but my main job was ferreting out good civilian actors to work -with us--to bring about a better feeling between the local population -and the Army." - -John Hamilton laughed. "Sounds as if you were doing shows in two -languages--" - -"Oh, no," Chris said easily. "They had to be English-speaking, of -course. It was a wonderful experience all around, but then I was in a -skiing accident in Bavaria. Broke my leg. That finished both the job and -the Army for me, and I came straight to New York." - -Mr. Hamilton handled the questions and conversation so skillfully that -soon Peggy and Chris almost forgot this was a radio interview. They -spoke about theater and sketched the plot of _Dear Ruth_, talking up -Alison Lord as the star of the show. - -"And the idea behind this theater, as I understand it," Mr. Hamilton -said, "is to attract more visitors to our area, isn't that right?" - -Peggy and Chris agreed enthusiastically. - -"Then certainly it should be a good thing for Lake Kenabeek," Mr. -Hamilton went on, "and I want to wish you a lot of luck. But I've heard -a rumor recently that you two might set straight while we have the -opportunity here. People are saying that you are operating illegally in -the high school--" - -Peggy gasped, but Hamilton didn't give them a chance to reply just then. - -"--and that you may not be able to open at all!" he continued. "Now, -what about this rumor? I'm sure our listening audience would like to -hear." He sat back and looked at them--"as if we were two fish on a -hook," Peggy thought, aghast at his question. - -In the booth, Aunt Hetty had turned beet red and looked as though she -might explode. Chris's mouth tightened and Peggy found that she was -becoming angrier by the moment. Of all the dirty tricks--John Hamilton -asking them here to "plug" their theater, and then bringing out this -issue! But Peggy had had enough experience with her father's newspaper -to know how newsmen operated--and she knew how to counter. Before Chris -had a chance to reply, and in the face of Aunt Hetty gesturing -frantically from the booth to say nothing, Peggy lashed back. - -"Oh, yes," she said quite calmly. "We saw that little piece in the -paper. Rather childish, wasn't it? Do you know that if we weren't -renting the auditorium the high school wouldn't make a penny this -summer? I'm sure you've heard of the great need for a new science lab. -By the way," she went on in a new vein, "I wouldn't be surprised if you -could help raise funds for the school, too--with your radio program. I'm -sure people would be glad to donate to a cause like that!" - -It was John Hamilton's turn to flush, which he did, as they looked at -each other like two sparring partners in a contest. Ignoring Peggy's -thrust, he came back firmly to the question. "Is it true that the -theater may not open at all?" - -In the booth, Peggy could see the engineer signaling thirty seconds to -go. If she hesitated, a lot of potential theatergoers might tune out -this program thinking of the Kenabeek Summer Theater as a myth, as a -good idea that failed. She couldn't lie, but perhaps there was another -way. She thought quickly, and her pretty voice sounded young and gay as -it traveled through the microphone. - -"The theater is scheduled to open this Thursday night, curtain at -eight-forty, for _Dear Ruth_. We'll be looking forward to seeing you, -Mr. Hamilton, and we hope your listening audience will be there, too." - -Peggy had timed her speech carefully, and Mr. Hamilton had barely time -to say, "This is John Hamilton, good day." The red light blinked off, -and they were off the air! - -John Hamilton took out a handkerchief and wiped his brow. Then he looked -at Peggy, laughed good-naturedly, and shook her hand. "You were a -charming guest! And a tough opponent! But you win, I won't say another -word about your theater until you do open--and then I'd like to have you -both back." He shook Chris's hand. "I know you were angry, but that's -the news business. Sorry. I'll be there for your opening if I can make -it." - -Aunt Hetty looked grimly at Peggy as they walked out the studio door. "I -hope you knew what you were doing, young lady," she said under her -breath. "You shouldn't have said a thing! If we don't open, you'll have -made a laughingstock of my nephew's name and mine--to say nothing of the -theater!" - -Aunt Hetty drove back in a silence so thick that Peggy and Chris didn't -have the courage to break it. Peggy felt acutely miserable. Had she done -wrong? She leaned over to Chris and whispered, "What else could I do? -But maybe she's right. Maybe I should have let you speak instead. Now -I've probably messed everything up!" - -"But I would have said the same thing!" Chris whispered back. "I was -_mad_!" He nodded at Peggy warmly, and she smiled back. She liked Chris -Hill, there was no question about that. He was impulsive, but -wonderfully kind and engaging. - -Aunt Hetty dropped them off in front of the high school and was about to -drive away when Danny Dunn came racing out of the stage door. - -"Wait a minute!" he yelled, tearing over to the car and waving a piece -of paper in the air. "We opened it," he panted, handing Aunt Hetty the -telegram. "It's to you and all of us, but we couldn't wait. Where's that -_brilliant_ girl!" He gave Peggy a tremendous pat on the back. "We -listened to you--and we nearly had heart failure when he pinned you -down. There wasn't time to call you at the studio, but--" - -"I suppose I owe you an apology," Aunt Hetty interrupted, handing the -telegram to Peggy, "but I still think you were taking a terrible chance. -Terrible," she repeated, but her eyes were twinkling. - - EVERYTHING OK STOP COMMISSIONER GIVES GO AHEAD STOP DETAILS ON RETURN - TOMORROW STOP HALLELUJAH RICHARD - - [Illustration: Chris was still standing beside the car.] - -"Oh, thank goodness!" Peggy cried. She could have almost wept with -relief, but Danny's excitement affected them all, and instead of tears -there were hugs and handshakes and Danny pulling Peggy back to the -theater to display "the most intelligent girl who ever graced a stock -company!" - -"Intelligent!" Peggy laughed. "Oh, Danny, just lucky!" - -"Mental telepathy," Danny insisted, "and that takes intelligence!" - -"Have everybody come to my house after rehearsal," Aunt Hetty called. -"We'll celebrate the good news. That's a nice girl," she remarked to -Chris, who was still standing by the car. "Even if she is a little -hasty. Not that you wouldn't have said the same thing." - -Startled, Chris stared at Aunt Hetty, who gave him an understanding -smile. Even in a whisper, it seemed, there was very little that Aunt -Hetty missed. - - - - - IV - A Favorable Decision - - -When Richard returned from Albany the next day he couldn't find enough -words to praise Peggy for what she had said on the radio. - -"But your aunt _was_ upset," Peggy exclaimed, "and she might have been -right! Just suppose we couldn't have opened--" - -"It wouldn't have made a bit of difference," Richard said. "But if you -had said we might not open, think of all the audience we would have -lost!" - -"That's exactly what I was thinking of," Peggy declared happily. "That's -why I went ahead." - -Richard called the cast together on stage to tell them what had happened -in Albany. "I got panicky when I heard that the commissioner was out of -town--almost decided to hire a guide and try to trail him in the woods! -But then he sent a wire from some little town saying he'd return Monday, -so I decided to wait." - -"By the way," Chuck interrupted, "you know we have dress rehearsal -tomorrow night, and the next night we open! Have you sent anything to -the papers yet? Does the town know we're going to open?" - -Richard gave Chuck an amused "where-do-you-think-I've-been" look. "Mr. -Crosby, I sent out at least six press releases Monday afternoon from -Albany. Not only to Lake Kenabeek, but to the New York papers, too. The -Albany paper is running a long article on this--it's an interesting -issue, you know. I wouldn't be surprised if we get a good press all -around. The Slade brothers may have actually helped this theater!" - -Chris laughed out loud. "I'll bet they love that idea!" - -"Oh, certainly! They'll be here with bells on Thursday night," Alison -drawled. - -Michael Miller was listening, too, covered with scene paint as usual, -and wearing his carpenter's apron stuffed with tools. "I'll bet anything -that when they hear about this, we'll be hearing from them again! Those -boys don't give up so easily!" - -"Oh, now, Michael," his father remonstrated, "they're not as bad as all -that--" - -"I want to hear what happened!" Rita urged Richard. "We don't know how -you wangled this or what the commissioner said--" - -"Well, I explained our problem to him," Richard began. "That someone had -questioned the legality of operating a profit-making business in a -school, and that we were threatened with court proceedings if we -continued. I told him who was behind it and why--the brothers Slade and -their movie house--and I also explained that we were helping the school -by our rent. Of course, he couldn't have agreed more with that, knowing -as much as he does about educational funds! And I ranted--really -ranted--about what the Kenabeek Summer Theater could do for this -town--and the whole area--and the school." Richard was declaiming now as -he walked back and forth in front of the stage, and the cast was highly -amused. - -"So, the commissioner promised to look into the matter some time soon." -Richard stopped dramatically. "Some time soon," he repeated, obviously -enjoying the effect on the cast. - -"Why, he's a regular ham!" Peggy thought, grinning. - -"Well, you should have seen me," Richard continued, laughing himself. "I -got up from my seat, leaned over the desk, stared him straight in the -eye, and said, as if this was the biggest thing since the end of the Ice -Age, 'The Kenabeek Summer Theater opens on Thursday. _This_ Thursday!'" - -"What did he do? What happened?" Mary Hopkins asked breathlessly. - -"He decided that he'd better do something about it!" Richard laughed. -"He was galvanized! He told his secretary to drop everything, and -together we went through a list of all the companies operating in the -state. We found that two other companies were playing in high schools! -If we couldn't go ahead here, those theaters would have to fold, too! - -"Well, it didn't seem fair, and yet, since no one had ever before -questioned the legality of playing in a school, there was no precedent -to go by. And no time to get a court decision!" Richard was very serious -now, and the cast listened interestedly, hanging on every word. "So, the -commissioner decided that the only thing he could do legally was to -_postpone a decision_ until Labor Day! If anyone raises the question -again, they will be informed that nothing can be done about it until -after Labor Day--and by that time, of course, all the theaters will have -finished their seasons!" - -"Very clever!" Mr. Miller nodded thoughtfully. "Very clever indeed!" - -"Yes, but there's one other little thing," Richard added. "It was also -decided, in order to squelch any rumors or new questions, that this -theater will operate on a non-profit basis." - -"We are now a non-profit organization?" Chuck asked slowly. - -"We are indeed," Richard replied. "Any money left over at the end of the -season, after expenses, goes to the Kenabeek High School toward their -new science lab." - -"Well!" Chuck exclaimed, looking perfectly blank. - -"Oh, what a pity!" Rita cried. "Then you two won't make any money this -summer!" She knew that Chuck and Richard were working for nothing beyond -their living expenses. They weren't even on regular salaries like the -rest of the company. Every penny would be poured back into the theater -to pay back the Chamber of Commerce and the individual investors. - -Chuck laughed. "I had hoped to have something left over at the end of -the season, but I can't imagine that we need the profits as much as the -school does. Actually, I'm glad about this arrangement!" - -"There probably won't be too much left over, anyway," Richard added. -"Did you ever hear of a summer theater making a real profit on a first -season? I agree with Chuck. We just want to have a season successful -enough to warrant a return next year." - -"We won't have a season _this_ year if we don't get back to work!" Chuck -declared. "We have a lot to clean up today. Places for the second act, -everybody, Scene Two." - -"Congratulations, Richard," Peggy said as she took a seat in the -auditorium. She had some time before she was due on stage, and she -wanted to watch the other actors. "I think you did a wonderful job!" - -"The Chamber of Commerce is going to be awfully pleased with the way -this turned out," Mr. Miller said, shaking Richard's hand. "And the -School Board will be delighted." - -"Thanks, Mr. Miller," Richard said. "I hope Max Slade will change his -mind about us now, too." - -"He might," Mr. Miller agreed. "He just might. If I have an opportunity, -I'll try to speak with him about it. Well, back to work, now. -Congratulations again, Richard." - -Watching him go, Peggy was struck again by the company's good fortune in -having Howard Miller. He was such a finished actor and lent dignity to -the theater by his position with the Chamber of Commerce and the School -Board. "Mr. Miller did a lot in the theater in his time, didn't he?" -Peggy whispered to Richard as the act began. - -"He certainly did. His background's very impressive!" - -"Do you think he might be able to work something out with Max Slade?" -Peggy asked. - -"It's possible, but if he can't," Richard whispered with a twinkle, -"maybe I'll sic you on the job! You did just fine with John Hamilton." - -Peggy laughed. "Oh, Richard! All I said was that _Dear Ruth_ would open -Thursday. What on earth would I say to Max Slade?" - -"I would leave that entirely up to you!" Richard teased. "I'm sure you'd -think of something!" - -"But not until after Thursday," Peggy said with mock seriousness. - -"No, no, certainly not until after Thursday!" Richard agreed, chuckling. -"We couldn't take a chance on losing you opening night! He might lock -you up in the movies!" - -"And I'd have to look at one of those awful pictures twelve times." They -both laughed. "But isn't it exciting, really?" Peggy said. "I mean the -opening--only two more days! It doesn't seem possible." - -"Two more days," Richard echoed thoughtfully, "and there's such a lot to -do." - -"NO!" Chuck suddenly shouted from the orchestra, and Peggy and Richard -both jumped. "No! How many times do I have to tell you--you cannot throw -that line away!" - -He ran up on stage and motioned Danny out of the way, saying, "Now watch -this! I hate to show you how to do your part, but we can't get hung up -on this every time we play the scene!" - -Peggy's eyes opened wide. She had never seen Chuck Crosby like this -before. - -"You _pause_ after you say, 'I got to the turnstile,' etc. _Then_ you -say, 'I didn't have a nickel'--and you _don't_ throw it away! You'll -kill your next line if it isn't just right. Now watch." - -"I see," Danny said when Chuck had finished. "Thanks, Chuck." - -"This is not Chekhov we're playing, it's a Norman Krasna _comedy_!" -Chuck said, speaking to everybody. "Now suppose we get to work! And stop -playing Alison Lord and Chris Hill and Danny Dunn--_and_ Peggy Lane, -radio heroine." He pointed straight at her. "Let's play _Dear Ruth_!" - -He jumped off the stage and resumed his place down front. "Take it -again," he called, "from the beginning!" - -And he was right. Watching him, Peggy knew that it was time to get down -to serious work. In two days they had to have a play ready. Really -ready, not half-way. And Chuck, like all good directors, was giving them -the impetus and the drive to do it. - - - - - V - Opening Night - - -Thursday! Peggy woke up with a funny feeling in the pit of her stomach -and for a moment wondered why. Then she remembered--opening night! - -"Oh!" she groaned and turned over, feeling the butterflies come and go -somewhere in the region of her chest. "Oh," she moaned again and turned -over on her back. - -"Good morning!" There was a knock at her door, and Rita entered bearing -a steaming cup of coffee. The cup rattled a bit in the saucer as she put -it down, spilling coffee over the sides. - -"You, too?" Peggy asked, sitting upright. - -"Naturally!" Rita held her arm out, showing Peggy her trembling hand. - -"That's nothing!" Peggy scoffed. "Look at this!" They compared hands, -and indeed, Peggy's was much the shakier. - -"Well, you haven't been up as long as I have," Rita said. "Wait awhile." - -"I know. It'll get better, and by noon I'll feel fine, and by dinnertime -I'll wish I'd never thought of being an actress in the first place. Oh -dear!" Peggy steadied herself with a sip of coffee. "I wonder how Alison -feels." - -"I'd better wake her up, too," Rita said and went out for more coffee. -In a moment she was back, and Alison, beautifully sleepy-eyed, joined -them in Peggy's room. - -"Why, oh, why did I ever decide to be an actress in the first place?" -Alison muttered over her coffee. - -Peggy and Rita went off into gales of laughter while Alison looked at -them indignantly. "It isn't funny," she said. "I don't feel funny in the -least." - -"We know!" Peggy laughed. "It's just exactly what I said a minute ago--I -mean what I said I would be saying about eight o'clock tonight!" - -"Well, but you don't have to carry the show," Alison said, still glum. -"I'll blow up, I know I will--or I'll trip over the stairs coming -down--I'll probably fall flat on my face on my first entrance. Oh, I -wish it were over! Heavens, my hair! I've got to wash and set my hair!" -She gulped down the last of her coffee and fled to the shower. - -Peggy and Rita watched her go with real compassion--they knew exactly -how she felt! - -Chuck Crosby knew what he was about when he called the cast together for -a morning reading of next week's play, _Angel Street_. By the time the -cast had finished, they had forgotten their anxiety about opening night. -It helped to be reminded that _Dear Ruth_ was not the only play of the -season. There would be other opening nights, too. But this was the big -one--everyone felt that as the day wore on and nervousness slowly -returned. - -The company gathered together at a large table for an early dinner at -Mrs. Brady's. They seldom ate _en masse_ like this, but tonight they -did, almost huddled together for support. - -"It feels like the last meal!" Danny mourned as he stirred his soup -listlessly. - -"I can't even stand the thought of food!" Alison declared, looking at -her bowl with distaste. - -Even Chris was nervous. Peggy couldn't help giggling as she watched him -break cracker after cracker into his soup until it looked like a -snowbank. He didn't have the slightest idea of what he was doing. Rita -plowed into her food, grimly determined to put something into her -stomach, and urged Peggy to do the same. - -"Never mind how you feel about it--you'll have more energy." - -"I can't," Peggy said, still giggling. "I just can't. There's something -absolutely ridiculous about food at a time like this! Imagine--tomato -soup and _Dear Ruth_--they just don't mix!" She started laughing again, -and everyone looked at her accusingly. "I can't help it." She giggled -helplessly. "I always do this--it's just nerves. It'll stop in a while!" -She took a deep breath, trying to calm down, but then another thought -sent her off again. "What do you imagine your husband is having for -dinner tonight?" she asked Rita. "I can just see him up at the theater, -decorating the set and eating lilacs dipped in crackerjack!" - -"Oh, Peggy, please stop!" Danny protested as he choked on a mouthful of -soup. "Stop talking and eat." - -"Please!" everyone echoed, and Peggy subsided, trying to force down some -food. It was worse, though, than nervous giggles. The palms of her hands -were first icy and then hot, her stomach felt as if a thousand birds -were migrating through, and the very thought of walking on stage gave -her a shiver from head to toe. - -"Well, the worst is over!" Rita said with relief as they finished dinner -and left, with Mrs. Brady's good wishes following them. - -And she was right. Somehow the food, the sparkling night air, the -familiar feeling of the auditorium, and the good smell of grease paint -in their dressing rooms relaxed everyone. This was their job--it was -opening night. In half an hour when they walked on stage, they would be -fine--and everybody knew it. - -"It's funny how the anticipation is always worse than the fact," Rita -mused as she started to put on her make-up. "And that dinner is the most -dreadful thing of all. It'll never be that bad again." - -"Aren't you nervous?" Mary Hopkins asked innocently from her table. The -girls all shared one large dressing room, and the men another. - -"What a question!" Peggy laughed. "Aren't you?" - -"Well, a little," Mary replied. "Not much." - -"That's because you're not a professional," Alison said. "If you ever -become one--just watch. You're not nervous at first, but the more you -work, the more nervous you get." - -"I think that's because in the beginning we all think we're just -wonderful," Peggy said, "but after a while, we realize how much we have -still to learn." - -"Zip me up, please?" Alison asked Peggy. She looked perfectly beautiful, -Peggy thought, in her pretty two-piece dress, and marvelous make-up. -Alison sat down again and took a little black candle out of her make-up -kit. She lit it and tilted it over a small tin cup. - -"Is that some kind of a ritual?" Peggy asked in amazement. "What on -earth are you doing, Alison?" - -"Eyelashes," Alison replied, dipping a brush in the cup and carefully -lifting it to her eyes. "I always do this last." - -"Eyelashes!" Peggy exclaimed--and looked into the little cup. It held -black wax melted by the flame, which thickened when Alison applied it, -making her lashes look thick and long. - -"I don't like to wear false lashes," Alison explained, "and this works -just as well if not better." - -"If you'll put a little white at the outer corner of your eyelid, -Peggy," Rita offered, "it will give you a young effect--and a dot of red -in the inner corner helps, too." - -Peggy tried it and it worked. - -"No line under your eyes," Rita said. "That makes you look older, and -you have to shave off about five years since Miriam is supposed to be -about fourteen. Now, bring your rouge up a little closer to your eyes -and not so far out on your cheek--you want to have a round effect. -There!" Rita looked at Peggy appraisingly. "What do you think?" - -Peggy looked at herself and was pleased. She would appear about fourteen -on stage, she thought. She hadn't been quite satisfied with her make-up -at dress rehearsal. She put on her little navy-blue jumper and white -blouse, brushed on her powder and was done. - -"Telegrams!" a voice outside the door announced. "Are you decent?" - -"We are, come in," Rita said, and Richard came through with a stack of -yellow envelopes, handing them to the girls. - -"I have to get out front," Richard said, "but I know you'll be terrific. -Break a leg!" - -"Break a leg!" Mary gasped as he left. "Why--what a thing to say!" - -"It means good luck," Peggy explained as she put her telegrams in front -of her mirror. "Theater people always say that, or something like -it--it's an old superstition." - -"I see. Why don't you open your telegrams?" Mary asked. - -"Oh, we never do," Alison answered. "Not until after the show." - -"That's in case any of them are bad news," Rita explained. - -"But they're just good-luck wires, aren't they?" - -"Of course," Peggy laughed, "but it's another old superstition--like -whistling in the dressing room!" - -"Fifteen minutes!" Gus called, rapping a tattoo on the door. - -"Where's the music?" Chuck asked, coming by. "Get that turntable going, -Gus--and better check the door buzzer again." He came into the room. -"Alison, don't worry about the orange juice--if you're shaky about -drinking it tonight, let it go. Peggy, let's see your make-up. Good! -That's much better! Now listen--I know it's opening night and I know it -means a lot--to all of us. And I know we're all excited and nervous--but -I know you're going to be just fine! - -"Remember--pace it! Keep it moving! It's a terrific comedy and it ought -to carry you along. It will, if you just keep it moving. I'll be -watching, but I don't think you'll see me until after the show unless -there's someone I can't hear. Mary, watch that. I couldn't hear you in -the last row last night." He paused a moment. "What else? Guess that's -it. Break a leg, everyone!" - -As Chuck left, the girls heard the music begin, and Gus came by, -calling, "Five minutes!" - -There was a sudden silence in the dressing room as everyone felt the -mounting tension. It was a different excitement, though, from their -morning nerves. Peggy began to yawn while Rita took very deep breaths -and Alison did a bending exercise. All these things helped their systems -adjust to the impending effort. - -Peggy felt that she had to move. Movement always helped and it was time, -anyway. She walked backstage and took her place in the wings. - -"Peggy," a voice whispered behind her, "have a lot of fun." - -"Thanks, Michael," Peggy replied shakily. "Do you know what kind of a -house we have?" - -"I think it's pretty good--there's a peephole in the curtain if you want -to look." - -"No, not tonight--" - -"Have fun, Dad," Michael said to his father as Howard Miller took his -place beside Peggy. - -"How do you feel, Peggy?" Mr. Miller asked. - -"Nervous!" Peggy smiled. "Break a leg, Dad." - -"House lights!" they heard Gus call to Michael, who was at the -lightboard. "Music! Spots!" - -Peggy took a deep breath and adjusted the little beret she wore for her -entrance. Suddenly her knees felt like water. "What's my first line?" -she thought frantically. "I don't remember what I'm supposed to say--" - -"Curtain!" Gus said, and the heavy drapes swept back. - -There was dead silence for a moment, and then Peggy heard a gasp from -the audience followed by a wave of applause for the set. It was evident -they hadn't expected anything so charming and good. - -"Morning, Mis' Wilkins." Mary Hopkins entered with her first line. - -"Good morning, Dora," Rita said, her voice clear and steady. - -Five more lines before Peggy's entrance. She was desperately trying to -remember her first line.... - -"... and that's the last box of Kleenex," Mary said. That was -it--Peggy's cue. - -Almost in a trance she made her entrance. "Good morning, Dora," she -said, the words coming from somewhere--and the minute she spoke, bathed -in the bright lights of the familiar, homey set, everything connected, -everything fell into place. - -Peggy began to act easily, feeling out the audience, trying to sense its -mood. It was a curious, rather tight house in the beginning. She felt -the spectators were silently saying, "Show me!" - -Mr. Miller and Alison got nice hands on their entrances, but nothing -seemed to "zip" yet--the audience still seemed too polite. Peggy watched -from the wings when Chris made his entrance--and then it happened. That -magical moment when a play suddenly comes to life. Chris entered with -exuberance and power, carrying the audience right along with him, and -the play began to move. It did have pace and rhythm, just as Chuck had -said. The whole cast could feel it and the audience began to laugh. At -the end of the first act there was a resounding wave of applause. - -Chuck couldn't wait out front as he had said he would. He came running -backstage with a huge grin. "It's great," he cried, slapping everybody -on the back. "It's great--just great! Keep it up--keep it moving--it's -great!" Vocabulary had apparently deserted Chuck Crosby, and his praise -made the actors very happy. They knew how he felt out there, watching -his actors, as nervous as they were, and probably praying that they -would come through. Directing was a big responsibility. - -There were six curtain calls! Richard presented Alison Lord with a big -bouquet of flowers from the Chamber of Commerce--a nice gesture for a -special opening, and by the way the applause went on and on, the cast -knew that this audience didn't want to leave. A sure indication that -they had really had a wonderful time! - -Gus finally turned on the music, the curtains closed on the company, and -opening night of _Dear Ruth_ was over. - -Almost over. There was to be a party later in the dining room of the -Kenabeek Inn, and now there were congratulations and backstage visitors, -and the exhilaration that always follows a good show. - -As she rubbed cold cream on her face in the dressing room, Peggy finally -read her telegrams. BREAK A LEG LITTLE ONE, from her big brother, David, -now off in San Francisco on an assignment for his news service. BEST -WISHES FOR A GRAND OPENING STOP WE KNOW YOU AND THE COMPANY WILL BE -WONDERFUL, from Mother and Dad. A wire from May Berriman and all the -girls in New York; and another from Randy Brewster, THINKING ABOUT A -VERY SPECIAL ACTRESS. - -The telegrams brought family and friends backstage as if they were right -here, congratulating her now. Peggy looked at Rita, remembering the way -they had felt in the morning. "Did I ever say I didn't want to be an -actress?" she asked, and they laughed, comparing absolutely steady hands -this time. - - - - - VI - Chance Encounter - - -There was no review of _Dear Ruth_ in the _Kenabeek Gazette_ the next -day! The cast sat around the patio after blocking the first act of -_Angel Street_, glum and disheartened. The wonderful elation of last -night's opening had left them. - -"Isn't Ford Birmingham going to review us at all?" Peggy wondered -unhappily. "Isn't it his job? Doesn't he have to?" - -"Oh, he'll probably write a token piece--it would be too obvious if he -didn't," Chuck answered grimly. "But I imagine he won't do it until the -middle of the week when we're almost finished with _Dear Ruth_. By that -time we'll have lost an audience--people will lose interest in our -theater." - -"But didn't he like the play?" Alison demanded. "Everyone else simply -loved it!" - -"He wasn't there," Chuck said shortly. "He didn't come last night, and I -doubt if he'll come at all. Max Slade must have that man wrapped around -his little finger! We had an audience last night only because of our own -advertising and publicity. But people expect reviews! And if Birmingham -doesn't give us one next week on opening night--I'll write one myself!" - -"Oh, you can't!" Peggy said anxiously. "If you do, he'll be sure to -bring it out in the paper, and then we'll seem like amateurs!" - -Chuck sighed. "I know, Peggy. I wouldn't, of course, but I just don't -see any other way!" - -"Well, for heaven's sake!" Alison protested. "He can't write a review -unless he comes to see a play!" - -"Sure he can," Chris Hill returned. "Easy. He'll write about two lines -to the effect that _Dear Ruth_ opened at the high school last Thursday, -and in the cast were..., et cetera and et cetera. By saying nothing -he'll create the impression we were terrible!" - -Peggy looked uneasily at Chris. He was terribly angry. She had a -momentary vision of him storming into the offices of the _Kenabeek -Gazette_ and demanding to have it out with Mr. Birmingham. She wasn't -far wrong. - -"Why don't I go to see him?" Chris fumed. "I'd love to see that guy -and--" - -"--tell him just exactly what you think of him!" Chuck finished. "Yes, I -know. So would I, but that's probably what they expect us to do, so we'd -better not. Better sit tight." - -"Just what is the connection between Max Slade and Birmingham?" Peggy -persisted. "It seems very mysterious to me. I can't imagine why a -newspaperman would be working hand in glove with a theater manager--it -doesn't make sense. Newsmen usually just want news! Period!" - -"Who knows?" Chuck shrugged. "All I know is that we'll be able to judge -from the house tonight how it's going to go from now on without a -review. It's too early to tell--maybe people will come anyway. But if -they don't, I can tell you this theater isn't going to last long!" - -Watching Chuck, Peggy felt worried. She noticed that Chris was looking -at their director too, and catching his eye, she knew that he felt as -she did. This meant so much to Chuck, and he had worked so hard. If -there were only something she could do.... - -"Peggy," Chuck said, as if in answer to her thought, "would you mind -going with Danny and Mike Miller this afternoon to hunt for furniture?" -He was going to work on the second act of _Angel Street_, in which Peggy -didn't appear. "You don't have to--I know you need a rest--but if you -feel like it, it would be a great help." - -"I'd love to!" Peggy beamed cheerfully. "Really, I would. It'll give me -a chance to see the town." - -Chuck smiled gratefully. "Well, if you're sure--" - -"Anything that's Victorian?" Peggy asked as she collected her sides and -pencil, dropping them into the large knitting bag she carried to -rehearsals. - -"Mike has the furniture and prop list up at the theater," Chuck said. -"I'd like you to keep an eye out for decoration. Knickknacks and -pictures and maybe a statue--you know." - -"They shouldn't be hard to find here," Peggy called gaily as she left -the annex. "These houses look as if they're stuffed with Victorian -antiques!" - -"Thanks, Peggy." The cast went back to rehearsal, and Peggy started up -to the theater. - -"We need a chaise longue, a desk, two tables, four straight chairs, two -easy chairs, and a hall table plus extras." Danny Dunn checked the list -as Michael Miller turned the little blue jeep out of the school driveway -and down the main road. - -"Are you sorry not to be in _Angel Street_?" Peggy asked him. Danny -would not be playing next week and had taken the job of stage-managing -instead, giving Gus an opportunity to concentrate on the set alone. - -"Not a bit!" Danny grinned. "You know I've played Sergeant Rough before, -and although I enjoyed doing it, I felt I was a little young. It will be -a real treat to see Howard Miller in the part. I think he'll be -fabulous!" - -Peggy chuckled. Danny's remarks were always liberally peppered with -words like _fabulous_, _terrific_, _fantastic_, _out of this world_. -Danny asked why she laughed and Peggy told him. - -"Well," he pronounced expansively, "the theater _is_ a little bit out of -this world--and I'm in the theater. So where am I?" - -"Passing the office of that 'fantastic' paper, the _Kenabeek Gazette_," -Michael informed him, laughing. "There it is, children, look your fill." - -Peggy and Danny whipped around in their seats to look. "The building -looks just like my father's newspaper in Rockport," Peggy said, "only a -little smaller. I wonder if Ford Birmingham is in." - -"Well, you won't have a chance to find out," Michael said. "I'm taking -you across town to see Mary Hopkins' mother. Mary said they might have -some things we could use." - -Peggy looked eagerly around the little town of Lake Kenabeek as they -drove through. It was only a few buildings on either side of the main -highway. A post office, drugstore, general store, and sporting goods -shop, the newspaper building, and a couple of restaurants. The -residents' houses and cottages were almost all off the main highway, on -twisting roads, hidden behind the profusion of pine trees and thick -forest growth. - -Peggy wished she could have just a few minutes to stroll around. -"Goodness," she said, "I've been here ten days, and this is the first -time I've been into town since I got off that bus!" - -"You mean ten years!" Michael retorted. "I've felt at least ten years go -by since I first saw you that afternoon!" - -Danny and Peggy laughed. Looking at Michael, though, Peggy realized that -he wasn't far wrong about himself. He had grown up in the past week! And -he seemed to be having more fun. He wasn't as serious and shy as he had -been at the start. For his sake, Peggy was glad of the change. - -"The jeep has aged, too," Danny commented. "Don't I detect a cough in -the engine?" - -"Oh, no, that's only her way of saying hello." Michael patted the wheel -as if the jeep were alive. "Look--there it is--the ogre!" Michael -pointed to the movie house and shook a fist playfully as they drove by. - -"Well, you certainly don't seem too worried about the state of affairs!" -Danny commented. - -"I'm not!" Michael responded. "I have absolute faith in the ultimate -triumph of the Kenabeek Summer Theater! Hey!" Michael suddenly braked -the jeep and pulled to the side of the road. "Bladen's Antiques! I'd -forgotten about them. This is the one antique store in the area, Peggy." - -They looked at the little house at the side of the road. Outside, by the -gate, was a huge iron elk carrying the shop's sign on his antlers. The -yard was strewn with marble pedestals, bird cages hanging from trees, -and a huge red sleigh with massive iron runners. There was even a small -weather-beaten totem pole leaning rather precariously to one side. - -"Is that the real thing?" Peggy asked Michael. - -"Well, if it wasn't when they put it up, it's certainly an antique by -now! No, it's not a real Indian one, Peggy. It's a fake, like a lot of -souvenir items up here. But we don't pretend they're real." - -"Think we might borrow one of those pedestals?" Peggy asked. "We could -use one on the set." - -"Couldn't carry it back--they're too heavy," Michael answered. "Why -don't I drop you here, Peggy, and you can browse around inside? We'll -pick you up on our way back from Mrs. Hopkins'." - -"Well, all right," Peggy agreed doubtfully, climbing out. "But suppose -they don't want to lend us anything?" - -"Make a big pitch about the program credit. Say it's great advertising! -See you later." They drove off, leaving Peggy feeling even more dubious. -She had never been very good at this type of thing--program credit or -not. She remembered a time when she had been asked to sell advertising -for the high school yearbook at home, and how shy she had felt about it. -Acting was one thing, but this was another. - -Some people didn't realize that actors and actresses didn't always make -good salesmen, she thought, as she entered the gate and walked up the -little flagstone path to the shop. She wished that Richard Wallace were -with her. He could talk anybody into anything! But then, Peggy recalled, -he seemed to think the same of her. She smiled, remembering how he had -kidded about sending her to see Max Slade. Well, even if that had been a -joke, at least she could try to do something useful here. - -Chimes rang above her head as she opened the door, and Peggy blinked, -coming into a room so stuffed with bric-a-brac and furniture that she -could hardly see her way. There was a narrow path of clear space, only -about a foot wide, that led to the counter. She had to avoid things -hanging from the ceiling: bunches of toy bark canoes on strings, birds -carved out of wood that danced merrily in the air at the breeze from the -door. Leaning down from the wall behind the counter and staring at her -roundly was a huge, stuffed owl, his eyes gleaming strangely in the dim -light. Peggy stared back at the owl, fascinated. - -"Yes, may I help you?" For a moment Peggy almost thought the owl had -spoken, but then she saw a little splinter of a man, so fragile and old -that it seemed as if he might break into a thousand pieces at any -moment. - -"Oh dear!" Peggy thought. "He's so old, and probably can't hear very -well, and won't know what I'm talking about!" But she had to begin -somewhere. - -"Why, yes," she said, speaking clearly in hopes he could hear. "I'm -Peggy Lane from the Kenabeek Summer Theater, and we hoped you might be -able to help us. We're doing a Victorian play next week--_Angel -Street_--and we thought you might have some furniture or decoration we -could use on our set...." Peggy stopped lamely while the old man just -smiled and said nothing. Obviously, he hadn't understood a word. - -"We couldn't pay you for them, of course," she rushed on, determined to -finish at any rate. "But if you'd be interested, we'd give you a good -credit in our programs, and that's free advertising for you, you know." - -Peggy felt bumbling and awkward, at a loss for words. Well, there was -only one thing left to say. She would finish and leave quickly. "We -would take very good care of whatever you lent us," she mumbled -faintly--it didn't matter, he couldn't hear anyway. "Well, I've -certainly made a mess of this," Peggy thought. "They should have sent -somebody who knows the old man and how to talk to him!" - -"Ah, yes. _Angel Street_ is an excellent play!" Peggy could hardly -believe her ears as the old man spoke. "Quite a thriller, yes, indeed. I -made a special trip to New York to see that play once--type of thing I -like. I was waiting for you to say something about taking care of -anything I might lend you," he went on. "You see, some of my things here -are quite valuable and I would have to be sure they were in responsible -hands." - -"Oh, of course," Peggy said eagerly. - -"If you hadn't mentioned that, I might not have said anything at all! -Might have let you leave thinking I was deaf as a stone!" He cocked his -head humorously on one side, giving Peggy a wink that reminded her of -the wise old owl. - -"I'm Mr. Bladen," the old man said as he came out from behind the -counter and threaded his way among the piles of stuff on the floor, -crooking a finger for Peggy to follow. There was hardly room to squeeze -through, but she valiantly held her breath and went sideways, picking -her way carefully around the vases, picture frames, statues, tables, and -chairs. - -"Been here forty years," he added, leading her over to one wall under a -window. He drew back the curtains and a dust cloud rose as he pinned -them back to get some light. Peggy sneezed. "_Gesundheit!_" Mr. Bladen -said. - -Peggy sneezed again. "_Gesundheit!_" he repeated, and Peggy giggled. - -"Think I'm a funny old codger, don't you?" he said, his eyes twinkling. -"And you're right--I am--I am! Can't get to be as old as I am and not be -funny somehow! Now look--" He started removing a pile of odds and ends -that were burying a piece of furniture covered with a dusty red shawl. -"Take this and put it somewhere." He handed Peggy a plaster cast of a -nymph blowing a conch shell. Peggy looked around and placed it on a -table already filled with other figurines. "And this--and this--" He -gave her pictures, frames, little boxes, lamps. Peggy was hard pressed -to find a place for them, but somehow she managed. Finally they reached -bottom and Mr. Bladen pulled off the shawl. After the cloud of dust had -subsided, among more sneezes and _Gesundheits_, Peggy looked at the -"buried treasure" and gasped. It was a perfect Victorian chaise longue -with a curving, dark mahogany frame, beautifully upholstered in red and -gold striped satin. - -"It's perfect!" Peggy cried excitedly. "Oh, Mr. Bladen, it's simply -perfect! We couldn't find anything better if we looked for a million -years! Oh, may we use it, really?" She clasped her hands eagerly. - -"Of course!" Mr. Bladen laughed, his thin, sensitive fingers patting the -edge of the sofa. "I know it's perfect. Just like the one they used in -New York--noticed it myself when I saw the play. Been waiting, really, -to find a use for it. Nobody would ever discover it under all this -stuff!" - -Peggy looked around, wondering how many other lovely pieces were hidden -under the incredible litter. - -"Yep," Mr. Bladen said, "I have a lot of nice things here, but can't -ever find the time to straighten things up so they can be seen. Too old, -I guess--and then there's my work." - -Peggy's surprise was evident. His work? Wasn't this his work? Mr. Bladen -answered her unspoken question with another conspiratorial wink. - -"Write poetry, you see--only thing worth doing at my age. Wouldn't you -agree?" - -Peggy was charmed. She hadn't met anyone so delightful as Mr. Bladen for -a long time. Wouldn't her parents love to hear about this wonderful old -man with his fantastic little shop and his poetry! - -"Then of course you'd know about the theater and plays and everything," -she cried with sudden understanding. "No wonder!" - -[Illustration: _"It's perfect!" Peggy cried excitedly._] - -"Yes," Mr. Bladen answered cheerfully. "And it's nice to know that -someone's bringing the theater to us here. Town needs it--wish you a lot -of luck. Anxious to help all I can. Now, let's see if we can't find some -little extras for that set--" He poked around, and like a magician -drawing rabbits out of a hat, triumphantly produced pictures, ornaments, -a student lamp, and two beautiful porcelain vases. - -"Think you'll need these," he told Peggy, holding up the vases. "Seems -to me I remember something special about a vase--" - -"That's right." Peggy smiled. "The rubies are hidden in a vase. But -those are much too good, Mr. Bladen!" - -"Nonsense," he scoffed. "You want to be realistic, don't you? Now you -just take these vases and scoot along. I'll put them in your care. Here, -take this along with you now, too." He balanced the student lamp -precariously between the vases that Peggy held in each hand. The china -shade was just under her chin. - -"But I really don't think--" Peggy started. - -"Send somebody back for the rest of the things." Mr. Bladen ignored her -protest. "I'm here all the time," he said as he opened the door. - -"Well, now about the advertising for the program--" - -"Worry about that later--have to get back to work now. Run along and -good luck." - -Mr. Bladen closed the door firmly, the chimes ringing good-by as Peggy -found herself outside. She hadn't even thanked him, she realized, -looking back at the house. Why was he in such a sudden hurry, she -wondered? And then she remembered--poetry! Peggy laughed softly. Mr. -Bladen must have had a new idea and wanted to write it down quickly. She -wondered if the poem would be about the theater, or _Angel Street_, or -if the sofa could have given him an idea, or the vases. It could be -anything! Peggy smiled broadly as she stepped down the little path to -the gate, carefully holding the vases and lamp. What a surprise to find -someone like Mr. Bladen in Lake Kenabeek! It proved that it paid to get -into town once in a while--there might be other fascinating people to -meet in this resort. - -Peggy leaned forward to open the gate and the lamp started to tumble. -Grabbing it, she almost let go of one of the precious vases which -started to slide out of her hand. It kept slipping and she couldn't get -a secure grasp on it. In a flash she saw an awful picture of shattered -porcelain, and Mr. Bladen's disappointment at having entrusted something -so valuable to her. Just as it was about to fall entirely and crash on -the pavement, two hands reached over the gate, grabbed the vase, and -removed the lamp from her arms. - -"Now maybe you'll be able to see where you're going!" A handsome young -man in a conservative summer suit stood there smiling, and Peggy sighed -with relief. - -"Thank you so much!" she said gratefully. "I don't know what I'd have -done if they'd been broken. You've really saved the day--I can't thank -you enough!" - -"Well, I don't know about that," the young man said, grinning, "It may -be enough to know that I've saved the day! How have I saved the day, by -the way?" He looked amused and interested, and Peggy laughed. - -"By the way, you've saved the day and helped the play!" she rhymed. -"Really you have. And you've also saved one of Mr. Bladen's precious -antiques!" - -He raised an eyebrow, turning the vase over in his hand. "Is it really -good?" he asked. "And what does it have to do with a play?" - -"We're going to use them in _Angel Street_," Peggy explained. She liked -this friendly young man who somehow made her feel as if she'd known him -for years. Was he another interesting resident, she wondered. "I'm Peggy -Lane from the Summer Theater," she said, "and next week's play is _Angel -Street_." - -"Oh," he said slowly, and Peggy was surprised to see him frown slightly. -But then he smiled again, handing back the vase. "How are you going to -manage all this?" he asked, still holding on to the lamp. "I don't think -you can carry them all without breaking something. Can I drop you -somewhere?" - -Peggy noticed a car parked a few feet away and shook her head, -declining, "No, thank you--" - -"I realize we haven't met formally," he said, bowing a little, "but in -Lake Kenabeek we're not very formal. I'd be glad to drive you to the -theater." - -He hadn't introduced himself, Peggy realized suddenly, but he seemed so -well-mannered that she imagined it was just a slip. "No, thanks again, -but the jeep is coming back for me. I'd better wait." - -He gave her a regretful glance and put the lamp carefully on the ground. -"Well, I'm sorry," he said. "It would be a pleasure to help you. A real -pleasure," he added softly, almost under his breath. "But perhaps we'll -meet again sometime." He looked at her as if about to add something, but -then, apparently changing his mind, gave her a peculiar smile and walked -to his car. "Good luck," he called as he got in, leaving Peggy -thoroughly puzzled. - -The little blue jeep was coming back just as the young man drove away, -and they passed each other on the road. Michael turned and pulled up in -front of Peggy, exclaiming when he saw the lamp and vases. - -"Success! They look wonderful, Peggy, and look what we have!" - -The back of the jeep was crammed with chairs and tables. "Mrs. Hopkins -has taken care of the table and chair department, and all we have left -now of any real importance is that couch. Can't seem to find one," Danny -said. - -"I've found it!" Peggy declared. "And wait until you see it! But we have -to come back for it later. Oh, I have such a lot to tell you!" She -handed Danny the lamp and climbed into the front seat, carefully holding -the vases. - -"By the way," Michael said as they drove back to the theater, "did you -see one of the ogres? He drove right past you--back there in front of -Bladen's." - -"Who? What ogre?" Peggy asked. "Where?" - -"Remember the car that passed us just as we came back for you?" - -Peggy certainly did remember, and her heart sank as she guessed what -Michael's next words would be. - -"That, my girl," he confirmed, "was none other than our Mr. Slade!" - -"Max Slade!" Peggy breathed softly. "Why, it doesn't seem possible...." - -"No, not Max," Michael corrected. "That was his shadow--his younger -brother, Bill." - -Peggy had such a peculiar expression that Danny worriedly asked, "What's -the matter, Peggy? You all right?" - -"Why, I don't know," she said slowly, hardly hearing as she recalled -Bill Slade's parting words-- - -"... it would be a pleasure to help you ... a real pleasure." - -"Oh, Michael," Peggy cried, "I've got to see your father and Richard -Wallace right away! There may be a lot more to all this than we realize! -There may even be a way to help the theater!" - - - - - VII - Unfair Play - - -"I think you should send someone to see him. I'm sure he'd really like -to help!" Peggy was saying. She had dropped into Aunt Hetty's home with -Richard and Mr. Miller to discuss her meeting with Bill Slade. "I had -the feeling when he spoke that he doesn't approve of what his brother's -doing, doesn't like this feud--" - -"Whether he approves or not, there's nothing he can do about it!" Aunt -Hetty said firmly. "They both run the movie house, but it's Max who -makes the decisions and Bill just follows along." - -"That's right, Peggy," Howard Miller agreed. "I'd hate to stir up any -friction between those two brothers. I spoke at length to Max the other -night, and I've never heard him so unreasonable about anything in all -the years I've known him! He won't even discuss the problem. He's so -terrified that we're going to ruin his business that he just clams up." - -"Was Bill Slade there when you saw him?" Peggy asked curiously. - -Mr. Miller nodded. "And he didn't say a word. I hate to disappoint you -about Bill, Peggy, but he's never been strong enough to stand up to his -brother; and no matter how he impressed you, I don't think this issue is -the one to change his character." - -Peggy sighed. "Well, I guess that's that," she said regretfully. "I'm -sorry--for a while I thought something could be done. He seemed so -nice--and sad somehow. It's a shame." - -"How's _Angel Street_ going?" Aunt Hetty asked, tactfully closing the -subject of Bill Slade. - -"Wonderful," Richard said. "It's going to be even better than _Dear -Ruth_--if that's possible! Come on, Peggy," he said, "I'll walk you -home." - -"Thank you for the coffee and the cake," Peggy said to Aunt Hetty. "It -was wonderful to have something homemade for a change!" - -"Remind you of home?" Aunt Hetty asked. - -"Yes--it all does," Peggy said wistfully, looking around the comfortable -living room with the beamed ceiling, fireplace, and gay chintz coverings -on the furniture. "But then," she laughed, "anything like this is a -startling change from the annex! It makes me wonder if I shouldn't go -home for a visit after the season is over...." - -"Good idea," Aunt Hetty agreed. "You'll need a rest." - -"Are you staying, Mr. Miller?" Richard asked. - -"Yes, I want to go over some things with your aunt, Richard. We have to -give a report soon to the Chamber of Commerce." - -"And I want to talk over some more promotion ideas with you," Richard -said, "if you'll be here when I get back." - -"Your aunt and Mr. Miller make a nice couple," Peggy observed as she and -Richard started back to the annex. "Have you ever noticed?" - -Richard grinned at Peggy. "You mean that just occurred to you? Why, I -guess everybody in town has seen that for years. We're all just waiting -for Aunt Hetty and Mr. Miller to wake up and notice it, too! - -"I'm sorry that we had to squelch your idea of appealing to Bill Slade," -Richard went on seriously, "and believe me, we wouldn't if there were -the slightest chance of his making any headway with his brother. But I'm -afraid Mr. Miller's right. Bill Slade is a pretty weak character. If he -really felt strongly about this, he'd do something about it on his own. -Don't you think so, Peggy?" - -"Yes, I do," Peggy said thoughtfully. "And do you know, Richard, I -wouldn't be surprised if he did do something! Maybe he isn't as weak as -all of you think. I just have a feeling--" - -"Woman's feelings!" Richard laughed. "For once, I'm afraid your -intuition is wrong, Peggy!" - -And as the week wore on, it seemed that Richard was right. By the night -of dress rehearsal for _Angel Street_, the cast was terribly dispirited, -having seen audiences diminish little by little each night for _Dear -Ruth_. Apparently Max Slade was talking down the theater at every -opportunity--calling them amateurs, and saying that if Ford Birmingham -wouldn't even bother to go, the townspeople could certainly judge from -that. Unfortunately, the company hadn't been playing long enough to -secure the loyal audience that could keep it going regardless. - -Alison Lord, who was playing the very demanding lead of "Mrs. -Manningham" in _Angel Street_, was particularly upset. - -"It's bad enough to be under the strain of doing this part," she said -tearfully to Chuck. "Sometimes I wonder why I bother at all--why not -just quit? It doesn't seem worth the effort!" - -"It will, tomorrow night, when we open," Chuck reassured her. "You're -doing a beautiful job, Alison, and, of course, it's worth while!" - -"Cheer up, Mrs. Manningham," Howard Miller said, patting Alison on the -shoulder, "you and I are going to have a wonderful time out there, -audience or not. Right?" - -"I guess so." Alison dried her tears and smiled ironically. "I'm unhappy -enough really to feel like Mrs. Manningham, anyway. If this keeps up, I -won't have to work very hard!" She went to the dressing room to change -into her costume. Peggy followed, worried about Alison's mood. "Mrs. -Manningham" was on stage almost constantly and really carried the show. -If some of Alison's fire was gone, even the fine performance that Howard -Miller was giving wouldn't be enough to save the play. - -"How is your costume?" Peggy asked Alison, thinking that clothes and -make-up always seemed to have a magical effect on the leading lady. -"Have you unpacked it yet?" The large boxes of costumes had arrived -earlier in the afternoon from New York. Because _Angel Street_ was a -period piece, everything had to be rented. Measurements had been sent, -and now the girls could only hope that everything fitted properly. If -not, there would be last-minute sewing--a difficult project to fit into -the next few short hours. - -"It's dull," Alison replied disinterestedly, "but it fits. At least I -don't have to worry about that!" She put on a smock and sat down at the -table to apply her make-up. Watching her draw in the tiny lines on her -forehead, and apply blue shadow under her eyes, Peggy had to giggle. - -"Oh, Alison!" She laughed. "Forgive me, but really, what a change!" - -Alison stared blankly into her mirror and then had to smile at herself. -Gone was the bright, vivacious "Ruth," and even beautiful Alison. In her -place was a wan, haunted woman about thirty, with circles under her eyes -and an expression of fear. "For once I look just the way I feel," said -Alison, and as Peggy and Rita laughed, even she had to join in. - -"I really should be a blonde for this," Peggy considered as she put up -her hair, arranging it in little curls on the top of her head. She was -playing the pert, saucy maid, Nancy. - -"You could spray your hair," Rita told her, "but it's a mess, and I -wouldn't advise it. I think you're all right just like that." - -"Except that my skirt is too long," Peggy noticed as she walked about -the dressing room, strutting a bit as "Nancy" did, with a rustle of -taffeta. "I'll trip on it, I'm afraid." - -"Here, maybe I can pin it," Rita offered. - -Finally, dressed in their costumes and make-up, the girls walked out on -stage for an inspection under lights. - -"What base are you using, Alison?" Chuck called from the aisle. "You're -too yellow under all this amber light. Gus, kill that spot and let me -see what happens. Now, will you walk over and sit on the sofa, Alison? -And Peggy, let me see you up by the fireplace." - -The girls moved around the stage while Gus worked with the lights, -changing filters and spots until Chuck was satisfied. It was a -wonderful, eerie set, Peggy thought. Gus had stenciled a wallpaper -design on the flats, and with the couch that Mr. Bladen had lent them, -and the other Victorian pieces and bric-a-brac, the room had a heavy, -mysterious quality. The atmosphere affected Peggy strongly. She felt as -if some dire event was going to take place. She walked down to the -auditorium to look at the stage. - -"Now try the bracket circuit," Chuck called. "Let me see how they dim. -Where's Mr. Miller? Get him and take that bit in Act Two, Alison, where -the lights go down." - -Already nine o'clock, and dress rehearsal hadn't even started yet. It -would go on until the early hours of the morning, Peggy knew. Missing -props would be found and put in place, movements changed, and -last-minute touches made to the set. Peggy settled down, curling up as -comfortably as she could on the hard seat, as she waited for rehearsal -to begin. - -Chris Hill walked out on stage, his appearance completely transformed -with the mustache, small beard, and sideburns that he used for Mr. -Manningham. Even his attitude was different, Peggy noticed. He seemed a -lot older and his voice was deep and serious as he checked his make-up -with Chuck. - -Finally, at nine-thirty, they were ready. The curtains were drawn, -Alison settled herself in her chair, Chris stretched out on the couch, -and Peggy took her place in the wings. Even a dress rehearsal, she -thought, as she mentally prepared for her entrance, had a feeling of -excitement and pressure. Well, this was their one chance to feel the -play as it would be on opening night--to rehearse with continuity. - -"I'm not going to stop you," Chuck called. "I'll be taking notes and -we'll iron out the flaws later. Ready, Danny?" - -"All set," Danny affirmed, his hands on the curtain. - -"All right then; make it a performance, everyone." - -The first half of Act One went well. Peggy had a very small part and was -able to watch almost continuously from the wings. Chris was really -sinister, she thought, shivering as she observed his scene with Alison. -And Alison was wonderful. She was a little young to play Mrs. Manningham -but her own personality had disappeared in the part, and she was -completely believable. - -"How I would love to play that part someday!" Peggy dreamed. "Or -something like it. I wish I had just one dramatic part to do this -summer!" She sighed as she thought of the season ahead--one comedy part -after another. - -Chris made his exit with a slam of the door, and Rita, as the -housekeeper, came on to announce the arrival of Sergeant Rough. Peggy -drew up a box near Gus at the switchboard, and leaned forward excitedly -to watch. With his old-fashioned cape-coat and painstaking make-up, -Howard Miller was the very picture of a Scotland Yard Inspector. Peggy -tensed as the suspense mounted; even Gus at the lights was so engrossed -in the play that he almost forgot to dim the lights at the right time. - -"Gus," Peggy whispered, "the lights! Gus, isn't that your cue?" - -He started, quickly dimmed the lights, and then shook his head -sheepishly. "Thanks, Peggy!" - -"I'm afraid you are married to a tolerably dangerous gentleman," -Sergeant Rough said to Mrs. Manningham, and as she stood there, slowly -realizing his meaning, the curtain closed on Act One. - -"House lights," Chuck called. "Open the curtain, Danny, and everybody on -stage." - -Surprised, the cast gathered on the set. - -"I thought we were doing a straight run-through" Alison complained -crossly. "I need it, Chuck, to get a feeling of the continuity!" - -"I know, Alison," Chuck said, "I'm sorry. But something's come up that -you'll all know about tomorrow, and it might ruin opening night. I'd -rather tell you now so you can work it out during rehearsal. Better a -bad dress rehearsal than a dreary opening." - -"What now?" Peggy wondered. She had never seen Chuck so depressed or -listless. All his energy seemed to have left him as he walked forward -and looked up at everybody. - -"You're all wonderful," he said slowly, "and you're doing a job that's -worthy of Broadway--honestly, you are." He watched Alison closely as he -spoke, letting the words sink in. "Now, I don't want this to throw you. -Just hear it quietly, and then we'll finish rehearsal. Aunt Hetty -dropped in a minute ago--she'd been in town and happened to drive past -the movie house. She saw the advertisement for the new bill which opens -tomorrow night." - -"Oh, no!" Chris broke in with instant comprehension. - -"I'm afraid so, Chris," Chuck said quietly. "They are showing the movie -of _Angel Street_ this week. Under another title, of course, but -everybody knows it's the same play. The story's too famous. Slade is -counting on the stars of the film to draw audiences away from our -production." Chuck tried to think of something else to say, but it was -no good. Everyone recognized the seriousness of this move, and what it -could mean. "I--I'm sorry." Chuck concluded lamely. - -Alison was standing stiffly, her hands clenched and her mouth tight as -she tried to control her tears. But then she broke. "I told you it -wasn't worth the effort," she sobbed. "I'm not going to ruin my health -and nerves doing this part and then have nobody in the audience! They -can all go to the movies as far as I'm concerned! This whole theater has -been a fiasco from the beginning, and the sooner we close the better. -You can give the part to somebody else--I'm through!" She ran off the -stage and to the dressing room as the rest of the cast looked after her -unhappily. - -Rita started to follow her, but Chuck shook his head. "Let her go," he -said. "She doesn't really mean it, and she might as well get it out of -her system. The part is a terrific strain, and I'm not surprised at her -reaction!" - -Peggy dropped onto the couch beside Howard Miller, who was sitting there -twirling his hat thoughtfully. "I had a feeling something was going to -happen," Peggy said sadly, "but I never dreamed it would be this. Guess -I really was all wrong about Bill Slade. If he didn't make an effort to -stop his brother this time, I guess he never will. Maybe he's just as -opposed to the theater as Max." - -"I don't know, Peggy," Mr. Miller replied, "I'm beginning to wonder if -we shouldn't have had someone go to see him as you suggested. Perhaps -any try would have been better than none at all. This move of theirs may -ruin the theater for good. We can't possibly stay open if business drops -off any more." He frowned. "The Chamber of Commerce will never want to -hear of a summer theater again, and we can't afford the loss of money -either." - -"Do you think it's too late?" Peggy questioned intently. "Too late to -see Bill Slade?" - -"I'm afraid so," he said. "I've already spoken to Max. Aunt Hetty is so -furious that she won't talk to either one of them, and they won't speak -to Richard or Chuck." He smiled ruefully. "Impasse. Like nations trying -to get together without a common language." - -Peggy was silent, remembering that Bill Slade had seemed to speak her -language. Could she have been so very wrong about that, after all? Why -couldn't she see him herself? Why did it have to be one of the directors -of the theater or of the Chamber of Commerce? If the Slades were too -stubborn or unreasonable to talk with "authority," maybe they--or at -least Bill--would be freer with her. She laughed softly to herself, -thinking of the Hatfields and McCoys. This feud was every bit as -unreasonable and silly--and in the stories, it was always the younger -generation that somehow managed to work things out! Feeling a little -like a heroine in a legend, Peggy decided to try. - -But how? All through the rest of the rehearsal--with Alison back and -working just as Chuck had predicted--Peggy thought about it. She -couldn't call and ask for an appointment. It had to be subtler than -that. She would have to arrange something that seemed quite accidental. -Yes, a chance meeting with Bill Slade! But how? - - - - - VIII - An Explanation - - -"Chuck, are you up yet?" Peggy knocked cautiously on the door of his -combination office-living quarters on the lower floor of the annex. It -was eleven o'clock and the tired company hadn't turned in until -three-thirty in the morning. - -"Come in, Peggy." Chuck opened the door and motioned her in. His desk -was covered with work, and crumpled wads of paper littered the floor. -"Been up for hours," he said. "I was just going over the budget." His -eyes were hollow and ringed from lack of sleep. "The answer is, _what_ -budget?" He tore up the piece of paper he was holding and dropped it in -the waste-basket. "It doesn't look good, Peggy." - -"Oh, Chuck, I'm sorry!" Peggy felt dreadful, realizing the enormous -amount of work that he had put into the theater, and the possible -futility of it all. But she couldn't reveal her plan, much as she would -like to, even to offer him some hope. It might not work out after all, -and Chuck was so depressed that he would probably try to dissuade her -from seeing Bill Slade. She had determined to try, at any cost, and she -must do it very quietly and all alone. - -"Could I possibly be excused from the reading today?" Peggy asked. -"There are so many things I need from town, and I haven't had a chance -yet to catch up on shopping--" - -"Go ahead," Chuck answered dully. "There isn't going to be a reading, -anyway. I don't know if we'll even be open after this week, so I'm not -going to work you any harder than I have to. Today everyone gets a rest; -tomorrow we'll begin again." - -"Thank you," Peggy said, wishing she could wave a magic wand and set -everything right. "Is there anything I can get for you while I'm in -town?" - -"No, thanks, Peggy. By the way, we will have a line rehearsal before the -show tonight. Five o'clock here." - -Five o'clock. Peggy calculated. Yes, that would work out. She could be -about her business and get back in plenty of time. She left quietly, -hoping that nobody noticed her as she walked up the little path around -the side of the inn and down the hill to the highway. - -The weather was changing, Peggy noticed, as she walked along. When she -had arrived a hint of spring had still been in the air, but now it was -hot and beginning to feel like real summer. Wouldn't it be fun to enjoy -some of the pleasures of the resort, she thought, looking at the -beautiful blue of the lake dotted with sails and speedboats. Michael had -promised to take her out in his boat someday. Someday! Everyone had been -so busy that even Michael hadn't had an opportunity to be out on the -water that he so dearly loved. - -"When we get settled into a routine," the company had dreamed -optimistically. "In a few weeks, after things are going smoothly, well, -then we'll have time to swim once in a while and go boating!" - -Peggy sighed, taking off the little jacket that topped her gaily -flowered summer dress. It could still work out, she thought, things -could run smoothly if everyone knew that the theater would stay open. -This uncertainty, though, was terrible for everyone's morale and left no -time for play. Actors needed relaxation, too, she mused. The theater was -fun, but it was hard work as well. - -"And today I'm free for a while!" She smiled with a sudden sharp -enjoyment at being outdoors and away from the theater. - -As Peggy passed the offices of the _Kenabeek Gazette_, she paused for a -moment. She needed a newspaper and wondered if she should go in. But no, -she decided, somebody might recognize her, so she hastened on and walked -into the drugstore. There were several copies of the paper left and -Peggy bought one along with some cosmetics she needed. Outside again, -she flipped through the paper, seeking the information she wanted. There -it was--the first showing of the movie today would be at noon. She had -just enough time. Hurriedly, she walked on, nodding back at several -people who smiled at her, apparently part of their grateful, if small, -audience. - -"Oh, Miss Lane--" A middle-aged woman, smartly attired in sports -clothes, stopped her on the sidewalk. "I just want to tell you how much -my husband and I enjoyed you in _Dear Ruth_. We saw it on Broadway years -ago and I must say we were surprised at the professional excellence of -your cast. Tell me, who did that lovely set?" - -"Oh, thank you." Peggy smiled. "Our set designer is Gus Stevens. He's -the husband of the girl you saw playing the part of the mother. And she -was awfully good, wasn't she?" - -"Wonderful," the woman agreed warmly. "Just wonderful. You know, we've -been coming up here to Lake Kenabeek for years--our son goes to a camp -nearby. This is the first summer that we've had any real entertainment! -You tell your director that we wish him a lot of luck--and the whole -cast. We hope you'll be here every year from now on!" - -Peggy left her thoughtfully, realizing that if the theater should have -to close, it would affect more than just the company and the Chamber of -Commerce. People here really wanted entertainment. Surely there was room -for a summer theater and the movies to exist side by side! - -She bought her ticket for the film, hoping that the woman in the booth -didn't recognize her. Probably not, Peggy thought. It might be a sin for -anyone employed at the movies to go to the Summer Theater! She shook her -head impatiently and went into the dark interior. Now that she was here, -Peggy wondered if her plan had been so ingenious after all. Perhaps Bill -Slade wouldn't even be here today. Perhaps instead of finding him, she -would run smack into his brother Max! And that was a prospect she didn't -particularly want to face. - -Peggy took a seat in the first row at the side of the balcony. Here she -was close enough to the mezzanine to get up frequently and look around -the lounge where a sign on a door announced, Office of the Manager. -Looking at it doubtfully as she left her seat for what must have been -the tenth time, Peggy wondered if anyone was inside. She might have to -stay here all day, seeing the film several times as she waited for -someone to emerge. Two ushers walked by and Peggy heard one of the girls -say, "No, Mr. Slade isn't here yet. He said he'd be in around -five-thirty. But you're off duty then, aren't you?" They went on, -leaving Peggy feeling that her brilliant idea hadn't been so brilliant -after all! She was just about to go back and watch the end of the movie, -when the door opened and Bill Slade walked out! - -Peggy was in luck! It must be Max who was expected later on. - -Bill Slade saw her standing there, and an incredulous expression -suffused his face. "Why--why, it's you!" he blurted, in utter -astonishment. - -"Oh, Mr. Slade! How nice to run into you again!" Peggy's acting -experience came in handy right now. She hoped she seemed genuinely -surprised. - -"And you know my name now, it seems," he said, reddening slightly as he -came over to her. "I'm sorry about that. I didn't dare introduce myself -that day, not knowing how you'd feel about it." - -Something tugged at Peggy's heart. She felt she had never met anyone so -basically nice or so unhappy with a situation. - -"What on earth are you doing here?" he asked, frowning a little as if he -had only just realized where they were. - -Peggy had planned the answer. "Why, I was having a little difficulty -with my part this week," she said easily, "and I thought I'd take a look -at the movie to see how it was done." From the balcony, the sound of the -closing music of the film swelled around them, followed by the martial -strains of music for the news-reel. - -"You missed the end," Bill Slade observed, looking at her closely. - -"Oh, that doesn't matter." Peggy was slightly flustered. "I'm not in the -end, anyway. I'm just playing the maid." She hoped it sounded logical. - -Bill laughed. "No wonder you were having trouble," he said. "That's -miscasting if I ever heard of it!" - -"Oh, no, it isn't." Peggy smiled back. "You just come to see the play -and you'll see what a good character actress I can be!" - -Again she noticed that sad expression come into his eyes, but then he -brightened and said, "Miss Peggy Lane, why don't we do something utterly -insane and go out for some lemonade or something together? Do you have -time?" - -Peggy glowed. This invitation was exactly what she had hoped for! "I'd -love to," she agreed happily. - -Bill Slade walked with her back to the drugstore and they took one of -the little booths in the rear, well away from curious eyes. In the -middle of the afternoon there were few people in the store, and they -could speak freely without being overheard. - -"I wish you would come up to the theater just once," Peggy implored. "I -think you'd enjoy seeing a play for a change." - -"I know I would," Bill said slowly. "I love the theater, Miss Lane--" - -"Peggy, please!" she twinkled. - -"Peggy!" he agreed. "All right. But we might as well not beat about the -bush. You know how my brother feels about the theater! I've talked to -him, Peggy, believe it or not." He looked at her pleadingly, and she -wondered how an attractive, intelligent young man like this could bear -to remain so entirely under his brother's influence. Bill Slade looked -as though he should have a more independent role. - -"But what does your brother have to do with it?" Peggy asked, hoping to -jolt him a little. "Surely, if you would like to be on our side--and I -gathered from the way you spoke that day that you would--?" - -Bill answered her implied question with an emphatic nod. - -"Well, then," Peggy urged, "why not take a stand? Come up to the theater -and let your brother know exactly how you feel." - -"He does know," Bill said softly. - -"I don't see why we have to be in competition," Peggy went on earnestly. -"Don't you think the two forms of entertainment could complement each -other? For instance, we're doing a melodrama this week, and if instead -of choosing the same story, you had run a comedy film, both our -businesses would have benefited. Or don't you agree?" - -She looked at him anxiously over her glass of lemonade, her large eyes -serious and her pretty dress making a splash of color against the dull -gray of the seat. Bill Slade smiled, saying, "You make an incongruous -picture, Peggy! You're much too young and pretty to be carrying the -weight of rival businesses on your shoulders. Tell me--" he leaned -forward intently--"did anyone ask you to come and see me about this? I -can't quite believe your story about the movie!" - -Peggy decided to be completely honest with him. "No, no one asked me to -come--but I did hope to see you. I came with that intention. I thought -perhaps if we talked together, you might see our point of view and -persuade your brother to put an end to this silly feud!" - -"I have tried to persuade him, Peggy," Bill said uneasily. "I've argued -about it from the beginning. Then when he decided to run this particular -movie this week--well, it was almost the last straw!" - -"Well, then," Peggy cried, "why not let it _be_ the last straw? Why -don't _you_ choose a picture for once instead of your brother? He -doesn't have everything to say about your business, does he?" - -Bill looked at her unhappily. "There's a lot you don't know, Peggy," he -said. "We are partners, yes, but partners in name only. You see, when we -bought that theater, Max was the one who put up the money. He was older, -and had been in a very successful public relations business in New York. -His dream had always been to come back here to live, with a business of -his own. I had just come out of the Army and didn't have any money to -invest." - -"And your brother bought the theater all on his own?" Peggy asked. "My! -He must have saved a lot!" - -"No, not entirely on his own," Bill said. "I don't know why I'm telling -you all this, Peggy--" he smiled as her wistfully--"I guess it's because -I want you to like me, and I want to clear myself. But please promise me -that anything I say will be a confidential matter between us." - -"Of course," Peggy agreed warmly. She was glad to know that Bill Slade -trusted her, and thought that it was probably a very good thing for him -to talk to somebody. She had an impression that he was very lonely. - -"Max couldn't have done it all on his own," Bill confided. "He had -another investor--a silent partner whom almost nobody knows about. Not -that there's anything wrong about it, but--" - -"Ford Birmingham!" Peggy guessed excitedly as the pieces began to fall -into place. - -"That's right. Ford put up the rest of the money. He keeps his -partnership silent because of his job on the paper. He loves the -newspaper business and writing, and manages to carry both jobs very -well. However, if people knew he was a partner, they might think his -movie reviews were prejudiced!" Bill laughed. "They're not, of course. -Ford is a painfully honest critic!" - -"And he goes right along with your brother's attitude about us?" Peggy -asked incredulously. - -"Well, you see, I'm afraid that Max has said some pretty awful things -about your theater to Ford." Bill seemed almost ashamed. "Not about the -people personally," he added hastily, "but professionally. Max honestly -thinks you're all amateurs and he's persuaded Ford of that." He shook -his head ruefully. "And Max resents a little company of newcomers coming -into the town and possibly drawing away his business. He--he's not a -very happy man, Peggy, and he is my brother. I have to understand how he -feels." - -"Of course," Peggy said sympathetically. "I know some people like that -in my home town. They're terrified of anything new and become completely -unreasonable about it." - -Bill nodded. "If Max would just let me choose some of the films, as you -said, I think our own business would pick up. It's been terrible lately, -but I know why. It isn't the Summer Theater, as Max thinks. It's his -choice of old, dull movies that nobody wants to see. This is the first -good one we've shown in a long time!" He sighed ironically. "And it took -your theater to make him choose it--for all the wrong reasons!" - -They were silent, each thinking of the seemingly impossible situation. -Now that she saw the design more clearly, Peggy couldn't think of a way -out. Apparently, neither could Bill. He frowned and shook his head -again. "I'm sorry, Peggy, but there just doesn't seem to be anything I -can do. I wish I could. Believe me, I wish I could!" - -Peggy walked back to the annex for the line rehearsal, feeling -disconsolate and subdued. It was really almost hopeless, she thought, -mulling over all the problems. Without any real authority in the -business, Bill couldn't be of much help. But she had been right about -one thing. Bill Slade was certainly not the weak, spineless creature -that people imagined! He had good reason for his actions, and actually, -it was wonderfully loyal and brave of him to stick by his brother in the -face of a lot of criticism. Peggy didn't doubt that more persons than -those concerned with the Summer Theater regarded Bill as his brother's -younger shadow--possibly even Ford Birmingham! - -Peggy thought of the little paragraph Mr. Birmingham had written on -_Dear Ruth_ toward the end of the week--just as Chuck had predicted. -Chris had been right, too. It had said almost less than nothing--a mere -notice, in fact! Well, it was all a shame, Peggy thought sadly, a -terrible and unnecessary shame! - - - - - IX - A Lifeline - - -_Angel Street_ opened to a house of twelve persons! - -Fortunately, Alison was so engrossed in her work that she was not aware -of the ridiculously small audience until curtain calls, when they showed -their intense appreciation of the play by standing while they applauded -and shouted, "Bravo!" It was indicative of the fine performances the -actors had given and a deliberate gesture of support. Almost everyone in -the audience came backstage after the show, congratulating the company -and telling Alison and Howard Miller in particular how wonderful they -had been. Aunt Hetty was singularly impressed. "I knew you were a good -actress, Alison," she complimented her, "but I really had no idea you -could do a demanding, difficult part like this so well!" - -Overhearing, Peggy couldn't help wishing again that she could have a -chance to sink her teeth into a dramatic part, too. Not that she was at -all envious of Alison--or was she, Peggy wondered? No, she didn't think -so. It was just that seeing someone else in a serious role opened up a -part of Peggy that hadn't been tapped this summer and wished to be used. - -There was something else to it, too, Peggy thought, smiling secretly. -Something that almost nobody outside of the theater knew. And it wasn't -such a bad idea to keep audiences in ignorance about it--otherwise their -enjoyment might be lessened. The secret was that in many ways it was -really easier to play a dramatic part than a comedy role. Comedy was the -hardest thing of all. - -Peggy suddenly saw Mr. Bladen, who was popping about on stage like a -sprightly old bird, nodding with satisfaction at the set. The friendly -woman Peggy had met on the street that morning had come with her -husband, and they were speaking with Richard Wallace. She noticed Peggy -and smiled, beckoning her to come and join their group. - -"I'd like you to meet Mr. and Mrs. Cook, Peggy," Richard said. "They're -interested in our theater and in some of the furniture we're using this -week." - -"Oh," Peggy exclaimed. "Well, I met part of the family this morning." -She smiled at Mrs. Cook. "And if you're interested in the pieces on -stage, you might speak to Mr. Bladen. He's here somewhere--" - -"I noticed in the program that he loaned the couch," Mr. Cook said. "We -think it's such a beautiful piece that we'd be very interested in buying -it." - -"Well, wait a minute, and I'll find him for you." Peggy beamed and -hurried away. Wouldn't it be wonderful if the theater could be of -assistance to Mr. Bladen, too! She found him behind a flat, looking -curiously at a prop table and, pinned above it, the list of scenes in -which the things were used. - -"Neat. Very neat," Mr. Bladen said. "Haven't been backstage since I was -a boy. It smells wonderful!" - -Peggy laughed. She knew exactly what he meant. There was a very special -aroma about backstage. It had a hint of glue, paint, make-up, and even -the peculiar, musty odor of ropes and pulleys. - -"I think you've sold your chaise longue," Peggy told him happily. "That -is, if you're interested in selling it!" She brought him back to meet -the Cooks, and soon all were engrossed in a discussion of antiques. -Peggy saw that it might indeed be a fruitful night for Mr. Bladen. When -the boys returned the props and furniture after _Angel Street_ was over, -maybe they would be willing to clean up Mr. Bladen's shop a bit. It was -little enough to do in return for the things he had lent them. Peggy -made a mental note to remind Michael and his friends. - -The audiences for the rest of the week were uniformly small. Either -people were going to the movie instead of the play, as Max Slade had -hoped, or his comments about the company were having their effect. The -absence of anything in the paper except their own advertisements was -keeping people away, too. If only Ford Birmingham would break down and -come to the theater, Peggy thought! - -The company began rehearsals for the next play, _Charley's Aunt_, not -knowing if they would even have an opportunity to play it! Rehearsals -had never gone so badly. All the fire had left Chuck's direction, and -the cast responded just as dully. Toward the middle of the week, Richard -and Chuck called everyone together and announced that the theater would -definitely have to close unless everyone took a cut in salary. If the -actors were willing to do this and work just for expenses, they might be -able to pull through another week. - -Rita and Gus looked at each other gloomily. Peggy knew that they had -counted on saving something this summer to take a long-dreamed-of -vacation. In the four years they'd been married, they had never had a -honeymoon! Still, Rita and Gus were the first to say they'd be glad to -forego their salaries. - -Rita even laughed about it. "It's fate, that's all. We might have known -it! And if we did leave now, we'd only have to go back unemployed to New -York. It's too late to get other jobs this summer. Might as well stay -here another week and enjoy the scenery!" - -Everyone else felt the same way. There was little point in not making -one last effort, even though they knew the theater couldn't last long. - -"Maybe I can talk the manager of Kenabeek Inn into letting us stay for a -few days after we close," Chuck added glumly. "Then you could all at -least have a little leisure and swimming after your work!" - -"Do you remember when we had all that space in the paper after the -commissioner of education made his decision about the theater?" Chris -Hill asked. "It probably accounted for the good house we had opening -night of _Dear Ruth_. Couldn't we somehow find something else that would -bring us space in the paper--maybe to be mentioned in some of the social -columns--anything, as long as they write about us!" - -"I've tried," Richard said. "I've been to see everyone on that paper who -could do us the slightest bit of good, and Aunt Hetty has used her -influence, too. We do get things in. But the social columns aren't the -answer, Chris, as long as people regard us as amateurs. They don't want -to spend money on anything that isn't professional! That's why we only -get the same small audience over and over again. Even people who bought -season tickets before we opened aren't using them! They're beginning to -regard their investment as some kind of charity to help the town! No, -Chris, I'm afraid we're licked." - -And for the first time, Peggy thought so, too. Until now she always had -felt a stirring of hope, an optimistic sense that the theater would pull -through somehow. But now everything looked too bleak. It would be -unrealistic to hope for a miracle at this point. - -Peggy began to visualize the letters she would shortly have to write -home: "Sorry, we folded! How would you like a visitor for a while?" If, -she thought dismally, she could even manage a ticket home now with the -cut in salary. It would be too defeating to ask her parents for that. -Maybe she wouldn't be able to go home after all! - -On the last night of _Angel Street_ a pall hung over the entire theater. -It was so thick the company could almost taste it. All the magic had -deserted the dressing rooms and the stage, and Peggy realized anew how -much the theater was a two-way romance. Plays needed an audience. One -couldn't work to a vacuum. Still, there was a job to be done, and -although the actors had long since lost their excitement, they began the -play with a determination to do the best possible job, and with that -inexplicable feeling of loss that always occurred on the last night of a -show. It was sad, saying good-by to a part and a story. _Angel Street_ -wouldn't live again until some other company somewhere took it and -molded it into being. - -The curtain fell to loud but scattered applause, and the actors, too -enervated to rush to their dressing rooms tonight, stood about on stage -longer than usual. Peggy was talking to Rita about _Charley's Aunt_, -when a movement in the wings caught her eye, and she turned to see a -sight so astonishing that she literally dropped onto Mr. Bladen's couch. - -Bill Slade, accompanied by two other men, was walking onto the stage and -heading straight for Chuck Crosby with a purposeful air and a broad -smile. - -Peggy gasped, unwilling to trust her eyes! The men were all talking to -Chuck now, and he seemed as flabbergasted as Peggy. - -Rita pulled on her sleeve, "Who are they, Peggy? What's it all about?" - -"That's Bill Slade, one of them," Peggy said. "I don't know who the -others are." - -"Bill Slade!" Rita exclaimed in disbelief. "Well, for heaven's sake!" - -Suddenly the little group laughed, and Bill turned to smile at Peggy. "I -took your advice, you see," he said, coming over to her. "I know I'm a -little late getting here, but I wanted to bring someone with me. Peggy, -this is Ford Birmingham!" - -Ford Birmingham! Everyone heard the name and stared openly. Mr. -Birmingham was an interesting, distinguished-looking man, younger than -Peggy had imagined, with streaks of premature gray in his hair. As he -spoke to her, Peggy felt a quality of integrity in everything he said. - -"I'm so sorry that I didn't come on my own initiative sooner. I feel -that I owe you all an apology--particularly in view of the superb play I -saw tonight! I'm afraid I misjudged you. I had no idea it would be like -this." - -He was kind enough to see each member of the company personally and -offer his apologies. Peggy was struck by the graciousness of the -gesture. It couldn't be easy for him. - -"So that is Ford Birmingham!" she exclaimed to Bill. "He's so--so -entirely different from my picture of him!" - -"Thought you'd like him." Bill smiled. "And I think there's another -surprise for the cast, Peggy!" He indicated the other member of the -trio, who was still deep in conversation with Chuck. - -"Who is he?" Peggy asked curiously. But before Bill could answer, Chuck, -grinning from ear to ear, asked the cast to gather around. - -"Someone here has a proposition for us," Chuck said, introducing Mr. -Eugene Vincent, the entertainment director for Lake Manor, a huge resort -hotel three miles down the highway. - -"If you people would be interested," Mr. Vincent said, his plump face -wreathed with good humor, "I'd like to have you play one night a week -down at the Manor! It would be a wonderful addition to our program, and -you wouldn't have to worry about a thing. We'd do our own sets for your -plays, take care of moving your props, and transport you back and forth. -All you have to do is act!" He beamed at them. "How does that sound to -you?" - -"It might mean that we'd be able to continue our season," Chuck broke in -anxiously. "I'm not sure yet, but the additional money might carry us -through--" - -"And there's one other inducement," Mr. Vincent added. "You'd come early -for dinner on performance days, and have the recreation facilities -available for your use at any time. Swimming, Ping-pong, volleyball...." -He raised his eyebrows and peered at them like a genie offering infinite -temptations. - -They couldn't believe their ears. After a stunned silence, Chris Hill -was the first to give a mighty whoop. "Mr. Vincent," he exclaimed, -pumping his hand furiously, "I have always believed in Santa Claus, and -now that you have come along, I _know_ it's true!" He turned to the -company. "What about the rest of you? Don't you believe in miracles?" - -"You mean it's true," Danny said, with a perfectly blank expression. -Then as it sank in he grinned, and grabbing Peggy, began to waltz about -on stage. - -"It's true," he sang, "it's terrific, it's fantastic, it's the most -amazing ever!" - -The cast merrily congratulated one another, showering Mr. Vincent with -handshakes and praise, and finally dragging him and even Ford Birmingham -into an impromptu conga line about the stage. Gus turned on the music -and it wasn't long before a real party developed. Michael Miller went -out to bring back sandwiches and soft drinks, and the set of _Angel -Street_ changed, miraculously, from a gloomy room to one of brightness -and gaiety. - -"How did it all happen?" Peggy asked Bill Slade breathlessly during a -lull in the dancing. - -"Simple," he answered, smiling. "It occurred to me after our talk that -there was one effort I could make in your behalf. I had never spoken -seriously to Ford about the theater. I took it for granted that he knew -how I felt, but then I remembered that I'd never actually told him so. -He'd only heard Max's side of the story. So"--he grinned at her--"after -I saw you that day, I went to see Ford. It took all week to persuade him -to come up here, but I finally managed." - -"But what did you say to him?" Peggy questioned, her eyes alight with -interest. "It must have been good!" - -"I appealed to his sense of honor," Bill said. "Since we're all in the -same business, I felt he should make an effort to understand your side -of the question, too. And after enough insistence that you were really -professional, and that he ought to check that for himself, well--he -agreed. You know," Bill added rather sheepishly, "I was terribly -impressed. I really didn't think the play would be as good as it was. -Will you forgive me?" - -Peggy laughed delightedly, "Oh, Bill! Of course!" - -"I think Ford will give you a terrific review," Bill said. - -"And what about Mr. Vincent?" Peggy asked, "Was that your doing, too?" - -"No." Bill shook his head shyly. "Just a coincidence, Peggy. Ford was -having dinner with him--" - -"And you persuaded both of them to come!" Peggy cried. "Now don't deny -it, Bill Slade, I know you did!" - -"Well," he admitted reluctantly, "I just said that it might be -interesting." - -"Oh, Bill, how will we ever be able to thank you!" Peggy's face was -flushed with gratitude. "And I'll bet Chuck and Richard don't know a -thing about this--" She got up with every intention of telling them, but -Bill put out his hand to stop her. - -"No, please don't, Peggy," he pleaded. "They think we came out of simple -curiosity and were pleasantly surprised. If the real story should get -back to Max, it might hurt him dreadfully. I'd rather keep the whole -thing as quiet as possible." - -"Of course," Peggy agreed, sitting down again. "I hadn't thought of -that. Bill, what are you going to do about your brother? I'm sure he -thought the theater would close, and he'll be furious at this new -development." - -"Well," Bill said slowly, "he's bound to know I had something to do with -it, but he doesn't have to know how much--until I prove to him that your -theater isn't the problem! I've already talked with Ford and together -we're going to try to improve our choice of films. Ford's on my side -about that." He smiled ruefully. "If I'd only spoken to him before, -Peggy! I guess it took a nudge from you to open my eyes!" - -"Say! When's this set coming down?" Gus Stevens asked everyone. "Do you -people know what time it is?" - -And it was late--so late that no one could think of leaving Gus and the -boys to work all alone. Everyone, including Ford Birmingham and Mr. -Vincent, pitched in to help. The wonderful night ended as the last flat -was stacked away and Mr. Vincent, dusting himself off, waved good-by -with the cheery promise, "Be seeing you next week at the Manor!" - -Bill said good-by to Peggy, holding her hand for a moment as he reminded -her, "Don't forget, Peggy, if you're grateful to me, that I have a lot -to thank you for, too. A lot!" - -"Well," Chris observed as he watched Bill drive away with his friends, -"I think there's more to this than meets the eye! You two seem to know -each other very well!" He looked at Peggy curiously as they started the -walk back to the annex together under a bright night sky so clear that -it looked like a canopy of diamonds. - -"Oh, well, you heard the story of my meeting Bill Slade when I went to -Mr. Bladen's that day," Peggy reminded him, hoping that it would satisfy -Chris. She didn't want anyone to know of their further talk. - -"And you two became such fast friends in all of about five minutes?" -Chris raised his eyebrows. "Oh, now, Peggy! I watched you together -tonight and I still say--there's more to this than meets the eye!" - -"Well"--Peggy was glad of the night that effectively covered her -blush--"he's really nice, Chris." She wasn't very good at evasion and -wished that she could tell the whole story, but for Bill's sake she -mustn't. - -"I see," Chris said softly. "Yes, he is a pleasant fellow, Peggy, but -you know there are other people around, too. I hope you won't forget -that when you're thinking of Mr. Slade." - -"What does he mean?" Peggy wondered in silence all the way home. Could -Chris possibly be putting a different interpretation on her friendship -with Bill Slade? "Oh dear," Peggy thought, "I may have helped untangle -the theater, but I've certainly tangled up my personal affairs!" She -sighed, remembering a little nervously that tomorrow _For Love or Money_ -would go into rehearsal and she would be playing a romantic lead -opposite Chris Hill! - - - - - X - Friends--New and Old - - -"'Last night a group of professional actors, backed by years of -experience on Broadway, television, and radio, presented a stunning -performance of _Angel Street_ to an audience of fewer than twenty -persons. It is this reviewer's duty to apologize publicly for having -neglected the Kenabeek Summer Theater. Until now he has not had the -pleasure of viewing one of its productions. It is his loss. And he would -like to say that the Summer Theater is one of the finest additions to -our town in many years. It deserves all the support our local residents -and out-of-towners can give it.' - -"Oh, just listen to that!" Peggy interrupted herself and squealed with -delight as she read Ford Birmingham's review in the _Gazette_ to Rita, -Alison, and Chris. They were having dinner together before the opening -of _Charley's Aunt_. Ford Birmingham had timed the appearance of the -review to coincide with the opening of the new play, and tomorrow there -would be yet another review in the _Gazette_. - -"Go on," Alison urged. - -"'_Angel Street_ was so electrifying,'" Peggy continued, "'that despite -the small house, your reviewer was sitting--literally--on the edge of -his hard seat in our high school auditorium. (That he was unaware of his -discomfort is another indication of the quality of the performance.) Do -not make the mistake of assuming that a production given in the high -school is an amateurish effort. The set was excellently executed by Gus -Stevens, a young man, who, we suspect, will shortly be designing for -Broadway. - -"'Alison Lord, as Mrs. Manningham, gave a controlled, vibrant -performance that was a delight to watch. As that colorful inspector, -Sergeant Bough, our own Howard Miller was simply superb.'" As Peggy read -on, the wonderful words of praise made everyone glow with a feeling of -success and satisfaction. - -"'Peggy Lane, in the small role of the maid Nancy, was pert and -charming, leaving us with the notion that we'd like to see her do -something else--'" - -"Well, they will," Chris interrupted, giving Peggy a wink. "Next week, -Peggy the Star!" - -"Oh, Chris," Peggy laughed. "I'm not really the star--it's you--and -Alison, too." - -"Leave me out," Alison said mockingly. "I had my big chance and no -audience. It's your turn next, Peggy, and it looks as if you'll be -luckier." There was a hint of envy in Alison's tone that surprised -Peggy. Only last week she had been complaining about having two big -leads in a row. Peggy had thought Alison was looking forward to the -smaller but very good part she had in _For Love or Money_. - -"Doesn't he say anything about me?" Chris asked. "Go on, Peggy, I can't -believe he isn't going to offer any criticism at all." - -Peggy resumed reading: "'Rita Stevens was excellent as the housekeeper; -so believable in fact, that one might tend to overlook a program note -which explains that she is much younger than she appeared.' - -"Oh, and here you are, Chris," Peggy said. "'Chris Hill, a romantic -leading man if ever we saw one, made a valiant effort to create the -difficult, heavy role of Mr. Manningham. That he didn't quite succeed is -no slur on his ability. He was very good indeed and there were moments -in the play when he was truly spine-chilling. We suspect, however, that -underneath those sideburns Mr. Hill is basically just too nice a fellow. -We're looking forward to him in _Charley's Aunt_ where, we understand, -he will be playing something closer to his type. This should be a real -treat for the young women of the area, and we assure you, if you're -interested, that you needn't look further for a living, breathing -matinee idol!' - -"Oh, Chris!" Peggy whooped and burst out laughing. - -"Why, Christopher Barrymore Hill!" Alison giggled. "I had no idea you -were such a heart throb!" - -"Heavens! You won't be able to walk down the street alone after that!" -Rita teased, as Chris got redder and redder and looked as if he would -like to vanish into the floor. - -"Oh, no," he groaned. "And I was beginning to think that Ford Birmingham -was a pretty nice guy! Why did he have to do this to me?" - -"Because it's wonderful publicity, that's why!" Peggy cried. "Oh, Chris, -don't you see? Look at everything he said--about the quality of the -actors, and then establishing you as a draw. Why," she declared -brightly, "we'll have everybody in town rushing up to see you! And -they'll bring their friends. It's a beautiful idea!" - -"Umphm," Chris moaned dismally. "It's a hideous idea! However, he was -right in his criticism. There were moments when I did feel distant from -the part." - -"After this, you won't even have to act any more." Alison laughed. "Just -be yourself while everyone swoons!" - -"Oh, Alison, cut it out!" Chris pleaded, looking around as if a thousand -eyes were fastened on him. "I wish Birmingham had settled on you for a -drawing card instead." - -"I wouldn't mind," Alison smiled, preening a little. "As a matter of -fact, I'd probably love it!" - -"I'll bet you would," Chris muttered, while Peggy frowned uneasily. The -conversation was taking an unpleasant turn, she thought, noticing the -look Alison gave Chris. - -"Well," Peggy said cheerily, trying to change the subject, "who's -looking forward to Monday besides me? Personally I can't wait!" - -Monday was the day that Mr. Vincent had asked the company to give their -first performance at Lake Manor. It would be the last night of the play -each week, as Chuck and Richard had decided to move the opening up one -day to Wednesday instead of Thursday. This meant also that there would -be one day less than usual to get _For Love or Money_ into shape. - -Talking excitedly about the Manor, the group finished dinner in good -spirits and left the restaurant with Mrs. Brady's wish for good luck -trailing after them. - -From the first night of _Charley's Aunt_, Ford Birmingham's review made -its effect felt. There was a difference in everyone's attitude now that -the theater had gained status. Audiences improved nightly, and Richard -said that if things kept up like this, the theater might even be able to -recoup some of its losses. - -"And this is the way summer stock should be," Peggy thought as she -greeted each day with the anticipation of a good rehearsal and a -satisfying show. Now she could concentrate more fully on her part in -_For Love of Money_. "A good thing, too, that I'm not worried about the -theater at a time like this," she realized. For as the week wore on, -Peggy saw more and more that Alison had been right about the role of -Janet. It was a long, demanding lead, and Peggy worked furiously, -knowing that next week she would have to carry the show. - -She found it a strange sensation to work opposite Chris. He was so good -in his part and made it all seem so real that Peggy often caught herself -wondering if she were in a play or doing something right out of life. At -times she forgot herself completely. She was Janet Blake, a young girl -who was gradually growing deeply fond of Preston Mitchell. - -Alison was quite evidently annoyed at the developing friendship between -Chris and Peggy. "Don't forget, dear, that you're supposed to be playing -comedy," she said to Peggy one day at rehearsal. "Sometimes I get a -feeling that you think you're doing _Camille_." - -Peggy was worried and hurt, wondering if Alison was right. "Do you think -I'm funny enough?" she asked Rita privately. "Alison is finding fault -with everything I do." - -"Well, are you going to listen to her or to your director?" Rita -demanded. "Chuck seems satisfied with your work. Look, Peggy, Alison is -jealous because you're playing opposite Chris. I wouldn't pay any -attention to anything she says. My own private opinion is that you're -more interested in Chris than you think--" - -"Rita!" Peggy blushed furiously. "Here we go again! It's just that I -like Chris enormously and--well--it is exciting to work with him!" - -"I know!" Rita teased her. "It seems to me I told you something like -that ages ago! Don't say I didn't warn you, Peggy Lane! Before you know -it, you'll have a dyed-in-the-wool crush on our new matinee idol!" Both -the girls laughed, remembering how uncomfortable Chris had been with the -role Ford Birmingham had assigned him. - -The week flew by and when Monday arrived, Peggy noticed an excitement -she hadn't felt since the theater opened. Something new was in the air; -they were to face a fresh audience in unfamiliar surroundings. None of -the cast had seen the famous Lake Manor, and all were intensely curious -as they rode along in the station wagon the Manor had sent for them. - -"This is more like it!" Danny observed gleefully. "Our own private -chauffeur and dinner awaiting--I always did like to live in style!" - -"How could I have missed the Manor on the way up by the bus?" Peggy -wondered as they drove down the highway. "This is the way I came--" - -"Ah, yes, but you don't see the Manor from the road," Danny replied -poetically. "It is hidden, like all goodies, a surprise package lurking -in the midst of tall trees and sparkling waters. And as we leave the -highway," he intoned in travelogue fashion, "we find ourselves driving -under an arch of fir trees, their graceful fronds meeting as they -embrace above the roadway--" - -"Oh, Danny," Peggy giggled, "we can see it, too." - -But he wasn't to be deterred. "And around a winding road which curves -gracefully through acres--and acres--and acres--" - -The cast laughed and joined in the joking as they drove through the -spacious grounds that belonged to the Manor. - -"And finally," Danny said as the Manor came into view, "as we reach our -destination--Oh, my gosh! It's a palace!" he concluded abruptly, -forgetting his travelogue as the car stopped under the awning in front -of the entrance. - -"It really is a palace," Peggy marveled as she stepped out of the car, -"or the next thing to it!" - -The main house of Lake Manor was a huge white building frosted with -turrets and bay windows and surrounded by cottages and a few other -sprawling buildings that appeared to be recreation halls. Peggy saw -stables, tennis courts, and a swimming pool off in the distance. -Ping-pong tables, croquet courts, and lawn chairs dotted the -velvet-green grass. - -"Oh, it's absolutely beautiful!" Rita exclaimed. "I had no idea anything -like this existed here!" - -Just then Mr. Vincent appeared and, smiling broadly, took the cast on a -short tour of the Manor. - -"It's early," he said, showing them the stage in one of the recreation -halls where they would play, "and dinner won't be served until six -o'clock. Come along and I'll show you your dining room. We have several, -and I don't want you to get lost! Then please do anything you'd like to -amuse yourselves. We want you to have a good time!" - -"How about some Ping-pong, Peggy?" Chris asked after Mr. Vincent had -left them. - -"I'd love it," Peggy said, "but I wish we could look at the stage again -first--Mr. Vincent took us through so quickly." - -"Don't you ever think of anything besides the stage, Peggy?" Alison -asked waspishly. "Really, it gets a little boring after a while!" She -turned and left the group in a sudden huff. - -"What's the matter with her?" Danny asked wonderingly. "I thought she -was all a-flutter about playing at the Manor." - -"Maybe she was all a-flutter about playing _before_ the show," Rita said -softly with a knowing look at Peggy. - -Peggy suddenly realized what she meant. Alison was disappointed that -Chris had asked Peggy instead of her. "Oh, for heaven's sake," she -thought wearily, "how could Alison possibly be upset over a little thing -like a game of Ping-pong!" When a group of people lived so closely -together, Peggy was beginning to realize, little things could cause -undue friction. A word or a glance could be magnified out of all -proportion. Hadn't she even been a little guilty of that herself when -Alison had criticized her performance? - -"Your serve, Miss Lane," Chris reminded her. "Where are you anyway--off -in a dream?" - -"Yes," Peggy smiled, "I guess I was!" She couldn't help observing how -handsome Chris was with his wonderful tan and his blond hair gleaming in -the sun. He did look like a movie star, and several people stopped to -watch them play together. Peggy felt almost ashamed to realize that she -was proud to be seen with him. "And a minute ago you were condemning -Alison for the same thing!" she chided herself fiercely. "I think it's -about time you had a long talk with yourself, Peggy Lane!" She slammed -the ball hard, and it hit the far corner of the table, out of Chris's -reach. - -"Good play!" he cried. "That's it." - -"Who won?" Peggy asked. She hadn't even noticed. - -"You don't deserve to know," he grinned. "You're off on a cloud -somewhere. Come on, ingenue, let's go for a walk." - -They strolled through the lovely grounds, finding that one winding path -led to another even more charming. Most of the landscaping was designed -to offer the best possible view of the lake, and Peggy felt actively -envious watching the boats dart back and forth like large birds. - -"I've wanted to tell you, Peggy," Chris said as they sat down on a large -rock that jutted out over the water, "what fun it is working with you. -So far I'm enjoying _For Love or Money_ more than any other play we've -done. It means more to me than just a play," Chris went on seriously. "I -feel that we do awfully well together--in almost anything." He stopped, -looking at her intently as Peggy caught her breath. She didn't know what -to say. Finally, a moment later, she tremulously suggested that they had -better get back to dinner. - -"Dinner!" Chris exclaimed with humorous disgust. "At a time like this, -with romance in the very air around you! Honestly, Peggy, you're enough -to try anybody's patience!" - -Peggy wished with all her might that she knew what her real feelings -were in regard to Chris. It was all so confusing, she thought, as they -found their way back to the dining room through the maze of pathways. - -Dinner was a sumptuous affair and a refreshing change from the good but -rather plain food at Mrs. Brady's. - -"Cheddar cheese soup!" Michael Miller peered at his bowl like a hungry -owl. "Haven't seen this since Dad took me to New York last year!" - -"Personally, I prefer turtle Madeira," Alison said languidly, taking a -few sips of the delicious broth. - -"Listen to the prima donna," Chris whispered to Peggy. "She was fine as -long as she had all the leads, but now wait and see. For the rest of -next week she'll be impossible. I know--I've seen it happen before." - -"But I thought you liked her," Peggy said softly. She had decided she -might as well find out how things stood between Chris and Alison. - -"I do," Chris answered, slightly surprised, "I like her a lot. She's a -very good actress." - -Thoughtfully, Peggy wondered if Chris judged people by their acting -ability--if that was the basis of his sudden pronounced interest in her. -Peggy was very conscious of his presence beside her as they finished -dinner together. - -_Charley's Aunt_ was riotously received by the Lake Manor audience. The -actors had to be unusually alert to restrict their movements -sufficiently to work on the smaller stage. There were several times when -Peggy, almost bumping into another player, came close to breaking up and -laughing out loud. And when an angry bee somehow found his way on stage -and got lost in the tea things, all the cast had a difficult time -controlling themselves. Microphones were suspended overhead to overcome -the poor acoustics in the hall, and the buzz of the bee came loud and -clear over the actors' voices. The audience loved it! They roared and -applauded when the bee finally made a grand exit over their heads and -out the rear door. - -Weak with laughter, Peggy made her way back toward the tiny, dark -dressing room that was stacked with boxes of costumes and props. The -hall was usually reserved for the individual comedy acts that the Manor -booked for its guests. - -"I'm sure they think we're just another variation on the same theme!" -Peggy giggled. "That silly bee! He sounded like a dive bomber!" - -"They loved it!" Chris cried exuberantly, whirling Peggy around in the -small hall. Chris was always like this after a show, Peggy noticed. -Excited and gay and ready to go on for the rest of the night. - -"Miss Lane?" one of the stagehands called to her. "There's someone -outside to see you." - -"Aha!" Chris intoned dramatically. "An admirer, no doubt. Come along, -Peggy--take me to your stage-door Johnny and I'll protect you!" -Laughing, they stepped out of the door into the courtyard of the -building. - -"Peggy!" A tall, lanky, redheaded boy grinned down at her, stretching -out both hands in greeting. - -"Randy Brewster!" Peggy cried, "Randy--of all people! Well, how on -earth--why--how did you--oh, Randy!" She was so excited and pleased that -she stuttered. - -"I loved the show," Randy declared happily, hugging her, "and I was so -surprised to see you down here at the Manor! I thought I'd have to wait -to surprise you up at the theater." - -"Oh, Chris,"--Peggy remembered him--"I'd like you to meet a very dear -friend of mine--I met him when I started in dramatic school. This is -Randy Brewster--Chris Hill." - -"How nice," Chris said shortly, his exuberance gone. - -"I certainly enjoyed your performance," Randy congratulated him. "Very -funny. You have a lot of vitality. Hope I'll do as well here--" - -"Oh," Peggy exclaimed with sudden understanding, "is that why you're -here? The Manor hired you?" - -"Yep," Randy said. "I'll be here for a week doing a new comedy routine. -I hope we'll be able to see each other often. I was so pleased, Peggy, -knowing you'd be in the neighborhood." He grinned at her with that -funny, warm, crooked smile that Peggy remembered so well. - -"I'm coming to see your opening day after tomorrow," Randy went on. -"Wouldn't miss it for anything. I'm glad that I'll be here while you're -playing a lead." - -"Are you familiar with the play?" Chris interrupted suddenly. - -"No," Randy said with a smile, "but that will make it even more fun." - -"Well," Chris said mysteriously, "I don't know how much fun it will be -for you, but you should certainly find it interesting! You're familiar -with the old saying, 'All's fair in love and war'?" He flashed a teasing -smile at Randy. "Well, we'll look forward to seeing you, Mr. -Brewster--yes, indeed!" - -Chris left them gaping after him while Randy shook his head. "That's a -strange fellow," he puzzled. "He's very charming, but I'd swear that he -doesn't like me one little bit! I wonder why! What have you been up to, -Peggy?" - -He looked at her curiously while Peggy wondered if things could -conceivably get any more complicated! She had been so happy to see a -friend from New York--and especially Randy. Now, she realized suddenly, -she would have to play her big lead with the knowledge that Randy was in -the audience, watching her and Chris. "Well," she thought, shivering -slightly, "that will be quite an experience!" - - - - - XI - Quick Thinking - - -Peggy sat at her dressing table applying her make-up carefully. For the -first time this summer she had to be just as beautiful as possible with -no little tricks or different hair styles for characterization. This -time she could look just like Peggy, only more so. After she had put on -the gown she wore for her entrance, she combed out her thick, glowing -hair that had grown in the past few weeks until it just touched her -shoulders. It framed her face in soft waves, and as she looked at -herself in the mirror, she was pleased. - -"You look absolutely lovely, Peggy," Rita said, "dreamy, in fact. I -think the audience will go into a tail spin--to say nothing of your -friend Randy." - -The minute she mentioned his name, Peggy's knees began to shake. "Here I -go again," she said nervously. "Opening night! Clammy hands and -butterflies!" - -"Well, don't worry about it," Rita said gently. "It's only because -you're doing a lead. It'll go away." - -But privately, Peggy wasn't so sure. Was she nervous because of the play -or Randy in the audience? "Oh, I wish he hadn't told me," Peggy thought -desperately. "Now I'll be thinking of him out there--" - -"Five minutes!" Gus called, and Peggy made her way to the wings. - -"Break a leg, leading lady," Chris whispered as he walked by, "and don't -worry about a thing." He grinned at her encouragingly and Peggy thought -again what a wonderful person Chris was. She wished he hadn't teased -Randy in that manner, but then Chris did everything all the way. No half -measures for him! Peggy watched him close his eyes for a moment, getting -into character and collecting his energy. Chris would be good, Peggy had -no doubt. "And what about me?" she wondered. "I hope I can concentrate -and not be distracted by my own private thoughts." - -"Curtain!" The play had begun. - -Peggy didn't make her entrance until the second scene of Act One. Now -she wished that she had stayed in her dressing room instead of watching -from the wings. By the time she walked on she was more nervous than -ever, but fortunately, Janet was supposed to be in an excited state, -too. Peggy was just beginning to relax and feel comfortable, timing her -laugh--when the phone didn't ring on cue! - -Peggy looked at Chris and Chris looked at Peggy. There was dead silence -for a moment. Something must have gone wrong with the phone bell or, -worse, someone had forgotten! They couldn't go on, either, until it -rang. The call was necessary to the action. - -"Well"--Peggy plunged in with an improvisation--"I've heard of sea gulls -that are supposed to be angels of ships at sea." Preston and Janet had -just been talking about gulls--perhaps they could continue until the -phone rang. But Chris didn't pick it up. He looked perfectly blank, and -Peggy read in his eyes that desperation that means an actor is -completely at a loss. In theater terms, Chris had "gone up"--higher than -a kite. - -"I think there was an article about sea gulls in the _Reader's Digest_," -Peggy ad libbed valiantly while Chris stayed silent as a tomb. If only -he would come back a little and help her out! Peggy got up from the -couch and strolled around the room as if seeing it for the first time. -If she could disappear in the wings for a moment, she might be able to -signal someone. "I hadn't noticed what a lovely place you have here, Mr. -Mitchell," she went on, making her way upstage to the hall. "Is this the -way to the kitchen?" She was out in the hall now and disappeared for a -moment, waving her hand frantically in the wings. - -Chris suddenly came to life and realized what she was doing. "Why, don't -tell me you're hungry," he called after her. "But if you want to snoop -around--go ahead." - -"I'm not snooping!" Peggy reappeared for a second. This was better--at -least they were improvising in character. "I'm just naturally curious, -that's all." She disappeared again, desperately whispering, -"_Sst--sst--where's the phone?_" - -Michael signaled her that they were working on it, the battery was dead! -"Well, use the doorbell then--anything!" Peggy whispered. She came back -on stage, her ingenuity giving out--but there it was, the ring! Chris -dived for the receiver. Gus had used the doorbell but they managed to -cover well enough and finished the first act with relief. - -"_Whew!_" Chris said when the curtain closed. "Thanks a lot for pulling -me through, Peggy. When that bell didn't ring, I blew completely. First -time that's happened in ages." - -"You were wonderful, Peggy," Rita said. "I don't think the audience -noticed a thing!" - -"Gosh, I'm sorry." Gus came up apologetically. "We should have used the -doorbell right away instead of tinkering with the phone. That was quick -thinking, Peggy." - -"So I did have my mind on my work after all!" Peggy thought happily. -"How silly of me to worry about it." - -But as the play progressed to the last act where Preston finally -embraces Janet, Peggy was amazed to find that the simple scene had -suddenly acquired enormous value. All she could think of was Randy out -in the audience! As they took their curtain calls she looked anxiously -for him, wondering what he was thinking. - -"Terrific!" Randy congratulated her with a friendly hug when he came -backstage. "You were funny and wonderful and perfect and you looked like -a vision!" - -"Why don't you introduce me, Peggy?" Alison asked as she came by. "This -must be your famous friend--" - -"Randolph Clark Brewster," Peggy said gaily, relieved that Randy had -taken the play as a play. "He's a wonderful comedian, but his heart -isn't in it. He wants to be a playwright." - -"Really!" Alison drawled. "You aren't related to the Brewsters of Long -Island by any chance?" - -Randy frowned and sent an appealing look to Peggy. He hated anyone to -know about his wealthy family as he was trying his best to be successful -on his own. "Well, uh, yes," he muttered reluctantly. "Look, Peggy, -change your things, and let's go out for a snack. This is my night off -and I want to make the most of it!" - -"I always did like that strong, silent type," Alison said as they -entered the dressing room, "and besides having that wonderful face and -red hair, he comes from a very prominent family. I don't blame you for -leaving Chris in the lurch for your old friend." The barb sank in, and -Alison's contrived innocent smile did nothing to relieve it. - -"Well," Peggy thought miserably as she took off her make-up, "if people -can't understand a thing like friendship, then let them think whatever -they like!" - -"Hey, open up, Peggy." Peggy got up to open the door and saw Bill Slade -standing there. "You were great, Peggy. You'll have to do another lead -this summer. Want to go out for some coffee?" He smiled, accepting her -silence as consent. - -"Peggy--a small tribute to a great leading lady!" It was Chris, and he -handed her a huge bouquet of roses with an elegantly mocking little bow. -"But let's eat. I'm famished." - -"That's a really fine set," Randy commented, returning from a tour of -the stage. "Are you ready yet?" - -Peggy hastily excused herself and closed the door while the three boys -waited in the hall, each assuming that she was his special date for the -evening. - - [Illustration: The three boys waited in the hall] - -Rita looked at Peggy's perplexed expression with undisguised amusement, -finally breaking into laughter. "The only solution, as I found out long -ago, is marriage!" she chuckled. "You'd better start thinking about it, -Peggy!" - -"That is the last thing in the world I'm going to think about--for a -long time!" Peggy said emphatically. She picked up her bag and sighed -heavily, wondering how to handle the situation. - -Alison was grimly combing her hair and putting her make-up away. "I -don't blame her for feeling left out," Peggy thought. "Playing a lead -does seem to make a difference in people's interest--although it -shouldn't. And taking a back seat isn't easy for Alison." Peggy wondered -how Alison would react if she asked her to join them. It would simplify -everything, but she mustn't appear to do it out of kindness. - -"Are you ready, Alison?" Peggy asked matter-of-factly. - -"Ready for what?" Alison looked up, surprised. - -"Why, to go to Mrs. Brady's or the inn--or wherever we're going. I think -we ought to let the boys decide." Peggy treated it as if it had been -understood from the beginning. "Are you and Gus coming along, too?" she -asked Rita. - -"I'm sorry, we can't, Peggy. We have to go over the prop list for _You -Can't Take It with You_. It's a difficult show on the backstage end, and -I want to help all I can." - -Peggy nodded. Next week was going to be a challenge for everyone. -"Better hurry, Alison," she said. "We can't stay out too late. We have -an early call tomorrow." - -It worked out just as Peggy had hoped. They went to the inn for -sandwiches and Alison attached herself to Chris, leaving Peggy free to -enjoy Randy's company. Bill Slade had a marvelous time with all of them. -Alison's presence prevented Chris from kidding Randy, which, Peggy -suspected, Chris would have loved to do. Just once in the evening, when -Alison excused herself for a moment, Chris leaned across the table and -said, "Say--how'd you like that last act, Randy? Think it was -realistic?" - -Randy looked from Chris to Peggy and back again. "Well," he said with a -slow smile, "it wasn't exactly the way I would have played it, a little -too theatrical for me. But then, Preston Mitchell _was_ an actor! I'd be -inclined to take that scene too seriously, I'm afraid." He looked -steadily at Peggy and she thought she understood. Randy was telling her -that Chris's interest in her was a professional mood--something she had -guessed already. But more important, he was saying that his own feelings -went deeper. Peggy felt comforted and secure. Whatever happened with -their friendship, it would always be a lasting one. Peggy smiled at him -understandingly. - -"What's your play next week, Peggy?" Randy asked. - -"_You Can't Take It With You!_ And it's going to be a job! We have to -use a lot of townspeople because it's such a large cast--" - -"It's a great show, though," Chris added enthusiastically. - -"And the most awful thing, Randy," Peggy continued, "is that I won't be -able to see your act down at the Manor." - -"Well, at least you can say good-by." Randy smiled. "The day you play -there is the day I leave." - -"Leave!" Peggy suddenly had an inspiration. "Oh, Randy, why don't you -stay here for another week? We're going to need so many people in _You -Can't Take It with You_--I'm sure Chuck and Richard would love to have -you." - -"The Russian!" Alison cried. "Everyone's been biting their nails, -wondering who could play the Russian!" - -"Oh, yes, you'd be perfect, Randy," Peggy urged. "And I'm doing Essie, -the little ballerina. We could work together--do say you'll stay!" - -"We-e-ell," Randy hesitated, "I suppose I don't have to rush back--" - -"You're absolutely sure?" Chris asked, raising an eyebrow. "I mean, we -wouldn't want you to miss anything in New York--" He looked at Peggy for -a moment, and noticing her pained expression, laughed good-naturedly, -leaning across the table to shake Randy's hand. "Okay. You win, Mr. -Brewster! I can't compete with old school ties and all that. You would -be great for the part and we'd love to have you." - -The boys shook hands, grinning at each other, while Peggy looked on, -happy and relieved. Chris had evidently decided to "bury the hatchet." - -Alison seemed a little mystified. "What's going on with you two? You -look as though you had a deep, dark secret." - -"Deep, but not dark, Alison," Chris laughed. "Light as summer. Which -reminds me, who knows something good for mosquito bites? They've decided -all of a sudden that I'm a particularly delectable morsel!" - -"Oh, oh, you've come to the right place," Bill Slade offered eagerly. -"Take it from an old hand--" - -"No, no, I know the best thing of all--" Alison urged. - -"But I found something brand-new--" Peggy started, and then everyone -laughed, plying Chris with their favorite remedies. Randy promised Peggy -that he'd speak to the producers the next day, and the party broke up -with happy expectations of next week's show. - - - - - XII - Varied Explosions - - -Just as Peggy had expected, the producers were delighted to have Randy -stay an extra week and play the Russian ballet teacher, Kolenkhov, in -_You Can't Take It with You_. With Randy in the cast and everyone -working comfortably together, Peggy couldn't remember ever having such -fun at rehearsals! And what a cast! The play needed so many actors that -everyone was pressed into service. Michael Miller and the apprentices -all had small parts, Chuck Crosby played the part of Peggy's father as -well as directing, Mr. Miller brought some friends of his to fill in, -and even Aunt Hetty was persuaded to play. Mary Hopkins brought a friend -to try out for the part of the Grand Duchess. June Tilson was a lovely -young girl who turned out to have a really fine talent. - -"Where have you been all summer?" Chuck asked when he heard her read for -the first time. "We could have used you before!" - -"She's been in hiding," Mary laughed, "or I would have brought her long -ago." - -"I've been at the music camp, actually," June explained. "You know--the -group of folk singers who have a summer session nearby." - -"Oh, yes." Chuck nodded. "We're giving them the auditorium one night for -a benefit performance. Let's see--it comes during the week of _Guest in -the House_, I believe." - -"Oh, will I be glad when we do that play!" Alison said. "I love the -part!" - -"The part of Evelyn?" Chuck asked. - -"Yes, I've done it before and I can hardly wait to play it again." - -"Don't count too much on having the same part this time," Chuck -cautioned her. "I'm not sure yet how we're going to cast the play." - -Alison shrugged. "Well, of course, I'm doing Evelyn," she commented -blithely. "That was one of the reasons I came up here!" - -"We'll discuss it later," Chuck said firmly. "And now, let's get to -work. By the way, does anyone have an idea on how to handle the -fireworks?" - -The script of _You Can't Take It with You_ calls for a display of -fireworks onstage and an explosion offstage during the show. Michael -Miller assured Chuck that he could easily take care of it. - -"I have a workshop, you know, and it won't be any trouble--be fun, in -fact!" - -"You'll have to be very careful," his father warned. - -"Naturally!" Michael said indignantly. - -"And don't make it too realistic." Peggy giggled. "Just a loud noise. We -don't want the auditorium down around our heads." - -"That Michael Miller is quite a character," Randy commented to Peggy -during a lull in rehearsal. "He seems so serious and yet sometimes I -catch a gleam of sheer mischief under those horn rims. You don't think -he'll do anything silly with the explosion, do you?" - -"Of course not!" Peggy laughed. "Michael's much too intelligent for -that!" - -Rehearsals went along as smoothly as could be expected with such a large -cast. It was amazing, Peggy thought, that the local people were able to -work so professionally with the rest of the company. Aunt Hetty was a -delight to watch. She was enjoying herself hugely in her small but -important role, and took all the direction that Chuck gave her with the -greatest good humor. - -"She's a wonderful sport," Peggy thought, watching her with amusement, -"and I think she really loves this." - -Randy was so good that it seemed as if he might steal the show. It was -hard for him, too, playing late at the Manor every night and then -rushing to the high school each morning. - -"What a schedule!" he sighed. Randy and Peggy were having a picnic lunch -on the school grounds together. "But after tonight it will all be over." -It was Randy's last night at the Manor. - -"For you," Peggy said, "but not for us. Tomorrow we play _For Love or -Money_ at the Manor, then comes the dress rehearsal and opening of _You -Can't Take It_, and after that we start on the old-fashioned melodrama. -I wish you could be here for that one, too!" - -"So do I--" Randy smiled affectionately--"but I really will have to get -back to New York soon. Let's not talk about it now, Peg, we still have a -whole week! And you have two more nights as Janet." - -_For Love or Money_ had been the most successful play of the season. -People came in droves all week and money flowed into the box office. - -"You think it would have happened anyway, after Mr. Birmingham's -review," Randy told her seriously, "but that isn't the whole story. I -don't think you realize how good you actually are in that part, Peggy. -People are coming to see _you_--I've heard the comments around town!" - -"Oh, Randy!" Peggy beamed at the delicious compliment. Randy was very -cautious with his praise, and coming from him, the words made Peggy -doubly happy. - -"I wouldn't be surprised if Richard and Chuck gave you another fat lead -to do this summer," Randy went on. "As a matter of fact, they'd be -foolish if they didn't." - -"But there isn't another lead I could do," Peggy said, surprised. -"There's just the little part in the melodrama and then, I suppose, the -model in _Guest in the House_--" - -"What about Evelyn?" Randy asked, looking at her intently. - -"Oh," Peggy laughed, "that's Alison's part. She's been waiting for it -all summer!" - -Randy nodded and said nothing while Peggy suddenly remembered what Chuck -had said to Alison--not to count on the part. Her heart skipped a beat -as she wondered if Chuck had meant that he might give it to her! Oh! -Peggy took a deep breath, feeling a little giddy. It just couldn't -happen, it was too good to possibly be true! No, she simply wouldn't let -herself think about it. She looked at Randy and caught him smiling at -her. - -"Yep," he agreed with her unspoken thought. "Don't think about it. -You're quite right. Put it entirely out of your mind!" They laughed -happily and went back to rehearsal. - - -Opening night of _You Can't Take It with You_ made a permanent place in -the history of Lake Kenabeek. With so many local people in the cast, the -auditorium was overflowing with relatives and friends as well as summer -guests. It was the best house the theater had had. - -Michael Miller arrived with a little package carefully wrapped in cotton -wool and asked Chuck where he should set it off. - -"Set what off?" Chuck demanded, distracted and intent on getting things -settled backstage as well as remembering his own part. - -"My Kenabeek Special!" Michael answered. "You know, the explosion." He -hadn't brought it to dress rehearsal with the explanation that there was -only one firecracker. It hadn't mattered--everyone was too busy to care. -At this point, Chuck was crossing his fingers and trusting to luck that -everything would turn out all right. - -"Is it loud?" Chuck asked hastily. - -"Very," Michael assured him. "At least I hope so--I followed -instructions to the letter." - -"What instructions?" Chuck almost yelped. "Didn't you just make an -ordinary firecracker?" - -"Good heavens no! You can't trust those things. This is very special and -safe!" - -"Well, put it in an ashcan out on the stairs and set it off there. Be -sure you're careful!" Chuck called after him. - -"Don't worry, I will be." - -The play went unbelievably well. None of the props were missing, -everyone came in on cue, the action zipped along, the audience was in -stitches at the comedy. The end of Act Two approached and Peggy was -onstage with Randy, Chris, Mr. Miller, the apprentices, and June Tilson. -They had paced the show furiously, warming up to the big scene. Mr. -Miller gave the cue for the explosion. A moment of silence--and then -they heard it. - -_Wham!_ - -It sounded as if the roof of the auditorium had been blown off. Huge, -billowing clouds of smoke poured on stage, almost obscuring the actors -as they finished the scene amid coughs and tears, with a hysterical -audience laughing as if their sides would split as the curtain closed. - -The applause was deafening, but the actors hardly heard as they rushed -backstage to see what had happened. There stood Michael Miller, black -with smoke and ashes, peering at them helplessly from glasses that were -absolutely opaque with grime. - -"I put it in the ashcan, Chuck, just like you said," Michael offered -timidly. "I think it blew the top off." - -The ashcan was a crumpled mass of tin. The top had been blown across the -stair well and ashes were strewn about, several inches deep. - -"I guess you didn't look in the can first," Chuck said very quietly, his -eyes still smarting. - -"I didn't know it would make so much smoke--" Michael whispered. - -"No, I guess you didn't," Chuck agreed softly. - -"I was very careful, but I guess maybe I should have just used a -firecracker." Michael sat down sorrowfully on the stairs, looking like a -lump of coal in a bin. - -Peggy couldn't restrain herself any longer. She burst out laughing. "Oh, -Michael," she gasped, "and you worked so hard! It couldn't have been -funnier if you'd tried!" - -Nobody could control himself any longer, and they all laughed until -their sides hurt. The play ended without another mishap and the audience -left, still talking about the "bomb." - -"Your place in folklore is assured, Michael," his father told him dryly. -"But next time I suggest you take a simple little walk to the store!" - - -The week flew by so quickly that Peggy didn't know where the time had -gone. They were rehearsing the melodrama, _Love Rides the Rails_, and -during the day Randy would come to the theater to watch and cue the -actors. - -"Only one more day," Peggy said incredulously, "and then you'll be off -to New York and we'll only have three more weeks here! Oh, the summer is -going so fast!" - -"I'll miss all this," Randy admitted, "the theater and the lake--and -you!" - -Randy decided to go back to New York on the night bus that left the -Manor right after the last performance of _You Can't Take It with You_. -Peggy walked with him to the gates to say good-by, feeling that the -nicest part of the summer was going with him. - -"It's been fun, Randy," she said shyly. "I'm awfully glad you were -here--" - -"I am too," he said seriously, taking her hand. "I think maybe I came -along at the right time. Chris is an awfully nice guy, but--well--this -is summer stock, Peggy. Funny things can happen when you act with -people. If you're really interested in him, I hope you'll see him in a -different environment--maybe back in New York." He smiled and suddenly -leaned down and kissed her. "In the meantime, don't forget me!" - -Randy started to get on the bus and then paused with another thought. -"And don't forget that you're an awfully good actress," he said. "I have -a lot of faith in you. I'd like you to remember that for the next few -weeks." - -The bus pulled away, leaving Peggy with a funny lump in her throat. -She'd be seeing Randy again in a little while--why did she feel so -strange, she wondered. She suddenly had an acute appreciation of the -difference between Randy's loyal and generous attitude and the -impulsive, surface interest of Chris Hill. That was it, she realized. -She was a little ashamed of herself for having been swept up in a -current by a dashing leading man, nice as he was. She watched Randy's -bus turn the corner and disappear, knowing that nobody could quite take -his place. - -The annex seemed strangely quiet the morning of the day _Love Rides the -Rails_ was to open. Rita and Gus were down first as usual, having coffee -and relaxing on the patio before rehearsals started. Peggy joined them, -having hastily dressed in pedal pushers and a halter. - -"It's getting hotter and hotter," she remarked, looking for a shady -place to sit down and have her breakfast. - -"But so peaceful after that hectic show," Rita said lazily. "Really -cozy! Will you ever forget Michael's bomb?" - -"I thought my hair would stand on end." Gus laughed. "But it turned out -to be a wonderful show. Your friend Randy certainly did a remarkable -job!" - -"I'm hoping that at last I get to play a nice young woman my own age." -Rita stretched out luxuriously on the wicker couch. "It doesn't happen -to me very often, you know!" - -"You mean the wife in _Guest in the House_?" Peggy asked. - -Rita nodded. "The wife to Chris Hill's husband." She grinned -mischievously at Gus. "That is, if Gus approves!" - -"Oh, certainly certainly." Gus smiled and rumpled her hair as he rose. -"Chris may be the Kenabeek heart throb, but I think my place is assured -at home. See you all later--I have to go build a house!" - -"He must really love his work," Peggy sighed as she watched him go. "I -think he's worked harder than any of us this summer." - -"Except maybe Richard and Chuck," Rita agreed. "I'm going to make him -take a vacation after we're through here, whether he likes it or not!" - -One by one, the other actors appeared, and after breakfast Chuck started -to hand out the sides for _Guest in the House_. Peggy felt unusually -nervous. She had promised herself not to think of the possibility of -playing Evelyn, but as the moment approached when her part was to be -handed her, Peggy's heart beat faster and her hand trembled. Chuck gave -her the sides without a word, and after closing her eyes for a moment, -Peggy took a deep breath and looked. - -Evelyn! He had given it to her! She hugged the little pamphlet as if it -were a long-lost friend. Here it was at last--a wonderful, rich, -dramatic role, far, far different from all the ingenues she had played -all summer! - -Rita noticed her ecstatic expression and peeked at the sides. "Well," -she breathed softly, "I kind of thought so. I'm awfully glad, Peggy. You -should play it!" - -"Just a minute!" Alison's voice was shrill in the quiet patio. "I'm not -playing the model, Chuck. You gave me the wrong part!" - -"No," Chuck said firmly. "Peggy is going to do Evelyn and I want you to -play Miriam Blake. You're right for it, Alison, just as Peggy is right -for Evelyn. It's the only way to cast this show." - -"That's true," Rita whispered to Peggy. - -"Well, I'm not going to do it!" Alison interrupted. "I've played Evelyn -before and this just doesn't make sense." - -"She did play it," Chris broke in cautiously with a concerned look at -Peggy. "We were both in the play last summer--" - -"And who did the model?" Chuck asked. - -"A girl we got from New York. We had to job the part," Chris replied. - -"Yes, you had to job the part, and we can't afford to do that. I'm -sorry, Alison," Chuck said gently, "I know you'd like to do it again and -I'm sure you were wonderful. But you yourself can see that with our -company this is the only possible casting. Peggy is too young and -unsophisticated to play the model. It just wouldn't work out." - -"Well, then, get somebody else to play the model," Alison said -impatiently. "Why not get that June Tilson--what's the matter with her?" - -"Because audiences want to see Peggy again in a good part." Chuck was -adamant. "They want to see you, too. That's part of stock, Alison. Your -summer audiences grow fond of their actors and are interested in seeing -them in varied roles. The model is a perfect part for you, Alison, and -you'll be good in it. Now let's start the reading!" - -Peggy had listened anxiously, almost without breathing. Now, as she -looked at Alison, who was obviously seething as she opened her sides, -Peggy wondered if this casting wouldn't create too many difficulties. -She knew that Chuck was right, though. His explanation made perfect -sense. It was best for the play. But how was Alison going to react? How -would rehearsals go if Alison remained as hostile as she was now? Peggy -watched her worriedly and was shocked to see the hateful glance that -Alison returned. - -Peggy grew more and more nervous as the time approached for her to read. -She hadn't considered this before, but Alison was a very good actress -with a fine technique. Would Peggy be able to do as well in this part? -Her mouth was dry and she was terribly tense. She stumbled over her -first lines as she felt everyone watching her--Chuck hopefully, Chris -and Danny curiously, Rita with calm compassion, and Alison with a -spiteful expression that said, "All right--let's see you try and do it!" - -No audience could ever be as critical as this small group of -professional actors. And even though she had a week to work, Peggy knew -that she was being severely judged on this first reading. - - - - - XIII - Double Trouble - - -During the week of rehearsal Peggy found that the drama inherent in the -part itself wasn't going to be enough to carry her through. Evelyn was a -girl who was emotionally disturbed and there was one scene toward the -end of the play when she broke down altogether and appeared in a state -of unreasonable fear. Peggy worked and worked on the scene, trying it -every conceivable way, while Chuck patiently encouraged her. But it -wasn't going right and she knew it. Alison was doing a marvelous job as -the model and it was a trial for Peggy to know that she was watching, -criticizing, and comparing Peggy's efforts with her own past success as -Evelyn. - -"I don't think I can do it!" Peggy told Chuck miserably one day after -rehearsal. "You should have given the part to Alison after all! I'm -terrible." - -"You'll be fine," Chuck said quietly, but Peggy knew by the tone of his -voice that Chuck had his doubts, too. She hadn't made a real -identification with the role yet, and it was drawing fearfully close to -opening night. Worried and unhappy, Peggy wondered if she had any right -to call herself an actress after all. If she couldn't do this part that -she had been so overjoyed to get, what hope was there? - -She was tense and straining and finally even Chuck lost patience. -"What's the matter with you, Peggy?" he said sharply at rehearsal one -day. "You're missing this thing by a mile. You're acting like an insipid -little daisy that's about to wilt on the stem! Evelyn isn't like -that--she's crazy like a fox! She has power in her own strange way--" - -"Could I say something, Chuck?" Alison interrupted, coming out from the -wings where she'd been watching. "It might help Peggy. When I played the -part I did it as though I were perfectly sane. Peggy's trying to _act_ -crazy and it's never believable that way." - -"Yes, that's true," Chuck admitted, "it's a good suggestion, Peggy. Try -the scene again with that in mind." - -Peggy didn't protest or try to justify herself, even though she had been -perfectly aware all along of what Alison had just said. She tried again, -doing even more badly than before, terribly conscious of Alison watching -from the wings and judging every move. - -"That was a rotten trick!" Rita fumed in a whisper when the scene was -finished and Peggy, almost in tears, ran off stage. "Alison offering to -help you! She knew exactly what she was doing--trying to draw attention -to herself and make comparisons. Peggy, you're never going to relax in -this part if you can't forget that Alison played it before. Can't you -see what she's doing?" - -"But it's too late to give her the part," Peggy said dully, "so she -can't be after that. Alison's never been like this before. I've always -liked her, really. What is she trying to do?" - -"Make you give a dreadful performance!" Rita insisted strongly. "I know -Alison Lord like a book. She's a fine, nice girl as long as she's in the -limelight, but her career comes first, and she'll walk roughshod over -anyone who interferes with it!" - -"But this is only a summer stock company--" Peggy protested. - -"Yes, and people go back to New York saying, 'Gosh, have you seen Peggy -Lane in _Guest in the House_? She was great!' These things do get -around, Peggy. Alison came up here to be the big cheese, and she wants -it to stay that way. If she can't play the part at least she figures -that people can say, 'They really should have given that part to Alison -Lord; Peggy Lane was awful!'" - -Rita spelled it out in no uncertain terms, leaving Peggy feeling bleaker -than ever. She knew that Rita was trying to prod her, make her angry -enough to forget Alison and come through with a good performance. But -Peggy didn't work that way. She couldn't act out of spite or anger. She -was aware, too, that other people in the company were disappointed in -her. Danny Dunn couldn't conceal his surprise or Chris Hill his -impatience. The fine rapport that Peggy and Chris had had in _For Love -or Money_ was a thing of the past. - -Dress rehearsal for _Guest in the House_ took place Tuesday afternoon. -The company had to be out of the theater by five P.M. for the group of -folk singers who had the auditorium for the evening. It was a benefit -affair and the Summer Theater was glad to donate its stage for the -night. Peggy didn't know if it was the strangeness of working in the -afternoon or if it would have happened in any case, but her performance -was the worst one she had ever given. Not only was she unable to get -into the role at all, but she forgot her lines on several -occasions--something that hadn't happened all season. Chuck was so -unhappy with the show that he didn't even criticize her. It was obvious -that he thought it too late. - -Miserably, Peggy took off her make-up and started to leave the theater, -wishing that she had never been given the part at all. Perhaps she would -never attempt to play a dramatic role again. "And I was feeling so -self-satisfied, thinking it was easy!" she thought as she walked out the -stage door. - -"Peggy, how's it going?" Michael Miller rounded the corner of the -building, coming from the little shack the boys used for a scene shop. - -"Awful." Peggy tried an unsuccessful smile. - -"What you need is a little relaxation--a change of scenery." Michael -smiled. "What are you going to do with your first free evening of the -summer?" - -"Tonight?" Peggy shook her head. "Going to work on my part again, I -guess--see if I can come up with something--" - -"Why don't you forget it for a while?" Michael asked. "I'm going to take -Mary Hopkins over to the other side of the lake for dinner; we'd love to -have you come along." - -"In your boat?" Peggy asked, feeling a faint stirring of interest. - -"What else?" Michael laughed. "We're not going to swim, that's for sure! -Come on, Peggy, it'll do you good." - -It would at that, Peggy thought, suddenly feeling a sense of freedom at -the prospect of being far away from the theater for a while, if even -just for dinner. Maybe she could regain her perspective out on the -water; there was nothing like putting a little distance between one's -self and one's problem. - -"I will, Michael," she accepted gratefully. "I'd love to. Goodness, -it'll be the first boat ride I've had all summer!" - -"And long overdue. I promised you a ride once, remember?" - -Peggy felt better than she had all week when they arrived at Michael's -house and walked down to his dock where Mary Hopkins was already -waiting. - -"Peggy--how nice!" she cried. "Are you coming with us?" - -"I certainly am--if I'm not intruding," Peggy said, suddenly wondering -if she was interrupting a date. - -"Oh, heavens, no!" Mary laughed. "I've been pestering Michael to take me -out in the boat for weeks. This is the first time he's been free!" - -"I'll just go and tell Dad we're off," Michael said. "That's a rule -around here when I take out the boat." - -He was back in a minute and they all got into the trim little craft, -Peggy feeling almost carefree as Michael started the motor and they -zipped away. - -"We call her the _Merry Mac_," Michael shouted over the noise of the -motor to the two girls. "She's Dad's pride and joy--and mine." - -"I can see why," Peggy laughed, loving the feel of the water underneath -as they skimmed along. It had been a beautiful day. The lake was -sky-blue and frosted with little points of white whipped up by the wind. - - [Illustration: "Dad's pride and joy--and mine."] - -"It's a little choppy," Michael called. - -"Fun!" Peggy cried as the spray blew over the windshield and splashed -her face. - -"You're going to get wet," Mary warned as Michael passed over the wake -of another boat, the _Merry Mac_ slapping across, the spray leaping to -drench Peggy's face. - -"I love it!" Peggy cried happily. "The wetter the better! Where are we -going, Michael?" - -"Straight across." Michael cut his speed a little so he could hear. "See -that cluster of buildings? The Golden Hound is the last one on the left. -Good food and music--very rustic." - -They were in the middle of the lake now, and Peggy realized that it was -much larger than she had thought. There were islands dotted all around, -some so tiny that there was only room for one or two houses. - -"Private islands," Michael informed her. "How would you like one of -those, Peggy?" - -"Oh, would I! It would be sheer heaven!" Peggy took a deep breath of the -wonderful fresh air. "No wonder you love this place, Michael. I wouldn't -ever want to leave if I'd been raised here!" - -"The winters are _cold_, though." Mary laughed. "How do you feel now, -Peggy? Better?" - -"Marvelous! I've almost forgotten about the theater entirely. This is -just what the doctor ordered!" - -Michael slowed the _Merry Mac_ and carefully turned her into the dock in -front of the restaurant. Peggy was impressed by his expert handling of -the boat. - -"Dad would never forgive me if anything happened to our little friend -here, and I'd never forgive myself!" he said as he stepped out and -helped the girls up from the boat. - -They had a wonderful dinner at a lovely candlelit table by a picture -window that afforded a sweeping view of the lake. - -"What a beautiful spot," Peggy said dreamily as twilight fell, and -lights in the little cottages dotting the shore twinkled on like a -fringe of decoration. "Why haven't we been here before?" - -"We can come again during the last week of the season," Michael said. -"I'll bring everybody over sometime." - -"Michael, isn't it getting awfully dark?" Mary interrupted, watching the -sky that had changed from sunset violet to a deep, heavy gray. - -Michael looked at the sky and smiled. "Sure, it'll be dark before we get -back. You're not worried about going back at night, are you?" - -"Well,"--Mary hesitated--"do you know how to find your way back at -night?" - -Michael laughed. "Mary Hopkins! And you've lived at Lake Kenabeek for -sixteen years!" - -"How do you find your way back?" Peggy asked. - -"By my landing light." Michael was still laughing at Mary. "I take a -straight course from here, across the lake, home. It's impossible to -miss it. Where have you been all these years, Mary?" - -"Well," she said with a shy smile, "I guess I just never thought of it -before." - -They finished dinner in a leisurely fashion, enjoying the music and the -peaceful atmosphere of this beautiful spot. - -"This really has been lovely, Michael," Peggy thanked him as they left -the restaurant. "I feel so relaxed and different--not half as worried as -I was this afternoon." - -"You'll probably knock 'em in the aisles tomorrow night," Michael said -cheerfully as they got into the _Merry Mac_ again. - -And Peggy thought he might be right, at that. Somehow, getting away from -the part had done her a world of good. She found that she was actually -looking forward to trying it again, and sure that she could improve her -performance. - -"My, it really is rough!" Mary said nervously as they started back. A -high wind had come up and the choppy water was blowing in all -directions, making the boat rock furiously. - -Michael was quite unconcerned. "See--there's the light, Mary." He -pointed it out to her dead ahead across the black lake. "We just take a -bead on that, and home we go without obstacles--in the rain, it seems." - -A freak summer storm had suddenly come up, and the rain pelted down -heavily, mixing with the spray that rose over the sides of the little -boat. - -"This is nothing," Michael reassured Mary. "I've been out in storms much -worse than this. As long as we can see the landing light there's nothing -to worry about, and it doesn't look--" - -But Michael had spoken too soon. The rain suddenly poured down in such -force that it was impossible to see. In an instant it descended in -driving torrents and Michael lost the landing light! In a second he had -cut the motor. "I don't think," he began--but then it happened. There -was a grinding crash that threw Peggy and Mary forward, their heads -hitting the windshield, while the _Merry Mac_ reared up and came to a -shuddering stop. - -There was dead silence for a moment. Then, "Is anybody hurt?" Michael -asked tightly. - -"No, I don't think so...." Peggy moved a bit. "Mary, are you all right?" - -"My head," she said shakily. "No--it's all right--I just bumped it." - -"Thank heaven!" Peggy breathed. "And thank goodness you cut the motor so -fast, Michael. If you hadn't been so quick...." They were all silent, -realizing that it was only Michael's alert action that had saved them -from a much more serious accident. - -"Where are we?" Peggy finally asked. - -"I don't know," Michael said, "but we'd better get out and see. I hope -we're not on a rock somewhere." - -The rain was so thick and the night so black that they couldn't see a -foot in front of them. Michael climbed out first, feeling his way. "It's -rock, all right," he said nervously. "No--then it goes on into sand. -Maybe we're on a small island. Peggy, throw out the cushions from the -seats, will you? I don't know if the boat is lodged too tightly to sink -or not, but we might as well have them to sit on." - -Groping in the dark, Peggy withdrew the cushions and handed them to -Michael. Her hands touched something slick and cold. "What's in the back -seat, Michael?" she asked. - -"Oh, good girl! Oilskin raincoats. I would have forgotten all about -them. We keep them there--for emergencies." Michael's voice was hollow -and Peggy knew that he was beginning to feel the situation. Michael had -wrecked his precious boat. Well, there was no time now to think about -that. Peggy took out the coats and wrapped one around Mary, who was -still shivering slightly from shock. - -They climbed up on their hands and knees, feeling their way precariously -from the rocks on which the boat had crashed to the sandy beach. Peggy -bumped into something and shrieked, then she realized it was a tree -trunk. "Michael, we're in some woods! Come on, Mary, get under cover and -out of the rain!" - -"Why doesn't somebody light a match?" Mary asked plaintively. "Let's -make a fire or something." - -At this, Peggy dropped down on the boat cushion and began to laugh -helplessly. - -"What do you find so funny, may I ask?" Michael questioned sourly from -the gloom beside her. - -"A fire!" Peggy giggled. "A fire in all this rain! I'm sorry, -Michael--it's just nerves!" - -"Very funny," Michael said. "Well, I suggest we just sit here until the -storm stops. Then we'll be able to see where we are." - -But the storm continued in full fury for hours while the three, drenched -and shivering, waited. Mary lay down on a cushion and, unbelievably, in -a few minutes, was fast asleep. Michael too began to yawn as the hours -passed, and Peggy offered him her cushion to doze on. She couldn't -possibly have slept. She curled up at the base of a tree, wrapped in her -oilskin, and waited for the rain to stop. By the time the storm had -subsided a little, dawn was breaking in a gray haze that filtered -through the rain and trees and gave Peggy a view of the surroundings. -She judged that they must be on an island, and getting up to look -through the woods, saw a little path. Looking back at her sleeping -comrades, Peggy decided to explore a little before awakening them. She -hadn't followed the path more than a few yards when she came to a -clearing and a cottage among the trees. All night, a refuge had been -this close! Seeing the house, Peggy realized how cold and exhausted she -was. She raced back to the others and woke them up. - -"I feel like the three bears," Mary said sleepily. "I hope they have -three beds and a stove; I'm chilled through." - -"It's a lucky break we had your raincoats," Peggy told Michael. "Do you -realize we might all have caught pneumonia?" - -Peggy knocked timidly at the door, hating to rouse anyone at this hour. -It must be close to five in the morning, she guessed. There was no -answer and Michael knocked again, louder this time. - -A sleepy, startled voice called out, "Who is it?" and Peggy knew that -the voice was familiar. Before she could place it, the door opened a -crack and then was flung wide. There stood Mrs. Cook, wide awake now -with the shock of seeing the three young people--wet and bedraggled as -lost kittens. - -"Oh, come in, come in!" she cried. "What on earth happened?" - -If Mrs. Cook was astonished to see them, it was nothing to Peggy's -surprise at finding her here. "Mrs. Cook!" she exclaimed. "I thought you -were staying at one of the hotels--" - -"Oh, no, we've had this house for years, only one on the island." - -Now the little group knew that they had crashed on one of the little -private islands in the middle of the lake. Within minutes the story was -told and Mrs. Cook had given them all warm bathrobes and hot drinks, -fussing over them as if they were her own children. - -"Now, all of you get some real rest," she commanded, showing Peggy and -Mary into her own room and giving Michael the couch. "We'll talk about -everything later after you've had some sleep!" - -As she gratefully snuggled down under the warm covers on the comfortable -bed, Peggy sleepily wondered why they hadn't seen Mr. Cook. But she was -too tired to think for more than a moment. Almost immediately she -dropped off into a deep, dreamless sleep, utterly exhausted. - - - - - XIV - Ups and Downs - - -Hours later Peggy awoke to the sound of rain beating on the windows and -a whining wind that lashed the tree tops mercilessly. It was a bleak -world, dark as evening, and it was only noon. Mary and Michael had been -up for some time, and Peggy found them in the living room, chatting with -Mrs. Cook, who had prepared a hearty breakfast for everybody. - -"Peggy--good!" Mrs. Cook said as she saw her emerging from the bedroom. -"I was going to wake you any minute. You must be ravenous." - -"I am," Peggy admitted, sitting down at the table Mrs. Cook had set in -front of the fireplace. "A fire in the summertime! It doesn't seem -possible." - -"Well, when these storms come up it can get good and chilly here. The -dampness goes right through you." Mrs. Cook smiled. - -"Have you called to notify your father that we're all right?" Peggy -asked Michael. "It just occurred to me that everyone must be terribly -worried about us." - -"Can't call," Michael replied, frowning. "The phone's out. Wire's blown -down, I guess. But I'm not too worried. I'm pretty sure Dad will assume -we stayed on the other side of the lake because of the storm. It's -happened before. He'll have called Mrs. Hopkins, and the theater for -you, Peggy." - -Peggy noticed the worry in Michael's eyes. There was something he wasn't -telling her, she felt sure. Mrs. Cook came to the rescue, gently putting -her hand on Peggy's shoulder as she said, "I'm afraid you may have to -stay here all day, dear. My husband took the boat to town and couldn't -get back last night in the storm. He called to tell me before the phone -went out. None of the boats are out today. We'll just have to wait until -it clears before you can be picked up." - -"But the show!" Peggy cried. "I have to get back for the opening." - -"Well, maybe you can," Mrs. Cook placated her. "It should clear by -evening, and my husband is sure to return as soon as he can." - -But as the hours progressed, the storm showed no sign of relenting. The -wind whistled angrily, blowing the rain in blinding sheets. No boat -could dare the lake in weather like this. - -"A fine idea I had!" Michael accused himself grimly. "A little fun, a -little relaxation--and what happens? I not only wreck the _Merry Mac_, -but I'm responsible for your missing the show!" - -"Oh, Michael, it isn't your fault," Peggy comforted him. But she was -sick at heart. She had felt so optimistic about her new approach to the -part, ready to play Evelyn tonight as if she had never played it before. -Now she might not even be there. She had no doubt as to what Chuck would -do; he would have Alison play the part and get somebody to read the -model for this one performance. It had been done before in stock. And -there went Peggy's chance to prove herself, not only to the company, but -to a deep part of her that said, "If I fail this, the opportunity may -never come again." She wandered over to the window and stood there, -looking out, trying to hold back the tears of disappointment. "Maybe -it's better this way," she told herself. "Perhaps I wouldn't do any -better than I have all week." But she remembered Randy's words as he -left her that day on the bus--"You're a fine actress and I have faith in -you!" Randy must have foreseen both the part and the trouble with -Alison. What he could never have imagined was the possibility of Peggy's -not being there to play it at all. - -By six o'clock the storm finally showed signs of subsiding. Peggy -anxiously watched the sky, wondering if it would be possible after all -to get back in time for the curtain. At seven-thirty the rain had -stopped and the wind was reduced to a murmur. Mrs. Cook took the group -down to the dock to watch for her husband's boat. "He's sure to come -soon," she said. "I think you'll make it, Peggy." - -Peggy strained to see across the lake. The sky was still gray, but in -the distance they could hear a motor. - -"Somebody's out, Peggy," Mary cried happily. "I think we will get back!" - -But the boat appeared and it wasn't Mr. Cook after all. They waved and -shouted frantically, but the owner didn't see them and he veered off in -the opposite direction. A few minutes later another boat came into view -and Mrs. Cook gave Peggy an impulsive hug. "There he is, dear." She -laughed. "Get ready to dash!" - -Mr. Cook didn't have a chance to say hello as he pulled into the -landing. The three young people practically fell into the boat with Mrs. -Cook shouting hasty directions and waving him off as if to a fire. - -"Hurry," she called as he turned around and sped off. "And good luck, -Peggy--" Her voice trailed away and Peggy gripped the sides of the boat, -her heart in her mouth as the possibility of making the curtain became a -reality. - -"This little runabout isn't too fast," Mr. Cook warned, "but I'll make -her do her best!" He pushed the little boat to her limit and in about -twenty minutes they pulled up at Michael's landing. "This is the closest -one to the theater, Peggy," Mr. Cook said. "Run! Don't say thanks--just -make that curtain!" - -But Peggy was already out and running up the stairs. With a hasty wave -she sprinted up the walk beside Michael's house and started to run to -the theater. - -The parking lot was jammed with cars, but Peggy didn't see anyone going -into the theater. Panting, she started to run back to the stage door, -but then realized that Chuck might be out front. She'd better let him -know she was here. She dashed back to the entrance and tore through the -large doors by the box office. Richard was just coming out of the little -room and, seeing her, he grabbed her arm with a sigh of relief. "Thank -goodness, Peggy! We were beginning to think you'd drowned!" - -"Where is everybody?" Peggy gasped. "I'm here--tell Chuck--" - -"Wait a minute," Richard held on to her with concern. "The show's -started, Peggy...." - -Breathlessly, Peggy stopped short while it sank in. Of course! Nobody in -the lounge, the doors to the auditorium closed-- The audience were in -their seats and the curtain had opened! Still trying to get her breath, -she looked at Richard helplessly while tears came to her eyes. - -"Oh, come on, Peggy." Richard patted her shoulder kindly. "It isn't that -important. If you only knew how worried we were about you! I'm so glad -you're safe and sound I don't give a hoot about the show!" - -"Thank you," Peggy managed to say. "I couldn't help it--I tried to get -back." - -"I know. You can tell me all about it later. Why don't you go home now -and get some rest?" - -"No! Oh, no." Peggy collected herself and took a deep breath. "As long -as I'm here, I'm going to watch!" It was a difficult decision. "Who's -doing the model?" - -"That girl, June Tilson; she's winging it." - -"Well, come on, then." Peggy smiled bravely. "Aren't you going to give -me a seat?" - -Richard grinned at her admiringly. "You're quite a girl, Peggy. I'll -give you the best seat in the house!" - -But Peggy preferred to watch from the rear of the auditorium, so she and -Richard quietly found places together. It was almost unbearable to see -someone else doing her part, but Peggy grimly watched, determined to be -as objective as possible. It was doubly difficult to admit that Alison -was quite marvelous as Evelyn. She was obviously working on emotion and -excitement, but it didn't matter. She established herself as the star of -the play, projecting her self-assurance and technique so that the -audience had eyes for no one else on stage. June Tilson did a remarkable -job as the model on such short notice. No one but Peggy or another actor -could have known that she was reading the part in bits and pieces before -she made an entrance, improvising, and finding her lines on the back of -furniture where they had been carefully pasted before the show. - -"She's good!" Peggy whispered. "My, she's good! Winging a part like that -takes a lot of courage. I thought she probably would read it." - -"Chuck said she could, but she wanted to do it this way. She's a fast -study, too!" Richard nodded in agreement. - -Watching _Guest in the House_ was one of the most painful experiences of -Peggy's life. By the time the play was over she felt as though she'd -been drawn through a wringer. Wearily, she left her seat, as the actors -were taking curtain calls, and bravos for Alison's performance were -filling the air. She walked outside and back to the stage door. Alison -deserved her congratulations, and she sincerely wanted to tell June -Tilson how good she had been. - -Alison was still in make-up on stage, flushed with excitement and -satisfaction. Everyone was milling around with words of praise for her -wonderful job. No one would ever know what courage it took for Peggy to -join the group and add her congratulations. Alison was too much in a -whirl with her own triumph to take any special satisfaction from Peggy's -praise, and Peggy realized how right Rita had been. Alison had no -personal spite; it was only her career that concerned her. - -Everyone was glad to see Peggy back unharmed, but it was impossible to -miss the undercurrent backstage. The company also was relieved that -Alison had played Evelyn and "saved the show." - -A middle-aged man from the audience drew Alison away from her group of -admirers and took her aside for a private discussion. In a few minutes, -Alison rushed back excitedly, looking for Chuck. "I've got a screen -test!" she exulted. "I have to leave tomorrow!" - -"Leave!" The entire company was stunned. Actresses just didn't walk out -on a theater in the middle of the season. But Alison was blithely -unconcerned. - -"That was Sidney Mitchell, the talent scout from Lion Studios! He said -he'd never been so impressed with a performance in summer stock! He -thinks I'm great, said he couldn't believe anybody could do a job like -that at the last minute!" - -"But you told him you'd played the part before, didn't you?" Chris Hill -demanded incredulously. - -"Of course not!" Alison hotly defended herself. "Why should I? Let him -think whatever he likes. The important thing is that he wants to test me -for a part immediately. They're looking for an unknown, and the part is -of a girl very like Evelyn. Oh," Alison glowed, looking more beautiful -than ever with her taste of success, "just think, I might actually get -to Hollywood!" - -"Well, of course we can't ask you to stay," Chuck said. "I suppose June -won't mind continuing in your part--" - -"I'd love to," June agreed, "and by tomorrow I'll know the lines." - -"Good." Chuck smiled. "And Peggy will resume Evelyn tomorrow night." - -Everyone turned to look thoughtfully at Peggy, only now realizing that -if she hadn't missed the show, the talent scout would have seen her, -maybe "discovered" her, instead of Alison. Their expressions were easy -to read. Curiosity, pity, and a slight feeling of guilt at their obvious -approval of Alison's performance. Peggy bravely accepted their glances -and smiled back at Alison. "I hope you do get the part, Alison," she -said gravely. "Be sure to let us know." - -Peggy couldn't wait to get back to the annex and be by herself for a -while. The reaction was just beginning to set in. If she had to stay -another minute, she felt, she would break into tears. Hastily excusing -herself with a promise to recount her adventure the next day, she -started to leave. - -But Rita stopped her at the stage door. "Don't let it bother you too -much, Peggy," she said gently. "These things happen all the time. It's -just rotten luck for you. The only time we've had a talent scout all -summer, and you had to have an accident!" - -"It doesn't matter, Rita," Peggy said with difficulty. She didn't want -to talk another minute. - -"But it does--I mean Alison's lying like that...." - -"But she wasn't lying," Peggy protested. - -"Well, it amounts to the same thing, withholding the fact that she'd -played the part before--that wasn't very honest. I just thought you -ought to know that everyone feels the same way about that. It wasn't -very ethical." - -"Let's talk about it tomorrow," Peggy pleaded, and Rita, understanding -that she wanted to be alone, gave her a comforting pat and let her go. - -Once in the privacy of her tiny bedroom, Peggy finally broke down and -wept. It _was_ rotten luck, she admitted to herself. The one chance -she'd had all summer, and she'd missed it. Why did Mr. Mitchell have to -pick this particular night to come? - -"It isn't that I don't wish Alison good luck," she cried softly, "but at -least he could have seen both of us in the play. He would probably have -picked Alison anyway, because she's good movie material. But if he had -only seen my work--it would have been something to take back to New York -with me." - -And on top of that she had missed the opportunity to play Evelyn at the -peak of her feeling about the part. Would she be able to do it at all -tomorrow night? She buried her face in the pillow and sobbed until she -was too exhausted to cry any more. Then, blessedly, sleep came. - -Alison was gone by the time Peggy awoke the next morning. It seemed -unbelievable that she had managed to assemble her things and pack in -such a short time, but her little room was as stark and bare as if no -one had been in it all summer. - -The cast didn't attempt to disguise their disapproval of Alison's hasty -exit. "That's typical of anybody so career-minded," sniffed Danny Dunn. -"No gratitude. Alison doesn't have the least conception of anyone's -problems except her own." - -"Thank goodness we have June Tilson to take her place," Rita echoed. "I -don't know what Chuck and Richard would have done." - -By evening Peggy was so exhausted that she almost didn't care how the -play went. She was tired of questioning looks and concern. Tired of -thinking about Evelyn. She put on her make-up and dressed for her -entrance, as unconcerned as if she were simply going out to dinner. She -watched the other actors begin the play and waited for her cue with such -a lack of emotion that she wondered for a moment if she could possibly -be coming down with a cold or a fever. She simply didn't care. Her cue -came up, and marshaling as much energy as possible under the -circumstances, Peggy walked on stage. - -For the two hours that she played Evelyn, Peggy worked with a most -peculiar sensation. She felt as though she were standing beside herself, -looking on. She watched Evelyn, heard Evelyn, moved her around like a -puppet, with an objective, detached viewpoint completely new to her. She -felt nothing whatsoever inside. - -After the play Peggy took her solo curtain call and received the most -tremendous ovation she had ever heard in the theater. She bowed and -smiled, wondering what all the shouting was about, and was utterly -astonished to see Chuck come to her with real tears in his eyes. - -"That was one of the most beautiful performances I have ever seen in my -life," he said, looking at her with something like awe. "I won't even -ask you what happened. It was too wonderful to spoil by trying to -analyze it!" - -Ford Birmingham came back to congratulate her, too. "I haven't yet -written my review, Peggy, because I heard what happened last night. I -saw both of you play it. Alison was awfully good, but I haven't seen a -job like yours in years! I'm truly grateful for having had the -opportunity to see you!" - -The entire cast looked at Peggy with a respect so new and surprising -that Peggy didn't know what to think. "You're not fooling me, are you, -Chuck?" she whispered. "I didn't feel a thing out there. Was I really -that good?" - -"Oho!" Chuck grinned at her mysteriously. "So our little ingenue has -discovered another secret--and all by accident! Listen, Peggy, sometimes -it happens that way. Just when you feel dead inside you'll give a -performance so electrifying that everybody wonders what happened. It -doesn't always work, you can't always be so objective. But I guess -that's what happened to you tonight. Tomorrow it'll be different, but -you'll never have trouble with Evelyn again!" - -And Peggy never did. Whether it was because Alison was no longer in the -wings, watching and criticizing, or just because Peggy had finally -"caught" it, she finished the week giving a glorious performance that -brought more and more people to the theater, and sent them away knowing -that they'd had a rare experience. - -"This is what really counts," Peggy thought gratefully. "Not a screen -test or my 'career,' but the knowledge that I can really contribute -something to the theater. Play a part with the author's intention, not -from my personal viewpoint." Peggy felt immensely gratified to know that -she was beginning to return a little of what the theater had already -given to her. - - - - - XV - Summer Stock - - -The season closed with a rollicking farce that drew a full house every -night. Enough money poured into the box office to pay back the investors -and the Chamber of Commerce and even leave something over for the new -science lab. On the last night of _See How They Run_, a tremendous party -was held backstage after the show. Everybody was there. Aunt Hetty was -hostess, beaming and brusque as ever, with lavish promises of what the -theater would do with her barn next summer. For it was certainly -established now that the Kenabeek Summer Theater was here to stay! - -The directors of the Chamber of Commerce and the members of the School -Board were there; all the apprentices and their families came; Mr. -Bladen read a special poem of praise for the theater; Mr. and Mrs. Cook -and Mrs. Hopkins and all their friends joined the celebration. Mr. -Miller and Michael were happy to report that the _Merry Mac_ had not -been damaged beyond repair after all, and that next summer she would be -back, ready to take the cast across the lake to the Golden Hound for -dinner. - -"Are you game, Peggy?" Michael asked with a twinkle. - -"Any time," Peggy laughed. "Tonight if you like!" - -"Well! That certainly speaks well for my son's seamanship," Mr. Miller -declared. - -"If it weren't for him, we'd all be at the bottom of Lake Kenabeek," -Mary Hopkins said. "Wreck or no wreck, Michael's a mighty good sailor!" - -"And the _Merry Mac_ was a smart boat to pick the Cooks' island out of -all the islands in the lake!" Peggy said. "I'd trust her again any -time." - -"And the Cooks have practically put Bladen's Antiques out of business," -Mr. Bladen added, winking at Peggy. "After your boys cleaned up my shop, -the Cooks couldn't seem to take things away fast enough. Then their -friends started to come! Pretty soon, I'll have to start buying more -antiques or just stick to poetry!" - -Bill Slade dashed into the theater, breathlessly waving an envelope and -calling for everyone to be quiet. "I know this is going to be a huge -shock," he cried excitedly, "but you all know how much our business has -improved since the Kenabeek Summer Theater came to town--for many -reasons." He grinned at Peggy. "Well! Although my brother Max is too -shy, and to be honest, still too stiff-necked to come here personally -and admit a mistake, he's tried to redeem himself in a mighty concrete -way!" With a huge smile of satisfaction, Bill dramatically opened the -envelope. "Here's a check to match whatever the Summer Theater is -donating to the high school--from Maximilian W. Slade! You just fill in -the amount!" - -Amid cheers and hurrahs, the School Board gratefully accepted the check. - -"Oh, Bill, that's just about the nicest thing that's happened all -summer!" Peggy cried. - -"It makes me very happy!" Bill said, grinning from ear to ear. "Next -summer, Max might even put in an appearance at a play!" - -Richard Wallace made a short, funny speech, thanking everyone for their -cooperation, and at the end giving a word of special praise to the -actors who "worked together without undue friction, without too many -complaints, and with only a minimum of backstage feuds, which is -probably a 'first' for any Adirondack stock company! Or any other, for -that matter!" - -There were toasts to the actors, toasts to Gus and the apprentices, -toasts to everyone, including the _Merry Mac_, the annex, Lake Manor, -the audiences, and Mrs. Brady's food. The party lasted long, with all -the actors talking about the possible jobs that awaited them in New -York. - -"What do you think you'll do when you get back to New York, Peggy?" -Chris Hill asked. "Do you suppose we'll have a chance to work together -again?" - -"I hope so," Peggy replied, glad to know that she could now talk to -Chris naturally and calmly, as actor to actor. "I'm going home for a -visit first, but after that anything can happen!" - -"And next time we won't let personal feelings interfere with our work, -right?" Chris beamed at her, his handsome face teasing a little, but now -Peggy understood. - -"Right!" Peggy smiled. - -"And give Randy my regards," Chris added seriously. "He's a great guy, -and I really hope to see him again sometime." - -The party finally broke up, with everyone going back to the annex to -start packing. Chuck and Richard had to stay after the close of the -season to wind things up, but almost everybody else was leaving Lake -Kenabeek on tomorrow's bus. Peggy remained quietly in the theater after -everyone had gone. She wanted to be alone for a little in this theater -that she might never see again. - -The flats had been stacked away for the party, and now only the -worklight was left, its circle casting a small pool of light on the -empty stage. Peggy stood there alone, looking out at the silent -auditorium and thinking of everything that had happened this summer. She -remembered the first time Rita and Gus had brought her up to the -theater--the stage had looked just like this. That night she had had her -first taste of the hectic backstage activity of painting flats. She had -learned so much this summer, Peggy thought gratefully. She had learned -about the theater and about working with people--even about summer -romance and handsome leading men! Peggy smiled wistfully, wishing that -Randy could be here with her now. He was the only person she knew who -could share her feelings about a dark theater like this--the smell and -the memories and the ghosts. - -For it seemed to her that the house was filled with echoes from all the -plays they had done that summer, that all the parts and the plays and -the authors were still alive here somehow. This emotion was the magic -that had brought Peggy to the theater in the first place--this sense of -life, of living literature, of a communication that was nowhere else so -special as between actor and audience. - -Peggy remembered the first time she had walked out on this stage in -_Dear Ruth_. How nervous she had been! And then as the weeks progressed, -her sureness had developed, her professionalism had increased. She had -learned from Rita and Gus and Chuck, from Richard and Danny and Alison. -Yes, perhaps most of all from Alison Lord, who had shown her the -contrast between career and dedication. - -"I hope I will come back here sometime," Peggy said aloud in farewell. -She was sentimental enough to wish to say a private good-by to her -summer. "And thank you," she whispered, "thank you for everything." - -As she finally walked out the stage door for the last time, her make-up -kit tucked under her arm, she could already hear the questions her -parents would ask when she arrived home for her visit. - -"Well! What did you do this summer, Peggy?" they would say. "What -happened? Tell us all about it." - -"My goodness," Peggy wondered, smiling at the stars, "how can I possibly -tell them?" - - [Illustration: Endpapers] - - - [Illustration: Back cover] - - - - - PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT - - -Peggy Lane's education in the theater and in life is "accelerated," the -summer she takes to the Straw Hat Circuit. Signed with the newly -organized Kenabeek Summer Theater, Peggy is thinking only of her work -when she arrives at the Adirondack resort. But acting turns out to be -only one of her problems. - -Immediately, she learns that the Summer Theater is opposed by Max Slade, -the local movie theater owner, who is exerting every effort to force the -"competition" to leave town. And she meets Chris Hill, blond, exciting, -romantic leading man of the company--who can make any girl feel she's -his One and Only, and not realize himself that he's insincere. Finally, -there's the back-breaking, bone-wearying, nerve-jangling job of mounting -a new play a week--never knowing if it will open! - -The maneuvering--legal and personal--as the actors fight to save their -theater is as dramatic as their nightly shows. But in the end it is -Peggy's own warmth, charm, and intelligence which precipitate the -surprising climax to their efforts to make the theater an accepted part -of the community! - - - _Peggy Lane Theater Stories_ - - Peggy Finds the Theater - Peggy Plays Off-Broadway - Peggy Goes Straw Hat - Peggy on the Road - - - - - Transcriber's Notes - - ---Copyright notice provided as in the original--this e-text is public - domain in the country of publication. - ---In the text versions, delimited italics text in _underscores_ (the - HTML version reproduces the font form of the printed book.) - ---Silently corrected palpable typos; left non-standard spellings and - dialect unchanged. - - - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Peggy Goes Straw Hat, by Virginia Hughes - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PEGGY GOES STRAW HAT *** - -***** This file should be named 55826.txt or 55826.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/8/2/55826/ - -Produced by Stephen Hutcheson and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/55826.zip b/old/55826.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4b5ff09..0000000 --- a/old/55826.zip +++ /dev/null |
